^r*\^ 


<N-.V 


INSTRUCTION 


rou 


FfFLD  AST^.i'^"'^' 


TTOASUR:   ROOM 


COL.  GEORGE  WASHINGTON  FLOWERS 
MEMORIAL  COLLECTION 


DUKE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 
DURHAM.  N.  C. 


PRESENTED  BY 

W.  W.  FLOWERS 


»Wlli.LI 


INSTRUCTION 


FOR 


FIELD  ARTILLERYs 


COMPILED    FROM 


STANDARD  MILITARY  AUTHORITY; 


EMBRACINO 


SCHOOLS  OF  THE  PIECE,  BATTERY,  AND  BATTALION  OR 

EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES;  WITH  AN 

INSTRUCTIVE  APPENDIX^ 


PREPARED    BY 

MAJOR  A.   W.    STARK 


PUBLISHED  BY  AUTHORITY  OF  THE  SECRETARY  OF  WAR, 


KICHMOND : 

A.  MORRIS,  rUBLISIIER. 

1864. 


Eiitored  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  18G4,  b^ 

A.    ]\rORRIS,  %, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  Confederate' States 
for  the  Eastern  District  of  Virginia. 


O.    U.    yfYKUli,    PKIMJCU. 


■  0 


'pREPACfi. 


The  following  Work  is  presented  with  the  hope  of  meeting 
a  want  now  felt  by  the  Artillery  of  the  Provisional  Army  of 
the  Confederate  States. 

The  employmeiit  of  Artillery  is  a  subject  of  such  extent) 
and  importance,  as  to  preclude  any  attempt  to  treat  of  it 
here — the  objecj;  being  to  present  this  volume  in  such  a  form 
•as  would  render  it  a  suitable  pocket  companion  for  the  Artil- 
lerist. 

In  some  respects,  the  exercises  prescribed  for  field  batteries 
exceed  those  required  for  the  purpose  of  war;  but  they 
should  be  regarded  as  a  study  which  it  is  advantageous  to  ex- 
tend beyond  its  ordinary  applications,  so  that  the  most  difficult 
circumstances  may  not  present  any  thing  that  is  unknown. 

No  rules  have  been  given  governing  batteries  when  manoeu- 
vring with  troops  of  other  arms.  All  arms  arc  governed  by 
the  same  general  principles,  but  each  has  an  appropriate  code 
for  its  own  manoeuvres,  which  are  not  extended  to  the  general 
movements  of  other  troops;  therefore,  the  only  way  for  an 
Artillery  Officer  to  manage  his  batteries,  when  manoeuvring 
with  other  troops,  is  to  understand  infantry  and  cavalry  ma- 
noeuvres, f 

In  conclusion,  the  compiler  would  remark,  that  this  work 
has  been,  though  hurriedly,  compiled  at  the  instance  of  others, 
not  with  a  view  to  derive  pecuniary  advantages,  but  that  it 
may  be  issued  by  the  publisher  at  the  lowest  rate  the  necessi- 
ties of  the  times  will  admit,  so  as  to  place  witnin  reach  of 
our  volunteers  the  instruction  that  may  assist  in  promoting 
their  efficiency  as  soldiers. 


Aj[)/^i,  18G4.      ^  Q  9 1  r^  O 


3215 


RECOMMENDATIONS. 


.     IIkAD  Qn's  f)jiPAHTMENT  OF  RICHMOND, 

November  4(h,  1863. 

1  deem  this  work  useful  and  necessary  to  the  Artillery  service, 
and  c'tfrnestly  recommend  its  immediate  publication. 

It  bhould  be  published  at  a  low  price  (cheap  edition),  so  as  to  place 
it  within  reach  of  every  Artillery  Officer. 

Very  respectfully, 

ARNOLD  ELZEY, 

Major  General. 

Approved  and  respectfully  recommended  to  the  favorable  conside- 
ration of  the  Secretary  of  War. 

S.  COOPER, 

Affjulant  and  Ins.  General. 
November  19,  18G3.     - 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


ORGANIZATION,  MATERIEL,  AND  SERVICE. 

NOS.  PAGE. 

Artillery  AND  ITS  Duties *. 17 

Artillery  troops  and  their  service ...  17 

Uses  aud  objects  of  field  artillery ...  18 

Obqanization  and  Equipment  of  Field  Batteries...         ...  18 

•  Organization  for  instruction ...  18 

Organization  for  the  march ■ ...  18 

Organization  for  war ...  19 

Composition  oj' the  Battery  of  Manohuvre _  20 

Definitions '     ...  20 

Elementary  movements,  and  their  objects ■       ...  21 

Method  of  giving  commands ...  21 

Bugle  signals  and  calls ...  22 

General  principles. ...  22 

TACTICAL  INSTRUCTION. 

s  School  of  the  Piece. 


The  Cannoneer  Dismounted 

Position  of  the  cannoneer  dismounted. 

Eyes  right — Eyes  left .*. 

Facings 

Marching 

'     To  halt.... 

To  march  backwards 

To  mark  time  when  marching , 

To  change -step 

To  face  when  marching , 

To  rest 

Parade  rest 


The  Gun  Detacitment 

Formation  and  telling  otF  the  detachment. 

To  form  in.  one  rank 

Alignments  — .'. 

Direct  march  in  single  fil^ ^ 

Cliange  of  direction  in  file 

Oblique  march^in  file ; , 

Direct  march  in  line 


O 
M 


32153 


... 

25 

2 

25 

3 

25 

4 

2(5 

7 

26 

8 

26 

9 

26 

10 

27 

n 

27 

12 

27 

17 

28 

18 

28 

23 

19 

28 

20  ■ 

29 

21 

29 

24  ■ 

ao 

27.  - 

30 

28 

30 

29 

80 

vi  TABLE    OF   CONTENTS. 


To  Itnit  the  deWichmcnt *.... 

>VhcpliDgs 

'♦         In  circle...^ 

"  to  the  rigbt  or  left. 
The  rPTPr«<».... 


'iment  in  two  ranks 

>i.k 

ink  ti)  form  line 

1  Imip ^ 

to  the  rciir •: 

To  mil  re  h  lackw;»r'is 

To  open  auti  close  ranks 

Kxccution  of  the  movements  nt  the  double-quick... 

"Thr  Platoon  1'.        34 

Tin:  Fiction... 35 


J">o iijJition  of  and  posts  of  officers 

Aliutijnents y.......7.^.... 

To  open  and  close  r.inks 

To  break  into  column  to  the  right  or  lcft.\ 

To  march  in  column 

To  Imlt  the  column 

To  change  direction  ip  coluifan 

To  march  by  a  Hank  vrlicn  in  column... 

OblicjiK'  n):irch  in  culunin 

I'lintr  i:i  cdninn,  to  I'orni  line 


I'lvancmg. 
.  line 


KG?. 

PAGE 

30 

•  31 

31 

31 

32 

31 

33 

31 

34 

31 

85 

82 

36 

32 

37 

37- 

39 

S3 

40 

33 

41 

33 

42 

'  34 

43 

S4 

45 

34 

<';    :     If  in  line 

'J'  oJ.ij.^ie  direction  in  line « 

To  ujiirch  by  a  Hank  when  in  liiu' 

To  clmi^ro  direction  wIkmi  faced  by  a  Hank 

Marching  by  a  Hank  to  form  column  of  detachment.s, 

To  pass  from  the  march  in  column  to  a  rnnroli  bv  a 

flank 

Marcliinj;  by  a  flank  to  f<Tj-m  line 

To  form  the  line  or  colun\n  faced  io  tlio  opposite 

direction 4.'. •.....,...» 

To  march  to  the  rear..: 

P'    tiiifj  tho  detachments  with 'their  jdeces 

i;^' .  ation  of  the  moveiuontrt  at  the  double-quick... 

THK  '.'  •Vil'A.W '.. 

( 'unipo.-^itioif  of,  and  posts  of 'officers 

lilxerciMe  of  the  company .V..j^.„.,'. 

Manual  of  run  Sad  it  k 

To  open  lile>- 

To  close  files '. 211 


•1? 

3b 

48 

36 

49 

36 

50 

37 

51 

37 

53 

37 

64 

38 

55 

38 

57 

38 

58 

39 

02 

40 

02 

•  40 

04 

41 

05 

41 

00 

-41 

09 

41 

70 

42 

71 

42 

72 

42 

1  o 

42 

74 

43 

75 

43 

70 

43 

.44 

1 1 

44 

77 

45 

78 

45 

70 

40 

111 

55 

TABLE   OP   COISTTENTS.  Til 

NOS.       PAOE. 

Manual  or  THE  Piece ,....  55 

Posts  of  ther  caniDoneers,  piece  unlimbeced i...  215  56 

Loailing  and  firing 216  56 

Londing  by  detaiT...^ 218  57 

Moving  the  piece  by  baud,  piece  uulimbered •  228  63 

Changing  posts ,.  230  64 

Equipnients 231  64 

Limbering...., :. 232  64 

Posts  of  cannoneers,  piece  limbered 235  66 

To  form  the  detachment ...  236  66 

Posts  of  the  detiS&febments  at  their  pieces '    238  67 

Change  of  posts  of  detachments 239  67 

To  post  the  cannoneers  at  the  piece,  limbered 241  68 

Moving  the  piece  by  Imnd,  piece  limbered 242  68 

Uulimbering  and  coming  into  action 244  69 

Movements  with  {he  prolonge 247%     70 

Service  of  the  gun  with  diminished  numbers 248  72 

•Supply  of  ammunition  when  in  action 249  72 

Changing  ammunition  chests .' 250  73 

Changing  wheels 251  73 

Dismounting  pieces 252  74 

Mounting  pieces 253  75 

Carrying  pieces....'. 254  75 

Dismounting  carriages 255  76 

Mounting  carriages 256  77 

Po^gts  of  cannoneers 257  77 

To  mount  and  dismount  the  cannoneei-s....- 258  77 

The  Cannoneer  Mounted 79 

To  bridle  the  horse 263  79- 

To  saddle ' '264  80 

To  lead  out 265  80 

Position  before  mounting 266  80 

To  mount 267  80 

Position  of  the  cannoneer  mounted 268  81 

To  lengthen  the  snaffle  rein 269  82 

To  shorten  the  snaffle  rein 270  82 

To  cross  the  reins  in  one  hand .-. 271  82 

To  take  the  reins  in  both  hands 272  83 

The  use  of  the  reins 273  83 

The  use  of  the  legs 274  83 

The  effect  of  the  legs  and  reins  combined 275  83 

To  march. ., 276  84 

To  bait  '. 277  84 

To  turn  to  the  right  or  left; 278  84 

To  reverse  to  the  right  or  leA 279  85 

To  oblique 280  85 

To  reiu  back 281  86 

To  dismount 282  86 

To  file  oil". 263  87 


in  TABLE   OP  CONTENTS. 

vs.  PAGE. 

To  unPdddle it  87 

To  unbridle l^',  87 

Length  of  tlio  stirrups l'  >;  87 

Position  of  the  foot  in  the  stirrup .    7  87 

Position  of  the  bridle-hand _--^  88 

The  piincrpal  inovemeiits  of  the  bridle-hand 2b9  88 

To  trot;  to  trot  out;  to  gallop 290  88 

Tjie  Detachmejit — Florae  Artillerif 291  89 

To  mount  and  dismount  in  two  ranks ^^.. ......       292  89 

To  form  in  one  rank..  W. 294  90 

Alignments 295  90 

To  forna  in  two  ranks 299  92 

To  open  and  close  thc^ranks ,%,...  300  92 

To  rein  back  the  dc'taclimeut ' 302  92 

Ite  march  the  detachment  by  file 303  93 

Direct  march  in  file...  305  94 

Change  of  direction  in  file 306-  9-4 

To  halt  and  to  move  off '. 307  94 

Oblique  in  line.. 308  94 

To  break  into  single  file 309  95 

To  form  in  double  files 310  96 

To  form  the  detachment  in  line...., 311  96 

Direyt  march  in  line 314  98 

Wheelings 315  98 

Oblique  in  line 327  101 

.     Changes  of  gait 328  101 

Thk  Platoon....;. 102 

ExKRCisE  or  SEVERAL  Oktachmknts — Ilorse  Artillery,  .....  102 

P'ormation  of  detachments  and  posts  of  oflicers....  330  102 

To  mount  and  dismount 333  103 

Alignments 333  103 

To  open  and  close  ranks 333  103 

Oblique  in  lino 333  103 

"        •'column 333  ]03 

"        "file... 333  103 

'  To  march  by  file 333  ,103 

To  change  direction  in  file 333  103 

To  halt  and  move  off 333  103 

Changes  of  gait 333  103 

To  break  into  single  file 333  103 

To  form  double  files 333  103 

Xo  break  into  column 334  103 

Change  of  direction  in  column ^ 337  104 

The  column   m  lohing  to  face  ih   the  opposite  di- 

i-eotion ." 338  104 

Being  in  cohnnn  to  form  in  line T.  330  104 

To  form  line  advancing 342  105 

To  advance  iu  lino 343  106 


TABLE    or   CONTENTS.  IX 


To  change  direction  in  line 

Marching  in  line  to  march  in  the  opposite  direction, 
Marching  by  a  flank  to  form  column  by  detach- 
ments  

In  column  of  detachments  to  march  by  file 

Posting  the  detachments  with  the  pieces 

The  Driver .........i.. 

To  harness 

Leading  to  the  exercise  ground 

To  mount 

To  dismount 

Marching  to  the  front 

To  halt 

To  rein  back 

Tofileotf 

To  turn  to  the  right  or  left.... 

The  reverse 

To  oblique... 

To  break  into  column  to  the  right 

.    To  form  line , 

To  unharness 


Tub  Team ; 

Arrangement  of  the  teams. 

To  break  into  column 

To  change  direction  in  column, 

To  halt 

To  advance  in  line 

To  march  by  a  flank 

Changes  of  gait • , 

Obli(iue  in  column 

To  form  line 

To  form  line  advancing ,. 

Oblique  in  lino 

Tlie  reverse. 

The  piece  horsed 

To  enter  the  j)ark 

Hitching  the  teams 

To  unpark 

To  wheel , 

To  oblique.. 

To  reverse... 

The  about , 

To  rest 

To  rein  back  to  the  right. ./.....' 

To  park 

To  tinhitcb 

To  leave  the  park 


The  Section ^ ". 

Composition  of. ,, 386 


K03. 

PAGE. 

344 

106 

345 

106 

346 

106 

347 

107 

348 

107 

107 

349 

107 

850 

108 

351 

108 

351 

108 

351 

108 

351 

108 

351 

108 

351 

108 

352 

108 

353 

109 

354 

109 

355 

109 

357 

109 

360 

109 



111 

362 

111 

363 

111 

363 

111 

363 

111 

363 

111 

363 

111 

363 

111 

364 

•111 

365 

112 

3ff8 

113 

369 

113 

370 

113 

371 

113 

372 

114 

373 

114 

375 

115 

376 

116 

377 

116 

878 

116 

379 

116 

381 

117 

383 

117 

881 

118 

885 

110 

386 

119 

120 

X  TABLE   OF  CONTENTS. 

N05.       PAGK. 

Posts  of  officers n^O       121 

Exercise  of  the  eection  386       121 

SCHOOL  OF    THE   BAiiERV. 

Gcnori.  i.niioiple«. 387       122 

Measures  of  the  elements  composing  a  battery,  and 

of  its  formations .- 

Formations  of  the  battery 

Manning  tlie  battery 

MovEME?{Ts  IN  Column 

To  unpark 

Formations  into  line,  and  battery  from  column  of 
pieces 

To  bait 

Change  of  gait 

To  form  sections ; 

la  column  of  pieces,  to  form  the  caissons  on  the 
flank 

To  march  in  Column 

To  march  by  a  flank 

Oblique  march _ 

Passage  of  carriages  in  column •.... 

About  in. column 

Countermarch  in  column..; 

To  change  direction  in  column , , 

To  diminish  the  front  of  a  column  on  the  march... 

In  column,,  with  the  caissons  on  the  flank,  to  re- 
place them  in  front  or  rear 408       137 

To  Pass  fuom  tiir  Order  in  Colum:«  •'fo  the  Order 
IN  Line,  and  the  Ukveusk 

To-form  forward  into  line  

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear  

To  form  line  to  the  right  or  loft 

'1^0  form  line  on  the  right  or  left    

T<5  break  into  column  to  the  front 

To  brejik  into  column  to  tie  rear.., .' 

To  break  into  column  to  the  right  or  left 

To  break  into  column  from  "one  flank  to  march  to- 
wards tire  other 

To  break  into  column  to  the  rear  from  one  flank  to 
march  towards  the  other 

To  break  into  cohunn  to  the  front  when  thQ  battery 
is  niarcliing  in  line 

To  form  line  udvancUig 

To  form  double  column  on  the  centre  section 

To  deploy  the  double  column  into  line  to  the  front, 

To  form  the  doubk  column  into  line  to  the  right 

.  or  left., , 423       147 


388 

122 

389 

123 

392 

126 

127 

303 

127 

394 

127 

395 

128 

396 

128 

397_ 

128 

398 

130 

399 

130 

400 

131 

401 

132 

402 

183 

403 

131 

405 

134 

406 

135 

407 

136 

137 

409 

137 

410 

138 

411 

139 

•112 

140 

41o 

140 

414 

141 

415 

141 

416* 

142 

417 

142 

418 

142 

419 

143 

420 

144 

421 

146 

164 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS.  XI 

NOS.        PAGE. 

MovEMEjJTs  IN  Line : •.•  I'^S 

To  advance  inline • •  42^  148 

To  halt  the  battery  and  align  it. 425  149- 

Tochanj;e  direction  in  line 42G  140 

To  close  intervals  in  line 428  151 

About,  or  countermarch  with  diminished  intervals,  429  151 

To  resume  intervals 430  152 

Passage  of  obstacles ^'^^  1^-^ 

FoKMATioVs  IN. Battery ' 1^*^ 

In  line,  with  pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to 

thefront....: .; •    .  432       153 

In  line,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front,  by  throw- 
ing the  caissons  to  the  rear 433 

In  line,  Avith  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to 

thefront 434   ^  155 

In  line,  with  pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to 

ihe  rear.... 435       155 

In  liiie,  with  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to 
the  rear ...:..... ,. 436       156 

In  battery,  to  fprm  in  line  to  the  front 487       157  -^ 

In  battery,  to  form  in  line  to  the  rear i....       438       158 

In  column,  with  pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery 

to  the  front '...■...._.... ; 439       159 

In  column,  with  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  bat- 
tery to  the  front '. 440       100 

In  column,  with  pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery 

to  the  rear 441       IGO 

Ir}  column,  with  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  bat- 
tery to  the  rear 442       161 

In  column,  with  pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery 

to  the  right  or  left 443       162 

In  column,  with  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  bat- 
tery to  the  right  or  left. . 444       163 

In  column,  with  pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery 

on  the  Tight  or  left 445       164 

In  column,  with  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  bat- 
tery on  the  righfor  left   ....• ■    446       164 

To  deploy  the  double  column  into  battery  to  the 

front  or  rear ^ ~ 447       105 

To  deploy  the  double  column  into  battery  to  the 

rightorlcft -. ••       448       166 

To  pass  from  the  order  in  battery  to  the  order  in 

column 449       167 

To  march  by. a  flank 450      167 

Firings " ^^^ 

To  fire  by  battery,  half  battery,  section  and  piece,       451  168 

To  ceasje  firing 451  168 

fo  iQOve  and  fire  with  the  prolonge ! > 452  161) 


xli  TABLE   OF   COi^TENTS. 

N'OS.  PAGE. 

To  fire  advancing. ; 453  1 69 

To  fire  retiring 454  170 

Movements  for  firing  in  echelon 455  172 

Being  in  echelon,  to  form  line 45.6  172 

To  fire  to  the  rear 457  173 

CnANOES  or  Front  in  Battery 174 

Change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  right,  left  wing  for- 
ward, and  the  reverse ". 458  174 

Change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  left  wing  for- 
ward, and  the  reverse 459  175 

Change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  Jeft  wing  to  the 

rear,  and  the  reverse 460  176 

Change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  right,  left  wing  to  the 

rear,  and  the  reverse 401  177 

To  pass  a  defile  in  front 462  178 

To  jiass  a  defile  iu  rear 463  179 

Parade  FOR  Review  AND  Inspection .  .'.  180 

Review  of  a  battery .• 464  180 

Review  of  a  battery  in  connection  with  other  troops,  '464  182 
To  march  in  review  in  line  or  column  cf  half  bat- 
teries...."  '..._ 464  183 

Officers'  salute  with  the  sabre 405  183 

Inspection 4G6  184 

EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

General  principles ; 185 

The  diflFerent  formations  and  positions  of  several 

batteries  united 407  185 

Posts  of  officers.. 4G7  185 

Designation  of  batteries 468  186 

The  guides  of  march. .., » 469  186 

Order  in  column,  posts  of  ofiicers,  etc 471  186 

Order  in  line  and  in  battery,  posts  of  officers 472  187 

Commands,  method  of  giving  and  repeating   ......  473  187 

Alignmeufs .......' 474  188 

To  march  iu  column , .  475  1 89 

To  halt 476  190 

Changes  of  gait 477  190 

To  march  by  a  flank 477  190 

Oblique  march 478  190 

Passage  of  carriages 479  190 

To  about '. 480  190 

'     The  countermarch -481  190 

Change  of  .lirt'ction 482  191 

General  remark 483  ■  191 

To  pass  from  the  order  in  column  t>y  section,  to  the 

order  by  battery  (close  column) „ 484  191 

To  pass  from  the  order  in  close  column  to  the  or- 
der in  column  by  section t.,... '485  193 


TABLE   OF  CONTENTS.  SlU 

NOS.        PAGE. 

Change  of  the  direction  of  the  close  column,  by  a 

bimultaueous  movement 486       191 

To,  pass  from  the  order  in  coluniu  to  the  order  in 

line 

To  form  faced  to  the  i^^ar  iuto  line 

To  form  to  the  left  (or  riglit),  into  line 

To  form  on  the  right  (or  left),  into  line' 

To  form  to  the  left  (or  right),  and  forward  into  line, 
To  form  to  the  left  (or  right),  and  faced  to  the  rear 

into  line ,. 

To  form  forward  into  line,  on  a  line  passed  by  the 

head  of  column ....;.. 

To  form  faced  to  the  rear,  on  a  line  passed  by  the 

head  of  column, .w 

To  deploy  the  close  column  forward,  into  line,  in 

advance  of  its  front *. 

To  deploy  tlie  close  column  forward,  into  line,  on 

one  of  the  batteries  which  stands  fast 

To  deploy  the  close  column  in  march  without  haltr 

ing  it -. . . . 

To  deploy  the  close  column  faced  to  the  rear,  into 

line 

To  deploy  the  close  column  to  the  left  (or  right), 

into  line 

To  deploy  the  close  column  on  the  left  (or  right), 

into  line .• ! .X  . . .       .500       205 

To  pass  from  the  order  in  line  to  the  order  in  col- 
umn      '501       205 

To  break  by  section  from  one  wing  to  march  to- 
wards th.e  other '........". 502       20i3 

To  form  close  column,  faced  to  the  right  (or  left),       503       206 
To  form  close  column  from  a  halt,.without.a  change 

orfront 504       207 

To  form  close  column,  when  in  march,  without  a 

change  of  front 

To  advance  in  Jine^ 

To  halt 

Changes  of  gait 

To  march  by  a  flank 

To  oblique 

Passage  of  carriages 

The  aliout. ;. 

The  countermarch 

To  close  intervals , 

Movements  with  closed  intervals 

To  reaume  intervals , 

Fornvation  and  deployment  of  two  parallel  columns, 
Porniatiou  and  deployment  of  four  parallel  columns, 

Passage  of  obstacles, , 

Changes  of  front  of  the  line  of  battle, ........... 


487 

195 

■488 

19ti 

489 

197 

490 

197 

491 

198 

492 

198 

493 

199 

404 

200 

495 

201 

49G 

202 

497 

2P3 

498. 

201 

499 

204 

605 

208 

506 

209 

507 

209 

507- 

209 

507 

209 

'507 

209 

507 

2.09 

507 

2p9 

507 

209 

508 

209 

509 

210 

510 

210 

511 

211 

612 

212 

513 

213 

514 

21:3 

xLv  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 


FouMATioNS  IX  Battery 

To  pass  from  the  order  in  line  to  the  order,  in  bat- 
tery  .". 

Ta  form  to  the  rear  into  buttery 

In  battery,  to  form  forward,  into  lin* 

In  battery,  to  form  faced  to  tlie  renr,  into  line.  .. 
To  pass  from  the  order  in  column,  to  the  order  in 

battery •  •  •  • 

To  fuiin  faced  to  the  rear,  into  battery 

To  form  to  tlie  left  (orri^iiit),  into  buttery 

To  form  on  tl»e  left  (or  riglit),  into  battery...... 

To  form  to  the  loft*(or  right),  and  forward,  into 

battery .'« . . 

To  form  to  the  left  (or  right),  and  faced  to  the  rear 

into  battery ' • 

To  form  forward,  into  battery,  on  a  line  v/hicli  has 

been  passed  by  the  head  of  the  coTumn . . ; 

To  form  faced  to  the  rear,  into   battery,  on  a  line 

passed  by  the  head  of  column ► 

To  deploy  the  close  column  forward,  into  battery, 

in  advance  of  its  fPont .  . .  .• 

To  deploy  the  close  column  faced  to  the  rear,  into 

battery,  in  advance  of  its  front ". 

To  deploy  the  close  column,  pieces  in  fron|,  forward. 

into   battery,  in  line  with  one  of   the  batteries 

which  stands  fast   !.........  •     529 

To  deploy  the  close  column,  cai»^.sons  in  front,  faced 

to  the  rear,  into  battery,  in  lino  with  one  of  the 

batteries  which  stands  fast , ' 

To  deploy  the   close  column  to  the  left  (or  right), 

into  battery 

To  deploy  the  oJose  column  on  the  left  (or  right), 

into  battery 

Deployment  of   two   parallel   columns  forward,    or 

faced  to  the  I'ear,  into  .battery 

Deployment  of  four  parallol'columns  forward,  or 

facei-h  to  the  rear,  iuto-battery, 

To  paijs  from  the  order  in  battery,  to  the  order  in 

column ' 

Being  iu'battery,  to  marcii  by  a  Hank 


NOS. 

PAGE. 

... 

213 

51-5 

213 

Sir, 

214 

517 

21''» 

618 

215 

519 

21;'. 

520 

217 

521 

218 

522 

21« 

523 

219 

524 

219 

.525 

220 

526 

.221 

527 

221 

528 

222 

J£xi:CUT10N    Ul"    THR    BlRl-NO» 

To  commence,  and  to  cease  firinj^;. 

To  lire  advancing!; 

To  fire  m  retreat 

T    lire  to  the  rear 


CllANUKS    OF    FllONT  IN    BaTTEUY 

Change  of  front  on  the  right  wing,  to  fire  to  the 
right,  left  wing  forward,  and  the  reverse 


532 

224 

531 

225 

^32 

22Q 

633 

22G 

53i 

227 

535'- 

,  227* 

580 

228 

... 

228 

537 

•  228 

538 

229 

539 

■  229 

54U 

230 

... 

231 

511 

231 

TABLE   OF   CONTENTS.      •  XV 

N08.  PAGES. 

Change  of  front  on  the  right  "wing,   to  fire  to  the 

left,  left  wing  forward,  and  the  reverse 642  2'P>1. 

Change  ef  front  on  the   riglit  wing,  to  fire  to.  the 

right,  left  wing  to  the  rear,  and  the  reverse....       643  232 
Change  of. front  on  the  right  wing,  to  fire  to  the 

left,  left  wing  to  the  rear,  and  the  reverse 544  233 

Changes  of  front  on  a  central  batterj '.       545  233 

Change  of  front  on  the  centre,  to  fire  to  the  right, 

left  wing  forward,  and  the  reverse 546  233 

Change  of  front  on  tl»e  centre,  to  fire  to  the  right, 

-  left  Aving  to  the  rear,  and'the  reverse. 547  234 

To  pass  a  defile  in  front. f 548  235 

To  pass  a  defile  in  rear^ 54a  236 

AhRANGEMENTS  for  PARAnES  AND  REVIEWS. 237 

For  parados . ." 550  237 

For  reviews 551  '237 

APPENDIX.   ■  239 

DOINTING    AND    RaNOES , 239 

Definitions .' '. 239 

Theory  of  pointing 239 

Pendulum  hausse   240 

Seat  for  pendulum  haiisse 240 

Muzzle  sight -... , 240 

Practical  hints  on  pointing 241 

Causes  which  disturb  the. true  flight  of  projectiles 241 

Approximate  ranges  of  field  guns  and  howitzers .243 

To  determine  the  height  of  the  breech-sight^for  different 

angles  of   elevation 245 

Management  of  a  Battery. 245 

Artillery  horses — Descriptioi' •" •  •  2.45 

General  rules  for  stable  management 24G 

Grooming 247 

Instruction  for  the  preservation  of  harness 249 

Field  Service .' 260 

Marches ' 250 

Ascents 253 

Descents 254: 

Crossing  fords \  . 264 

Passage  of  military  bridges 265 

Reversing  a  battery  in  a  narrow  road -i -  256 

.  lu  action  or  preparing  for  action '. 256 

Replacing  killcd^or  di^-abli-d  horses,  .  .'. 258 

Spiking  and  unspiking  cannon 258 

Kighting  carriages  that  have  been  overturned 259 

Camp  of, artillery 260 

Comoiencing  an  action -  •  •  262 


ERRATA. 


Page  59,  21st  line  from  bottom,  for  "rammer-band,"  reM  "rammer- 
head." 
**     60,  17th  line  from  bottom,  place  a  comma  after  "second." 
"     67,  5th  lin6  from  top,  for  "*in,"  read  "is." 
"     68,  12th  line  from  bottom,  omit  the  commas  after  "2"  and 

"right." 
"     08,  11th  line  from  bottom,- after  "  posts,"  place  a  comma  ia- 

stead  of  the  semi-colon. 
"     77,  8th  line  from  top,  for  "215,"  read  "235." 
"     1G3,  17th  line  from  bottom,  for  "435,"  read'" 436." 
"     200,  5th  line  from  bottom,  for  "/>«//,"  read  ''Riffhf." 
"     209,  8tb  line  from  bottom,  for  "then,"  read  "  there." 
-"    213,  18th  line  from  top,  for  "Mauch,"  read  "Obstacle.'* 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  FIELD  ARTILLERY. 


ORGANIZATION,   MATERIEL,   AND  SERVICE. 

ARTILLERY  AND  ITS  DUTIES. 

The  troops  of  the  artillery  are  divided  iato  two  kinds,  viz : 
Foot  Arlillcry,  and  Liglu  or  Field  Artillery. 

To  the  Foot  Artillcy  belongs  the  service  of  siege,  sea-coast 
garrison,  and  mountain  artillery,  rocket  batteries,  and  the 
artillery  duties  of  the  park. 

To  the  Field  Artilleri/  belongs  the  service  of  ^tlic  batteries 
which  manoBuvre  with  the  troops  on  the  Jield  of  battle.  It  is 
divided  into  two  parts.  Horse  Artillery.,  which  is  generally 
attached  to  and  manosuvrea  with"  cavalry,  the  cannoneers  being 
mounted  on  horseback ;  and  Mounted  Artillery,  which  is 
generally  attached  to  and  manoeuvres  with  infantry,  the  can- 
noneers marching  at  the  sides  of  their  pieces,  or,  when 
necessary,  mounting  the  ammunition  chests. 

The  Artillery  lleserves  are  composed  of  horse,  and  mounted 
batteries  in  such  proportions  as  the  nature  of  ihe  service 
requires. 

The  service  of  batteries  assigned  to  brigades  or  divisions  of 
cavalry  and  infantrj'  is  special,  and,  to  a  great  extent,  subor- 
dinate to  the  operations  of  the  troops  to  which ,  they  arc 
attached  as  auxiliaries.  The  artillery  reserve  is  commanded 
by  a  superior  officer  of  artillery,  and  constitutes  a  distinct  arm 
of  battle,  under  the  immediate  orders  of  the  general  com- 
manding. 

The  employment  of  field  artillery,  according  to  the  various 
conditions  of  service,  is  a  subject  of  such  extent  and  import- 
ance as  precludes  any  uttenipt  to  treat  of  it  in  this  work.  It 
varies  with  the  nature  of  the  theatre  of  operations;  the 
character  of  the  enemy's  defences;  the  composition  of  his 
forces,  whether  consistinc;  of  troops  of  a  single  arm  or  of 
combinations    of  the  different   arms^  and   according    to   the 


18  0U9ANIZATI0Jf,    MATERIEL,   AND   SEKVICE. 

f]i-ripline,  instruction,  and  number  of  the  troops  with  Tfhich 
ir  is  assnoiiitcd,  their  composition,  and.  the  proportions  of  the 
(liil'erciit  arms. 

FIFXD  ARTILLERY. 

Field  arfiUcry  is  used  to  attack  and  defend  the  work^  of 
temporary  fortification  ;  to  dei?troy  or  demolif^h  material  obsta- 
cles and  means  of  cover,  and  thus  prepare  the  way  for  the 
success  ci'  other  arms  j  t5  act  upon  the  field  of  battle  j  to 
break  an  enemy's  lino  or  prevent  him  from  forming  j  to  crush 
his  masses;  to  disraoun^his  batteries;  to  follow  and  support 
in  a  pursuit,  and  to  cover  and  protect  a  retreat. 

The -fj} ret  of  field  artillery  is  generally  in  proportion  to  the 
concentration  of  its  jire.  It  has  therefore  for  its  object,  not 
to  strike  down  a  few  isolated  Tnen,  and"  here  and  there  to  di.'- 
mount  a  jrun,  but  by  a  combined  and  concentrated  fire  to 
destroy  an  enemy's  cover;  to  break  up  his  squares  and 
"columns ;  to  open  his  ranks ;  to  arrest  his  attacks,  and  to 
support  those  which  may  be  directed  against  him. 

ORGANIZATION  AND  EQUIPMENT  OF  FIELD  BATTERIES. 

There  are  three  distinct  orsjanizations  for  field  batteries  : — 

1.  The  jjc-ar*^  organization,  or  that /«?•  insitruction,  simply 

2.  That  for  the  march,  or  of  preparation  for  service. 

3.  "^That  for  icetr. 

The  first  organization,  thatyo?*  i7istrvrtion,  requires  that  the 
latft  r7/  of  manccuvre,  only  consisting  of  four  pieces,  with  th^ii: 
caissopg,  should  be  horsed.  As  the  movements  are  executed, 
with  empty  ammunition  chests,  the  number  of  horses,  and 
especially  in  the  G-pounder  bixtteries,  may  be  limited  to  four 
for  each,  carriage.  The  battery  wagon  and  forgo,  although 
not  horsed,  should  be  at  all  times  with  the  battery,  and 
provided  with  the  stores  and  tools  for  service. 

The  additional  guns  and  caissons,  with  their  equipments 
and  harness,  to  complete  the  battery  to  the  war  establishment, 
libould  bo  kept  with  it,  or  in  store,  ready  for  issue. 

The  second  organization,  that  o^  prcpareition  for  service, 
requires  that  the  battery  of  nianceuvre,.  and  also  th.e  forge  and 
battery  wagon,  should  bo  kept  fully  horsed,  manned  and 
equipped.  As  the  ammunition  and  stores  must  be  trans- 
ported, the  carriages  require  six  horses  each,  and  the  artificers, 


•    ORGANIZATION,    MATERIEL,   AND   SERVICE.  19 

as  well  as  the  chiefs  of  pieces  and  buglers,  should  be  mounted. 
On  the  inland  frontiers,  or  at  interior  stations,  where  batte- 
ries, when  put. in  motion,  must  take  the  road,  they  should  be 
kept  on. this  organization. 

The  third  organization  requires  that  the  full  battery  of  six 
or  eight  pieces  should  be  equipped  in  all  respects  for  war. 
When  there  is  no  reserve  park  with  the  troops,  the  additional 
battery  wagon,  forge,  and  other  carriages  which  usually  accom- 
pany it,  with  their  stores  and  supplies,  and  the  full  campaign 
allowance  of  ammunition,  should  accompany  the  battery  under 
charge  of  its  commanders.  .  ' 

When  batteries  are  ordered  on  service  on  the  plains,  the 
number  of  spare  draught  horses  should  be  increased  to  one 
pair  for  each  carriage. 

The  hatlery  is  supposed  to  consist  of  six  pieces.  In  batte- 
ries of  eight  pieces  there  are  two  "additional  guns,  with  the 
material  required  for  their  service. 

The  campaign  allowance  of  ammunition  is  about  400  rounds 
jwr  piece,  of  which  about  200  rounds  per  piece  accompany  the 
battery,  the  remainder  being  with  the  reserve  parks. 

For  description  and  dimensions  of  field  pieces;  composition 
of  ammunition,  and  kinds  and  description  of  projectiles  used 
in  field  service ;  the  number  and  description  of  field  carriages ; 
the  method  of  packing,  and  contents  of  ammunition  chests, 
travelling  forge,  and  battery  wagon,  see  Ordnance  Manual. 

COMPOSITION  OF  THE  BATTERY  OF  MANffiUVRE. 

The  BaftPry  of  Mananivre  is  composed  of  six  field  pieces 
and^ix  caissons,  properly  manned,  horsed,  and  equipped.  It 
is  sometimes  reduced  to  four  or  increased  to  eight  pieces.  The 
tactics  is  adapted  to  cither  number,  but  six  pieces  are  supposed. 

Each  carriage  is  drawn  by  four  or  six  horses,  and  the 
officers  and  men  am  as  follows  : 

Onc^captain,  who  commands  the  battery. 

i'hree  lieutenants,  each  commanding  a  section;  the  section 
01   the  junior  lieutenant  should  be  in  the  centre. 

One  lieutenant  comniauding  the  line  of  caissons. 

When  half  balteries  are  formed,  they  aVe  commanded  by 
the  two  lieutenants  highest  in  rank. 

Six  njounted  sergeants,  each  charered  with  guiding  and 
superintending  a  piece. 


20  ORGANIZATION,    MATERIEL,   AND   SERVICE. 

Twenty-four,  or  tbirtj-six  drivers,  being  one  toeacb  pair  of 
horses.  '' 

Six  dctacbments  of  cannoneers,  cacb  containing  nine  men 
in  mounted  batteries,  and  eleven  in  horse  butteries.  This 
number  includes  two' corporals,  one  of  whom  is  chief  of  the 
caisson ;  and  the  other,  the  gunner,  has  charge  of  the  gun 
and  its  detachment.  In  each  detachment  of  liorse  artillery 
two  of  the  cannoneers  are  horse-holders. 

Two  trumpeters  or  buglers. 

One  iruidou. 

The  battery  is  divided  into  three  sections,  denominated  ibe 
right,  left,  and  centre  sections.  Should  there  be  four  sections, 
they  are  denominated  the  ri(ilit^  ri<j1it^entrc,  hft-centrc,  and 
left  sections.  A  section  contains  two  pieces  and  two  caissons, 
and  in"  each  section  the  pieces  are  denominated  right  jpiece 
and  Irft  piece. 

The  battery  is  also  divided  into  half  batteries,  denominated 
right  half  hattery,  and  left  half  battery. 

The  word  piece  applies  to  the  gun  or  howitzer,  either  with 
or  without  its  limber;  and  sometimes  to  the  piece  and  caisson 
together. 

The  front  of  a  battery,  in  the  order  in  battery,  is  the  front 
of  the  lino  of  pieces.  In  all  other  formations  it  is  the  front 
of  the  first  line  of  drivers.' 

The  right  or  left  of  a  battery  is  always  that  of  the  actual 
front,  whether  the  pieces  or  caissons  lead.  * 

The  interval  is  a  space  measured  parallel  to  the  front. 

J'he  (liafance  is  u.  space  measured  in  depth,  or  perpendicular 
to  the  front. 

The  measures  of  intervals  and  distances  are  given  in  yards, 
and  express  the  vacant  spaces  between  the  component  parts  of 
the  battery. 

The  object  of  a  right  or  left  wheel  is  to  give  the  carriage  a 
direction  perpendicular  to  ^the  one  it  had  before.  In  exe- 
cuting it,  the  leading  horse  on  the  pivot  flank  describes  a 
quarter  [5  yards]  of  a  circle  whose  radius  is  3:25  yards,  and 
then  resumes  the  direct  march.  The  horse  coupled  to  him 
increases  his  gait  and  conforms  to  his  movement,  resuming 
the  direct  march  at  the  same  time.  The  centre  and  wheel 
horses  follow  in  the  tracks  of  their  leaders. 

The  object  of  a  right  or  left  obliq^ie  is  to  give  the  carriage 
a  direction  including  45°  to  the  right  or  left  of  the  one  it  hud 


ORGANIZATION,    MATERIEL,    AND   SERVtCfi.  21 

before.  In  executing  it,  the  leading  horse  on  the  pivot  flank 
describes  the  eighth  'of  a  circle  whose  radius  is  .3:25  yards, 
and-  then  resumes  the  direct  march.  The  horse  coupled  to 
him  increases  his  gait,  conforms  to  his  movement,  and  resumes 
the  direct  march  at  the  same  time.  The  other  horses  follow 
in  the  tracks  of  their  leaders.  The  oblique  of  a  carriage  is 
in  fact  one-half  of  a  right  or  left  wheel. 

The  j^ctssarje  applies  to  two  carriages  in  file,  and  its  object 
is  to  pass  the  rear  carriage  to  the  front.  To  execute  it,  the 
rear  carriage  inclines  to  the  right,  passes  the  one  in  front,  and 
takes  its  proper  distance  in  front  by  inclining  to  the  left.  The 
reciprocal  gaits  of  the -carriages  are  regulated  by  commanda. 

The  olDJect  of  an  about  is  to  establish  the  carriage  on  the 
same" ground,  but  in  the  opposite  direction,  having  the  heads 
of  the  leading  horses  where  the  hinder  part  of  the  carriage 
was  before.  For  the  easy  execution,  of  this  movement  at  all 
gaits,  and  with  a  carriage  of  four  wheels,  all  the- horses  incline 
at  once  to  iho  right  as  they  advance,  and  so  move,  according 
to  thfir  distances  from  the  pole,  as  not  to  interfere  with  the., 
wheel  horses  which  really  govern  the  carriages. 

In  horse  artillerij  the  detachment  of  cannoneers  follows  the 
piece,  which  advances  7  'yards  after  finishing  the  about,  in. 
order  that  the  heads  of  leading  horses  may  reach  the  position 
occupied  by  the  rear  of  the  detachment.  ' 

The  cow«?e?-?7zarc7r  applies  to  two  carriages  of  different  kinds 
in  file.  Its  object  'is  to  make  them  both  perform  the  about 
and  to  establish  them  on  the  ground  they  occupied  before,  but 
in  the  opposite  direction  and  with  the  same  carriage  in  front. 
In  performing  it  the  carriage  of  the  front  rank  executes  an 
about  at  once,  and  moves  to  the  place  which  was  occupied  by 
the  other  carriage.  The  latter  follows  the  track  of- the  former, 
executes  the  about  on  the  same  gj-ound,  and  takes  its  place. 

There  is  but  pne  kind  of  wheel,  which  is  that  with  a  mov- 
ing pivot.  The  carriage  on  the  pivot  flank  wheels  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  unmask  the  ground  where  the  movement  com- 
menced. When  the  wheel  is  made  with  a  section  front,  the 
pivot  carriage  describes  a  quadrant  [5  yards]  of  a  circle  whose 
radius  is  3:25.  With  a  battery  front  the  pivot  carriage  de- 
scribes a  quadrant  [22  yards]  of  a  circle,  whose  radius  is  14. 
If  the  wheel  be  ordered  from  a  halt,  the  pivot  carriage  moves 
at  a  walk  ;  if  on  the  march,  it  preserves  its  gait.  In  alt  cases 
the   marching  wing  regulates  its  gait  in  such  a  manner  as  to 


22  ORGANIZATION,    MATERIEL,   ANt)   SERVICE. 

r^raain  the  shortest  possible  time  in  rear  of  the  line,  wifchoufc 
urging  the  horses  unnecessarily.  In  all  wheels  the  guide  is 
on  the  pivot  flank;  and  the  intervals  arc  preserved  from  that 
flank. 

In  mounted  hatteries  the  chiefs  of  pieces  act  as  guides, 
marching  for  that  purpose  with  the  leading  carriages. 

In   JLorsc  art'dltrtj  they  are   also   guides,  except  when   the 
caissons  I'ead  and  the  chiefs  are  mounted  ;  these  chiefs  becom- 
ing the  guides  in  that  place.     The  guide  of  the  battery  is  that  '' 
of  the  cariia^e  to  which  the  movemeuts  are  referred. 

The  alignnie'id  is  made  on  the  drivers  of  the  wheel  horses, 
except  in  batte.ry,  when  it  is  made  on  Xhc  hind  wheels. 

In  giving  oouuuands,  the  strength  of '  voice  should  be^  pro- 
portioned to  the  length  oY  the  line.  AVheu  a  chief  of  section 
does  not  hear  the  commands,  he  regulates  his  movements  by 
what  he  sees  executed  by  an  adjoining  chief.  The  command. 
Attention,  i»  given  by  the  captain  at  the  commencement,  ariid 
at  each  renewal  of  the  exercise;  but  afterwards,  it  is  given 
only  when  he  thinks  it  necessary  to  fix  attention. 

Bugle  signals  are  used  instead  of  commands  whenever  they 
can  be  introduced. 

GENERAL   PRINCIPLES. 

The  battery  juauoeuvre  is  divided  into  sections,  each  being 
composed  of  two  pieces  and  two  caissons.  The  colutnn  of 
sections  is. not  only  found  to  be  suflicient  for  the  purposes  of 
manceuvre,  but  much  more  convenient  than  the  column  of 
pieces  or  half-batteries.  The  column  of  pieces  requires  too 
great  an  extension  of  the  battery,  and  too  much  time  for  its 
evolutions.  In  the  column  of  half-batteries  one  chief  of  sec- 
tion is  deprived  of  his  command  j  and,  when  formed  at  full 
distance,  the  depth  of  the  column  is  essentially  the  same  as 
in  that  of  sections.  Moreover,  when  this  column  is  used  for 
manceuvre,  the  pieces  of  the  same  section  cannot  be  kept 
long  together  in  any  part  of  the  battery.  These  objections  to 
the  column  of  half-laatteries  do  not,  however,  apply  to  the 
eight-guu  battery,  which  can  be  manoeuvred  by  half-batteries 
without  depriving  a  chief  of  section  of  his  comipand,  or 
separating  .the  pieces  of  the  same  section.  Habitually  this 
battery  will  bo  manceuvrtd  by  sections,  but  when  ncccsisary, 
or  expedibut^  it  may  be  manoeuvred  by  half-batteries. 


•OiKJ^ANIZATlON,  ^lATERlEL,    A'NI>  SERVICE.  23 

Each  piece  and  its  caisson  are  kept  in  a  fixed  relation  to 
oacb  other,  and  may  be  said  to  constitute  a  unit.  They  are 
separated  only  in  the  formations  in  battery.  This  principle 
simplifies  the  manoeuvres  greatly,  and  renders  it  generally 
unnecessary  to  give  separate  commands  to  the  caissons. 

No  notice  is  taken  of  inversions  in  any  of  the  orders,  either 
in  column,  in  line,  or  in  battery.  The  most  simple  and  rapid 
jfbrmationa  are  always  adopted. 

The  passage  of  carriages  is  used  as  an  elementary  principle 
in  the  manoeuvres.  In  tlie  formations  in  battery  it  is  indis- 
pensable for  changing  the  front  of  a  line;  and  when  executed 
seasonably,  as  a  preparatory  movement,  it  greatly  facilitates 
all  the.  formations.  It  may  be  executed  vjith  the  same,  or  an 
increased  gait. 

But  one  wheel  is  admitted.  The  pivot  carriage-  preserves 
its  gait,  while  the  others  regulate  theirs  according  to  their 
distance  from  it;   the  guide  being  always  on  the  pivot  flank. 

No  general  or  special  guides  are  used.  The  chiefs  of  pieces, 
and  in  horse  artillery  the  chiefs  of  caissons  also,  are  the  guides 
of  the  carriages  to  which  they  are  attached.  And  each 
becomes  the  guide  of  the  line  or  column  whenever  his  car- 
riage occupies  the  position  to  which  the  movements  are 
referred. 

The  cautionary  command  AxjpENTiON  is  not  embraced 
among  those  required  for  the  manoeuvres,  but  may  be  used  at 
the  discretion  of  the  captain.  The  commands  of  the  chiefs 
of  sections  are  more  numerous,  and  those  ni  the  captaiQ^are 
more  frequently  repeated  than  in  other  arms  of  the  service, 
on  account  of  the  noise  of  carriages  and  extent  of  command. 

As  a  general  rule,  the  cannoneers  should  mount  the  ammu- 
nition chests  only  for  rapid  movements;  and  when  within 
range  of  the  enemy's  guns  they  should,  dismount,  unless  im- 
portant consideratk>ns  require  a  continuance  of  the  rapid  gait 
The  explosion  of  a  caisson  when  the  cannoneers  are  mounted 
might  destroy  many  men. 

The  three  orders,  in  column,  in  line,  and  in  battery,  are  so 
established  as  to  occupy  the  least  possible  space,  and  to  require 
the  least  ground  for  their  formations.  In  both  kind^j  of  artil- 
lery, whether  in  column  or  in  line,  the  distance  between  two 
carriages;  or  between  a  carriage  and  detachment,  is  2  yards. 
The  interval  is  so  calculated  that  the  column  may  be  readily 


24  ORGANIZATIOSr,    MAtERIELj   AND   SERVICE- 

formed  into  line.  The  mtervals  thus  resulting  are  different 
in  the  two  kinds  of  artillery  j  but  when  they  manoeuvre 
together,  the  carriafres  of  mounted  artillery  take  the  intervals 
and  distances  belonging  to  those  of  horse  artillery.   ' 

In  the  order  in  battery  the  distances  are  the  same  for  both 
kinds  of  artillery.  This  order  presents  an  arrangement  whicli 
the  cxiirencies  of  war  habitually  vary.  But  the  rule  requiring 
the  limbers  and  caissons  to  face  towards  the  enemy,  should  be 
departed  from  only  while  firins:  in  retreat. 

In  that  formation  in  battery  which  requires  the  caisson  and 
detachment  of  horse  cannoneers  to  pass  the  piece,  the  detach- 
ment does  not  pass  until  after  the  caisson ;  and  the  cannon^ 
I'ers  do  not  dismount  until  the  detachment  has  reached  its 
;)lace  in  battery.  The  first  pari  of  this  arrangement  arises 
j'rom  the  fact,  that  the  passage  of  the  caissons  is  a  preparatory 
step,  which  should  be  completed  before  the  command  In 
BATTERY  is  given.  The  second  part  is  intended  to  avoid  the 
difficulty  which  would  be  esperienced  by  the  horse  holders  in 
leading  their  horses,  and  the  inconvenience  and  danger  of 
halting  near  the  piece,  and  thus  grouping  all  the  horses 
together  at  the  moment  of  coming  into  battery. 

Two  methods  have  been  adopted  for  the  formation  in  bat- 
tery to  the  front ;  one  requiring  the  pieces  to  be  thrown  for- 
ward, the  other  requiring  the  caissons  to  be  thrown  to  the 
,rear.  The  first  method  is  equally  adapted  to  light  and  heavy 
batteries.  By  this  method  the  pieces  and  caissons  are  rapidly 
separated;  and  the  commands  may  be  given  while  the  battery 
is  mcf^iug,  so  as  tj  leave  the  caissons  at  their  proper  distance 
in  rear  of  the  line  on  which  the  pieces  are  to  form.  The 
second  method  is  not  adapted  to  heavy  batteries,  on  alccount 
of  the  difficulty  of  turning  the  pieces  about  by  hand.  But 
with  light  pieces  it  is  advantageous  .when  the  battery  is  - 
already  formed  upon  the  line  of  battle,  or  when  the  head  of  a 
column  which  is  to  be  formed  into  battery  is  very  near  that 
line.  In  horse  artillery  the  first  method  of  coming  into  action 
is  considered  the  best;  for,  while  the  cannoneers  are  dismount- 
ing, the  pieces  are  moved  forward  and  wheeled  a1>out'  by  t)be 
horses,  so  that  nothing  remains  for  the  cannoneers  but  to" 
unlimber  and  commence  firing.  Moreover,  when  the  com- 
mand for  this  formation  is  given,  the^  detachments  halt  at  once 
on  tho  ground  which  their  horses  are  to  occupy  in  battery. 


TACTICAL  INSTRUCTION. 


itfjool  of  t|t  Jitce 


<5 


THE  CANNONEER  DISMOUNTED. 

1.  The  object  of  this  school  is  the  regular  and  progressive 
instruction  of  the  artillerjmrin  in  his  duties  at  and  connected 
with  the  piece,  from  the  period. of  his  joining  as  a  recruit. 

This  part  is  taught  by  the  non-commissioned"  officers,  under 
the  supervision  of  the  chiefs  of  sections^  to  each  recruit  indi- 
vidually, or  at  most  to  four  at  a  time.  In  the  latter  case, 
they  are  placed  on  the  same  line,  one  yard  from  each  other. 

rOSITION  OF  THE  CANNONEER. 

2.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  and  as  near  to  each  other  as  the 
conformation  of  the  man  will  permit;  feet  turned  out  equally, 
and  forming  with  each  other  an  angle  of  about  sixty  degrees  j 
knees  straight ;  body  erect,  the  upper  portion  inclining  a  little 
forward;  shoulders  square;  arms  hanging  naturally,  with  the 
palms  of  the  hands  turned  a  little  to  the  front;  head  erect; 
chin  slightly  drawn  in;  eyes  to  the  front;  the  position  of  the 
whole  body  without'  constraint :  when  the  sabre  is  worn,  the 
left  hand  hangs  by  the  side  and  over  it. 

1.  Eye% — lliQHT.     2.  Front. 

3.  At  the  command  Right,  turn  the  head  gently  to  the 
right,  so  that  the  inner  corner  of  the  left  eye  may  be  on  a  line 
with  the  buttons  of  the  jacket.  At  the  command  Front, 
turn  the  head  gently  to  the  front."  The  command  Eyes, — 
Left,  is  executed  on  the  same  principlea. 

2 


25  CAN50NEER    DISMOtTNTEjD. 

FACINGS. 

1.    Cannrmper^y  right  {or  left ^     2.   Face. 

4.  At  the  commaDfl  Facb,  raise  tlie  right  foot  slightly, 
turn  OIL  the  It  ft  heel,  face  to  the  right,  and  replace  the  right 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

1.    Cannoneers,  rear.     2.  Face. 

f>.  At  the  cotHmand  rear,  make  a  half  faceT  to  the  right, 
turninji  on  the  left  heel  j  place  the  right  foot  square  behind 
the  left,  the  hollow  of  it  opposite  to  and  throe  inches  from  the 
left  heel.  At  the  command  Fack,  turn  on  both  heels,  face  to 
the  rear,  and  bring  the  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the- left. 

1.    Cannoneers,  rUjlit  (or  lefC)  oblique.     2.   Face. 

6.  At  the  coiTimand  Face,  raise  the  right  foot,  turn  upon 
the  left  heel,  making  a  half  face,  and  replace  the  right  foot  by* 
the  side  of  th^  left. 

MARCHING. 

7.  The  length  of  the  step  i.s  28  inches,  and  33  in  double- 
fjuiek;  its  quickness  at  the  rate  of  liO  step??  to  a  minute  in 
quick-time,  and  1G5  in  double-quick. 

1.    Cannoneers,  for  ward.     2.  Mai^CH. 

At  the  cmmu'dod  for w a i'(f,  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  on 
the  light  leg.  At  the  command  March,  step  off  briskly 
with  the  left  foot,  and  m;\reh  straight  to  the  front,  taking  steps 
of  equal  length  and  cadence. 

1.    Cannoneers.      2.   Halt. 

8.  At  the  command  Halt,  which  should  be  given  as  one 
foot  comes  to  the  ground,  bring  the  one  in  rear  to  the  side  of 
it  without  shock. 

1.    Ca)inoneers,  hadcivards.      2.   MarcII. 

9.  At  the  command  iMahcii,  carry  the  left  foot  14  inches 
to  the  rear,  then  bring  the  right  foot  likewise  to  the  rear  of 
it,  and  so  on,  successively,  until  the  command  : 

1     Caniioneers.     2,  Halt. 


CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED.  2? 

At  the  coramaiid  Halt,  bring  the  foot  which  is  in  front  by 
the  side  of  the  other. 

1.    Marh  time.     2.  March. 

10.  At  the  word  March,  make  the  semblance  of  marching, 
and  mark  the  cadence  of  the  step  by  raising  the  feet  alter- 
nately, commencing  with  the  left,  without  advancing  or 
receding. 

1.    Change  step.     2.  March. 

11.  At  the  word  March,  given  at  the  moment  one  foot  is 
coming  to  the  ground,  bring  the  other  to  its  side,  and  step  off 
again  with  the  first. 

1.    CannoneerSy  hy  the  vlfjht  fianh.     2.   March. 

12.  At  the  word  March,  given  at  the  moment  the  left -foot 
is  coming  to  the  ground,  turn  the  body  to  the  right,  and  step 
off  with  the  right  foot  irn  the  new  direction,  without  losing 
the  cadence  of  the  step. 

1.    Cannoneers,  hf/jhe  left  Jianlc.     2.   March. 

13.  At  the  word  March,  given  as  the  right  foot  is  coming 
to  the  ground,  turn  the  body  to  the  left,  and  step  off"  with  the 
left  foot. 

1.    Cannoneers,  to  the  rear.     2.   March.' 

14.  Which  is  executed  as  directed  for  facing  to  the  right, 
excepting  that  the  body"  is  turned  to  face  to  the  rear  instead 
of  to  the  risrht. 

o 

1.    Cannoneers,  riylit  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

15.  At  the  word  March,  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  or 
left,  and  step  off  in  the  new  direction,  with  the  foot  on  the 
bide  towards  which  the  turn  is  made. 

To  resume  the  primitive  direction,  the  command  is; 

Forward. 

16.  At  thi.'S,  make  a  half  face  so  as  to  move  in  the  original 
direction,  and  march  straight  to  the  front. 

If  the  instructor  wishes  to  rest  the  recruit,  he  commands: 

Kest. 


28  CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED. 

17.  At  this,  the  recruit  is  no  longer  required  to  preserve 
immobility. 

If  the  instructor  should,  however,  simply  desire  to  relieve 
the  attention  of  the  recruit,  he  will  command  : 

Parade — Rest. 

IS.-  At  the  word  Rest,  carry  the  right  foot  six  inches  to 
the  rear,  the  left  knee  slightly  bent,  the  body  erect  on  the 
right  leg,  the  arras  folded  over  the  chest. 

At  the  command  Attention,  the  recruit  retakes  the  posi- 
tion and  remains  motionless. 

THE  GUN  DETACHMENT. 

19.  The  cannoneers  Of  a  piece,  when  united  for  the  service 
of  the  gun,  or  for  the  .preliminary  instruction,  constitute  a 
detachment  J  which  is  composed  ordinarily  of  8  men,  com- 
manded by  a  gunner. 

A  rank  is  composed  of  men  abreast;  a^i/e,  of  men  placed 
one  behind  the  other. 

The  cannoneers  fall  in  in  two  ranks,  18  inches  between  the 
ranks;  elbows  slightly  touching;  and  in  such  a  manner  that 
the}'  may  be  told  off  to  the  duties  of  the  piece  for  which  they 
are  best  fitted.  This,  of  course,  does  not  apply  to  recruits; 
each  of  whom  must  be  taught  the  duties  of  ever}'  number. 

The  gunner  tells  off  the  detachujent  from  the  right.  No,  1 
being  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank  ;  No.  2  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank;  No.  o  on  the  Icl't  of  No.  1  ;  No.  4  on  the  left  of 
No.  2,  and  so  on;  the  even  numbers  being  in  the  front,  and 
the  odd  numbers  in  the  rear  rank.  He  then  takes  post  on 
the  right  of  the  front  rank.  The  chief  of  caisson,  who,  as 
well  as  the  gunner,  should  be  a  corporal,  is  told  oft'  as  No.  8 
of  the  gun  detachment.  When  the  detachment  is  composed 
of  more  or  less  than  8  men,  he  should  be  the  highest  even 
num'hor.  When  the  chief  of  the  piece  is  present  and  not  the 
instructor,  he  performs  the  duties  and  takes  the  position  of  the 
gimner,  who  then  takes  post  1  yard  in  rear. of  the  right  file, 
and  acts  as  file  closer,  except  when  ihe  chief  of  piece  is  out 
of  ranks,  when  the  gunner  resumes  his  post. 


CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED.  29 

TO  FORM  IN  ONE  RANK. 

1.   Detachment,  left  into  sui(/Ie  ranJc.    2.   March.    3.   Halt. 
4.  Rijht — Dress.     5.  Front. 

20.  At  the  first  commandj  the  even  numbers  face  to  the 
left;  and,  at  the  comman'ci  March,  step  off.  At  the  word 
JiATiT,  given  when  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  is. 
opposite  to  the  left  elbow  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  rear 
rank,  they  all  halt  and  face  to  the  front.  At  the  word  Dress, 
the  odd  numbers  step  forward,  and  all  aKgn  themselves  on  the 
gunner.     At  the  word  Front,  all  cast  their  eyes  to  the  front. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

21.  To  the  front.  Two  or  more  files  of  the  right  are  moved 
forward  3  yards  and  aligned  by  the  commands  :  T'wo  right  files 
forward — March— Halt — Right — Dress.  The  instructor 
then  commands : 

1.  Bi/  file,  Right — Dress.     2.  Front. 

At  the  word  Dress,  the  men  move  forward  successively, 
casting  their  eyes  to  the  right,  halt  short  of  the  line,  and  dress 
forward  until  standing  squarely  to  the  front  and  touching  the 
elbow  of  the  man  on  the  right,  they  see  the  breast  of  the 
second  man  on  that  side.  Each  executes  the  movement  when 
the  preceding  one  arrives  on  the  line,  so  that  but  one  tile 
aligns  itself  at  a  time.  The  command  Front  is  given  when 
the  last  file  is  aligned. 

22.  2'o  the  rear.  Two  or  more  files  are  moved  backwards 
2  yards  and  aligned  by  the  commands:  Two  right  flea  hack- 
26"rt?v/— March — Halt — Right — Dress.  The  instructor  then 
commands: 

1.   By  file,  right  hachward — Dress.     2.   Front. 

At  the  word  Dre%3,  each  file  takes  the  back  step  in  succes- 
sion, casting  his  eyes  to  the  right,  passes  a  little  to  the  rear  of 
the  new  line,  and  then  dresses  forward  as  in  No.  21. 

23.  To  align  the  whole  of  the  detachment  at  oncC;  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1.  Detachment,  right  (or  left)  Dress.     2.  Front. 

OR 

1.   Detachment,  right  (or  left)  haclcward — Dress.    2.  FRONT. 


80  CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED. 

DIRECT  MARCH  IX  SINGLE  FILE. 

•  24.  The  command  is  given  : 

1.   VcOuhmentf  rigid  (or  leff)   Face.     2.    Column  foncard. 

3.  March. 

At  the  word  Face,  tlic  cannoneers  face  to  the  right  (or 
left),  and  at  the  command  JIarcii,  they  sttp  off  together. 
Each  man  marches  exactly  biliind  the  one  who  precedes  him. 

25.    Tu  Itdi'fj  when  inarching  by  file,  the  command  is  : 

1.    Column.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  all  halt  in  their  positions. 

2G.  To  face  to  the  proper  front,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Front — Face.     2.  Eighi  (or  left)  Dress.     3.  Front. 

At  the  word  Face,  each  man  faces  to  the  left  if  the  detnch- 
racnt  has  bpen  faced  to  the  right;  and  to  the  light,  if  it  has 
been  faced  to  the  left. 

27.  The  detachment  marching  by  file,  in  single  rank,  to 
cause  it  to  change  direction  by  file,  the  instructor  commands : 

.   1.  Bi/ file  rifjht  {ov  left).     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 

At  the  word  March,  the  loading  man  turns  in  the  direc- 
tion indicated;  and  at  the  word  Forward,  given  as  soon  as 
he  turns,  moves  io  the  front,  and  is  followed  by  the  others  in 
succession,  who  turn  upon  the  same  ground. 

28.  To  cause  the  detachment,  marching  in  file,  to  march 
obliquely,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.    Cannoneers^  rujlit  (or  left)  ohUque.     2.   MARCH. 

The  movement  is  performed  as  in  No.  15. 

DIRECT  MARCH  IN  LIJE. 

20.  The  detachment  being  correctly  aligned,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.    Dctarlimrvt.,  forward.      2.    MaRCII. 
3     Guide  rifjlit  (or  Ifft.^ 

At  the  word  Maijch,  all  step  oif,  taking  care  to  keep  the 
touch  of  the  elbow  towards  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist 
all  pressure  from  the  opposite  direction. 


CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED.  SI 

30.  To  halt  the  detacluii'jnt,  the  iustruetor  commaads : 

Detachment — IIal't. 

WHEELINGS. 

31.  There  is  but  one  wheel,  that  on  a  movable  pivot,  Ta 
wheeling,  the  pivot  uian  describes  an  arc  of  a  circle,  ch^aring 
the  pivot  18  inches.  The  men  touch  elbows  towards  the  pivot 
and  lengthcG  their  steps  as  they  approach  the  marching  flank. 
The  conductor  of  the  marchin<i  flank  siiouid  cast  his  eyes  over 
the  arc  which  lie  is  to  describe,  so  that  the  tiles  should  not  be 
too  open  or  too  close;  for  this  purpose  he  occasionally  turns 
his  head  towards  the  pivot;  the  cannoneers  turn  theirs  slightly 
towards  the  marching  flank  to  keep  aligned,  yield  to  pressure 
coming  from  the  direction  of  the  pivot,  and  resist  that  from 
the  opposite  direction. 

32.  The  detachment  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  or  in  march, 
the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Detachment y  in  circle,  right  wheel.     2,   Marck. 

At  the  word  March,  the  cannoneers  take  the  wheeling 
step.  The  wheel  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  31.  After 
several  wheels  have  bcec  esecuted,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Detachment — Halt.     2.  Left — Dress.     3.  Front. 

33.  The  detachment  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  or  in  march, 
to  place  it  in  a  position   perpendicular  to  the  existing  front,^ 
(he  instructor  commands : 

1.   Detachment,  ri;/hf  (or  left)  whrel.     2.    Marcfi.      3.   Halt. 
4.  Lf/t  (or  ri(jht)  Dress.     5.  Fruxt. 

Which  is  executed  as  in  the  wheel  in  circle,  the  instructor 
giving  the  word  Halt,  wheu  the  wheel  is  nearly  completed. 

THE  REVERSE. 

34.  The  detachment  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  or  in  march, 
to  phice  it  faced  to  tliG  rear,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Dctachm^'ut,  n'l/ht  (^QY  I'/t)  7'evcrse.     2.  MakCIL     3.  Halt, 
4.  Lr/t  (or  rijht)  Dress.     5.  Front. 


fg  CANNONEER   DISMOITNTED. 

"S^liich  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No  32,  the  detacbment 
describing  only  a  half -circle,  and  the  commaad  Halt  being 
given  whoa  the  reverse  is  nearly  completed. 

35  In  all  wheelings,  when  it  is  desired  to  move  forward  at 
their  completion,  instead  of  the  command  Halt,  etc.,  the 
commands  will  be  Forward,  Guide  right  (or  left).  The 
command  Forward  is*  given  as  soon  as  the  detachment  is  in 
the  new  direction,  and  is' followed  by  the  command  for  the 
guide. 

TO  FORM  THE  DETACHMENT  IN  TWO-  HANKS.       - 

36.  The  instructor  commands :  .  . 

1.  Rijlit  into  two  ranks.     2,  March.     3.  Ei(/7it — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  odd  numbers  take  two  steps  to 
the  rear;  the  even  numbers  face  to  the  right,  and  at  the  com- 
mand March,  move  forward  until  opposite  the  rear  rank  men 
of  their  iilcs,  when' they  halt  and  face  to  the  front. 

TO  xMArX'II  BY  A  FLANK. 

37.  To  the  right  or  left.  The  detachment  marching  ia 
line,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Detachment^  hi/  the  right  (or  left)  flanh.     2.  March. 
3.  Forward. 

At  the  word  March,  each  man  turns  in  the  direction  indi- 
cated and  steps  off. 

The  march  in  lice  in  the  primitive  direction  is  resumed  at 
the  commands  : 

1.    Coluiiniyl))/ the  left  (^ov  right)  flanh.     2.  March. 
3.  Forward.     4.   Guide  right  (or  left). 

38.  To  the  front.  The  detachment  marching  in  line,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1.   Detachment,  Inj  the  right  flanh  hy  file  left. 
2.  March.     3.  Forward. 

At  the  word  March,  each  man  faces  to  the  right,  and  the 
column  then  turns  to  the  left.     The    instructor   commands 


CANI70NEER   DISMOUNTED.  33 

FowARD  .IS  soon  as  tlio  leacliDg  file  Las  iurned.     The  move- 
ment is  executed  with  the  left  in  front  at  the  commands : 

1.  Detachment^  hi/  the  left  flanh  hi/  file  right. 
2.  M Alien.     3.  Forward. 

THE  DETACHMENT  MARCHING  BY  A  FLANK  TO  FORM 

LINE. 

39.  The-  cohimn  marching  with  the  right  in  front,  tlie 
instructor  commands  : 

1.    Cannoneers^  into  line.     2.  March.     3.    Guide — Right. 

At  the  word  March,  the -first  man  of  the  the  front  rank 
continues  to  march.  The  first  man  of  the  rear  rank  shortens 
his  step,  and  phices  himself  behind  him  by  obliquing  to  the 
left;  the  other  men  oblique  immediately  to  the  left,  quicken 
the  step,  and  form  in  succession  in  Rne  on  the  left  of  the  first, 
each  in  the  rank  to  which  he  belongs.  -The  instructor  then 
gives  the  command,  Guide— ^Right. 

When  the  column  is  left  in  front,  the  movement  is  executed 
on  the  same  principles  by  inverse  means. 

OBLIQUE  IN  LINE. 

40.  The  detachment  marching  in  line,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.    Cannoneers^  left  (or  right)  ohlique.     2.  Marcii. 

At  the  word  March,  the  men  oblique  in  the  direction 
ordered.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  marching  in  rear  of  the 
men  on  the  right  of  their  respective  file-leaders. 

The  primitive  direction  is  resumed  at  the  command : 

Forward. 

TO  MARCH  TO  THE  REAR. 

41.  The  detachment  being  in  march,  in  line,  or  in  column, 
the  instructor  commands : 

1.   Cannoneers^  to  the  rear.     2.  March.  3.  Forward. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  14.  When  the 
detachment  is  in  line,  the  instructor  adds  the  command  for 
the  guide, 


84  CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED. 

TO  MARCH  BACKWARDS. 

42.  The  detachment  being  in  line  at- a  halt,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.   Detachment,  hachward.     2.   March. 
3.    Guide — Rhjlit  (or  Left.') 

At  the  word  March,  tho  movement  is  esecuted  as  pre- 
scribed in  No.  9. 

TO  OPEN  AND  CLOSE  RANKS. 

43.  To  open  ranks,  the  instructor  commands : 

.1.  To  the  rear  open  order.     2.   March.     3.  ^/^/j/;— Dress. 

4,  Front. 

At  the  word  March,  the  rear  rank  briskly  marches  back, 
wards  5  yards  and  halts,  each  man  accurately  coverinj^  his  file 
leader.  At  the  word  Dress,  th^  rear  rank,  is  aligned  to  the 
right.  ^ 

44.  To  dose  ranks,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.    Close  order.     2.  March. 
At  the  word  March,  the  rear  rank  closer  on  the  front. 

EXECUTION  OF  THE  MOVEMENTS  AT  THE  DOUBLE-QUICK. 

45.  When  the  instructor  desires  to  increase  the  rapidity  of 
the  march,  he  eomraauds:  f      j 

1.  JJouhle-quic/c.     2.   March. 
^    At  tlie  word  March,  the  men  take  steps  at  the  rate  of  165 
m  a  minute,  and  continue  them  till  the  command: 

1.  Qui'ck  2.  March,  is  given,  when  they  resume  the 
ordinary  rate  of  110  steps  to  a  miaute. 

THE  PLATOON. 

eon.%  JrA  ennnoneers  and  drivers  of  a  piece,  when  united, 
k  thl  1  f  ^f/r'^'-''^^^"^^  ^'^  commanded  by  a  Sergeant  who 
^s  the  chief  of  the  piece.     The  drivers  fon/  on  the  left,  and 


CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED.  35 

the  platoon  is  divided  into  detadiipents  of  the  same  size  as 
the  g-uu  detnchnient,  the  men  being  numbered  in  the  same 
manner;  the  chief  of  caisson  is  the  front-rank  man  of  the  left 
file.  •  . 

To  prevent  the  formation  of  incomplete  detachments,  artifi- 
cers may  be  assigned  as  Nos.  8 ;  or  the  permanent  chiefs  of 
caissons  may  be  assigned  as  gncners  to  detachments,  other 
than  the  gun  detachmentj  and  posted  one  yard  behind  the 
right  files. 

When  necessary,  surplus  men  may  be  transferred  from  one 
detachment  to  another,  so  that  there  shall  be  but  one  incomplete 
detachment  in  the  company,  which  should  not  be  on  the  Hank. 
When  an  incomplete  detuchment  consists  of  an  odd  number 
of  men,  the  vacancy  is  left  in  the  rear  rank,  in  the  next  tile 
but  one  from  the  left,  that  number  being  omitted  in  calling  off. 

When  the  company  is  formed  for  parade  purposes,  and  it  is 
not  desired  to  manoeuvre  by  detachments,  the  platoons  may  be 
equalized  and  regarded  as  the  units.  They  are  then  formed 
as  single  detachments,  the  chiefs  of  caissons  being  posted  as 
the  front  rank  men  of  the  left  files  of  the  platoons.  The  men 
call  oft'  from  No.  1  to  No.  8,  as  if  divided  into  detachments  of 
eight  men  each. 

The  instruction  laid  down  for  the  detachment  is  equally 
applicable  to  the  platoon,  by  substituting 'the  word  p/(/^oo?i 
for  the  word  detachment. 

THE  SECTION. 

47.  Two  platoons  constitute  a  section,  which  is  commanded 
by  a  lieutenant.  The  platoons  forai,  when  in  line,  in  the  order 
of  their  pieces  in  park,  and  touching  each  other.  In  a  sec- 
tion, they  arc  designated  as  the  right  and  left  platoons, 
•according  to  their  actual  position  with  reference  to  each  other. 
No  notice  is  taken  of  inversions;  the  actual  right  and  left 
detachments  being  the  right  and  left  of  the  line,  which  may 
be  formed-  from  column  by  throwing  the  rear  detachments 
either  to  the  right  or  left  of  the  leading  one. 

The  posts  of  the  officers  in  a  section  are  as  follows  : — Chiefs 
of  sections,  in  line,  or  in,  column  of  sections,  2  yards  in  front 
of  the  centres  of  their  respective  commands ;  in  column  of 
platoonsj  or  of  detachments,  or  ichcn  faced  hy  a  flank,  % 


36  CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED. 

yards  outside  the  marching  flank;  wilh  several  sections 
united,  mid  faced  hy  a  fiank,  the  chief  of  the  leading  one 
takes  his  place  at  the  side  of  the  leading  file;  in  all  other 
cases,  opposite  the  centre  of  their  commands. 

The  sergeants,  chiefs  of  pieces,  wlicn  in  line,  in  column  of 
sections,  or  faced  hi/  a  fav/c,  are  on  the  right  of  the  gun 
detachments  of  their  respective  platoons,  in  the  front  rank. 
7/1  column  of  plafoons,  or  of  detachments,  they  are  1  )'ard  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  their  platoons  or  their  gun  detachments. 

The  corporals,  gunners,  when  in  h'ne,  or  column  of  sections, 
are  1  yard  behind  the  right  files  of  their  respective  gun  detach- 
ments. In  column  of  platoons,  or  detachments,  they  are  on 
the  right  of  the  gun  detachments.  When  the  column  has  a 
detachment,  other  than  the  gun  detachment,  at  its  head,  the 
gunner  of  the  platoon  to  which  it  belongs  will  place  himself 
1  yard  in  front  of  its  centre,  unless  the  chief  of  the  caisson 
of  that  platoon  is  acting  as  its  file-closer;  in  which  case  the 
latter  leads  the  column.  When  /cicerf  bi/  a  flank,  they  face 
with  the  company,  and  keep  their  respective  places. 

The  corporals,  chiefs  of  caissons,  are  in  their  places  in  the 
ranks  as  Nos.  8  of  the  gun  detachments,  or  as  the  front  rank 
men  on  the  left  of  their  platoons,  or  they  may  be  assigned  as 
gunners  to  detachments,  other  than  the  gun  detachments,  in 
the  case  already  provided  for  to  prevent  the  formation  of 
incomplete  detachments. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

48.  The  detachments  are  aligoed  -  by  the  instructor,  as 
directed  in  No.  23,  at  the  commands  : 

1..  Riglit  (or  left)  Dress.     2.  Front. 

TO  OPEN  AND  CLOSE  THE  RANKS. 

49.  To  open  the  ranks,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.    To  the 'rear  open  order.      2.   xMarcii.      3.   Riyl'it — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  sergeants  step  back  briskly  5 
yards,  and  halt  opposite  their  places  in  line.  The  remainder 
of  the  movement  is  executed  as  directed  in  No.  43, 


CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED.  37 

At  the  word  Front,  the  sergeants  resume  their  posts  in 
line. 

2^0  clone  ranhs,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.   Clo!^e  order.     2.  March. 

At  the  word  March,  the  rear  rank  closes  on  the  front  rank. 

TO  BREAK  INTO  COLUMN  TO  THE  RIGHT  OR  LEFT. 

50.  The  instructor  commands  :  ' 

1.  B)/ jjlatoony  Right — Wheel.     2.  March.     3.  .Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  step  briskly  1 
yard  to  the  front  of  tho  centres  of  their  commands,  face 
towards  them,  and  repeat  the  commands  after  the  instructor. 
The}'  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  83. 

As  soon  as  each  platoon  is  halted,  its  chief  dresses  it  to  the 
left,  the  guides  covering  each  other  at  distances  equal  to  the 
front  of  a  platoon,  and  then  takes  his  place  in  column. 

The  line  is  broken  into  column  to  the  left  on -the  same  prin- 
ciples.    It  may  also  be  broken  by  detachments. 

TO  MARCH  IN  COLUMN. 

51.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Column — ForivarcJ.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  le/t  (or  rfgJii) 

The  commands  Forward,  March,  Guide  le/f,  are  all 
repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoons. 

52.  When  the  instructor,  after  breaking  into  column,  wishes 
to  put  the  sub-divisions  in  motion  without  halting,  instead  of 
the  word  Halt,  as  prescribed  in  No.  50,  he  commands  : 

3.   Column,  Forward.     4.    Guide  left  (or  right'). 

The  chiefs  of  sub  divisions  repeat  the  commands,  Forward, 
and  that  for  the  guide. 

TO  HALT  THE  COLUMN, 

53.  The  instructor  commands  : 

Column — Halt. 
The  word  Halt  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sub-divisioqs. 


$8  CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED. 

TO  CHANGE  DIRECTION  IN  COLUMN. 

54.  The  column  marching,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left. 

At  this,  the  chief  of  the  leadiuir  phUoon  wheels  it  to  the 
left,  and  eomm-.inds  Forward  as  tlie  movenicpt  is  completed. 
The  other  platoons  wheel  in  succession  on  tlfe  same  ground 
as  the  first,  and  at  the  same  commands  from  its  chief. 

TO  MARCH  BY  A  FLANK  WHEN  IN  COLUMN. 

55.  The  column  marching,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.    Column,  hij  the  riyht  [or  h'ft)  flank.      2.   MARCH. 
3.  Forward.     4.   Guide  k'ft  (or  right). 

At  the  word  March,  the  platoons  face  and  continue  (he 
march.  The  chiefs  of  sub-divif^ions  take  their  places  at  the 
sides  of  their  leading  files.  The  ofiiccrs  face  with  the  column 
and  retain  their  relative  positions. 

50.  To  resume  the  j^i'iniitive  direction ^  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.   Bi/  the   left   (or   ri<jht)  flfinJc,     2.  ^Iarcii. 
3.    Column^  Forward,     4.    Guide  right  (or  left^. 

At  the  word  March,  the  platoons  face  as  directed  and  their 
chiefs  resume  their  places  in  column. 

OBLIQUE  IN  COLUMN. 

57.  The  column  marching,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.    Cannoneers,  left  (or  right)  oblique. 
2.  March. 

The  chiefs  of  sub-divisions  repeat  the  word   March,  and 
each  sub-division  obliques  as  pniscribed  in  No.  40. 
The  primitive  direction  is  resumed  at  the  command  : 

1.   Forward.     2.    Guide  left  (or  right). 

Given  by  the  instructor,  and  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sub- 
divisions. 


CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED.  S9 

BEING  IN  COLUMN  TO  FORM  LINE. 

58.  The  column  being  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  Forward  into  line,  left  ohliqiie.     2.    MarCII. 
3.   Guide  riyht.     4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  sub-division 
commands  Forward,  and  the  others,  Cannoneers,  leftoldiqne. 
At  the  word  March,  the  leading  subdivision  advances  18 
yards,  and  is  halted  by  its  chief,  who  then  commands  Ri(jht — 
Dress,  and  takes  his  place  in  line.  The  others  oblique  until 
opposite  their  proper  positions,  when  their  chiefs  command 
Forward,  Guide  ric/lit,  halt  abreast  of  the  subdivision  in 
line,  and  command  Right — Dress,  and  take  their  places  in 
line. 

The  instructor  aligns  the  sub- divisions,  and  command? 
Front. 

The  line  is  formed  on  the  right  of  the  leading  sub-division, 
on  the  same  principles,  at  the  commands : 

1.   Forward  into  line,  riglit  oblique.     2.   March. 
3.   Guide  left.     4.  Front. 

50.  To  form  oh  the  right  into  line,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.    On  right  into  line.     2.   Marcpi.     3.    Guide  right. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  sub-division 
commands:  Right  iclis<d,  and  at  the  word  March,  which  he 
repeats,  wheels  his  sub-division  to  the  right,  marches  it  for- 
ward until  it  unmasks  the  column,  halts  it,  counnands  Right — 
Dress,  and  takes  his  place  in  Hue.  The  other  chiefs  of  sub- 
divii-ions  repeat  the  command  for  the  guide,  wheel  their  com- 
mands to  the  right  as  si^on  as  they  are  oppoite  the  left  of  the 
preceding  one,  move  them  forward,  halt  them  on  the  line, 
commaDd  Rliyht—DwEtS,  and  take  their  places  in  line. 

As  soon  as  the  lino  is  dressed,  the  instructor  commands 
FaoNT. 

The  sub  divisions  are  f  )rmed  in  lino  on  the  left  according 
to  the  same  principles,  at  the  commands  : 

1.    On  left  into  line.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left.     4.  Front. 


40  CANNONEER    DISMOUNTED. 

60.    T'i  tlie^right  or  left.     The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Rijht  (or  left)  into  line,  wheel     2.  MARCH.     3.  Halt. 
.  4.  Lrff  (or  ri(jl(f)  Dress. 

The  commands  RijJU  (or  left)  wheel,  March,  and  Halt, 
nre  repeated  by  the  chiefd  of  subdivisions,  who  take  their 
places  in  both  cases  on  the  right  as  soon  as  tho  movement  is 
executed.  The  instructor  th(;'n  aligns  the  subdivisions  by  the 
commands  :  Rit/ht  (or  left)  Dress.     Front. 

01.  In  all  Ibniiations  and  changes  of  tYont  in  line,  the  offi- 
cers promptly  take  their  proper  positions,  passing,  if  necessary, 
through  the  intervals  during  the  execution  of  the  movemenfs. 

'10  FORM  LINE  ADVANCING. 

02.  The  column  marching  at  a  walk,  to  form  the  sub-divis- 
ions into  line,  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  and  to  continue  the 
march,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.   Form  line  advancing — left  ohUque — doiihlc-quich. 
2.  March.     3.   Guide  riyht. 

The  leading  chief  of  suh-division  repeats  the  command  for 
the  guide,  and  his  eommand  continues  the  .march;  the  others 
command,  Lrft  nhlitpic—douhlc-quicJci  and  March,  after  the 
instructor.  As  soou  as  each  subdi vision  has  obliqued  suffi- 
ciently, its  chief  gives  the  command  Forward — Guideright, 
when  it  moves  directly  to  the  front,  and  on  arriving  upon  the 
line,  resumes  the  ordinary  step;  the  officers  take  their  posi- 
tions in  line. 

The  movement  is  pcrfonucd,  gaining  ground  to  the  right,  on 
the  same  piinciples,  the  commands  of  the  instructor  being: 

1.   Form  line  advancing — right  ohlique — dotihle-qnicJc. 
2.  March.     3.    Guide  left. 

TO  ADVANCE  IN  LINE. 

63.  The  instructor  commands  : 
1.    Section,  forward.     2.   March.     3.    G 2L id e  lift  (ov  right). 

Which  arc  executed  according  to  the  principles  laid  down 
in  No.  29. 


CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED.  41 

To  lialty  tbe  instructor  commands  : 
Section — Halt. 

OBLIQUE  IN  LINE. 

G4.  This  movement  is  executed  according  to  the  principles 
and  commands  laid  down  in  No.  -iO. 


TO  CHANGE- DIRECTION  IN  LINE. 

65.  This  movements  are  executed  according  to  the  princi- 
ples laid  down  in  Nos.  33,  and  34;  the  commands  are  :. 

1.    Section,  left  (or  right)  iclieel  (or  reverse).     2.   MARCH. 

3.  Halt. 
Or,         3.  Forward.     4.    Guide  left  (or  right'). 

TO  MARCH  BY  A  FLANK  WHEN  IN  LINE. 

66.  The  line  being  in  march,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.   Section,  hi/  the  right  (or  le/t)  Jian/c.     2.  March. 
3.  Forward. 

67.  The  march  in  line  in  the  primitive  direction  is  resumed 
by  the  commands  : 

1.    Column,  hi/ the  Ic/t  (or  right)  JIank.     2.   March. 
3.  Forward.     4.    Guide  left  (or  right). 

68.  To  march  to  the  front,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.    Section,  hi/  the  right  Jhnik  h?/  file  left  (or  hi/  the  hft  flanh 
hij fde  right).      2.    MaRCH.      3.    FORWARD. 

This  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  38. 

TO  CHANGE  DIRECTION  WHEN  FACED  BY  A  FLANK. 

60.  This  movement  is  executed  on  the  principles  laid  down 
in  No  27.  •  ■ 


42  CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED. 

MARCiriNG    in*  A  FLANK  TO    FORM  COLUMN  OF  DETACH- 
MENTS. 

70.  The  instructor  commauds  : 

Form  detachments. 

At  tln<!  command,  each  chief  of  detachment  forms  his  com- 
mund  itifo  line  as  pref*c'rib''d  in  No.  39.  The  instructor  then 
gives  the  com  maud  for  the  guide. 

TO    TASS  FROM  A  MARCH  IN  COLUMN  TO  A  MARCH  BY  A 

FLANK. 

71.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.^  Bi/thcri(jhtJlankyhi/JileleJt.      2.    MaRGII.      3.    FORWARD. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sub  divisions, 
each  sub-division  faces  to  the  rio;ht,  and  then  turns  to  the 
left,  the  chiefs  taking  their  post  in  the  ranks.  The  column 
is  marched  by  a  flank,  with  the  left  in  front,  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples by  inverse  meaus. 

MARCIUNG  BY  A  FLANK  TO  FORM  LINE. 

72.  Detachments  arc  fir.'Jt  formed  as  prescribed  in  No.  70, 
after  which  they  are  formed  iu  line,  as  prescribed  in  No.  58, 
and  following. 

V 

TO  FORM  THi:  LINK  Oil  COLUMN  FACED  IN  THE  OPFOSITE 

DIRECTION. 

73.  The  line  or  column  being  m  march,  or  at  a  halt,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1.  Platoons,  rif/hf  (or  left)  reverse.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 
4.  Left  (or  ri'jJit)  Dress.     5.  Front. 

Each  sub-.division  executes  the  reverse,  as  prescribed  in 
No.  31. 

If  the  sub-divisi'ius  are  in  cohuun,  the  oflicers  <]o  not  change 
Bides;   but  if  they  \\\\\  in  line,  the  otHL-er.?  pa.-s  through  one  of 
the  intervals  during  the  execution  of  the  movement,  so  as  to 
^take  their  proper  po.silions  in  line. 


CANNONEER    DISMOUNTED.  43 

If  the  instructor  wishes  to  move  forward  in  the  new  direc- 
tion, instead  of  the  command  Halt,  etc.,  he  commands  For- 
ward, or  Cohimn,  Forward,  as  the  reverse  is  about  being 
completed,  and  adds  the  command  for  the  guide. 

TO  MARCH  TO  THE  REAR. 

74.  The  sub-divisions  being  in  line  or  in  column,  to  iraiu 
ground  to  the  rear,  the  same  cominands  are  used  as  in  No. 
41,  the  command  for  the  guide  being  given  always  after  that 
of  execution. 

In  this  case,  the  officers  face  to  the  rear,  at  the  proper  com- 
mands, but  do  not  pass  through  the  line  to  take  position. 

POSTING  THE  DETACHMENTS  AVITH  THEIR  PIECES. 

75.  The  detachments  are  marched  to  the  battery,  cither  in 
column  or  in  line,  as  circumstances  may  require.  If  approach- 
ing in  column,  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the  battery,  the  in- 
structor, when  near  it,  commands  : 

DErACHiMENTS,  OrPOSITE   YOUR   PIECES. 

Each  detachment  is  halted  by  its  chief  when  opposite  its 
piece,  and  wheeled  into  line. 

Approaching  from  the  front  or  rear,  the  detachments  are 
formed  in  line  facin^;  the  battery,  and  in  the  same  order  as 
their  "pieces,  and  the  instructor  commands  : 

,  Detachments,  opposite  your  pieces. 

Each  i*s  wheeled  or  face^  in  the  proper  direction  by  its 
chief,  marched  opposite  its  piece,  and  formed  in  .line,  as  di- 
rected in  No.  'J 38. 

The  cannoneers  are  then  posted,  and  exercised  too;c;ther  at 
thiir  duties  in  the  manual  of  the  piece  and  mechanical 
manoeuvres. 

EXECUTION  OF  THE  MOVEMENTS  AT  THE'  DOUBLE  QUICK. 

TO  The  movements  directed  may  bo  ma<le  in  tlie  double- 
quick  time,  and  the  ordinary  times  resumed  according  to  the 
principles  of  No.  45. 


44  CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED. 

"*  THE  COMPANY. 

77.  The  Cowpant/  is  composed  of  two,  three,  or  four  sec- 
tions. The  instruction  is  given  more  particularly  for  three 
sections,  but  is  applicable  to  either  case.  When  there  are 
four  sections,  the  company  is  further  divided  into  (livUion&, 
each  composed  of  two  sections.  The  company  will  not  be 
luanaMivrcd  by  diviswna  unless  circumstances  require  it,  the 
section  or  platoon  beirig  the  most  convenient  sub-division  for 
niano'uvreinjiij. 

The  company  is  commanded  by  a  capt^ain.  A  subaltern, 
in  addition  to  the  chiefs  of  sections,  is  attached  to  it.  lie 
performs  the  staff  duties  of  the  battery,  and  commands  the 
line  of  caissons  in  the  battery  formations.  In  the  absence  of 
the  lieutenant  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons,  he  is  replaced  by 
the  first  sergeant. 

In  addition  to  what  is  already  prescribed,  the  posts  of  officers 
with  a  company  arc  as  follows  :  The  captain  commanding'  goes 
wherever  his  presence  may  bo  necessary,  or  his  commands  best 
heard.  His  position  is,  in  the  order  in  line,  4  yards  in  front 
of  "the  centre  of  the  company;  in  the  order  in  column,  or 
when  fdccd  by  a  Jlank,  4  yards  outside  the  rcarching  flank, 
0])positc  the  centre  of  the  Company. 

In  column  of  dirisions,  the  ranking  chief  of  section  in 
each  division  is  4  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division ; 
the  other  chief  of  section  keeps  his  position  2  yards  in  front 
of  tlie  centre  of  his  section. 

The  lieutenant.,  chief  of  caissons,  is,  in  line,  4  yards  behind 
the  centre  of  the  company;  in  column.,  ov faced  by^  a Jlanh, 
he  is  4  yards  outside  the  pivot  flank,  and  opposite  the  centre 
of  the  company. 

The  first  sergeant,  in  line,  is  on  the  right  of  the  company, 
in  line  with  the  front  rank,  and  1  yard  from  it;  in  column, 
he  is  on  the  marching  flank,  1  yard  outside  the  section  or 
other  sub-division  nearest  to  him  when  in  line.  When /acetZ 
by  a  flank,  he  faces  with  the  company. 

The  rjuarterm^ster-sorgoant  occupies  positions  on  the  left  of 
the  company,  corresponding  to  "those  of  the  first -sergeant  on 
the  right,  whether  in  line,  in  column,  ov  faced  bij  njianh. 

The  buglers,  in  line,  are  on  the  right  of  the  first  sergeant, 
in  one  rank,  an  1  1  yards  from  him;   in  column^  they  are  6 


CANNONEER   DISMOUNTED.  45 

yards  in  front  or  rear  of  the  sub-division  next  them  in  line, 
according  as  that  sub-division  forms  the  head  or  rear  of  the 
column.  When  the  company  faces  hij  a  jianh,  they  face 
with  it. 

The  artificers  occupy  positions  on  the  left  of  the  company 
corresponding  to  those  of  the  musicians  on  the  right,  whether 
in  line,  in  column,  ov  faced  hy  a  jlank. 

The  guidon  farms  with  the  buglers,  and  on  their  left,  or 
taki'S  such  position  as  the  captain  may  prescribe. 

When  the  company  is  paraded,  the  principles  laid  down  for 
the  Exerche  of  the  Section  are  applidable.  The  commands 
are  modified  to  suit  the  circumstances,  the  term  company  be- 
ing used  to  designate  the  line. 

No  notice  is  taken  of  inversions,  the  actual  right  and  loft 
being  the  right  and  left  of  the  company.  In  the  exercise,  the 
platoons  or  sections  may  be  made  the  unit  at  the  pleasure  of 
the  instructor. 

In  line,  or  in  column  of  s^ectiom^,  either  when  marching  or 
at  a  halt,  to  form  faced  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  reverse 
may  be  executed  by  platoon  or  by  section.  In  column  by  pla- 
toons, the  reverse  should  be  executed  by  platoon.  It  may  be 
executed  by  detachment  in  all  cases, .but  this  mode  of  chang- 
ing the  front  should  not  be  resorted  to  except  in  cases  of 
necessity,  or  when  the  gun  detachments  only  are  present. 

If  the  line  should  be  formed  faced  in  the  opposite  direction, 
for  instance,  by  a  reverse,  to  the  right  or  left,  the  non-com- 
nilssioncd  staff  ofliccrs,  buglers  and  artificers  will  remain  with 
the  sub-divisions  near  which  they  were  originally  formed,  and 
the  line  would  then  be  formed  as  follows — from  the  actual 
right  to  left:  the  artificers;  quartermaster-sergeant;  com- 
pany; first  sergeant;  guidon,  and  buglers. 

^lANUAL  OF  THE  SAERE. 

78.  This  ia  taught  immediately  after  the  cannoneers  have 
been  exercised  in  t\\Q  plafooit .  The  instructor  points  out  the 
different  parts  of  the  sabre — Hilt  :  gripe,  rjuard,  sword-knot ; 
]3L.\i>r,:  Ixirk,  edtfc^  p()ii\t ;  8cakb.\RD  :  riv<fit,  sprintjs.  He 
tlicn  explains  what  is  meant  by  the  rijJit  and  left  side  of  the 
ijripe  ;  by  tierce,  and  by  quarte. 

The  riijht  side  of  the  gripe  is  the  side  opposite  the  guard  ; 


46  MANUAL   0^   THE    SABRiE. 

the  thumb  and  fingers  close  over  it  when  the  hand  grasps  the 
hilt. 

Thf  h  ft  side  of  the  f/ripe  is  the  si(^e  next  to  the  guard,  and 
lies  in  the  palm  of  the  hand. 

Tierro  i.s  the  p(>>itiou  in  which  the  edge  of  the  blade  is 
turned  to  the  right,  the  nails  downwards. 

Qunric  is  the  position  in  which  the  edge  of  the  blade  is  turn- 
ed to  the  left,  the  nails  upwards. 

The  sabre  exercise  should  commence  and  end  with  moiili- 
nefa.  When  all  the  motions  are  executed  with  regiilaritTj  the 
instructor  requires  each  cut-  to  be  given  without  decomposing 
it.  All  cuts  are  tlien  terminated  by  a  half  moulinet,  which 
brin.'s  b;ick  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

yVirjis/.s-.^should  always  be  used  in  preference,  as  they  require 
less  force,  and  their  result  is  more  prompt,  sure,  and  decisive. 

The  parries  against  the  lance  are  the  same  as  against  the 
point.  . 

TO  OPEN  FILES. 

•79.  For  the  sabre  exercise,  the  instructor  opens  the  ranks, 
or  forms  the  cannoneers  in  one  rank,  and  commands; 

1,  Mf/  lite  left  (or  ru/ht)—OvEis  FiLKS.     2.  March, 
3.  J^i(/ht  (or  le/f) — Dress.     4..  Front. 

At  the  command  open  files,  all  face  to  the  left  except  the 
fii-st  tile. 

At  the  word  March,  the  men  step  off  together.  The 
second  man  from  the  right,  after  having  marched  4  yards, 
halts,  fronts  by  a  right  face,  and  dresses  on  the  right  file,,  who 
has  not  moved.  The  others  continue  the  march,  and,  each 
one  glancing  over  his  right  shoulder,  halts  in  succession,  and 
fronts  when  he  has  arrived  at  his  place,  which  is  4  yards  from 
that  of  the  man  behind  him.  'The  rear  rank  men  regulate 
themselves  by  their  file  leaders,  and  remain  exactly  behind 
them. 

When  the  third  ranu  from  the  right  has  faced  to  the 
front,  the  instructor  command^',  T^/^A^— DaESS,  and  then  com- 
mands, FHONT. 

To  open  the  files  without  too  much  extending  the  front,  the 
inetructor  forms  the  canuoueers  in  single  rank,  or  else  opens 


MANUAL   OF   THE   SABRE.  47 

the  ranks  by  raarcbing  the  front  rank  12  yards  to  the  front,  or 
the  rear  rank  V2  yards  to  the  rear.      He  then  commands: 

1.   To  the  front— Oj?en  FILES.     2.  Marcii. 
3.  Right — Dress.     4.  Front. 

At  the  word  March,  Nos.  1  and  2  move  9  yards,  Nos.  3  and 
4  move  6  j^arda,  and  Nos,  5' and  6  move  3  yards  to  their  front, 
and  halt.     At  the  command,  each  dresses  on  his  own  line. 

80.  The  instructor  then  commands  : 

Draw — Sabre. 

Tivo  times. 

1.  At  the  command  Draav,  turn  the  head  slightly  to  the 
left,  without  deranging  the  position  of  the  body;  unhook  the 
sabre  with  the  left  hand,  and  bring  the  hilt  to  the  front;  run 
the  right  wrist  through  the  sword-knot;  seize  the  gripe,  draw 
the  blade  six  inches  out  of  the  scabbard,  pressing  the  scab- 
bard ngainst  the  thigh  with  the  left  hand,  which  seizes  it  at 
the  upper  ring,  and  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

2.  At  the  comnvand  Sabhe,  draw  the  sabre  quickly,  raising 
the  'arm  to  its  full  extent;  make- a  slijzht  pause,  carry  the 
blade  to  the  right  shoulder,  the  back  of  it  against  the  hollow 
of  the  shoulder,  the  wrist  resting  agaijist  the  hip,  the  little 
finger  on  the  outside  of  the  gripe. 

This  position  is  the  same  when  mounted,  except  that  the 
wrist  then  naturally  falls  upon  the  thigh. 

Present — Sabre. 
One  time. 

81.  At  the  command  Sabre,  carry  the  sabre  to  the  front, 
the  arm  half  extended,  the  thumb  opposite  to,  and  six  inches 
from  the  neck,  the  blade  perpendicular,  the  edge  to  the  left, 
the  thumb  extended  on  the  right  side  of  the  gripe,  the  little 
finger  by  the  side  of  the  others. 

Carry— Sabre. 
One  time. 

82.  At  the  command  Sabre,  carry  the  back  of  the  blade 
against  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder,  the  wrist  resting  against 
the  hip,  the  little  finger  on  the  outside  of  the  gripe. 


48  MANUAL    OF   THE    SABRE. 

R?:turn — Sabre.  . 
Tico  times. 

83.  1..  At  the  command  Returx,  execute  the  first  motion 
of  Prcftf'nf  sahre. 

2.  At  the  coiiim:)nd  Sabre,  carry  the  wrist  opposite  to, 
and  six  inches  from  the  left  shoulder;  lower  the  blade  and 
pass  it  across  and  along  the  left  arm,  the  point  to  the  rear; 
turn  the  head  slightly  to  the  left,  fixing  the  eyes  on  the' open- 
ing of  the  .'^cabbard ;  return  the  blade,  free  the  wrist  from  the 
sword-knot,  turn  the  head  to  the  front,  drop  the  right  hand 
by  the  side,  and  hook  up  the  sabre  with  the  hilt  to  the  rear. 

Inspection — (of)  Sabre. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

84.  1.  At  the  command  Sabre,  talie  the  position  of  Pre- 
sent sahre. 

2.  Turn  the  wrist  inwards;  show  the  other  side  of  the 
blade;  and  turn  the  wrist  back. 

3.  Carry  the  ^abre  to  the  shoulder. 

On  inspection,  the  last,  motion  is  not  executed  until  the 
inspector  has  passed  the  next  man. 

Guard. 
One  time. 

85.  At  the  command  Guard,  carry  the  right  foot  tioo  feet 
from  the  left,  the  heels  on  the  same  line  ;  place  the  left  hand 
dosed,. SIX  inches  from  the  body,  and  as  high  as  the  elbow, 
the  fingers  towards  the  body,  the  little  finger  nearer  than  the 
thumb  (^posifioiL  of  the  bridle  hand) ;  at  the  same  time,  place 
the  righjt  hand  in  tierce  at  the  height  of,  and  three  inches 
from,  the  left  hand,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the 
gripe,  the  little  finger  by  the  side  of  the  otlters,  the  point  Of 
the  sabre  inclined  to  the  left,  and  iioo  feet  higher  than  the 
hand. 

THE  MOULINETS. 
Lp/t — MOULTNET. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

86.  1.  At  the  command  Moulinet,  extend  the  right  arm 


MANUAL   OP   THE   SABRE.  49 

to  the  front  to  its  full  length,  the  hand  in  tierce  and  as  high 
as  the  eyes. 

2.  Lower  the  blade  in  rear  of  the  left  elbow;  graze  the 
horse's  neck  quickly,  describing  a  circle  from,  rear  to  front, 
and  return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

Riglit — MOULINET. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

87.  1.  At  the  command  Moulinet,  extend  the  right  arm 
to'  the  front  to  its  full  length,  the  hand  in  quarte,  and  as  high 
as  the  eyes. 

2  Lower  the.  blade  in  rear  of  the  right  elbow ;  graze  the 
horse's  neck  quickly,  describing  a  circle  from  rear  to  front, 
and  return  to  the  position  of  GtUard. 

88.  To  execute  the  moulinet  without  stopping,  if  the  in- 
structor wishes  to  begin  by  the  left,  he  commands : 

Left  and  Right — Moulinet. 

One  time- and  two  motions. 

If  he  wishes  to  begin  by  the  right,  he  coua'mands : 
Right  and  Left — Moulinet. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

At  either  Of  these  commands,  the  men,  commencing*  from 
the  position  of  Guard,  execute  alternately  what  is  laid  down 
above,  without  stopping  at  any  motion. 

Rear — Moulinet  . 
One  time  and  two  ^notions. 

89.  1.  At  the  command  Moulinet,,  raise  the  arm  to  the 
right  and  rear  to  its  full  extent,  the  point  of  the  sabre  up- 
wards, the  edge  to  the  right,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back 
of  the  gripe,  the  body  slightly  turned  to  the  right. 

2.  Describe  a  circle  in  rear  from  left  to  right,  the  hand  as 
far  as  possible  from  the  body,  and  return  to  the  position  of 
Guard. 

When  the  men  execute  the  moulinets  well,  the  instructor 
require^  them  to  execute  several  in  succession,  until  the  com- 
mand Guard. 
3 


60  MANUAL    OF   THE    SABRE?, 

THE  THRUST. 

In  tierce — PoiNT. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

90.  1.  At  the  command  Point,  raise  the  hand  in  tierce  as 
hi^h  as  the  eyes,  throw  back  the  right  shoulder,  carrying  the 
elbow  to  the  rear,  the  point  of  the  sabre  to  the  front,  the  edge 
upwards 

2.  Thrusit  to  the  front,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full  length. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

In  qnarte^-VoiliT. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

91.  1.  At  the  command  Point,  lower  the  hand  in  quarte 
near  the  right  hip,  the  ,thumb  extended  on  the  right  side  of 
the  gripe,  the  point  a  little  higher  than  the  wrist. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  front,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full  length. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

Z^yj;^-PoiNT. 
One  time  and  three  molions. 

92.  1.  At  the  command  Point,  turn  the  head  to  the  left, 
draw  back  the  hand  in  tierce  towards  the  right,  at  the  height 
of  the  neck,  the  edge  upwards,- the  point  directed  to  the  left. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  left,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full  length. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

Eir/ht — Point. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

93.  1.  At  the  command  Point,  turn  the  head  to  the  right, 
carry  the  hand  in  qiiarte  near  the  left  breast,  the  edge  up- 
wards, the  point  directed  to  th€  right. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  right,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full  length, 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

Hear — Point. 
One  time  and  thr'^e  motions. 

94.  h  At  the  command  Point,  turn  the  head  to  the  right 


MANUAL    OF   THE   SABRE.  '$% 

and  rear,  bring  the  band  in  quarte  opposite  tp  the  right  shoul- 
der, the  arm  half  extended,  the  bkide  h'X)rizontal,  the  point  to 
the  rear,  the  edge  upwards. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  rear,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full  length. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

.Against  infantry^  Left—'VQ\^'^. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

95.  1.  At  the' command  Point,  turn  the  head  to  the  left, 
"raise  the  hand  in  tierce  near  the 'neck,  the  point  of  the  sabre 
directed  at  the  height  of  the  breast  of  a  man  on  foot. 

!?.  Thrust  down  in  tiercQ. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

Against  infantry^  Right^PoilsiT. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

■  96.  1.  At  the  command  Point,  turn  the 'head  to  the  right, 
carry  the  hand  in  quarte  near  the  right  hip,  the  point  of  the 
sabre  directed  at  the  height  of  the  breast  of  a  man  on  foot. 
2.  Thrust  in  quarte. 

•  3.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

THE  CUT. 

Front-rzQviT. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

97.  1.  At  the  command  Cut,  rai.se  the  sabre,  .the  arm  half 
extended,  the  hand  a  little  above  the  head,  the  edge  upward, 
the  point  to  the  rear  and  higher  than  the  hand. 

2.  Cut,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full  length. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

Xr/^— Cut. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

98.  1.  At  the  command  Cut,  turn  the  hepd  to  the  left, 
raise  the  sabre,  the  arm  extended  to  the  right,  the  hand  in 
quarte,  and  as  high  as  the  head,  the  point  higher  than  the 
band. 

2.  Cut  diagonally  to  the  left. 

8.  Return  to  tho  position  of  Guard. 


62  MANUAL   OF   THE   SABRE. 

J^i'oJit— Cut. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

99.  1.  At  the  command  Cut,  turn  the  head  to  the  right, 
curry  the  hand  opposite  to  the  left  shoulder,  the  point  of  the 
sabre  upward,  the  edge  to  the  left. 

2.  Extend  the  arm  quickly  to" its  full  length,  give  a  back- 
handed cut  horizontally. 

2.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

'  These   cuts  are  also   used   against  infantry,  observing  to 
direct  them  vertically. 

J2caj' — Cut. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

100.  1.  At  the  command  Cut,  turn  the  head  to  the  right, 
throwing  back  the  right  shoulder;  carry  the  hand  as  high  as, 
and  opposite  to,  the  left  shoulder,  the  sabre  perpendicular,  the 
edge  to  the  left; 

2.  Extend  the  arm  quickly  to  its  full  length,  and  give  a 
back-handed  cut  horizontally,  to  the  rear.  • 

3.  Keturn  to  the  position  of  Guard: 

Right,  in  tierce  and  quarte — CuT. 
One  time  and  four  motions. 

101.  1.  At  the  command  Cut,  execute  the  1st  motion  of 
right  cut. 

.  I.  Execute  the  2d  motion  of  right  cut. 
o'.  Turn  the  hand  in  quarte,  and  cut  horizontally. 

4.  lleturn  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

Left,  in  quarte  and  tierce — Cut. 
One  time  and  four  motions. 

102.  1.  At  the  command  Cut,  execute  the  1st  motion  of 
left  cut. 

2.  ExecHte  the  2d  motion  of  left  cut. 

3.  Turn  the  hand  in  tierce,  and  cut  horizontally. 

4.  Upturn  to  the  position  of  Guard. 


^ 


MANUAL   OF   THE    SABRE.  5S 

Rear,  in  tierce  and  quatte — Cut. 

One  time  and  /our  motions. 

lOo.  1.-  At  the  command  Cut,  execute  the  1st  motion  of 
rear  cut. 

2.  Execute  the  2d  motion  of  rear  cut. 

3.  Turn  the  hand  in  quarte,  and  cut  horizontally. 

4.  Ileturn  to  the  position  of  GtUARD. 

*, 

THE  PARRY. 

In  tierce — Parry. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

104.  1.  At  the  command  Parry,"  carry  th»  hand  quickly  a 
little  to  the  front  and  right,  the  nails  downward,  without  mov- 
ing the  elbow;  the  point  inclined  to  the  front,  ashigh  as  the 
eyes,  and  in  the  direction  of  the  right  shoulder;  the  thumb 
extended  on  the  back  of  the  gripe,  and  pressing  against  the 
guard. 

2.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard.  ^  ■• 

In  qua7'te—V ARUY . 
One  lime  and  two  motions. 

105.  1.  At  the  command  Parry,  turn  the  hand  and  carry 
it  quickly  to  the  front  and  left^  the  nails  upward,  the  edge  to 
the  left,  ihe  poitit  inclined  to  the  front,  as  higii  as  the  eyes, 
and  in  the  direction  of  the  left  shoulder ;  the  thumb  extended 

•on  the  back  of  the  gripe,  and  resting  against  the  guard. 
2.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

For  the  head — PARRY. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

106.  1  At  the  command  Parry,  raise  the  sabre  quiokly 
ahove  the  head,  die  aYnt  nearly  extended',  the  edge  upward, 
the  point  to  fhe  left,  and  abouf  six  inches  higher  than  the 
hand. 

2.  Return  to  the  position. of  Guard. 


54  MANUAL    OF   THE 'SABRE. 

Against  i'n/antr?/,  Right — Parry. 
One  time  and  tliree.  motions. 

107.  1.  At  the  command  Parry,  tmn  the  head  to  tho 
right,  throwing  back  the  right  shoulder,  raise  the  sabre,  the 
arm  extended  to  the  right  and  rear,  the  point  upward,  the 
hand  in  tierce,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the  gripe, 
the  edge  to.the  left. 

2.  Describe  a  circle  quickly  on  the  right  from  rear  to  front, 
the  arm  exttiU^ed )  turn  aside  the  bayonet  with  the  back  of 
the  blade,  bringing  the'  hand  as  high  as  tlie  head,  the  point 
upward. 

o.  Return  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

Against  infantry ^  Left—VAB.ViY. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

• 

108.  1.  At  the  command  Parry,  turn  the  head  to  the 
left,  raise  the  sabre,  the  arm  extended  to  the  front  and  right, 
the  point  upward,  the  hand  in  tierce,  the  thumb  extended  on 

■the  back  of  the  gripe,  the  back  of  the  bladC'  to  the  front. 
,     2.    Describe  a  circle  quickly  on  the  left,  from  front  id  rear, 
along  t\f^  horse's   neck,  the   arm   extended;  turn   aside   the 
bayonet  with  the  back  of  the  blade,  bririgiiag  the  hand,  still 
in  tierce,  above  the  left  shoulder, 
o.  lieturn  to  the  position  of  Guard. 

THE  THRUST  AND  CUT  COMBINED. 

109.  W^ien  the  men  begin  to  execute  correctly  the  above 
cuts,  thrusts,  and  parries,  the  instructor  re(|uires  them  to  make 
the  applicatipn  of  them  by  combined  tnotions,.as  follows: 

la  ^i'm'c— Point,  and  front  cut. 
Ill  quarte — Point,  and  front  cut. 
Left — Point,  and  cut. 

Bight —FOINT,  AND  cut. 

7?ear— Point,  and  cut. 

Against  infantry^  Righf-^-ToiNT.ANTt  CUT. 

Against  infantry,  Left— J^OINT  AND  GUT. 

Garry — Sabre. 

110.  As  it  is  prescribed,  and, carry  the  right  foot  by  the 
side  of  the  left. 


MANUAL   OF   THE   SABRE.  55 

211.  When  tbc  instructor  wishes  to  form  the  detachment 
or  phitooD,  he  commands  : 

1.   To  the  right  (or  Jeff) — Close  Files.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  Close  Files,  the  men  all  face  to  the 
right,  (or  left,)  except  the  file  on  which  they  close.     . 

At  the  .word  March,  they  step  off  together,  and  each  one 
forms  in  succession,  by  a  left  (or  right)  faoe,  when  he  closes 
up  to  the  man  who  precedes  him. 

After  the  ranks  are  formed,  the  instructor  closes  and  dresses 
them.  . 

If  the  files  have  been  opened  to  the  front,  the  instructor 
commands :  • 

1.   Close  Files.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  doi^e  filea^  Nos.  7  and  8  stand  fdst;  the- 
other  numbers  face  to  the  rear. 

At  the  word  MARCH,-aU  close  on  Nos.  7  and  8.,  each  in.hi3 
own  rank,  and  face  about. 

The  tanks  are  then  formed,  or  closed,  and  the  men  aligned. 

Parade — Rest. 

212.  With  the  sabre  drawn,. at  the  word.  Rest,  the  can- 
noneer assumes  the  same  position  as  without  th(?  sabre,  No, 
18,  e"Scept  that  instead  of  folding  the  arms  over  the  chest,  he 
crosses  the  hands  in  front  of  his  body,  the  left  hand  over  the 
right. 

At  the  comand  Attention,  he  assumes  the  position  of 
Ca/vv/— Sabre. 

MANUAL  OF  THE  PIECE. 

213.  This  is  taught  immediately  after  the  mhre  exercise. 
For  the  purpose  of  instruction,  each  detachment  should  be 
halted  in  tVnnt  of  and  ficing  the  piece,  the  latter  being  un- 
limbered.  and  the  different  numbers  called  upon  successively, 
to  perform  their  respective  duties  in  detail,  while  the  rest  of 
the  detachment  are  required  to  attend  to  the  instruction,  and 
to  the  manner  in  which  the  motions  are  performed. 

214  The  eanoonneers  of  a  piece  when  united,  constitute  a 
(]un  jk'farJim'cnt,  wliieh  is  composed  ordinarily  of  nine  men 
in  mounted  artillery,  and  eleven  in  horse  artillery;  two  of 


56.  MANUAL    OF   THE    PIEC^. 

whom — the  gunner  .who  commands  the  detachment;,  and  tpe 
chief  of  caisson — should  be  corporals. 

POSTS  OF  THE  CANNONEERS.     PIECE  UNLIMBERED. 

215.  The  gUQTier  is  at  the  end  of  the  trail  handspike  ;  Nos, 
1  and  2  are  about  two  feet-  outride  the  wheels,  No.  1  on  the 
right,  and  No.  2  on  the  left :  with  howitzers,  they  are  rather 
in  rear  of  the  muzzle-;  with  gnns,  in  line  with  the  front  part 
of  Jbfe  wheels.  Nos.  3  and  4  are  in  line  with  ihe  knob  of  the 
cascable,  covering  Nos;  1  and  2;  No.  5  five  yards  in  rear  of 
the  left  wheel ;  No.  6  in  rear  of  the  limber,  which  is  turned 
about  so  as  to  face  toward  the  piece;  and  No.  7  on  his  left^ 
eov'ering  No.  5  ;  No.  8,  the  chief  of  the  caisson,  is  four  yards 
in  rear  of  the  limber,-  and  on  its  left;  all  face  to  the  front, 
which  is  the  direction  in  which. the  muzzle  of  the  piece  is 
pointing.  -  * 

The  chief  of  the  piece  Is  opposite  the  middle  of  -the  trail 
handspike,  outside  of  and  near -the  left  cannoneers.  In  actual 
firing,  he  places  himself  where  he  can  best  observe  the  effect 
of  the  shot. 

LOADING  AND  FIRING. 

21G.  The  piece  is  supposed  to  be  on  the  drill  ground)  ud- 
limbercd,  and  ready  for  action ;  the  limber  is  in  position  be- 
hind the  piece,  and  facing  toward  it,  the  end  of  the  pole  six 
yards  from  the  end  of  the  trail  handspike. 

Befoi'e  commencing  the  individual  instruction  of  the  can- 
nooeers,-  the  instructor  should  enter  into  an  explanation  of  the 
.different  kinds  of  field  guns,  their  names,  and  the  names  and 
uses  of  the  different  parts  of. the  gun  and  carriage  before  them. 
This  done,  he  commences  the  instruction  with  the  gunaerj 
"who  commands  and  points  the  piece  in  action. 

217.  Commandimj  and  point mc/.-^-The  gunner  is  responsi- 
ble for  the  manner  m  which  the  numberg  didoharge  their  duty. 
lie  communicates  the  orders  which  he  receives  for  the  kind  of 
ammunition  to  be  fired;  sending  to  No.  6,  (who.  is, charged 
with  preparing  the  fuze,)  the  time  of  flight  or  the.  distance  for 
each  rovind,  when  firin«:  shells  or  spherical  case  'shot.  H-e 
should^  when  the  firing  is  slow^  see  that,  each  fiize  is  properly 


MANUAL   OF   THE   PIECE.  57 

prepared,  and  make  suclr  corrections  as  are  necessary;  for  this 
purposQ,  he,  as  well  as  No.  6,  should  be  provided  with  a  fuze- 
gouge.  ..    ^  _ 

On  receiving  the  command  or  signal  to  commence  firing,  he 
gives  tlie  command  Load;  takes  hold  of  the  handspike  at  the 
end  with  the  right  hand,  and  at  the  centre  with  the  left; 
places  his  left  knee  against  the  left  hand,  bending  over  it,  the 
right  knee -being  slightly  bent;  looks  oyer  the  top  of  the 
piece,  and  gives  the  direction.  He. then  steps  to  the  breech 
tc^give  the  elevation,  which  he  does  by  placing  the  hausse  on 
its  seat,  taking  hold  of  9,  handle  of  the  elevating  screw,  draw- 
ing back  his  right  foat,  bending  over  his  left  knee,  and  sight- 
ing through  the  slit  in  the  hausse. 

When  the  piece  i^  loaded  and  pointed,  he  removes  the 
hausse,  gives  the  command  Ready,  and  stepping  clear  of  the 
wheel  to  that  side  where  he  can  best  observe  the  effect  of  his 
shot,  gives  the  command  Fire.  As  soon  as  the  piece  has 
been  fired,  he  causes  it  to  be  run  up  to  its  former  place,  if  the 
recoil  has  made  it  necessary. 

When  the  instructor,  instead  of  giving  the  command  Conj:- 
MENCE  Firing,  gives  that  of  Load,  the  gunner  repeats  it, 
and  performs  the,  same  duties  as  before,  except  that  he  does 
not  command  Fire  until  the  firing  is  ordered  to  commence. 
After  the  command  to  Commence  Firing  is  given,  the  action 
is  continued  by. the  gunner  without .furthei'  command  from, 
the  instructior,  until  the  fij-ing  is  ordered  to  cease.  When  the 
commands  are -all'  given  by  the  instructor,  as  in  loading  hi/ 
detail,  the  gunner  performs  the  same  duties,  but  without  re- 
peating the  commands. 

"IX^.  Sponging  and  ramming. — Until  the  command  Load, 
No.  1  stands  faced  to  the  front,  in  line  with  the  front  of  the 
wheels,  holding  the  sponge  about  the  middle  of  the  staff  in. 
hifi  right  hand,  afid  trailing  at  an  angle  of  45^^,  sponge 
Jiead  up. 

The  instructor  commands : 

B^  'derail — Load. 

Three  pauses  Q.iid  fuur  ^notions. 

First  motion.  At  the  command  Load,  No.  1  faces  to  the 
h^ft^  steps  oblifpcly  to  the  right  with  his  right  foot,  withou*. 


58  xMANUAL   OF   THK   PIECE. 

moving  his  left,  and  at  the  same  time  brings  the  sponge  to  a 
perpendicular  position,  by  drawing  his  rio:ht  hand  up  in  aline 
with  his  elbow.  The  sponge  is  grasped  firmly  in  the  hand, 
tbe  rammer  head  held  over  the  right  toe,  find  the  elbow  kept 
close  to  the  side. 

Second  motion,  lie  steps  oblicjuely  to  the  left  with  his  left 
foot,  planting  it  about  half-way  between  the  piece  and  the 
wheel,  and  opposite  the  muzzle,  bringing  the  sponge  at  the 
same  time  across  his  body  to  the  left,  so  that  his  right'  hand 
may  be  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  the  sponge  staff  being 
inclined  at  an  angle  of  45°  across  the  front  of  it. 

Third  modon.  He  takes  a  side  step  to  the  right  of  thirty 
inches  with  the  right  foot,  and  bending  the  right  knee,  bringe 
the  sponge  to  a  horizontal  position,  extending  the  hands  to 
the  ends  of  the  staff,  the  sponge  head  to  fhe  left,  the  back  of 
the  right  band  up,  and  that  of  his  left  down,  the  sponge  head 
pressing  against  the  face  of  the  piece. 

Fourth  motion.  He  inserts  the  sponge, head,  drops  his  left 
hand  behind  his  thigh,  shoulders  square,  feet  equally  turned 
out,  straightens  the  right  knee,  bends  the  left,  and,  leaning 
over  it,  forces  the  sponge  home. 

Sponge. 

Three  pauses  and  four  motions. 

219.  First  motion.  At  the  command  Sponqb,  No.  1  fixes 
his, eye  on  the  vent  to  see  that  it  is  closed,  gives  two  turns  to 
the  sponge,  pressing  it  at  the  same  time  against  the"  bottom  of 
the  bore. 

Scrund  motion.  He  draws  out  the  sponge,  at  the  same  time 
straightening  his  left  knee  and  bending  his  right,  seizes  the 
staff'  near  the  sponge  head  with  his  left  hand,  back  of  the 
hand  down,  and  places  the  sponge  against  the  face  of  the 
piece.    '"^ 

Third  motion.  He  turns  the  sponge  by  bringing  his  hands 
together  in  the  middle  of  the  stj^iT,  giving  a  cant*with  each 
liand,  tlirowiug  the  sponge  head  over,  at  the  same  time  turning 
his  wrists,  so  as  to  bring  the  stuff  to  a  horizontnl 'position  j  he 
then  extends  hi.s  hands  to  the  ends  of  the  staff,- the  back  of 
the  left  up^  that  of  the  right  dowii. 

Paring  the  whole  time  of  sponging,  No.  1  keeps  his  eye  on 


MANUAL   OF   THE   PIECE. 


¥> 


the  vent.     If  at  any  time  it  is  not  closed,  he  will  discontinue 
the  niana3uvre,  and  coiDmand,  Stop  Vent.  ■ 

Fourth  motion.  He  introduces  the  rammer  head  into,  the 
muzzle  as*l50on  as  No.  2  has  inserted  the  charge,  and  joins  his 
left  hand  to  his  right,  casting  his  ejes  to  the  front.       •   ,   . 

Ham. 

Tico  i)(^usQS  aiul  three  motions. 

1-20  Fir!<t  motion.  At  the  command  Ram,  No.  1  rims 
home,  throwing  the  weight  of  his  bod-j  with  the  rammer; 
bending  over  his  left  knee,  and  passing  his  left  arm,  with  the 
elbow  slightly  bent,  and  back  of  the  hand  up,  in  a  horizontal 
position  over  the  piece,  until  it  points  in  the  direction  of  the 
left  trunnion  ;•  the  right  shoulder  thrown  back,  an'"d  the  eyes 
cast  toward  the  front  until  the  cartridge  is  home. 

Second  motion,  lie  jerks  the  sponge  out  with  his  right 
hand,  allowing  it  to  slide  through  the  hand  as  far  as  the  mid- 
dle of  the  staff,  when  he  grasps  it  firmly,  and  seizing  it  close 
to  the  rammer  head  with  the  left  hand,  back  of  the  hand  up, 
places  the  rammer iiand  agaijist  the  face  of  th.e  piece,  straight- 
ens his  left  knee,  and  stands  erect;   eyes  to  his  own  front. 

Third  molion.  lie  then  draws  the  sponge  close  to  his  body, 
and  immediately  steps  baok  outside  the  wheel,  first  with  the 
riglit,  then  with  the  left  foot;  so  that  when  the  right. foot  is 
brought  to  it,  the  right  hip  may  be  on  a  lin-e  with  the  front  of 
the  wheel.  In  drawing  the  right  foot  to  the  left,  he  gives  the 
sponge  a  cmt  with  his  left  hand,  at  the  same  time  quitting  it, 
and  brings  the  sponge  to  a -perpendicular  po.^ition  in  the  right 
hand,  the  rammer  head  resting*on  the  right  toe. 

221  Heady.  At  this  conmiand,  which  is*givcn  as  soon  as 
the  piece  is  leaded,  or  the  firing  about  to  commence.  No.  1 
breaks  well  off  to  the  left  with  his  left  foot,  bending  the  left 
knee  and  straigliteoing  the  right  leg,  drops  the  end,  of  the 
sponge  Staff  into  the  left  hand,  back  of  the  hand  down,  and 
fixes  his  eyes  on  the  muzzle.  The  heels  should  be  parallel 
with  the  wheel,  the  body  erect  on  the  haunches,  and  the  sponi^ 
and  rammer  held  in  both  liaods  in  a  horizontal  position,  the 
sponge  head  to  the  left. 

The  piece  havini:  been  fired,  No.  1  rises  on  his  right  knee, 
and  returns  to  his  position  as'  in  the  third  motion  of  IvAJr, 


60  MANUAL   OF  TUB   PIECE. 

j^  the  commamd  Load,  be  steps  in  and  performs  bis  duties 
in  the  same  manner  as  before. 

222.  When  the  loading  is  not  hij  detail,  No.  1  goes  through 
all  his  duties  at  the  command  Load,  returns  to  ITis  position 
ou^^ide  the  wheel,  as  given  in  the  third  motion  of  11a]m; 
bi«-  f:«  off  at  the  .command  IIkady,  and  at  the  firing  of  the 
gun  rises,  steps  in,  and -pcrforHis  his  duties  as  before.  Tbis- 
he  continues  uncil  the  command  Cease  Firing  is  given,  aji. 
wl],ich  command  he  resumes  the  po.<^ition  be  bad  before  the 
fi^rt  command  Load.  If  the  sponging  has  been  commenced 
when  the  command. Cease  Firing  is  given,  it  is  completed 
before  No.  1  resumes  his  post 

In  sponging  and  ramming,  if  the  length  of  the  piece  re- 
quires it,  the  .sponge  and  rammer  are  to  be  pressed  home  in 
two  motions,  No.  1  extending  his  right  band  fo  the'end  of  the 
staff  as  soon  as  it  reaches  the  muzzle. 

:'In  sponging  howitzers,-  No.  1  presses  the  sponge  to  thebot*- 
torn  of  the  chamber,  which  should  be  well  sponged  out;  -he 
vfipes  the  bore  by  rubbing  its  whole  surface,  without  allowing 
the  sponge  to  turn  in  his  hands. 

223.  Loadimj.- — The  instructor  places  -No.  2  on  the  left  of 
the  piece,  where  be  remains  faced  to  the  front  until  the  cqhj- 
mand  Load.  At  this  command,  he  faces  to  his  right,  and  by 
two  oblique  steps,  corresponding  to  those  of  No.  1,  the  first 
with  his  left  foot,  the  second  at  the  command  Two,  with  his 
right,  he  places  himself  near  the  muzzle  of  the  piece  '^t  the 
command  Three,  he  brings  up  bis  left  foot  to  the  side  of  the 
right,  and  faqes.to  the  right,  bringing  his  hands  together  to 
receive  the  ammunition  from  No.  5;  the  cartridge  in  the 
jight,  the  shot  in  the  left  hftnd.  As  soon  as  the  sponge  is 
withdrawn  by  No.  1,  he  faces  to  the  left,  and  puts,  the  ammu- 
nition into  the  muzzle,  taking  care'  that  the  seam 'of>.  the  cart- 
ridge does  not  come  under  the  vent, 'and  then  steps  back,  com- 
mencing with  bis  left  foot,  to  his  position  outside  the  wheel, 
in  the  same  manner  tliat  No.  1  does. 

At  the  command   Ready,  ^e  breaks  off  well  to  the   right 
with  his  right  foot,  bending  the  right  knee,  and  straightening., 
the  left  leg ;   the  body  erect  on  the  haunches,  the  e;yes  fixed 
en  the  muzale. 

The  piece  having  been  fired,  No  2  raises  on  his  left  leg,  re- 
mains facing  the  piece  until  he  hears  tlie  command  Load,  or 


MANUAL    OP   THE   PIECE.  61 

the  firing  of  the  }2;urt ;  then  steps  in,  and^  perfbrms  his  duty 
as  before.  At  the  command  Cease  Fi-ring,  he  resumes  his 
position  outside  the  wheel,  and  faces  to  the  front. 

With  the  hoiuifzer,  No.  2  puts  in  the. charge  so  that  the 
fuze  .may  rest  against  the  rammer  head,  and  No.  1  sets  it 
home  very  carefully. 

224.  ScrviiKj  the  vent. — iMie  instructor  places  No.  o  on  the 
right  of  the  piece,  on  a  line  with  the  knob  of  the  cascable, 
and  covering  No.  1;  he  holds  the  priming  wire  in  his  right 
hand,  thumb  through  the  ring,  the  thumbstall  on  the  left 
thumb,  and  the  tube  pouch  fastened  to  his  waist. 

.^t  the  commanti  Load,  he  steps  to  his  left,  wipes  the  vent 
field  (or  surface  around  the  vent)  with  the* thumbstall,  which 
he  then  holds  .pressed  upon  the  vent,  keeping  his  elbows  raised; 
his  fingers  on  the  left  side  of  the  piece,  so  as  to  allow  the 
gunner  to  point  over  his  thumb;  the  fight  hand  on  the  tube 
pouch.  When  the  piece  is  spanged,  and  the  charge  inserted 
by  No.  2,  he  jumps  to  the  end  of  the  trail  handspike,  and, 
seizing  it  with  both-  handtS,  prepares  to  move  it  to  the  right  or 
left,  at  a  signal  from  the  gunner,  who  taps  the  right  of  the 
trail  for  a  movement  to  the  left,  and  the  left  of  it  for  a  move- 
ment to  the  right..  As  soon  as  the  piece  is  pointed,  the  gun- 
ner raises  both  hamis  as  a  signal  to  No.  o,  who  then  resumes  » 
his  post  '  • 

At  the  command  Ready,  he  steps  to  the  piece,  pricks  the 
cartridge,  taking  care  not  to  move  the  charge,  and  co)j;ers  the 
vent  with  his  left  hand  as  soon  as  the  friction  tuhe  is  inserted. 
At  the  command  Fire,  be  steps  to  the  right,  clear  of  the 
right  wheel,  and  at  the  firing 'of  the  gun,  or. at  the  command 
Load,  serves  the  vent  as  before. 

No.  3  must  keep  the  vent  closed  from  the  time  the  sponge 
enters  the  muzzle,  until  the  charge  is  inserted  by  No.  2.- .  ' 

22a.  Firing. — The  instructor  places  No.  4  on  the  left  of 
the  piece,  opposite  No.  o,  and  covering  No.  2;  Ife  is  equipped 
with  a  tube  pouch  and  lanyard. 

A(f  the  command  Load,  No.  4  inserts  the  lanyard  hook  into 
the  ring  of  a  primer,  and  stands  fast. 

At  the  command  JIeady.^  he  steps  in  with  the  right  foot, 
drops  the  tube  in  the  vent,  takes  the  lanyard  in  Ifis  right 
hand,  movos  to  the  rear  so  far  as  to  keep  the  lanyard  slack, 
but  capable  of  being  stretched/ without  altering  his  position, 


62  MANUAL    OF   THE   PIECE. 

which  should  be  outside  the  wheel,  the  left  foot  broken  to.the 
left  and  rear.   : 

As  soon  as  No;  3  is  clear  of  the  wljeel  aftcF  the  command 
Fire  is  given,  No.  4  pulls  'the  .lanyard  briskly  and  firmly, 
passing:  the  hand,  back  up,  in  a  downward  direction*  to  the 
rear,  so  as  to  keep  the  lanyard  liookfrom  flying  back  in  the 
direction  of  the  face.  Should* the  tube  fail  to  explode  the 
charge,  the  gunner  immediately  commands,  dun^ t  advance, 
the  primer  has  failed.  Upon  which  No.  2  steps  inside  the 
wheel,  close  to  the  axletree,  receives  a  priming  wire  over  the 
wheel  from  No,  3,  artd  a  prepared  primer  from  No-  4,  pricks, 
inserts  the  primer,  and  resumes  his  post.  At  the  command 
Cease  Firing,  No   4  secures  his  lanyard. 

In  the  absence  of  No.  4,  No.^o  discharged  his  duties;  after 
pricking  the  cartridge,  he  prepares  and  inserts  a  friction  tube, 
steps  to  his  post,  faces  the  vent,  breaks  to  his  rear  with  his 
left  foot,  and  at  the  command  Fire,  discharges  the  piece. 
He  then  resumes  his  post,  and  tends  the  vent  as  before. 

22G.  .Sew injj  Ammunition. — The  instructor  stations  No. 
5  five  yards  in  the  rear  of  the  left  wheel,  and  covering  it.  No. 
7  in  the  rear  and  near  the  left  limber  \vheel,  and  No.  G  in  rear 
of  the  limber  chest  to  issue  ammunition,  tie  is  provided 
with  a  fuze  gouge,  and  prepares  4;be  shells  or  spherical  case 
shot,  according  to  the  distance  or  time  ordered,  before  deliver- 
ing them  ta  No.  5. 

Toj^ut  the  i'^w.^e— Place  the  projectile  between  the  knees, 
fuze  uppermost,  and  .support  it  with  the  left  hand.  Holding 
the  fuze-gouge  in  thr3  right  hand,  place  the  left  corner  of  its 
edge  close  to,  and  on  the  righl  of  the  graduated-  mark  indi- 
cating the  time  desired  ;  then  cut  away  gradually  until  the 
composition  is  exposed  for  a  length' about  equal  to  the  width 
of  the  gouge.  Care  must  betaken  ndl  to  cut  the  fuzes  more 
rapidly, than  the  demand  for  shells  or  case  shot  requires 

At  the  command  Load,  No.  5  runs  to  the  ammunition 
chest,  receives  from  No.  7  or  No.  G  a  single  round,  the  shot 
in  the  right  hand,  the  cartridge  in  his  left;  takes  it  to  the 
piece  and  delivers  it  to  No.  2  ;  returns  immediately  for  another 
round,  and  then  halts  at  his  posj  until  the  piece  is  fired.  In 
•firing  shell  or  spherical  ease,  he  exhibits  the  fuze  to  the' gunner 
before  delivering  it  to  No.  2.  • 

Ammunition  pouches  are  worn  by  Nos.  5  and  7,  hung  from 


MANUAL   OF   TUE   PIECE.  63 

the  left  shoulder  to  the  right  side ;  the  round  is  so  placed  in 
the  pouch  that  the  cartridge  will  be  to  the  front.  When  it  is 
brought  up,  No.  5  holds  open  the  pouch,  and  No.  2  takes  out 
the  round  with  both  hands.  In  rapid  firin<];  with  round  shot 
and  canister,  Nos.  5  and  7  may  alternate  in  delivering  the 
charges.  At  the  command  Cease  FtRiNG,  No  5  carries  the 
round  back*ta-No.  6.  No.  G  should  keep  the  lid  of  the  am- 
munition chest  closed  as  much  as  possible.  At  the  command 
Cease  Firing,  he  carefully  replaces  the  ammunition  in  the 
chest,  and  secures  the  lid. 

227.  Loadin(j  hi/  detail. — For  the  instruction  of  the  'can- 
noneer.^ united  for  the  service  of  the  gun,  the  exercise  is  first 
conducted  by  detail,  the  instructor  givinpj  all  the  commands. 
His  commands  are  :  Load  hi/  detail — Load  j  two^  three,  four-: 
Sponge;  two,(hrcey/our :  Ram;  ttcoythree:  Ready;  Fire; 
Cease  Firing. 

When  the  men  are  sufficiently  instructed  to  go  through  the 
manual-  without  detail,  the  commands  of  the  instructor  for 
that  purpose  are:  Load;  Commence  Firing;  Cease 
Firing;  or  simply.  Commence  Firing,  and  Cease  Firing. 
After  the  command  Commence  Firing,  the  action  is  con- 
tinued as  laid  down  for  loading  without  detail^  until  the  com- 
mand Cease  Firing  is  given,  which  is  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  piece  and  the  gunner. 

MOVING  THE  PIECE  BY  HAND.     PIECE  UNLIMBERED. 

228.  To  the  front.— Tho  cannoneers  being  at  their  posts, 
the  instructor  com man'ds  : 

1.  Bi/  hand  to  the  front.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  ^he  gunner  seizes  the  end  of  the 
handspike,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  the  spokes  of  the  wheelg. 
No.  1  with  his  left  hand  ;  Nos  2-,  3  and  4,  with  both  hands ; 
No.  1  holds  the  sponge  with  his  righl  hand,  the  staff  resting 
upon. his  right  .--houlder,  sponge  head  down.  At  the  second 
command  they  move  the  piece  forwnrd,"  the  gunner  raising  the 
trail  until  the  command  Halt  is  given,  when  all  resume  their 
posts. 

220.    To  the  rear. — The  instructor  comffiahd.s  : 

1.  Bi/  hand  to  the  rear.     2.  MARCH.     3.   Halt. 


64     .  MANUAL   OF   THE    PIECE. 

At  the  first  command,  the  gunner,  facinp^  to  the  rear,  seizes 
the  handspike  with  his  right  hand;  Xos.  1,  2,  o  and  4,  seize 
the  wheels  as  before,  except  that  No.  1,  holding  the  sponge  in 
his'left  hand,  uses  his  right  hand  at  the'  wheel.  At  the  com- 
mand March,  they  move  the  piece  to  the-  rear,  the  gunner 
raising  the  trail,  until  the  command  Halt  is  given,  when  all 
resume  their  posts. 

CHANGING  P0ST3. 

230.  In  ordei:  to  instruct  the  men  in  all  the  duties  at  the 
piece,  the  instructor  causes  them  to  change  pests. 
For  this  purpose  he  commands  : 

1.    Change  posts.   .2.  March. 

At  the  command  Change,  posts,  the  "men  on  the  right  of  the 
piece  face  to  the  rear;  those  who  have  equipments  lay  .them 
down ;  No.  1  resting  the  sponge  head  on  the  knave  of  the 
wheel.  At  the  command  MArcei,  each  man  takes  the  place 
and  equipments  of  the  man  in  his  front.  • 

No    1  takes. the  place  of  No.  o. 


No. 

3 

No. 

8 

No. 

6 

No. 

7 

No. 

5 

No. 

4 

No. 

9 

No. 

8. 

No. 

G. 

No. 

7. 

No. 

5. 

No 

4. 

^ 

No. 

2. 

N",. 

1 

The  gunner  changes  with  one  of  the  numbers,,  by  special 
direction  of  the  instructor. 

231.  J'J(iuipments. — The  gunner,  who  is  responsible  for  the 
equipments,  either  distributes  tii^m  from  the  limber  chest,  or 
they  may  be  huag  on  the  neck  of  the  cascable,  and  distribi^ted 
by  him  to  the  proper  numbers,  at  the  command  Take  ]<]quip- 
MENTS,  from  the  instructor.  .  He  receives  them  again  at  the 
command  Replace  Equi1>ments,  making  such  disposition  of 
them  as  may  be  dfrected. 

LIMBERING. 

232,  To  the  front. — The  instructor  commands  : 

Ltmper  to  the  phont. 


MANUAL   OF   THE   PIECE..  05 

At  this  command,  No.  1  steps  up  between  the  muzzle  and 
the  wheel;  by  the  oblique  steps  indicated  for  loading;  turns 
the  staff,' seizing  it  with  the  left  hand,  at  the  samie  time  shift- 
ing his  right,  the  back  of  the  right  up,  that  of  the  left  down, 
and  passes  the  spone;o  on  its  hook;  rammer  head  tp  the  rear, 
to  No.  o,  who  receives  the  head,  ♦secures  it.  against  the  stop, 
and  keys  it  up.  The  piece  is  then  brought  about  by  the  can- 
noneers, and  the  limber,  inclining  to  the  right,  passes  to  its 
place  in  front  of  itj  being  drawn,  when  the  horses  are  not 
attached,  by  Nos.  6  and  7,  who  take  liold  of  the  end  of  the 
pole  for  the  purpose. 

To  bring  the  piece  about,  the  gunner  and,No.  5  pass  te  the 
riglt  of  the  handspike,  and,  fadng  toward  the  left,  seize  it, 
the  gunner  near  the  end,  and  No.  5  at  the  middle,  and  on  his 
right,  raise  the  trail  and  carry  it  round  to  the  teft;  Nos.  1  and 

2  bear  down  upon  the  muzzle,  and  Nos.  3  and  4,  each  using 
both  hands,  bring  the  wheels  around  ;  No.  3  turning  the  right 
wheel  to  the  rear,  arid  Na.  4  the  .  left  wheel  to  the  front. 
When  the  piece  is  brought  about,  the  trail  is  lowered  ;  Nos. 

3  and  4  step  within  the  wheels  to  avoid  the  limber;  Nos.  1 
and  2  remain  at  the  muzale,  and  the  gunmer  and  No.  5  step 
up  between  Nos.  3  and  4  and  the  trail,  the  gunner  first  t-aking 
out  the  handspike,  and  passing  it  to  No.  4,  by  whom  it  is 
put  up.  . 

As  soon  as  the  limber  is  in  front  of  the  piece,  the  gunner 
commands,  Halt,  Limber  up;  upon  which  the  limber4ialts, 
the  gunner  and  No.  5  raise  the  trail  by  means  of  the  handles, 
and,  assisted  by  Nos.  3  and  4  at  fehe  wheels, 'and  Nos.  1  and 
2  at  the  muzzle,  run  the  piece  forward,  and  place  the  lunette 
upon  the  pintle;  the  gunner  then  puts  in  the  key,  and  all 
take  their  posts;  .when  necessary,  Nos.  6  and  7  assist  at  the 
trail  in  bringing  the  piece  about, jind- in  limbering  up. 

233.    To  the  right  (of  left). — The  instructor  commands  : 

Limber  to  the  Right  (or -Left). 

The  trail,  is  turtied  to  the  right  (or  Iqft),  and  the  piece  lim- 
bered up  as  before^  .the  lifnber  inclining  to  the  righ*.(or  left), 
and  taking  its  place  by  a  right  for  left)  wheel. 

534.    To  the  rear. — The  instructor  commands: 

Libber  to  the  Rear. 


m 


MANUAL   OP   THE    PIECE. 


The  limber  inclines  to  the  right,  and  takes  its  place  by 
wheeling  about  to  the  left;  the  piece  is  then  limbered  up  as 
before.- 

•Posts  of  the  Cannonep:rs.     Piece  Limbered. 

235.  Nos  1  and  2  opposite  the  muzzle;  Nos.  Sand  4  oppo- 
site the  knob  of  the  cascable ;  the  gunner  and  No.  5  opposite 
the  rear,  and  Nos.  6  and  7  opposite  the  front  parts  of  the  lim- 
ber wheels^  No.  8  is  on  the  left  and  opposite  the  limber  chest 
of  the  caissoii.  All  face  to  the  fron^,  which  is  now  in  the 
direction  of  the  pole  instead  of  the  muzzle,  -and  cover  each 
other -in  lines  on*e  yard  fron^  the  wheels;  the  even  numbers 
on  the  right;,  the  oid  on  the  left.  The  chief  of  the  piece  is 
on  the  left,  and,  if  hot  mounted,  opposite  the  end  of  the  pole; 
if  mounted,  he  is  near  the  leading  driver,  and  on  his  left.. 

TO  FORM  THE  DETACHMENT. 

236.  2h  the  front. — The  instructor  commands  :. 

Detachment — Front, 

The  i2:unner-  commands,  Cannoneers,  forward,  March; 
the  oven  numbers  move  directly  to  the  front;  the  odd  num- 
bers closing  to  the>  right  upon  them  when  clea^r  of  the  piece. 
The  gunner  files  them  to  the  left,  halts  the  detachment  in 
front  of  the  piece,  and  faces  them  to  the  front.  No.  8  moves 
directly  forward,  and  takes  his  place  in  the  detachment. 

2j7.    To  the  rear. — The  instructor  commands  : 

.    Detachment — Rear. 

The  gu-nners  command.  Cannoneers,  rear  Face,  March. 
At  the  command  Malich,  tHe  odd  numbers  move  directly  to 
the  rear,  the  even  numbers  closing  to  the  right  upon  them 
after  passing  the  pi^ce,  the  detaciiment  is  filed  to  the  left  at 
the  proper  distance,  halted  by  the  gunner  opposite  the  piece 
and  faced  to  the  frpnt,  No.  8  taking  his  proper  place  in  the 
detachment.  *  ;  " 

In  forming  the  detachments  in  line,  they  are  always,  after 
halting,  dressed  to  the  right  by  the  gunne^^-. 


MANUAL   OF   TUB   PIECE.  67 

POSTS  OF  THE  DETACHMENTS  AT  THEIR  pIeCES.  <  , 
» 

238.  In  front. — The  detachment  is  in  line  facing  to  the 
front,  two  yards  from  -the  end  of  the  pole  or  the' leading 
horses. 

In:rear. — The  centre  of  the  detachment  in  two  yards,  be- 
hind the  muzzle,  and  facing  it.. 

On  the  riijht  or  left. — The  detrichment  is  in  line  opposite 
the  axletree  of  the  limber,  and  three  yards  from  it.  '  In  horse 
artUlcrjj^  it  is  in  line  with,  and  three  yards  from,  the  leading 
horses.     In  all  cases  it  faces  to  the  front. 

CHANGE   OF   POSTS  OF    DETACHMENTS  AT  THEIIl   PIECES 

239. — From  front  to  rear. — :The  detachments  being  in- line^ 
in  front  of  their  pieces,  to  post  them  in  rear,  the  instructor 
commands :'         .  -v 

Detachments — Rear. 

The  gunner  commands.  Cannoneers ^reg,r  Face,  .March. 
At  the  command  March,  Nos.  1,  2,  o  and  4  oblique  suffi- 
ciently to  the  left,  and  Nos.  5,  6,  7  and  8  to  the  right,  move 
along  the  sides  of  their  piece ;  re-unite  as  soon  as  they  have 
passed  it,  and  are  halted  at  the  proper  distance,  faced  to  the 
I'ront,  and  aligned  to  the  right  by  the  gunner. 

From  rear  to  front. — The  instructor  commands  : 

Detachme^nts — Front.   . 

The  ganner  repeats  the  Command,  and  adds  IMarcii.  At 
this  command,  the  cannoneers  oblique;  Nos  1,  2  3  and  4  to 
the  right,  Nos.  5,  G,  7  and  8  to  the  left;  pass  their  piece, 
unite  in  front,  and  are  halted  and  aligned  to  the  right  by. the 
gunner. 

From  rear  to  right  (or  hfl).—'i\\Q  instructor  commands : 

/>e^acA7nen/s— Right  (or  Lef.t). 

.The  gunner  commands,  Right  (or  Jeft^  oblique,  March,  and 
afterward  FoRWARD,-and  Halt,  in  tinie  to  bring  the  detach- 
ment to  its  post  on  the  right  or  left.  Hq  then  aligns  it  to  the 
right. 

240.  In  horse  artillery^  to  change  from  front  to  rear,  the 


68  '  MANUAL    OF   THE   PIECE. 

gunners  co*mmand,  Left  re  verse,  March;  Forward;  L'e/C 
reverse,  March  ;  Halt. 

From  rear  to  front. — The  gunners  cpinmand  Ru/ht  oblique j 
March;  Forward.  Left  oblique,  March;  Forward; 
Halt. 

From  rear  to  right  {or  left). — The  gunners  command  Right 
(or  If  ft)  oblique,  March;  Forward; 'Halt. 

From  rjght  (or  left)  to  rear. — The  gunners  command  Right 
(or  left)  reverse,  March;  Forward;  /^yV;/tr(or  left)  reverse, 
MaiIch;  Halt. 

If  .the  piece  is  moving  when  the  last  cliange  of  post  is 
ordered,  the  gunner  halts,  or  slackens  the  pace  until  it  passes, 
and  then  commands,  Left  (or  right),  oblique,  March-;.  For- 
ay ard. 

The  commands  of  the  instructor  in  all  these  cases  are  the 
same  as  in  mounted  artillery.  The  movements  are  executed 
in  the  same  manner  when  the  detachments  are  dismounted. 

TO  rOST  THE  CANNONEERS  AT  THE  TIECE'  LIMBERED. 

241.  The  detachment  being  formed  in  line  in  front  or  rear^ 
on  the  right  or  left,  the  instructor  commands : 

Cannoneers,  to  your  posts. 

From  the  front. — The  gunner  faces,  the  detachment  to  the 
right  and  commands,  To,  youi*  pasts,  ^lAViQii.  At  this  com- 
mand, the -cannoneers,  Nos.  1  and  2,  turning  to  the  right, 
and  opening  out,  tile  to  their  posts;  halt  at  their  proper  places, 
and  face  to  the  front. 

Frorri  tho-r ear,  right  or  left. — At  the  command  Cannon- 
eers to  your  posts,  tLe  gunner,  in  each  case,  faces  the  de- 
tachment to  the  left,  and  marches  the  cannoneers  by  that 
flank  to  their  posts. 

MOVING  THE  PIECE  BY  HAND.     PIECE  LIMBERED. 

.242.    To  the  front. — The  instructor  commands  : 
1.  Forward.     2.  MaRch.     &•.  Halt. 

•At  the  first -icommand,  Nos.  6  and  7  seize  the  end  of  the 
pole  with  both  hands^  the. gunner  and  No.  5,  facing  toward 


MANUAL   OP   TUB   PIECE.  ^ 

the  pole,  seize  the  splioter-bar  with  one  hand,  and  the  pole 
with  the  other.'  Nos.  3  and  4'  seize  the  spokes  of  the  hind 
wheels  with  both  hands,  and  Nos.  1  and  2  apply  both  hands 
at  the  head  of  the  carriage.  At  the  second  command,  all 
acting  together,  urge  the  pie(^o  forward  until  the  command 
Halt  is  g;iven,  when  all  resume  their  posts. 

243.  To  the  irear. — The  instructor  commands  : 

1..  Backward.     2.  MARCH.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  all  face  to  the  rear;  Nos.  6  and  7 
seize  the  end  of  the  pole  with  both  hands ;  No.  5  and  the 
gunner  seize  the  spokes  of  the  limber,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and 
4,  those  of  the  hind  wheels.  At  the  command  March,  all 
moving  together,  move  the  piece  to  the  rear^  Nos.  6  and  7 
keepin^it  straight  by  the  use  of  .the  pole.  At  the  command 
Halt,  all  resume  their  posts. 

Unlimbering  and  coming  into  action. 

244.  To  the  front. — The  instructor  commands: 

Action — Front. 

At  this  command,  the  gunner  takes  out  the  key,  and  as- 
sisted by  No.  5,  raises  the  trail  from  the  pintle,  and  then  com- 
mands DrivpTon,  upon  which  Nos.  6  and  7  reverse  the  lim- 
ber, and  proceed  with  it  to  the  rear.  Again  reverse  to  the 
left,  and  halt  so  that -the  limber  shall  covt^r  the  piece,  with 
the  end  of  the  pole  six  yards  from  the  end  of  the  trail  hand- 
spike. At  the  same  time  that  the  limber  moves  off,  the  piece 
is  brought  about  in  all  respects  as  in  limbering  to  the  front, 
except  that  the  gunner  and  No.  5,  without  lowering  the  trail, 
carry^  it  about,  each  by  means  of  the  handle  on  his  own  side. 
Nos.  6  and  7,  when  necessary,  assist  at  the  trail,  after  placing 
the  limber  in  position. 

.As  soon  as  the  piece  is  brought  about,  and  the  trail  lowered, 
No.  4  takes  out  the  handspike  and  .passes  it  to  the  gunner, 
who  fixes  it  in  the  trtiil.  No.  1  takes  out  the  sponge,  No.  3 
unkeying  it,  and  No.  4  prepares"  his  lanyard.  All  then  take 
their  posts  as  required  when  the  piece  is  nnh'mhered. 

245.  To  the  riijht  (or  A/?). — The  instructor,  commands  : 

Action,  Right  (or  Left). 


70  MANUAL    OF   THE    PIECE. 

m' 
The  piece  is  unlinibered  in  the  same  manner  as  for  action, 

front;  and  placed  in  the  required  direction;  the  liuiber  wheels 

to  the  left  (or  right),  and  takes  its  pfece  in  rear,  by  reversing 

to  the  left  (or  right). 

24G.    2h  tlic  rear. — The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  rear.     2.  In  Battery. 

At  the  command  In  Battery,  the  piece  is  unlimbered  as 
before;  the  trail  immediately  lowered,  and  the  gun  prepared 
for  action  ;  the  limber  moves  directly  forward  at  the  command 
Drivk  on,  from  the  gunDen  and  takes  its  place  by  coming  to 
the  left  about. 

MOVEMENTS  WITH  THE  PROLONGE. 

•    247.  The  piece  being  in  battery,  to  fix  the  prolonge  to  fire 
retiring,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Fix  prolonge  to  fire  retiring. 

At  this  command,  the  limber  inclines  to  the  right,  wheels 
to  the  left  about,  and  halts  four  yards  frolii  the  trail.  No.  5 
uncoils  the  prolonge  and  passes  the  toggle  to  the  gunner,  who 
fixes  it  in  the  trail  by  passing  it  upward  through  the  lunette, 
whilst  he  attaches  the  other  end  to  the  limber.,  by  passing  the 
ring  over  the  pintle  and  keying  it. 

At  the  command  Retire,  the  cannoneers  face  about  and 
all  march  on  the  left  of  the  piece,  except  Nos.  1  and  3,  They 
keep  the  implements  in  their  hands,  and,  at  the  command 
Halt,  face  about,  resume  their  posts,  and  go  on  with  the 
firing. 

Should  the  piece  be  loaded  at  the  command  Retire,  No.  q- 
puts  in  the  priming  wire.  At  the  command  Halt,  he  takes 
it  out  again,  andl  No.  1  rams  home.  If  the  command  Load 
be  given  when  the  piece  is  in  motion,  No.  5  puts  in  the 
charge,  and  No.  2  serves  vent,  ^'eceiving  from  No.  o  the  neces- 
sary implements  for  that  purpose. 

The  piece  being  in  action,,  to  fix  the  prolonge  to  fire  ad- 
vancing, the  instructor  commands  : 

Fix  prolonge  to  fire  advancing. 
At  this  command,  the  limber  passes  its  piece  on  the  right 


MANUAL    OF   THE    PIECE.  71 

and  halts  when  in  front  of  it,  Nos.  1  and  3  stepping  within 
the  wheels  to  avoid  the  limber.  No.  5  uncoils  tha  prolonge, 
carries  it  to  the  front,  gives  the  togj^fe  to  No.  2,  who  puts  it 
in  the  lunette  of  the  axle-strap,  whilst  he  places  the  riog  over 
the  pintle  and  keys  it. 

In  advancing,  the  men  retain  their  implements  and  march 
at  their  posts.  At  the  command  Halt,  No.  2  takes  out  the 
toggle  and  commands  Drive  on,  upon  which  the  limber  takes 
its  place  in  rear,  and  the^ firing  is  renewed. 

When  the  piece  is  limbered,  to  fix  the  prolong^e  to  fire  re- 
tiring or  advancing,  the  same  commands  are  given.  The  piece 
is  unlimbercd,  and  the  prolonge  attached  as  before. 

To  fix  the  prolonge  for  passing  a  ditch,  or  for  any  other  pur- 
pose, the  command  is.  Fix  prolonge.  The  prolonge  is  then 
fixed  to  the  trail  as  before. 

In  moving  with  the  prolonge,  the  gunner  attends  the  hand- 
spike, and  in  chfinges  of  direction,  is  careful  to  circulate  the 
trail  round  in  proper  time  to  prevent  the  prolonge  being  cut 
by  the  wheels.  No.  7  clears  the  prolonge  from  the  limber 
wheels,  and  Nos.  1  and  2  from  the  gun  wheels.  In  wheeling 
about,  -the  limber  first  backs  a  little  and  then  describes  a  small 
circle.  '  In  passing  a  ditch  the  gunner  takes  out  the  hand- 
spike. .  • 

In  fixing  the  prolonge  for  any  purpose,  the  caisson  wheels 
or  reverses,  if  necessary,  so  that  the  horses  of  the  limber  and 
caisson  may  face  in  the  same  direction. 

To  detach  the  prolonge  from  the  limber  and  coil  it  up,  the 
instructor  commands :  ^i 

Coil  prolonge. 

At  this  command,  the  gunner  takes  out  the  toggle^  and  No. 
5  takes  oft"  the  ring  and  coils  the  prolonge,  first  passing,  the 
ring  over  the  upper  prolonge  hook. 

To  coil  the' prolonge  and  limber  the  piece,  the  instructor 
commands,  CoiL  pRoiiONGE — limuer  to  the  rear.  The 
prolonge  is  defached  and  coiled  as  before,  the  piece  is  run  to- 
ward the  limber,  which  reins  back  on  receiving  the  command 
Rein  back  from  the  gunner,  and  is  limbered  "up.  To  limber 
to  the  front,  right  or  loft,  the  instructor  commands,  Coil  pro- 
longe— limber  to  the  front,  right  or  left;  which  i.s 
executed  as  already  describc<i,  the  cunnercommaoding  Drive 
ON,  as  eoo'u  as  tUe  prolonge  is  detacheii. 


72  MANUAL   OF   THE   PIECE. 

SERVICE  OF  THE  GUN  WITH  DIMINISHED  NUMBERS. 

248.  Disabled  men  are; re- placed  as  soon  as  possible  by  the 
hrghest  numbefrs,  or,  if  men  are  selected  to  re-phice  then),  the 
highest  numbers  will  be  reduced  to  fill  the  vacancies  thus  cre- 
ated. During  action,- Nos.  1  and  2  may  occasionally  change 
places  and  numbers;  the  duties  of  No.  1  are  very  fatiguing. 

Service  of  the  piece  hy  two  men. — The  gunner  commands, 
points,  serves  the  vent,  and  fires;  No.,]  sponges,  loads,  and 
serves  ammunition. 

Three  inen. — The  gunner  commands,  points,  serves  the 
vent,  and  fires;  No.  1  sponges;  No.  2  loads  and -serves  am- 
munition. 

Four  men. — -The  gunner  commands  and  points;  No.  1 
sponges;  No  2  loads  and  serves  ammunition;  No.  3  serves 
the  vent  and  fires. 

Five  men. — The  gunner  commands  and-  points;  No.  1 
sponges;  No.  2  loads;  No.  3  serves  the  vent  and  fires;  No.  4 
serves  ammunition. 

•  Six  men. — The  gunner  commands  and  points;  No.  1 
sponges ;  No.  2  loads ;  No.  3  serves  the  vent  and  fires ;  Nos. 
4  and  5  serve  ammunition. 

Seven  men. — The  gunner  commands  and  points ;  No.  1 
sponges ;  No.  2  loads ;  No.  3  serves  the  vent,  and  attends  to 
the  trail;  No  4  fires;  No.  6  is  at  the  limber,  and  serves  am- 
munition to  No.  5,  and  occasionally  changes  with  him. 

Fii/Ju  men. — No.  7  assists  No.  6;  the  other  numbers  as 
before.  %. 


SUPPLY  OF   AMMUNITION  WHEN  IN  ACTION, 

249  When  it  can  be  done  without  inconvenience,  ammu- 
nition will  be  served  direct  from  the  tear  chest  of  the  caisson, 
No.  8  performing  the  duties  prescribed  for  No.'  6  at  the  lim- 
ber chest.  At  convenient  moments,  the  ammunition  served 
out  by  No.  6  will  be  replaced  from  the  rear  caisson  chest.  If 
the  ammunition  chest  on  the  limber  of  the  piece  is  exhausted, 
the  limber  is  replaced  by  that  of  the  caisson,  and  the  empty 
chest  exchanged  for  the  centre  one  of  the  caisson. 

As  a  rule,  the  limber  chests,  and  especially  that  of  the 
piece,  will  be  kept  full  at  the  expense  of  the  others,  so  that 


MANUAL   OF   THE   PIECE.  7S 

in  case  of  a  sudden  movement  on  the  field,  there  shall  always 
be  a  sufiicient  supply  of  ammunition  at  hand. 

CHANGING  AMMUNITION  CHESTS. 

250.  In  service,  when^he  limber  chest  of  the  piece  is  emp* 
tied,  the  piece  and  caisson  exchange  limbers;  No.  S,  assisted 
by  No.  7,  unlimbers  and  limbers  up  the  caisson,  aud  the  mid- 
dle chest  is  exchanged  with  the  enjpty  one  on  the  limber  as* 
soon  as  practicable.  To  change  the  ammunition  chests,  the 
instructor  commands  :• 

1.  Frejpare  to  change  the  ammunition  chest. 
2.  Change  the  chest. 

At  the  first  command,  Nos.  5  and  6  unkey  the  empty  chest, 
each  on  his  own  side,  and,  takifig  hold  of  the  handles,  place 
it  upon  the  ground,  on  the  left  of  the  caisson.  Nos.  7  and  8 
unkey  the  middle  chest  at  the  same  time. 

At  the  second  command,  Nos  5,  6,  7  and  8,  seizing  the 
middle  cUest  by  the"  handles,  lift  it  on  the  foot-board,  and,  turn- 
ing it  end  for  end  there,  shift  the  chest  along  the  stock  to  the. 
limber,  and  put  it  in  place;  Nos.  5  and  G  resume  their  posts 
immediately;  Nos.  7  and  8  key  the  chest,  replace  the  empty 
chest;  key  it,  and  resume  their  posts. 

CHANGING  WHEELS. 

251.  The  piece  being  unlimbered,  to  change  the  right 
wheel,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Prepare  to  change  the  right  wheel. 
2.  Change  the  wheel. 

At  the  first  command,  Nos.  5,  6  and  7  dismount  the  spare 
wheel;  No.  5  brings  it  near,  and  parallel  to  the  disabled  one, 
leaving  room  for  the  latter  to  be  taken  off.  The  gunner 
passes  one  end  of  his  handspike  to  No.  1,  placing  it  under 
the  axletree  close  to  the  wheel.  The  gunner  and  No.  1, 
placing  themselves  between  the  handspike  and  the  piece,  and 
facing  the  wheel,  take  hold  of  the  handspike  near  the  axle; 
Nos.  4  and  6  take  hold  of  the  cuds  of  the  handspike;  No.  6 
assisting  the  gunnor. 
4 


74  MANUAi;^   OP   THE  VIEGJl, 

At  the  second  command,  the  carriage  is  raised ;  Nos.  2  an3 
8  take  off  the  disabled  wheel;  No.  2  runs  it  to  the  rear,  and 
Nos.  3  and  5  put  on  the  spare  wheel,  No.  3  taking  hold  of  it 
in  th«  rear.  Nos.  3  and  4  attend  to  the  linchpins  and  wash- 
ers on  their  respective  sides. - 

To  change  the'left  wheel.— Tha  gunner  and  No.. 2,  assisted 
by  No.  G  and  No.  o  respectively,  man  tha  handspike;  Nos.  1 
-and  4  take  off  the  wheel ;  Nos.  5,  G  and  7  dismount  the  spare 
wheel;  No.  5  brings  it  up,  and  Nos.  4  and  5  put  it  on ;  No. 
1  runs  the  disabled  wheel  to  the  rear.  , 

In  taking  off  a  limber  wheel,  the  horses  are  taken  out; 
No.  6  removes  the  linchpin  and  washer;  Nos.  3,  4^  7  and  8 
raise  the  limber;  Nos.  5  and  G  take  off  the  wheel.  ' 

DISMOUNTING  PIECES. 

252.  The  piece  being  unlimbered,  the  instructor  commands : 
1.  Prepare  to  dismount  the  piece. 

2.    DlSMj^UNT    THE   PIECE. 

'  At  the  first  command,  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  remove  the  im- 
plements and  pkice  them  on  the  ground,  outside  of  their  re- 
spective wheels,  the  bucket  on  the  right,  and  the  worm  on 
the  left.  Nos.  1  and  2  then  press  upon  the  muzzle,  and  Nos. 
3  and  4,  after  removing  the  cap  squares,  station  themselves 
at  the  end  of  the  cheeks,  and,  with  one  hand  on  the  wheel 
and  the  other  on  the  knob  of  the  cascablc,  prepare  to  raise 
the  breech.  The  gunner,  first  taking  out  the  handspike,  if  in 
the  trail,  and  passing  it  to  No.  4,  raises  the  elevating  screw 
to  its  greatest  height,  and  then  seizes  the  left  trail  handle; 
No.  5  seizes  the  right,  and  Nos.  6  and  7,  after  scotching  the 
wheels,  go  to  the  trail  to  assist  in  raising  it. 

At  the  second  command,  Nos.  I  and  2  bear  down  upon  the 
muzzle ;  the  gunner  and  Nos.  5,  6  and  7  raise  the  trail  until  the 
muzzle  rests  upon  the  ground  ;  Nos.  3  and  4  push  against  the 
cascable  to  raise  the  breech,  and,  when  the  piece  is  vertical, 
run  round  to  assist  No^.  1  and  2  to  keep  it  in  that  position. 
The  trail  is  then  lowered,  and  the  carriage  run  back,  and  the 
piece  placed  on  the  j^ound,  vent  upwards.  The  implements 
are  then  replaced,  Nos.  3  and  4  securing  the  cap  squares. 


MANUAL    OF   THE   PIECE*  75 

MOUNTING  PIECES. 

253.  The  -piece  being  on  the  ground,  vent  upwards,  the 
instructor  commands : 

1.  Prepare  to  mount  the  piece. 
2.  Mount  the  piece* 

At  the  first  command,  the  implements  are  removed  as'  ia 
dismounting,  except  that  the  handspikes  are  passed,  by  Nos. 

3  and  4,  respectively,  to  the  gunner  and   No.  2;  Nos.  3  and 

4  take  off  tl^e  cap  squares ;  No.  2  inserts  his  handspike  in 
the  bore,  and,  assisted  by  No.  1,  raises  the  chase,  so  that  the 
gunner  may  put  his  handspike  under  the  piece  a  little  in  rear 
of  the  trunnions.  This  being  done,  No.  2  withdraws  his 
handspike  from  the  bore,  and  places  it  under  the  knob  of  the 
cascable.  Nos.  1,  3  and  4  assist  at  tlie  handspike  of  No.  2, 
and  Nos.  5,  G  and  7  at  that  pf  the  gunner,  Nos.  1,  2,  6  and 
the  gunner  being  at  the  ends.  .  The  gunner  tBen  commands': 
Heave;  upon  which  the  men  raise  the  piece  upright,  and 
Nos.  1,  2,  o  and  4  steady  it  in  that  position.  The  gunner 
and  No.  5  go  to  the  trail,  and,  assisted  by  Nos.  6  and  7  at  the 
wheels,  run  the  carriage  forward  within  a  foot  of  the  piece. 
Nos.  6  -and  7  then  go  to  the  trail  to  assist  the  gunner  and 
No.  5  in  raising  it. 

At  the  second  command  the  trail  is  raised ;  Nos.  1  and  2 
push  gently  against  the  piece,  and  place  the  trunnions  in  their 
plates.  The  trail  is  then  lowered  to  the  ground,  the  imple- 
ments replaced,  No/s.  3  and  4  securing  the  cap  squares. 

it  niay  sometimes  be  necessary  in  mounting  and  dismount- 
ing long  rifled  guns  for  Nos.  1  and  2  to  make  a  hole  in  the 
ground  under  the  head  of  the  carriage  to  receive  the  muzzle. 

CARRYING  PIECES. 

254.  The  piece  being  on  the  ground,  vent  upwards,  the 
instructor  commands : 

1.  Prepare  to  carry  the  piece. 
2.  Forward.     3.  MARCUr 

At  the  first  command,  Nos.  6  and  7  back  the  limber  over 


76  MANUAL   OF   THE   PIECE. 

tlfe  breech' until  the  pintle  boolc  is  just  above  the  trunnions; 
ISj).  2  inserts  a  handspike  in  the  bore  to  raise  the  piece,  and 
•fiiFos.  1,  3  add  4  stand  near  to  assist  him  ;  trlie  gunner,  assisted 
by  No.  5,  passes  the  pro.longe  round  the  piece,  in  front  and 
rear-of  tlie  trunnions,  the  piece  boinjj  raised  for  that  purpose, 
and'  puts  the  riijg  over  the  pintle  hook.  Nos.  6  and  7  then 
raise  the  pole,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  the  piece,  if  not  already 
raised;  the  gunner  tightens  the  prolonge,  pulling  on  the  free 
end,  which  he  passes  over  th^  pintle  hook,  and  under  the  lim- 
IftP^to  No.  f),  who  i-eceives  it  at  (he  splinter  bar,  and  makes  a 
tura  with  it  around  the  fork.  The  polfe  is  then  lowered,  and 
Nos.  1  antl  2  press  uppB  the  muzzle  to  raise  the  breech.  The 
gunner,  assisted  by  No.  '5,  Jashes  thij  knob  of  the  cascable  to 
the  .splinter  bar.     The  piece  when  slung  should  be  horizontal. 

At  the  second  command,  the  men  prepare  to  move  forward 
the  limber. 

At  the  word  March,  they  move  the  limber  to  the  front. 

When  the  herses  are  hitched  in,  they  should  be  taken  oat 
to  enable  the  men  to  sling  the  piece. 

The  disabled  carriage  is  limbered  up  to  the  spare  pintle 
hook  in  the  rear  of  the  caisson,  or  it  may  be  taken  apart  and 
lashed-upon  the  caisson.  When  a  limber  is  disabled,  the  trail 
of  its  carriage  or  caisson  is  attached  to  the  rear  of  another 
carriage. 

•  MSMOUNTING  .CARRIAGES. 

255.  The  piece  bein|if  dismounted  and  implements  taken  off, 
as  already  prescribed,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.   Prepare  to  dismount  the  carriage. 
2.  Dismount  the  carriage. 

At  the  first  command,  Nos.  3  and  4  remove  the  linchpins 
and  washersf,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  step  inside  the  wheels 
and  take  hold  of  the  carriage. 

At  the  second  command.  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  lift  the  car- 
riage; Nos^5  and  7  take  off  the  right  wheel,  and  Nos.  6  and 
8  the  left,  Nos.  5  and  6  taking  hold  in"  front,  and  Nos.  7  and 
8  in  rear. 

Idmbem  The  limbers  are  dismouut^sd  in  the  same  manner 


MANUA'L   OF   THE   PIECE.  77 

as  tlie   carriages,  the  different  numbers  taldng  hold   in  the 
same  relative  po;5itions,  and  performing  the  same  duties. 

MOUNTINQ  CARRIAGES.  '       . 

256.  The  method  of  mounting  carriages  and  limbers  corres- 
spoiids  to- that. of  di.-jmouuting  them, 

POSTS- Of  CANNONEERS. 

257.  During  the  manoeuvres,  the  cannoneers  arc  either  at  their 
posts,  as  in  No.  215,  or  they  are  seated  on  the  ammunition 
chest  as  follows  : — The  g-unner  and  Nos.  5  and^  6  on  the  limber 
chest  of  the  piece,  the  gunner  on  theright,  and  No.  5  on  the 
left;  Nos.  1,  '£>  and  7  on' the  liml^er  chest  of  th«  caisson,  No, 
2  on  thb  right,  and  No.  1  on  the  left ;  Nos.  3*,  4  and  8  on  the 
middle  chest  of  the  caisspn,  No.  4  on  the  right,  and  No.  3  on 
the  left. 

'  When  circumstances  require  it,  Nos.  6  and  7  may  be  di- 
rected to  mount  the  rear  chest  of  the  caisson.  They  sit  with 
their  backs  to  the  front.  No.  6  on- the  right. 

In  horse  arAillerr/,  the  cannoneers  are  in  detachments  of  two 
ranks,  and  habitually  in  rear  of  the  pieces.  The  detach- 
ments may  be  ordered  to  the  right  or  left  for  greater  conveni- 
ence in  making  a  rapid  movement,  of  for  coming  into  battery 
to  the  rear  when  the  caissons  are  in  front.  But,  as  their  po- 
sitions on  the  flanks  are  inconvenient  for  manoeuvre,  they 
should  be  ordered  to  the  rear  as  soon  asjthe  special  object  has 
been  accomplished,  Theirproperplaces  in  rear  should  always 
be  kept  open  for  that  purpose. 

.TO  MOUNT  AND  DISMOUNT  THE  CANNONEERS. 

25<S.  To  mount. — The  instructor  halts  the  battery,  if  not 
already  at  a  halt,  and  commands,: 

1.    Cannoneers^  prepare  to  mo^int.     2.   MoUNT. 

At  the  first  com&and,  the  cannoneers  run  to  their  respective 
places,' and  stan^ficing  the  chests  whitflh  they  are.  to  mount. 
The  guunr-r  and  No.  5  ia  rear  of  the  gun  limber;  No'.  6  on 
the  right  of  the  gunner;  Nfns.  1  apd  2  in  rear  of  the  caisson 
limber;  No. -7  on  tjie  left  of  No.  1 ;  Nos.  3  and  4  in  front  of 


78  MANUAL   OF   THE   PIEOE. 

the  middle  cbesfc  of  the  caisson ;  No.  8  on  the  viiiht  of  No.  3. 
The  gunner  and  Nos.  2  and  3  seize  the  handles  \tith  the  right 
hand,  and  step  upon  the  stocks  with  the  left,  foot,. and  Nos.  5, 
1  and  4  seize  the  handles  with  the  left  hand,  and  step  upon 
the  stocks  with  the  right  foot. 

At  the  command  Mount,  the  gunner  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4 
and  5,  spring  into  their  seats.  The  gunner  and  Nos  5,  1  and 
2,  seat  themselves  in  their  places,  with  their  backs  to  the  front, 
and  immediately  face  aboul;,  by  throwing  their  legs  outward 
over  the  handles. 

No  8  then  springs  into  his  seat  in  the  same  manner  as  No. 
3;  Nos.  G  a«d  7  step  in  rear  of  their  chests,  place  their  hands 
upon  them,  stop  upon  the  stocks  ^yith  their  nearest  feet,  spring 
up,  step  over  the  boxes  and  take  their  seats, 'placing,  their 
hands  on  the  shoulders  of  the  men  already  seated  in  order  to 
steady  themselves. 

When  the  command  Oamwnce7's,  JIount,  is  given  by  itself, 
the  men  run  to  their  places  and  spring  into  their  seats  at  once, 
No.  8  taking  his  seat  before  No.  o. 

259.  To  Dismount. — The  instructor  halts  the  caj-riages  as' 
before,  and  commands  :  . 

1.  Cannoneers,  prepare  to  dismount.     2.  Dismount. 

At  the  first  command,  tjie  cannoneers  stand  up  in  their 
places,  except  the  gunner  and  No.  5,  who  face  about.  At 
the  second  command,  the  whole  Jump  off  and  run  to  their 
posts. 

When  the  command  Cannoneers,  Dismount,  is  given  by 
itself,  the  men  jump  from  their  chests  in  the  same  manner. 

260.  The  cannoneers  always  dismount  at  "the.  command 
Action  Front,  Right"  (or  Left.)  They  also  dismount  at 
the  command  In  Battery,  as  soon  as  thu  carriage  on  .which 
they  are  mounted  halts. 

In  ho7'se  artillery,  the  gunner  dismoun.ts  the  cannoneers 
when  the  command  Action  Front,  Higiit  or  Left,  or  In 
Battery,  is  given,  and  all  move^ to  .their  posts  in  double- 
quick  time,  and  u,nlimber  as  rapidly  as  possible. 

The  object  of  mounting  the  cannoneers  on  the  ammunition^ 
chests,'  is  generally  to  enable  the  battery  to  make  rapid 
movements. 

Care  should  be  taken  when  the  ground  is  unfavorable,  or  the 


THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED.  79 

movements, are  likely  to  be  proloDgcd,  not  to  mount  them  so 
often  as  to  be  injurious  to  the  horses.  '-After  they  are  well 
instructed  in  mounting  and  dismounting,  at  a  halt,  the  can- 
noneers may  be  ordered  to  mount  or  dismount  whilst  the 
carriarres  are  in  march  at-a  walk. 

261.  When  a  caisson  is  absent,  or  temporarily  disabled,  and 
a  quick  movement  is  necessary,  .Nos.  1,  2  and  3  will  mount 
the  off  horses  of  the  piece.  No.  2  the  lead.  No.  1  the  middle, 
and  No.  3  the, wheel  horse;  Nos.  1  and  3  passing  by  the 
rear  of  the  gun.  This  arrangement  may  also  be  resorted  to 
in  case  of  a  sudden  alarm,  the  drivers  of  the  caissons  assist- 
ing the  drivers  of  the  pieces  by  harnessing  their  off  horses 
and  hitching  them  in.  The  cannoneers  then  mount  as  de- 
scribed, and  the  pieces  move  off.  The  remainiag  cannoneers 
assist  the  drivers  of  the  caissons  to  harness  and  hitch  in  their 
horses,  and  then  mount  the  ehcsts  of  the  caissons,  which  pro^ 
ce^d  at  once  to  join  their  pieces. 

THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED. 

262.  This  part  should  be  taught  immediately  after  the  man- 
ual of  the  piece,  and  all  the  cannoneers  of  mounted  batteries, 
as  well  as  of  horse  artillerij,  should  receive  this  instruction, 
as  it  is  an  indispensable  preparation  for  the  duties  of  a  non- 
commissioned officer  as  well  as  those  of  a  driver. 

Tlje  men  arc  placed  in  one  rank,  three  yards  apart.  The 
horses  are  taken  in  the  stables  or  at  the  picket  rope. 

TO  BRIDLE  THE  HORSE. 

2C3.  The  instructor  commands  : 

Bridle.  * 

The  reins  are-taken  in  the  right  hanel,  the  crown  piece  in 
the  left ;  the  hor.^e  is  approached  on  the  near  (or  left)  side ; 
the  reins  slipped  over  his  head;  then  take  the  crosvn  piece 
in  the  right  hand,  and  the  bit  in  the  left;  bring  the  bridle 
head  in  front  of  and  sli€:litly  below  its  proper  position  ;  insert 
the  left  thumb  in  tho  side  of  the  mouth  ;  press  open  the  jaw  ; 
insert  the  bit  by  raising  the  crown  piece ;  pass  the  left  hand 
under  the  brow  bund- and  put  the  ears  under  the  crown  piece, 


so  THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED. 

comraoncing  with  the  riglit;  arrnnge'tho  forelock  ;  secure  th€  ' 
throat  lash  and  curb   strap,  taking  care  to  leave  three  finger's 
breadths  between  the  th-roat  lash  and  the  jawa. 

TO  SADDLE. 
264.  The  instructor  commands  : 

I. 
The  cannoneer  approaches  the  horse  on  the  left  side,  laja 
the  blanket  on  his  back,  and  slides  it  once  or  twice  from  front 
to  rear  to  smooth  the  hair.  The  breast  strap,  crupper  and 
siirrups  being  crossed  over  the  saddle,  he  seizes  it  at  the.pum- 
mel  with  the  left  hand,  at  the  cantle  with  the  right,  places 
it  on  the  horse's  back  a  little  in  rear  of  its  position,  that  the 
crupper  can  be  put  on;  lets  down  the  crupper  and  breast 
strap ;  steps  to  the  rear,  passes  the  end  of  the  crupper  under 
the  dock  and  buckles  it,  or  passes  the  tail  through  tlie  loop; 
steps  to  the  right  of  the,  horse,  moves  the  saddle  up  to  its 
proper  place;  lets  down  the  girth  and  the  right  stirrup;  re- 
turns to  the  left  of  the  horse ;  buckles  the  girth  and  breast 
^  strap,  and  lets  down  the  left  stirrup.  .  ^ 

TO  LEAD  OUT. 

"265.  The  horse  being. saddled  and  bridled,  at  the  Command 
Lead  out,  the  cannoneer  conducts  him  to  the  exercise  ground. 
He  stands  on  the  left  of  i\\e  horse,  holjls  the  reins  with  the 
right  hand,  6  inches  from  the  mouth,  nails  under,  the  hand 
elevated  and  firm  , 

"^(jQ.  PosilLOii  he/ore  mounting. — At  the  command  'S'^nd 
TO  ifORSE,  the  cannoneer  stands  "opposite  the  lovter  jaw,  on 
the  left  of  the  horse,  and  assumes  the  position  prescribed  in 
No.  2,  except  that  he  holds  the  reins  with  the  right  hand. 

TO  MOUNT. 
•  267.  The  instructor  commands  ; 

1.    PlJEf  ARE  TO  MOUNJ". 

^    At  this  command,  unhook  the  sabrC)  when  worn;  place  the 


THE   CANNONEER   MOUNTED.  81 

right  foot  three  inches  in  rear  of  the  left;  make  a  faee  and  a 
half  tq  the  right  Da  both  heels,  the  right  foot  retnainiu;:  ia 
front;  let  go  the  right  rein;  slijp  the  right*  hand  along  the 
left  I'eiu  ;  take  two  steps,  stepping  off  with  the  right,  foot,  and 
face  to  the  left  upori  the  point  of  the  left  foot,  the  right  side 
toward  the  flank  of  the  hbrse;  carry  back  the  right  heel  three 
inches  in  rear  of  the  left;  the  right  hand  seizing  the  end'  of 
the  reins  is  placed  upon  the  cuntle  of  the  saddle. 

2.  Place  a  third,  of  the.  left  fofot  in  the  stirrup,  supporting 
it  against  the  fore-arm  of  the  horse;  rest  upon  the  point  of 
the  right  foot,  and  seize  with  the  left  hand  over  the  reins  a 
lock  of  the  mane  as  fiir  forward  as  possible,  the  extremity  of 
the  lock  passing  oiit  of  the  hand  on  the  side  of  the  little  finger. 

Mount. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  Mount,  spring  from  the  right  foot, 
holding  firmly  to  the  mane,  at  the  same  time  pressing  the 
cantle  to  prevent  the  saddle  from  turning;  the  bod*y  erect. 

1^.  Pass  the  right  leg  stretched  over  the  croup  of  the  horse 
without  touching;  sit  gently'  down  in  the  saddle;  let  go  the 
mane,  and  insert  the  right  foot  in  the  stirrup- without  the  aid 
of  the  hand  or.  eye. 

POSITION  OF  THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED. 

268.  The  buttocks  beaning  equally  upon  the  saddle,  and  as 
far  forward  as  posaible;  the  thighs  turned  upon  their  flat  side 
without  effort,  embracing  e(jUHlly  the  horse,  and  stretched 
only  by  their  own  weight  and  that  of  the  legs;  a  supple  bend 
of  the  knees;  the  legs  free  and  falling  naturally;  the  point 
of  the  feet  falling  in  like  manner ;  the  loins  supported  witjiout 
BtifTness;  the  upper  part  of  the  body  at  ease,  free  and  erect; 
the  shoulders  equally  thrown  back;  the  arms  free,  the  elbows 
falling  naturally;  the  head  erect,  at  caee,  and  not  drawn  in 
between  the  shoulders;  one  rein  of  the  snaffle  in  cacJi  hand, 
the  fing<»r8  closed,  the  thumb  aiopg  each  rein,'  the  wrist*  as 
high  as  the  elbow,  at  r,tx  inches  from  each"  other,  the  lingers 
turned  toward  each  other,  the  upper  extremity  of  the  reins 
leaving  the  hand  on  the  side  of  the  thumb. 


92  THE   CANNONEEB   MOUNTED. 

TO  LENGTHEN  THe'sNAFFLE  REIN. 

260.  Th€  instructor  commands  : 

Lengthen  left  (or  right) — JPtEiN. 
Pne  tijiic  and  two  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  lh^IX,  bring  the  wrists  toward  each 
other  without  turninjTr  them  in,  seize  the  left  rein  with  the 
thumb  and  first  finger  of  the  right  han^,  at  one  inch  from  the 
left  thumb. 

2.  Half  open  the  left  hand,  and  allow  the  rein  to  slip  until 
the  thumbs  touch;  reclose  the  left  hand,  and  replace  the 
wrists.  ■  ~ 

TO  SHORTEN  THE  SNAFFLE  REIN. 

270.  The  instructor  commands  : 

Shorten  left  (or  right) — Rein. 
One  time  and  two  Motions. 

1.  At  the  command  Rein,  bring  the  wrists  toward  each 
other  without  turning  them  in,  seize  the  left  rein  with  -the 
thumb  and  first  finger  of  the  right  hand,  so  that  the  thumbs 
touch. 

2.  Half  open  the  left  hand,  elevate  the  right  hand,  and 
permit  the  rein  to  slip  until  the  thumbs  are  one  inch  apart; 
reclose  the  left  hand,  and  replace  the  wrists. 

The  right  rein  is  lengthened  and  shortened  on  the  same 
principles,  but  by  inverse  means. 

TO  CROSS  THE  REINS  IN  ONE  HAND. 

,271,  The  instructor  commands  : 

In  left  (or  right)  hand,  Cross — Reins. 

One  time. 

At  the  command  Reins,  turn  in  the  left  wrist,,  the  nails 
downward,  afthe  sanle  time  bring  the  wrist  apposite  to  the 
middle  of  the  body,  half  open  the  left  hand,  place  in  it  the 
part  of  the  rein  that  was  in  the  right;  reclose  the  left  hand 
and  let  the  fight  fall'to  the  side. 


THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED.  83 

TO  TAKE  THE  REINS  IN  BOTH  HANDS.   ' 

272.  The  instructor  c6i*nmands  : 

Separate — Reins. 

One  time. 

At  the  conimand  Retns,  half  open  the  left  hand,  seize  with 
the  riiiht  hand,  the  nails  downward,  the  part  of  the  right  rein 
which  is  in  the  left  hand,  and  replace  the  wrists  six  inches 
apart. 

THE  USE  Oi?  THE  REINS.  ' 

273.  The  reins  serve  to  prepare  the  horse  for  the  movement 
he  is  required  to  execute,  to  direct  him  and  to  stop  him. 
Their  action  should  be  progressive,  and  in  accordance  with 
that  of  the  legs. 

When  the  cannoneer  makes  use  of  the  reins,  the  arms  should 
act  with  suppleness,  and  their  movements  ought  to  extend 
from  the  wrist  to  the  shoulder. 

THE  USE  OF  THE  :f.EGS. 

274.  The  legs  serve  to  urge  the  horse  forward,  to  support 
him,  and  to  aid  him  in  turning  to  the  right  and  to  the  left. 
Whenever  the  cannoneer  wishes  his  horse,  to  move  forward, 
he  should  close  the  legs  bj  degrees  behind  the  girths,  causing 
their  eflPcct  to  correspond  with  the  sensibility  of  the  horse^ 
taking  care  neither  to  open  nor  elevate  the  knees,  of  whicn 
the  bend  should  be  always  pliant.  The  cannoneer  relaxes  the 
legs  by  degrees,  as  he  closed  them. 

Till!:  EFFECT  OF  THE  REINS  AND  THE  LEGS  COMBINED. 

275.  In  elevating  a  little  the' wrists,  and  closing  the  legs, 
the  cannoneer  cjaihers,  his  horse  ;  in  elevating  again  the  wrists, 
he  slackens  the  pace;  in  repeating  this  movement  of  the 
wrists,  he  stops  the  horse,  or  i-eins  hark.  The  cannoneer 
ought  to  elevate  the  wrists  without  curvin'g  them,  at  the  same 
time  drawing  them  slightly  towards  the  body. 

In  opening  the  right  rein  and  closing  the  right  leg,  the 
cannoiieer  turns  his  horse  to  the  right.     To  open  the  right 


84  THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED. 

rein,  the  right  wrist  is  carried,  without  turoicg  it,  more  or 
less  to  the  right,  according  to  the  sensibility  of  the  horse. 

In  opening  the  left  rein,  and  closing  the  left  leg,  the  can- 
noneer turns  his  horse  to  thoUeft.  To  open  the  left  rein^ 
the  Teft  wrist  is  cavrie'd,  without  turning  it,  more  or  less  to 
the  left,  .according  to  the  sensiloiHty  of  the  horse.. 

By  lowering  slightly  the  wrists,  the  horse  is  ni  liberty  to 
move'forward;  the  closing  the  legs  determine  the  moveuient. 

TO  H-ARCII. 

276.  Th^  instructor  commands  : 

1.    Cannoneers  forvard.     2.  March. 

.Ki  the  command  Cannoneers  forward^  elevate  slightly  the 
wrists,  and  close  the  legs  in  order  to  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command   March,  lower  slightly  the  wrists,  and 
close  the  legs  more  or  less,  according  to  the  sensibility  of  the 
horse.     The  horse  having  obeyed^  replace  the  wrists  and  the"^ 
legs  by  degrees. 

TO  HALT. 

277. — After  some  steps,  the  instrtictor  commands  : 
'1.    Cannoneers.      2.   Halt. 

At  the  command  Cannoneers,  the  cannoneer  -gathers  his 
horse,  without  slackening  his  pa*^e. 

At  the  coQiinand  Halt,  the  cannoneer  braces  himseff  in 
the  paddle;  elevates  the  wrists-at  the  same  time  by  degrees, 
and  closes  the  legs  in  order  to-pi:event  the  horse  from  receding. 
T^he  horse  having  obeyed,  replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by 
degrees.  • 

When  the  horse  does  not  obey,  cause  him  to  feel  succes- 
sively the  effect  of  each  rein,  according  to  his  sensibility. 

TO.T,URN  TO  THE  RIGHT  OR.  LEFT. 

278.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.    Cannoneers  by. the  rvjht  (or  le/t)  flank.  2.    Marcit. 

B.'Halt.      __       / 

At  the  command  March,  open    the  right  rein,  and  close  ^ 

progressively  the  right  leg.     In  order  not  to  turn  the  horse 


THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED.  85 

too  short,  perform  the  movement  upon  a  quarter  of  a  crrcle  of 
three  paces.  The  movetneut  being  almost  cOmpleteci',  diniiuish 
the  effect  of  the  rein  and  the  right  leg,  supporting  the  horse 
at  the  same  time  with  the  left  rein  and  leg  to  terminate  the 
moyenient. 

At  tfce  command  Halt,  elevate  slightly -the  wrists,  and 
hokl  the'  legs  near,  in  order  to  keep  the4iarse  straight  in- the 
now  direction;  replace  the  wrists  and'the  legs  by-degrees. 

TO  REVERSE  TO  THE  RIGHT  OR  THE  LEFT. 

279.  The  instructor  cooimands  : 

1.   Gaii}ibnfinsj-^ufht  (or  left)  reverse.     2.  March. 


»  V 


..«* 


Halt. 


This  m ove men t^fe  Executed  on  the  principles  prescribed  for 
the  turn  to  the  ri(/ht  or  le/t,  with  this  difference,  that.the  horse 
should  pass  over  a  semicircle  of  six  paces,-  and-  face  to  the 
rear. 

TO  OBLIQUE. 

280.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Oannojieers'y  right  oblique  (ov  left  oblique.)     2.   March. 

8.  Halt. 

At  the  command  March,  open  a  little  the  right  rein,  and 
close  slightly  the  right  legy  m  order  to  make  the  horse  exe- 
cute an  oblique  to  the  rif/ht ;  cause  the  horse  to  feel,  almost 
at  the  same  time,  the  effect  of  the  rein  and  the  left  leg,  to 
terminate  the  movement  without  increasing  the  degree  of 
obliquity. 

At  the  command  Halt,  elevate  slightly  the  wrists  and  close 
the  legs,  to  keep  the  direction  of  the  oblique  to  the  ri(/hf; 
replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

TO  REIN-BACK. 

281.  The  instructor  comraan«ls  : 

1.    Cannoneers — Backwards.   w2.    MAR.en. 
3.    Cannoneers.     4.    Halt. 

At  the  command  Ma^ou,  keep  a  firm  8eat,^clevate  the 


86  THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED. 

wrists,  and.  close  the  legs.  x\.s  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  lower 
and  elevate  successively,  the  wrists,  which  is  called  yielding 
and  chcrhing.  If. the  horse  throws  the  haunches  to  the  right, 
close  the  right  legj  if  he  throws  them  to  the  left,  close  the 
left  leg.  If  these  means  are  not  sufficient,  to  replace  the  horse 
in  his.  proper  position,  open  the  rein  on  the  ..side- towards 
which  the  horse  throws  his  haunches,  causing  him  to  feel,  at 
the  same  time,  slightly,  the  effect  of  the  opposite  rein. 

At  the  command  Halt,  lower  the  wrists  and  close  the  legs. 
The  horse   huving  obeyed,  replace  the  wrists  and  the   legs  by 


degrees. 


TO  DISMOUNT. 


282.  The  instructor  causes  the  stirriipa  to  be  let  dowu  and 
the  feet  put  in  them.     He  then  commands : 

1.  Prepare  to  Dismount. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  Prepare  to  Dismount,  pass  the  right 
rein  of  the  snaffle  into  the'  left  hand,  the  extremity  of  the 
reins  leaving  the  hand  on  the  side  of  the  thumb. 

Dismount. 
One  time  arid  two  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  Dismount,  rise  upon  the  left  stirrup; 
pass  the  right  leg  extended  over  the  croup  of  the  horse,  with- 
out touching  him,  and  bring  the  right  thigh  near  to  the  left, 
the  body  being  well  sustained ;  place  at  the  same  time  the 
right  hand  upon  the  cantle  of  the  saddle,  slipping  it  along  the 
r^ins  without  letting  them  go )  descend  lightly  j;o  the  ground, 
the  body  erect,  the  heels  upon  the  same  line.  Let  go  the, 
mane  with  the.  left  hand ;  engage  the  extremity  of  the  reins 
in  the  left  cloak-strap  with  the  right  hand,  which  then  seizes 
the  left  rein. 

2.  Make  a  face  and  two  steps  to  the  left,  stepping  off  with 
the  lefE  foot;  slip  the  right  hand  along  the  left  rein,  seize 
with  the  same  hand  ^both  reins  at  six  inches  from  the  mouth 
of  the  horse,  the  nails  downward,  and- take  the  position  of 
Stand  to  horsk. 


1 


THE   CANNONEER   MOUNTED.  87 

TO  FILE  OFF. 

283.  The  instructor  commands : 

1.   Bi/  the  right,  (or  left,)  file  off.     2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  hook  up  the  sabre,  when  worn.  At 
the  word  IMarch,  the  cannoneer  on  the  right  steps  off,  leading 
his  horse  to  the  front.  He  movgs  i  yards,  and  turns  to  the 
right.  Eacli  man  executes  successively  the  same  movement 
when  the  one  who  precedes  him  has  moved  4  yards  to  the 
front. 

They  conform  to  the  same  principles  to  file  oif  to  the  left. 

JO  UNSADDLE. 

284.  At  the  command  Unsaddle,  the  cannoneer  unbuekles 
the  breast  strap  and 'cirth;  steps  to  the  right,  turns  up  the 
girth  and  breast  strap;  throws  over  the  right  stirrup;  carries 
the  saddle  a  little  back,  and  frees  the  tail  from  the  crupper; 
throws  over  the  left  stirrup;  seizes  the  pummel  with  the  left 
hand,  the  cantle  with  the  right,  removes  thd  saddle  and  places 
it  on  its  peg;  takes  off  the  blanket,  and  lays  it  on  the  saddle, 
passing  the  crupper  over  it. 

TO  UNBRIDLE. 

285.  At  the  word  Unbridle,  loose  the  curb  strap  and 
throat  lash ;  slip  the  reins  with  the  right  hand  to  the  crown 
piece,  and  then  with  both  hands  disengage  the  ears,  and  let 
the  bit  drop-out  of  the  mouth  by  lowering  the  crown  piece. 

LENGTH  OF  THE  STIRRUP. 

286.  They  are  of  the  proper  length  if,  when  the  cannoneer 
raises,  him  .self  on  the  stirrup,  there  is  a  space  of  six  inches 
between  the  fork  and  the  saddle. 

POStTIO-N  OF  THE  FOOT  IN  THE  STIRRUP. 

287.  The  stirrup  should  stipport  only  the  weight  of  the 
leg;  the  foot  ought  to  be  inserted  one-thifd  of  its  length,  the 
heel  lower  than  the  too. 


88  THE  CANNONEER   MOlTNTEl). 

The  s^tirvKj)  shouhJ  fiupport  only  the.  loeu/hf  of  the  hg  :  if 
the  cannoueer  bore  too  much  upon  thje  stirrups,  his  seat  would 
be  deranged  as  well  as  the  position  of  the  legs,  and  the  just- 
ness of  their  actioQ  would-be  impaired. 

7'he  foot  onyht  to'  he  inserted  one-third  of  its  length':  if  the 
cannoneer  did  not  insert  the  foot  sufficiently  fiir  in  the  «tir- 
Y\i\),  he  would  risk  losing  them,  particularly  during  the  lively 
gaits.  If  the  foot  were  inserted  too  far,  the  legs  would  not 
fall' naturally. 

I'he  heel  hncer.  than  the  toe:  that  the  foot  inay  keep  the 
stirrup  without  effort  and  without  wtiffness ;  that  the  play  of 
the  joint  with  the  leg  may- remain,  free,  and  that  .tfie  spur 
being  further  removed  from  the  horse,  there  is  less  danger  of 
its  being  improperly  employed. 

POSITION  OF  THE  BRIDLE-HAND. 

288.  The  reins  with  their  slide  in  the  left  hand,  the  little 
finger  between  the  reins,  the  other  fingers  well  closed,  and  the 
thumb  upon  the  second  joint  of  the  first  finger;  the  elbow 
elightly  detached  from  the  body,  the  hand  four  inches  above 
the  pommel  of  the  saddle,  the  fingers  six  inches  from  and 
turned  toward  the  body;  the  little  finger- a  little  nearer  the 
body  than  the  upper  part  of  the  wrist,  the. right  hand  at  the 
side. 

THE  PRINCIPAL  M0VE'^1ENTS  OF  THE  BRIDLE-HAND. 

289.  In  raising  slightly,  the  hand  and  drawin^itin  toward 
the  body,  the  cannoneer  gathers  his  horse;  in  raising  it  still 
more,  the  gait  is  made  slower.  I^y  increasing  the  effecj;  of  the 
hand,  the  horse  is  stopped ;  if  increased  still  more,  the  horse 
is  reined  back. 

In  lowering  slightly  the  hand,  the  horse  is  at  liberty  to 
move  forward. 

In  carrying  the  hand  forward  and  to  the  right,  the  horse  is 
turned  to  the  right. 

In  carrying  the  hand  forward  and  to  the  left,  the  horse  is 
turned 'to  the  left. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  the  bridle-hand  resumes  its 
original  positioQ. 


THE   CANN.ONEER   MOUNTED.  89 

TO  TROT. 

290.  After  the  cinnoneers  become  habituated  to  the  move- 
ments of  the  horse,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.    Trot.     2.  Mat^ch. 
At  the  word  March,  lower  the  wrist  and  close  the  legs,, 
until  the  horse  obcjs,  when  the  wrist  and  legs  will  be  replaced. 
To  pass  from  a  trot  to  a  trot  owf,  the  instructol:  commands  : 

Trot  out. 

To  resume  the  trot,  the  instructor  commands : 

Slow— Trot.  ^    . 

At  this  command,-  elevate  the  wri>t  until  the  horse  obeys. 
To  pass  from  a  trot  to  a  gallop,  the  instructor  commands  : 

-    ,  1.   Gallop.     2.  March.'. 

THE  DETACHMENT. 
Horse  Artillery. 

291.  The  detachnient  is  formed  in  two  ranks,  with  closed 
intervals;  the  distance  between  the  ranks  2  feet,  measuring 
from  head  to  croup  It  is. told  off  as  in  mounted  artillery, 
excepting  that  two  additional  men  required  as  horse  holders, 
and  nujnbered  9  and  10,  are  posted,  No.  9  in  the  centre  of  the 
rear  rank,  No.  10  iajhe  centre  of  *he  front  rank.  The  gun- 
ner, when  not  himself  the  instructor,  takes  his  post  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank. 

TO  MOUNT  AND  DISMOUNT  IN.  TWO  RANKS. 

292.  To  mountj  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.   Prepare  to  mount.     2.   MoUNT. 

At  the-firat  command,  the  gunner,  No.  4,  and  No.  G,  move 
2  yards  to  the  front,  Nos.  3  and  5,  2  yards?  to  the  rear,  cover- 
ing their  intervals;  the  mounting  is  then  complete,  and  the 

instructor  then  coinnmrids  :      • 

Form — Ranks. 
At  the  word  Kanks,  the^guaner  and  Nos.  4  and  G  stand 


90  THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED. 

fast,  the  other  numbers  form  -on  them,  and   the  rear  rank 
closes  up  '1  feet. 

293.  To  dismounfy  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Prepare  to  dismount.     2.  Dismount. 

At  the  first  command,  the.  g^unner  and  Nos.  4  and  6  move 
forward,  and  Nos.  3  and  5  rein  back  2  yards,- and  the  dis- 
mount is  completed  at  the  second  command.  The  instructor 
then  commands  :  Form — Ranks. 

TO  FORM  IN  ONE  RANK. 

294.  The  instructor  commands-: 

1.  Left  into  single  rank.     2.  March.    '3.  Halt. 
4.  7?<yif— Dress.     5.  Front, 

At  the  command  March^  the  gunner  advances  5  yards  and 
halts  No.  8  turns  short  to  the  left,  and  moves  forward;  he 
is  followed  by  the  other  even  tiurabers,  who  execute  suc- 
cessively the  same  movement.  At  the  command  Halt,  given 
in  time  to  enable  him  to  take  his  proper  distance,  No.  8  turns 
short  to  the  right,  and  moves  forwardj  until  on  a  line  with 
the  gunner.  The  other  even  numbers  turn  in  time  to  place 
themselves  in  rank  successively  on  ^he  right  of  the  cannoneer 
who  precedes  him.  At  the  command  Rlyht — Dress,  the  odd 
numbers  move  to  their  front,  and  align  themselves  on  the 
gunner.  At  the  command  Front,  all  cast  their  eyes  to  the 
front. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

295.  The  cannoneers,  to  align  themselves,  should  -regulate 
their  shoulders  upon  those  of  the  men  on  the  side  of  the  align- 
ment, and  fix  the  eyes  upon  the  line  of  the  eyes,  so  as  to  per- 
ceive the  breast  of  the  second  cannoneer  of  their  rank  on  the 
side  of  the  alignment;  for  this  purpose,  they  should  turn  the" 
head,  remaining  square  upon  their  horses,  feel  lightly  the 
boot  of  thp  man  on  the  side  of  the  i^lignment,  and  keep  the 
horses  straight  in  the  ranks,  -that  all  may  have'  a  parallel 
direction. 

The  cannoneers  of  the  rear  rank,  independently  af  the 
alignment;  should  -be  exactly  behind  their  file-leaders,  and  in 


THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED.  91 

the  same  direction,  taking  care  to  preserve  the  distamce  of  two 
feet;  from  head  to  croup. 

296.  Snccesive  alignments  of  ^  jilcs — t a  the  front.  Two  or 
more  files  of  the  right  are  moved  forward,  -and  aligned  by  the 

commands,  Two  {or )  ri(jht  jilcs  /orward,.MARQli,  Halt, 

R'ujlit — Dress'.     The  instrucfcar  then  comiuands  : 

1.  By  file  riylht  (or  /r/c)— Dress.     2.  Front. 

At  the  command  Dress,  each  file  moves  forward  sue 
eessively  and  steadily,  the  cannoneers  turning  the  head  to  the 
right  and  taking  the  last  steps  slowly,  in  order  to  arrive 
abreast  of  the  filesalready  formed  without  passing  beyond  the 
alignment,  observing  then  to  halt,  give  the  hand,  relax  the 
legs,  and  keep- the  head  to' the  right  until  the  command  Front. 

Each  file  executes  the  same  movement  wheri  the  preceding 
one  has  arrived  on  the  base  of  alignment. 

297.  To  the  rear. — Two  or  more  files  of  the  right  are  made 
to  rein    back    2    yards,  and  .align  themselves  opposite  their 

places ;  by  the  commands  Two  (or )  right  files-  backward, 

March,  Halt,  7? /'yA;;— Dress.     The   instructor  then  com- 
mands : 

1.  By  file — right  (or  left)  hac/cwards — Dres's.     2.  Front. 

* 

At  the  command  Dress,  each  file  reins  back  successively, 
keeping  perfectly  straight,  the  cannoneers  turning  the  head 
to  the  right,  and  passing  a  little  to  the  rear  of  the  files  already 
formed,  in  order  to  come  up  abreast  of  them  by  a  movement 
to  front  whipli  renders  the  alignment  more  easy. 

The  cannoneers  of  the  front  rank  rein  back  slowly,  those  of 
the  rear  rank  regulate  themselves  upon  their  file  leaders,  pre- 
serving always  their  proper  distance. 

At.  the  command  Front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front.      .     . 

298.  To  align  the  detachment.  The  instructor  places  the 
file  of  the  flank  on  which  he  wishes  to  align  it,  in  such  position 
that  no  cannoneer  will  be  forced  to  rein  back,  and  commands  : 


'J 


1.  Bight  (or  lcft)—'DRtss.     2.  Front. 

At  the  conirafind    Press,. nil   the  cannoneers  align  them- 
selves promptly,  but  wi<"h  steadiness.        ' 

At  thei  command  Front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 


9fi  THE   CANNONEER  MOUNTED. 

•»  TO  FORM  IN  TWO  RANKS. 

299.^  The  detachment  being  formed  in  one  rank,  the 
instructor  commands : 

1.   Riyht  into  two  ranJcs.      2.   MARCH.     3.   Riylit — DrESS. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  command  MaroiIj  the  gunner  advances  5  yards,  and 
halts.  No.  2-  turns  to  the  right,  moves  along  the  front  of  the 
odd  numbers,  and  turns  short  to  the  left  in  time  to  halt 
square  in  front  of  No.  1.  The  other  even  numbers  follow  his 
movement!?,  and  form  on  his  left.'  As  soon  as  the  front  rank 
is  in  po;-itiou,  the  rear  rank  takes  the  distance  of  two  feet,  and 
at  the  third  and  fourth  command  the  detachment  is  aligned  to 
the  ritjht 

When  formed  in  two  ranks,  the  detachment  will  be  taken 
through  the  foregoing  movements  together. 

TO  OPEN  AND  CLOSE  THE  RANKS. 

300.  To  open-the  ranJcs.     The  instructor  commands  : 

1.    To  the  rcar^'open  order.    i2.   March. 
3.  7??V/7<^— Dress..     4.  Front. 
%h  "     • 

.  .At  the  command  March,  the  front  rank  remains  immova- 
ble; the  rear  rank  reins  back  G  jards,  each  cannoneer  pre- 
serving the  dirtction  of  liis  file  leader.  At  the  third  com- 
mand, the  rear  rank  is  aligned  to  the  right'. 

301.  To  dxjHC  the  ranks.     The  instructor  commands  : 

1.   Close  order.     2.  March.     3.  Right — Dress. 
i.  Front. 

At  the  command  March,  the  rear  rank  closes  to  the  di^- 
tanc.e  of  2  feet  from  the  front,  each  cannoneer  accurately  cov- 
ering his  file  leader.  At  the  third  command  the  detachment 
is -aligned  to  the  right. 

TO  REIN  BACIi.  THE  DETACHMENT. 

302.  The  detachment  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor-com- 
mands :  ♦ 

■♦•  . . 

1.  'Detaclimtnt,  hackwards.     2.  March.  . 

3.   Guide — Right. 


TfiB  CANNONEER  MOUNTED.  93 

At  the  command  March,  all  the- cannoneers  rein  back  at 
once,  following  the  principles  already  prescrihcd  for  the  move- 
ment, and  regulating  themselves  by  the  guide. 

After  they  have  reined,  back  some  steps,  the  instructor 
commands :  ^ 

1.  petqchmeiit— E ALT.  2.  Right  (or  left)  Dress. 
3.  Front. 

19  MARCH  THE  DETACHMENT  BY  FILE. 

303.  To  the  front.  The  detachment  being  at  a  halt,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1.   Douhle  files  from  the  right..     2.   March. 

At  the  command  March,  the  right  file  nwv'es  straight  to 
Ihe  front,  liaeh  of  the  other  files  move  as  soon  as  the  rear 
rank  man  of  the  file  on  its  right,  is  on  a  line  with  its  front 
rank  man. 

These  two  cannoneers  advance  5  yards  abreast,  oblique  to 
the  right;  march  in  the  new  direction  until  nearly  opposite 
their  places,  when  th"ey  oblique  to  the  left,  so. as  to  enter  the 
column  ;  the  rear  rank  man  "then  quickens  his  pace,  and  takes 
his  positTon'at  the  side  of  his  proper  front  rank  man. 

To  break  tbe  detachment  ly  the  left,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles,  at  the  commands  :  . 

\.   Douhle  fileR  from  the  left.     2.    March. 

304.  To  the  right  (or  left).    -The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Bi/  the  right  (or  left)  fin nh.     2.  March. 
3.  Forward. 

At  the  first  command,  gather  the  horses.  At  the  command 
March,  the  cannoneer  on  the  r^ht  (or  left^  of  each  rank 
executes  a  turn  to  the  riL'ht  (nr  left)  and  inov(>s  forward,  the 
one  in  the  rear  rank  approaching;  his  front  rank  man  This 
moyement  is  executed  by  all  the  other  cannoneers  in  suc- 
cession. 

When  the  gunner  is  in  the  ranks,' he  constitutes  a  file;  all 
the  movements  are  njjide  as  if  he  were  an  even  number,  and 
th'e  filo  oDmplclOi 


^  THE   CANNONEER   MOUNTED. 

To  form  the  detachment  by  file  when  it  is  in  march,  the 
same  commands  are  given  as  if  it  were  at  a  halt.  At  thd 
command  March,  all  the  cannoneers,  except  the  file  which 
commences  the  movement,  halt,  if  the  detachment  is  at  a 
walk  ',  or  walk  if  it  is  at  a  .trot ;  and  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted as  already  directed,  in  resuming  the  original  gait. 

DIRECT  MARCH  IN  FILE. 

305.  The  even  numbers  are  guides^  they  preserve  the  dis- 
tance of  2  feet  from  head  to  croup,  move  steadily,  and  regain 
the  distances  gradually  when  lost.  The  odd  numbers  dress 
on  their  guides,  keeping  up  lightly  the  touch'  of  the  boot. 

CIJANGE  OF  DIRECTION  IN  FILE. 

'*  306.  The  column  marching,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  By  file  left  {ov  right),     2.  MARCH. 
3.  Forward. 

At  the  command  March,  the  left  (or  right)  cannoneer  at 
the  head  of  the  column  executes  the  turn ;  the  cannoneer 
abreast  of  him  conforma.  to  the  movement,  increasing  his  gait 
and  keeping  up  the  touch  of  the  boot.  At  the  command 
Forward,  both  move  to  the  front  at  the  original  gait.  The 
other  cannoneers  exQcute  the  same  movement  on  the  same 
ground. 

TO  HALT  AND  TO  MOVE  OFF. 

307.  To  halt  the  column,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Column — Halt. 

To  resume  the  march,  he  commands  : 
^  1.    Column,  forward.     2.  March. 

OBLIQUE  .IN  FILE. 

308.  The  column  marching,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.    Cannoneers,  left  (or  right)  oblique. 
2.  March. 


.TilE   CANNONEER  MOUNTED.  05 

At  the  command  MARCft,  each  cannoneer  obliques  to  the 
left;  the  leading  cannoneer  of  the  left  file  is  the  ^uide  of  the 
column,  and  moves  straight  forward  in  the  new  direction ;  the 
other  cannoneers  of  that  file  move  in  the  same  direction,  and 
on  a  line  with  him.  The  cannoneers  of  the  right  file  dress  on 
their  guides,  each  placing  his  left  knee  behind  the  right  knee 
of  his  guide,  keeping  the  head  of  his  horse  on  a  line  with 
the  shoulders  of  the  horse  on.  his  left,  and  marches  in  this 
way  during  the  oblique. 

To  return  to  the  primitive  direction,  the  instructor  com- 
mands :       ^ 

Forward. 

The  oblique  to  the  right  is  executed  on  the  same  principles. 

In  the  oblique  march,  the  guide  is  always  on  the  side  to- 
wards which  the  oblique  is  made;  and, "at  the  eommand-FoR- 
WARD,  returns  to  the  original  side.  The  change  of  guides 
will.be  made  without  any  special  commands. 

TO  BREAK  INTO  SINGLE  FILE. 

309.  The  column  marching  in  double  file,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  Ill  single  file.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  single  file^  all  the  cannoneers,  except  the 
even  number  at  the  head  of  the  column,  prepare  to  halt.  At 
the  cammand  March,  they  halt.  As  soon  as  the  odd  number 
of  the  first  rank  is  passed  by  the  horse  of  the  even  number, 
he  enters  the  column  by  two  successive  oblique  movements. 
Each  rank  of  two  executes  in  siiccessron  the  same  move-ment, 
the  even  numbers*  breaking  as  soon  as  the  odd  number  of  the 
rank  in  front  comm.ences  obliquing  to  enter  the  column.  The 
gait  is  regulated  so  as  to  keep  the  distances. 

When  the  column  is  at  a  trot  or  gallop,  it  is  broken  into 
single  files  according  to  the^iame  principles  and  by  the  same 
commands;  the  even  number  of  the  leading  rank  continues 
the  gait;  the  others  coming  to  a  walk  in  case  the  column  is 
at  a  trot,  or  a  trot  in  case  it  is  at  a  gallop,  as  soan  as  the  com- 
mand iNlAROU  is  given,  and  resuming  the  original  gait  to  enter 
the  column.  ^  j"  • 


96  THE   CANNONEER   MOtJNXBD. 

The  column  by  single  file  majsfee  formed  from  the  detach- 
ment when  in  line,'  by  the  commands  : 

1.   Singh' file  from  t^e  right.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  March,  the  file  indicated  movea  to  the 
front.  -    ,  • 

When  the  croup  of  the  rear  rank  horse  is  opposite  the  head 
of  the  leading  horse  of  the  next  file,  that  file  puts  itself  in 
!iiotion,  advances  8  yards,  obliques  to  the  right,  and  ag^in  to 
the  left,  so  as  to  enter  the  colutiiU.  Each  file  takes  up  the 
movement  in  succession,  governing  itself  by  that  of  the  fila 
on  its  riglit. 

The  column  is  formed  in  single  file  from  the  left  oh  the 
same  principles.  The  movement  in  single  file  will  never  be 
used  in  the  artillery  except  when  unavoidable. 

TO  FORM  IN  DOUBLE  FILES. 

310.  The  column  bei'ng  in  single  file,  marching  or  at  a 
walk,  the-instructot  commands : 

'  I.  Double  files.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  coi^mand,  all  gather  their  horses.  At  the  com- 
mand March,  the  odd  numbers  oblique  to  the  right,  if  the 
right  is  in  front j  to  the  lefc,  if  the  left  is  in  front;  and,  by 
another  oblique,  place  themselves  at  the  sides  of  their  even 
numbers,  quickening  the  gait  for  the  purpose  if  the  column  is 
in  march.     All  close  up  to  2  feet  from  head  to  croup. 

TO  FORM  THE  DETACHMENT  IN  LINE. 

Z\\.  To  the  front.  The  detachment  marching  in  double 
files,  right  in  front,  the  instructor  comman*ds : 

1.    Cannoneers,  into  line     2.-  March. 
3.    Guide — KlGHT. 

At  the  first  command,  all  gather  their  horses;  the  odd 
numbers  slacken  their  gait  until  they  are  on  a  line  with  the 
next  even  number  behiud  them. 

At  tho  GDminaud  MaroUj  the  guide  of  the  column  (^ontia- 


TXIE   CANNONEER   MOUNTED.  9t 

ues  to  advance ;  the  other  ca^nnoneers  oblique  to  the  leftj 
quickening  their  gait,  until  opposite  tlijeir  places  in  line;  then 
they  oblique  to  the  rights  and  form  in  succession  iu  line,  each 
in  his  proper  rank.  The  instructor  gives  the  command  for 
the  guide  immediately  after  the  command  March. 

When  the  detachment  is  at  a  halt,  the  leading  guide,  at  the 
first  comuiand,  moves  forward  5  yards  and  halts,  and  the 
movement  is  executed  as  already  directed,  except  that  instead 
of  the  command  for  the  guide,  the  instructor  commands : 

3.  Rujlit — Dress.     4.  Front. 

312.  To  tlie  right.     The  instructor  commands  : 

1.    Cannoneers,  on  right  into  line.     2.  March. 
3.  Right — Dress.     4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the' odd  numbers  slacken  the  gait 
until  they  are  in  a  line  with  the  next  even  number  behind 
them. 

At  the  comnjand  March,  the  guide  of  the  column  turnsto 
the  right,  advances  5  yards,  and  halts  ]  the  other  cannoneers 
continue  to  advance,  turn  in  succession  to  the  right,  and  form 
in  line ;  each  in  his  proper  rank. 

313.  To  the  left.     The  instructor  commands  : 

1.    Cannoneers,  to  the  left  into  line.     2.  MARCH. 
3.  Right — Dress.     4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  gather  the  horses.  At  the  command 
March,  each  of  the  t\yo  leading  cannoneers  turns  to  the  left, 
moves  forward  5  yards,  and  halts.  The  other  cannoneers  ex- 
ecute the  same  movement  in  succession,  when  they  are  nearly 
opposite  their  places,  and  take  their  proper  positions  in  line; 
each  in  his  own  rank. 

In  forming  line  to  the  right,  and  to  the  left,  the  command 
Right — Dress  is  given  when  the  leading  cannoneer  halts. 
The  command  Front  is  given  when  the  last  file  is  aligned. 
When  the  column  is  moving  left  in  front,  the  line  is  formed 
to  \;h.e  front y  left,  and  right,  on  the  same  principles. 
5 


fB  THE   CANNONEER   MOUNffl?o 

DIllECT  MARCH  IN  LINE. 

314.  To  laarcb  tbd  detachment  forward,  the  iDstmctor 
commands :  .  • 

1.  Detachment,  forioartl.     2.  MARCH, 
3.    Guide — Right  (or  Left.) 

At  the  command  March,  which  is  immediately  followed  by 
ihat  for  the  guide,  all  the  cannoneers  move  straight  forwards 
To  halt  the  detachment,  he  commands; 

1.  Detachment,  Halt.     2.  Ri(jlit  (or  left)  Dress, 
o.  Front. 

WHEELING. 

315.  General princijples. — In  executing  a  whesl  whilst  tbe 
detachment  is  in  march,  the  conductor  of  the  marching  flank 
should  increase  his  gait,  and  describe  his  arc  so  as  to  cause  tbe 
iiles  neither  to  open  nor  close.  •  The  piyofe  describes  a»  arc  of 
a  circle  of  2  yards  radius  in  slackening  the  gait.  The  can- 
noneers from  the  centre  to  the  marching  flank  increase,  and 
those  from  tbe  centre  to  the  pivot  decrease  tbe  gait  progress- 
ively, so  that  the  centre  man  preserves  the  gait  at  which  the 
detachment  was  marching.  At  the  end  of  tbe  wheel,  all  re- 
sume the  original  gait,  and  straighten  their  horses. 

At  the  command  Forward,  they  cease  to  wheel,  and  re- 
sume the  direct  march,  at  whatever  point  of  tbe  wheel  they 
may  be. 

316.  The  wheelings  are  executed  at  first  in  single  rank; 
for  this  purpose  the  detachment  is  foiuned  in  one  rank,  and^, 
l)sing  aligned,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Detachment  in  circle,  right  (or  left')  loheel. 

2.  March. 

At  tbe  command  March,  the  cannoneers  put  themselves 
In  motion,  the  pivot  describing  the  arc  of  a  circle  of  which 
tbe  radius  is  2  yards,  at  a  slow  gait;  tbe  marching  iiank 
moves  briskly,  and  regulates  itself  by  the  pivot,  avoiding  all 
pressure  in  tbe  ranks. 

317.  When  tbe  detachment  baa  executed  several  wheels,  to 
bait  it,  tbe  instructor  eommand§  : 

1'.  Dctachmenty  Halt.     2.  Left  (or  right)  Dre33. 

3.  Front. 


TliE   CANNONEER   MOUNTED.  99 

At  the  cominaud  Halt,  the  cfinrioneers  Straighten  their 
horses,  and  hult  with  steadiness.  Before  dressiDg  the  detach- 
ment, the  cannoneer  on  the  marching  flank  is  made  to  come 
up  abreast  of  the  pivot  man,  so  that  the  others  will  not  have 
to  rein  back  in  order  to  align  themselves.. 

818.  The  detachment  is  then  marched  forward,  and  made 
to  re-commence  the  wheel  whilst  marching,  and  by  the  same 
commands.  At  the  first  command  the  pivot  man  prepares  to 
slacken,  and  the  marcliing  flank  to  quicken  the  gait,  so  that 
the  centre  man  will  preserve  the  gait  at  which  he  is  march- 
ing:; the  wheel  is  then  executed  as  prescribed.  When  the 
instructor  wishes  the  detachment  to  take  the  direct  march 
instead  of  halting,  he  commands  : 

1.  Forward.     2.    Gifide  right  (or  left.) 

At  the  command  Forward,  the  pivot  resumes  the  gait  at 
which  it  was  previously  marching,  the  other  cannoneers 
straighten  their  horses,  and  the  two  flanks  move  forward  at 
the  same  gait. 

o!9.  When  sufficiently  exercised  in  single  rank,  the  can- 
noneers are  formed  in  two  ranks,  and  the  wheel  executed  in 
following  the  same  gradation.     The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Detachment  in  circle,  right  (or  left)  wheel. 
2.  March. 

At  the  command  March,  the  men  of  the  front  rank  exe- 
cute the  movement  as  prescribed  in  No.  316,  the  cannoneers 
of  the  rear  rank  turn  the  head,  and  carry  the  hand  towards 
the  marching  flank,  so  that  each  one  may  be  out  of  the  direc- 
tion of  his  lile  leader  by  two  men.  For  this  purpose,  the 
moment  the  wheel  commences,  each  rear  rank  man  executes 
a  quarter  turn  to  the  left,  if  the  wheel  is  to  the  right;  to  the 
right,  if  the  wheel  is  to  the  left,  keeping,  during  the  wheel, 
in  the  direction  of  his  new  file  leader,  and  remaining  at  the 
distance  of  2  feet  from  the  fron't  rank. 

320.  To  stop  the  wheel,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.   Detaclimcnt.      2.   Halt. 
3.    Left  (or  r{ghl\  DrESS.      4.    FilONT. 

At  the  command  Defachmci^f,  the  rear  rank  men  straighten 


100         THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED. 

their  horses, -and  return  to  the  direction  of  their  file  leaders. 
At  the  command  Halt,  all  the.  cannoneers  halt. 

32 L  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  detachment  to  resume 
the  direct  march,  he  commands  : 

1.  Forward.     2,   Guide  left  (or  right.') 
At  the  command  Foi^ward,  the  rear  rank   men  replace 
themselves   behind    their  file   leaders,   and    march    straight 
'  forward. 

322.  The  detachment  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  or  in  march, 
to  place  it  in  a  position  perpendicular  to  the  original  front,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1.  Detachment ,  rigid  (or  left')  wlipxl.     2.  March. 
3.  Halt.     4.  Left  (cir  right^  Dress.     5.  Front. 

Which  commands  are  -executed  on  the  same  principles  as 
the  wheel  in  circle,  .a  quarter  of  a  circle  only- being  described, 
and  the  command  halt  given  when  the  wheel  is  nearly 
completed* 

323.  The  detachment  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  or  in  march, 
to  place  it  in  a  direction  oblique  to  the  original  front,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1.  Detachment,  right-half  (or  left  half)   wheel.     2.   MARCH. 
3.  Halt.     4.  Left  (or  right)  Dress.     5.  Front. 

Which  commands  are  executed  on  the  same  principles  as 
the  wheel  in  circle,  a  quarter  of  a  circle  only  being 'described, 
and  the  command  Halt  given  when  the  wheel  is  nearly 
completed'. 

324.  The  detachment  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  or  in  march 
to  place  it  in  a  direction  oblique  to  the  original  front,  the 
instructor  commands : 

1.  Detachment^  right-half  (or  left  half)  iched.     2.  MXRCH. 
3.  Halt.     4.  Left  (or  right)  Dress.     5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  as  in  the  wheel,  except  that  the  eighth 
of  a  circle  only  is  passed  over. 

325.  The  detachment  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  or  in  march, 
to  place  it  in  a  position  faced  to  the  rear,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.  Detachment^  right  (or  hft)  reverse.     2.  March. 
3    Ha,lt.     4.  Left  (or  right)  Dress    5    Front. 


THE*  CANNONEER   MOUNTED.  101 

Which  commands  are  executed  ag  prescribed  ia  No.  322, 
except  that  a  semicircle  is  described. 

326.  In  all  the  wheeloi,  when,  instead  of  halting,  it  is  de- 
sired to  move  forward  at  their  completion,  instead  of  the  com- 
mands- 3.  Halt,  &c.,  the  commands  will  be  : 

3.   FoHWARD.     4.    Guide  riyht  (or  left.) 

The  command  Forward  is  given  as  soon  as  the  detach- 
ment is  in  the  new  direction ;  all  the  cannoneers  resume  the 
march  to  the  front,  and  the  command  for  the  guide  follows 
immediately. 

The  foregoing  movements  being  properly  executed,  from  a 
halt  and  at  a  walk,  are  repeated  at  a  trot. 

OBLIQUE  IN  LINE.  ^ 

327.  The  detachment  marching  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain 
ground  towards  one  of  its  flanks  without  changing  the  front, 
the  instructor  commands: 

1.    Cannoneers,  right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  Marc&,  the  cannoneers  execute  an  oblique 
to  the  right,  so  that  the  head  of  each  horse  may  be  opposite 
the  shoulders  of  the  horse  on  his  right,  and  that  the  right  knee 
of  each  cannoneer  may  be  in  rear  of  the  left  knee  of  the  man 
on  his  right.  The  men  then  move  in  the  new  direction,  vegu- 
lating^upon  the  guide.  When  the  detachment  has  obliqued 
sufficiently,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Forward. 

The  cannoneers  straighten  their  horses,  and  move  forward. 
When,  in  the. execution  of  an  oblique  march,  the  guide  is 
always  on  the  flank  of  the  dctachiuent  towards  which  the 
oblique  is  made,  and  after  the  command  Forwad,  the  guide 
returns,  without  a  command,  to  the  side  on  which  it  was 
when  the  oblique  was  ordered.      This  rule  is  general. 

CHANGES  OF    GAIT. 

3'iS.  To  pass  from  one  gait  to  another,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.   Trot  (trot  out  or  gallop.)     2.  March. 


102  THE   CANNONEER   SlOUNTED. 

All  cha/u/cs  of  gait  must  he  made  (jradnalli/,  and  care  must 
.be  taken  never  to  check  a  horse  so  suddenly  as  to  injure  his 
mouth  or  throw  him  on  his  haunches, 

THE  TLATOON. 

329.  The  principles  of  the  instruction,  as  laid  down  for  the 
detachment,  are  applicable  to  the  platoon,  the  word  platoon 
being  substituted  for  detacliment^  wherever  the  latter  occurs 
in  the  commands.     The  platoon  is  divided  into  detachments 

■  of  eight  men  each,  the  horse  holders  being  left  out.  -  The 
gunner  is  on  the  right  of  the  platoon  ;  the  chief  of  the 
caisson  is  the  front  rank  man  of  the  left  file.  The  mounting 
and  dismounting  are  executed  as  in  No.  292,  the  gunner  tak- 
ing his  place  on  the  right  at  the  command  Form  Kanks. 

EXERCISE  OF  SEVERAL  DETACHMENTS. 

Horse  Artillery. 

330.  The  detachments  are  drawn  up  in  line  corresponding 
to  the  position  of  their  piece?  in  park,  and  touching  each  other. 
The  cannoneers,  as  in  dismounted  detachments,  retain  their 
numbers  and  relative  positions,  but  each,  detachment  consti- 
tutes -a  unit,  and  no  notice  is  taken  of  inversions  in  the  ma- 
noeuvres. When  the  chiefs  of  sections  are  not  present,  there 
is  an  assistant  instructor,  who  is  mounted. 

331.  In  line  or  column  of  detachments,  the  gunners  are 
on  the  right'of  their  respective  detachments,  in- the  front  rank. 
Each  constftutes  a  file,  unless  the  chiefs  of  pieces  are  present, 
in  which  case  the  latter  take  their  places  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank,  the  gunners  covering  them  in  the  rear  rank  and 
completing  the  files. 

332.  The  officers,  when  two  or  more  sections  are  united, 
are.  posted  as  directed  for  .dismounted  detachment^,  except 
that  in  column  of  detachments  the  chief  of  the  leading:  sec- 
tion  IS  2  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  column.  The 
assistant  instructor  is  posted :  Li  line,  4  yards  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  the  detachments.  In  column,  2  yards  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  the  leading  detachment.  Bi/  Jlanh,  at  the  side 
of  the  leading  file. 


THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED.        •  lOS 

33o.  The  following  movfimcets  are  executed  in  i\\e  same 
manner  as  for  a  single  detaclinicnt:  7h  mount  and  dismount; 
the  alignments ;  to  open  <xnd  close  ranks;  tloe  oblique  in  linCy 
in  column,  a,nd  injilc;  to  march  hy  fde;  to  change  direction 
in  file  ;  to  Jialt  and  move  off;  the  changes  of  gait-;  to  hreah 
into  single  file  ;  and  to  form  double  files. 

TO  BREAK  INTO  COLUMN. 

334.  To  the  front.  The  detachments'beinc;  in  line  at  & 
halt,  to  break  to  the  front,  the  instructor  commaads: 

1.  By  detachment  from,  tlve  right — front  into  column. 
2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  word  MARCir,  the  right  detachment  moves  to  tlie 
front,  the  assistant  iastractor  taking  his  post  2 -yards  in  front 
of  its  ceatre.  The  other  detachiuents  move  off  in  succcss^ioa 
as  soon  as  the  haunches  of  the  horses  of  the  rear  ranii  of  the 
detachment  on  its  right  are  in  line  with  the  heads  of  its  own 
front  rank  horses.  They  move  directly  to  the  front  G  yards, 
and  then  oblique  to  the  right,  as  prescribed  in  No.  327,  until 
they  intersect  the  column,  when,  by  a  left  oblique,  they  eirter 
it,  and  resume  the  dress  towards  the  guide.  The  gait  is  so 
reguhted,  that  upon  entering  the  column,  there  should  be  2 
yards  distance  between  the  detachments. 

The  detachments  are  broken  into  column  from  the  left,  ac- 
cording k)  the  same  principles. 

33.5.  If  the  detachments  are- marching  in  linc^,  the  ia- 
fitructor  comaads: 

1.  B)f  the  right  (or  left)  break  info  detachments. 
2.   March.     3.    Guide  right  (or  hft). 

At  the  word  March,  all  the  detachments,  except  the  right 
(or  left),  halt,  if  they  are  marching  at  a  walk,  or  walk,  if  tliey 
are  marching  at  a  trot,  and  the  movement  is  completed  as  ia 
No.  334  ;  each  detachment  resuming  the  original  gait  to  com- 
tnenec  the  movement. 

33(>.  To  the  right  or  left.  The  detachments  being  in  lioe^ 
at  a  halt,  or  in  march,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.   Bi/  dctnrhments,  right  (or  left)  wheel.     2,  MARCzr. 
3.*ToRWARn.     4.    Guide  le/t  (or  right). 


104     .  THE   CANNONEER   MOUNTED, 

At  fche  word  March,  each  detachment  executes  the  wheel 
as  in  No.  322,  and  moves  to  the  front  at  the  word  Forward, 
so  regulating  the  gait  that  there  shall  be  a  distance  of  2  yards 
between  them. 

CHANGE  OF  DIRECTION  IN  COLUMN. 

337.  The  column  naarching,  the  instructor  commands : 

Head  of  column  to  the  right  (or  left). 

The  assistant  instructor  commands,  when  the  detachment 
is  2 -yards  from  the  point : 

1.  Right  (ov  left)  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 

The  loading  detachment  wheels  to  the  right  at  the  word 
!MARcn,  and,  at  the  word  Forward,  moves  to  its  .front;  the 
other  detachments  wheel,  on  reaching  the  same  ground,  with- 
out farther  commands. 

An  oblique  change  is  executed  on  the  same  principles,  at 
the  commands  i 

^  Head  of  -column  right  (or  left)  half- wheel. 

THE  COLUMN   MARCHING  TO  FACE   IN  THE  OPPOSITE 

DIRECTION. 

338.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Detachments^  right  (or  left')  reverse.  .   2.   March. 
3.    Column,  Forward.     4.   Guide  right  (or  left). 

At  the  word  March,  each  detachment  executes  the  reverse 
at  the  gait  at  which  it  is  marching,  and  the  assistant  instructor 
passes  to  the  head  of  the  column.  At  the  command  For- 
ward, the  column  marches  to  its  front. 

BEING  IN  COLUMN  TO  FORM  IN  LINE. 

339.  To  the  front.  The  column  being  in  march,  or  at  a 
halt,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Fonvard  into  line,  left  (or  right)  ohlique.     2.   MarCH. 
3.   Giude  right.     4.  Front. 


THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED.  105 

At  the  word  March,  the  leading  detachment  advances  14: 
yards,*^and  is  halted  by  the  assistant  instructor,  who  then 
commands  Right  (or  left)  Dress,  and  fakes  his  place  in  line. 
The  other  detachments  oblique  to  the  left  (or  riglit)  until  op- 
posite their  places  in  line,  when  they  move  to  the  right,  dress- 
ing to  the  right  (or  left,),  and  form  in  succession  on  the  left 
(or  right)  of  the  preceding  detachment. 

340.  On  the  right  (ov  left).     The  instructor  commands : 

1.    On  the  right' (or  left)  info  line.     2.   MARCH. 
3.   Guide,  right  (or  iPft).     4.  Front. 

At  the  word  March,  the  leading  detachment  wheels  to  the 
right  (or  left),  advances  until  it  has  unmasked  the  column, 
and  is  halted  by  the  assistant  instructor,  who  then  commands 
Right  (or  left)  DresS,  and  takes  his  place  in  line.  The  other 
detachments  continue  the  march,  dressing  to  the  right  (or 
left),  wheel  in  succession  opposite  their  positions  on  the  left 
(or  right)  of  the  first,  advance  to  the  line,  halt,  and  dress  to 
the  right  (or  left). 

341.  To  the  right  (or  left).     The  instructor  commands*; 

1.  Right  into  line  wheel,     2.  Maroh.     3.  Halt. 
4.  Left — Dress.     5.  Front. 

At  the  word  March,  the  detachments  wheel  to  the  right 
into  line,  and  are  then  halted  and  dressed'  by  the  instructor. 

;  TO  FORM  LINE  ADVANCING. 

342.  The  column  being  in  march  at  a  walk,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  form  line  advancing — left  oblique — trot. 
2.  March.     3.      Guide  right. 

At  1>he  word  March,  the  leading  detachment  continues  the 
walk.  The  others  oblique  at  a  trot  until  opposite  their  places, 
and  then  move  forward,  and  form  in  succession  on  the  left  of 
the  first,  resuming  the  walk  as  they  reach  the  line. 

When  the  column  is  nt  a  tret,  the  leading  detachment  takes 
the  u.azj,  j^j.  ^|j^  ^Qj.^  March. 


106  THE  CANNONEER  MOUNTED. 

TO  ADVANCE  IN  LINE. 

343.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.    Section  (or  — )  forward.     2.   March. 
3.    Guide  riyht  (or  hft). 

These  commands  are  executed  as  in  No.  314,  at  the  differ^ 
ent  gaits. 

TO  CHANGE  DIRECTION  IN  LINE. 

344.  The  detachments  being  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  the  in- 
structor commands  : 

1.   Section  (or  — )  riyht  wheel  (or  reversej  etc.^ 
2.  March.     3.  Forward. 

These  commands  arc  executed  as  prescribed  in  Nos.  323, 
324,  and  325,  for  a  s-ingle  detachment,  except  that  the  radius 
of  the  arc  described  by  the  pivot  is  about  8  yards,  so  that 
the  arc  in  the  wheel  is  12  yards,  in  the  reverse  24  yards,  and 
in  the  half-wheel  6  yards. 

MARCHING  ]N  LINE  TO  MAKCH  IN  THE  OPPOSITE 
DIRECTION. 

345.  The  instructor  commands  :  • 

j>     1.  DctacJiments,  right  (or  l<ifty  reverse.     2.  March. 
3.  ToRWARD.     4.    Guide  right  (or  left). 

At  the  word  March,  each  detachment  executes  the  reverse 
without  confusion,  and  as  it  is  about  being  couipleted,  the  in- 
structor commands  Forward,  and  adds  the  command  for  the 
guide. 

The  officers  pass  throu2;h  the  line  daring  the  executiou  of 
the  movement,  and  take  their  positions. 

It  is  generally  better  to  execute  the  change  of  front  by 
sections. 

MAHCHING  by  a  flank  T.^  FORM  COLUMN  BY 
DETACHMENTS.   " 

816.  The  instructor  commands: 

1.   Form  deiaehments.     2.  M*-  *^* 
3.    Guide  right  (or  ^' '  •' 


THE   DRIVER.  107 

At  the  first  command,  all  the  detachments,  except  the  lead- 
ing one,  halt,  if  they  are  marching  at  a  walk,  or  walk,  if 
they  arc  marching  at  a  trot. 

At  the  word  March,  the  leading  detachment  forms  as  di- 
rected in  No.  Sll..  The  others  take  up  the  movement  in  suc- 
cession, at  the  original  gait,  as  soon  as  the  cannoneers  of  the 
one  in  front  of  them  begin  the  oblique. 

IN  COLUMN  OF  DETACHMENTS  TO  MARCH  BY  FILE. 

347.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Douhle  files  frojntJib  right  (ov  left).     2.  March. 

At  the  word  March,  all  the  detachments,  except  the  lead- 
ing one,  halt,  if  the  column  is  marching  at  a  walk,  or  walk, 
if  marching  at  a  trot.  The  leading  detachment  forms  in 
double  files,  as  in  No.  304,  the  others  taking  up  the  move- 
ment at  the  original  gait,  and  closing  to  the  proper  distances. 

POSTING  THE  DEfACHMENTS  AVITH  THE  PIECES. 
• 

348.  The  detachments  are  marched  to  the  park,  cither  in 
column  or  line,  and  posted  at  their  pieces  as  directed  in  No. 
75,  or,  should  it  bo  more  convenient,  they  may  be  marched 
each  in  rear  of  the  teams  belonging  to  its  piece. 

Whenever  the  nature  of  the  ground  requires,  the  detach- 
ments are  halted  outside  the  park  and  marched  to  their  posts 
Siucccssively  as  the  pieces  file  out. 

The  position  of  the  detachment  is  habitually  in  roar, of  its 
piece,  but-  positions  may  be  changed  by  the  means  laid  down 
in  No.  240. 

THE  DRIVER.- 

849.  The  horses  are  taken  in  the  stalls  or  at  tho  picket- 
rope,  each  driver  is  in  rear  of  and  between  hi8  pair  of  houses 
To  harness,  the  instructor  cr>"»'"ands  : 

Harness. 

I     >^Chis  command,  each  wheel  driver  pas^s  the  collar 
^^v^led,  ovc*r  the  head  of  tlie  horse,  and  put^n  the  blanket! 


108  THE    DRIVER. 

2.  He  seizes  the  pommel  with  the  left  hand  and  the  cantle 
with  the  right,- and  puts  the  saddle  in  its  position  upon  the 
horse's  back. 

o.  He  passes  to  the  front  of  the  horse,  pulls  the  breast 
strap  over  his  head,  adjusts  the  hames  to. the  collar,  connects 
the  lower  part  of  the  branches  and  ti'^htens  the  bame  straps. 

4.  He  passes  to  the  near  side  of  the  horse,  disengages  the 
breeching;  then  moves  to  the  rear,  draws  it  over  the  horse's 
haunches,  arranges  the  crupper 'and- loin  straps. 

5.  He  sees  that  tlic  harness  is  properly  arranged,  tightens 
and  buckles  the  girth,  and  buckles  the  belly  band. 

6.  He  bridles  the  horse,  and  Jiccures  him  to  the  head  post 
or  picket  rope. 

The  near  horse  is  harnessed  in  the  same  manner  and  by  the 
same  commands,  with  this  exception  : 

7.  The  driver  puts  the  legrguard  on  the  right  leg,  bridles 
the  off  horse, 'acTd  backs  them  into  the  gangway,  facing  the 
door,  and  takes  position  for  leading  to  the  exercise- ground. 

In  harnessing  and  unharnessing  lead  horses,  the  instruc- 
tions for  the  wheelers  apply,  with  th'e  modifications  required 
by  the  nature  of  the  harness.  . 

350.  Leading  to  the  exercise  ground.  "The  driver  assumes 
fhe  position  of  Stand  to  horse,  holding  at  the  same  time 
the  coupling  rein  of  his  off  horse,  thrown  over  the  neck  of 
his  near  one,  in  the  right  hand,  so  as  to  lead  both.  At  the 
command  Lead  out,  all  conduct  their  horses  to  the  exercise 
ground,  and  form  in  one  rank,  4  yards  apart,  with  their  horses 
on  their  right,  the  traces  trussed  up  to  the  hames. 

361.  The  drivers'are  then  exercised  in  mounting^  dismount- 
ing, and  marching  to  the  front ;  halting,  reining  back,  and  to 
Jile  ojjf,  by  the  commands  and  means  for^the  cannoneer  mounted. 

TO  TURN  TO  THE  IlIGHT.mi  LEFT. 

852.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Drivers,  rlijht  xohed,     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

At  t"li«5  word  'March,  the  driver  Wii^^u  i^jg  horses  to  the 
right,  malting  the  off  horse  describe  a  cjuaa>^y,^  ^^  ^  circle 
whose  rad\u,>ia  3:25  yards  or  10  feet.  The  ofi^  u^..^.^  ^joves 
^t  the  ordinal;  gait,  the  near  hdrse  quickens  his  movt^eflig 
XQ  conform  to  ti^g^  ^f  the  off"  horse. 


THE   DRIVER.  109 

THE  REVERSE. 

853.  The  iustructor  commands  : 
1.  D rivers,  rigitt  (or  left)  reverse.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

This.niovemeiit  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  as  the 
wheel,  the  inner  horse  describing  a  semicircle  of^O  3'ards,  and 
the  outer  one  of  12  yards,  making  his  movements  conform  to 
those  of  the-inner  one. 

TO  OBLIQUE. 

354.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Drivers,  right'(oY  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 
3.  Halt. 

Which  is  executed  according  to  the  principles  of  the  wheel, 
observing  that  the  oblique  is  one-eighth  of  a  circle,  and  that 
the  inner  horse  passes  over  an  arc  of  2:5  yards,  the  radius 
being  3:25- yards.  -  ~  • 

TO  BREAK  iNTO  COLUMN  TO  THE  FRONT. 

355.  The  instructor  command^  : 

1.  Drivers,  from  the  right,  front  into  column. 
2.  March. 

m 

At  the  word  March,  the  driver  on  the  right  moves  directly 
to  the  front.  As  soon  as  the  haunches  of  the  horse  on  the 
right  are  on  line  with  the  heads  of"  his  own  horses,  the  next 
driver  moves  5  yards  to  the  front,  obliques  to  the  right,  an(i 
again  to  the  left  and  enters  the  column.  He  then  follows  at 
the  distance  of  2  yards  from  head  to  croup. 

356.  The  change  of  direction  in  column,- the  oblique  in 
column;  to  advance  in  line;  to  march  to  a  flank,  and  the 
change  of  gait,  are  executed  on  the  same  principles  as  in  the 
instruction  for  the  canrioneer  mounted. 

TO  FORM  LINE. 

'857.  To  the  front.  The  column  being  in  march,  or  at  a 
halt,  the  instructor  commands; 


110  THE   DRIVER. 

1.  Drivers,  fovK'ard  info  line,  rifjlit  (or  left)  ohlique. 

2.  March.     3.  Left  (or  right)  i>RESS.     4.  Front. 

At  the  word  March,  the  leading  driver  advances  5  yards, 
and  halts.  The  others  oblique  to  the  righl  (or  left),  until 
opposite  their  places,  then  move  forward  and  form  at  the 
proper  distapcCj  on  the  right  (or  left)  of  the  preceding  drivers, 
and  dress. 

358.  To  the  right  or  left.     The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Drivers,  right  (or  left)  into  line^  loheel. 
2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

Each  driver  wheels  to  the  right,  and  halts  at  the  command, 
which  should  be  given  when  the  horses  are  in  the  new  direc- 
tion. 

359.  On  the  right  or  left.     The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Drivers,  on  the  right  (or  left)  into  live.     2.   March. 
3.  Halt.     4.  Right  (or  left)  Dress.     5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  as  with  the  cannoneer  mounted. 
TO  UNHARNJESS. 

360.  The  horses  having  been  returned  to  their  stalls,  or 
the  picket- rope,  the  off  horse  is  secured,  and  the  instructor 
commands : 

Unharness. 

1.  The  driver  takes  off  tlie  leg-guard,  and  hangs  it  up; 
unbridles  the  near  horse,  and  puts  up  the  bridle. 

2.  He  unbuckles  and  frees  the  crupper,  slips  the  breeching 
over  the  rump,  and  places  it  over  the  cantlo  and  on  the  seat 
of  the  saddle. 

3.  He  goes -to  the  front,  draws  the  breast  strap  well  for- 
ward through  the  links,  loosens  the  hame  straps  at  the  top, 
disconnects  the  branches  at  the'  bottom,  passes  the  breast 
strap  over  the  horse's  head,  laying  it,  with  the  hames,  over 
the  pommel. 

4.  He  loosens  the  belly-band,  and  J;hen  the  girth ;  takes 
off  the  saddle,  and  places  it  on  its*  peg,  with  the  blanket 
Qver  it. 


TUB   TEAM.  Ill 

5.  He  takes  off  and  puts  up  the  collar,  and  secures  the 
horse  by  his  halter. 

The  off  horse  is  unharnessed  rn  the  same  manner. 

After  the  drivers  have  been  taught  to  harness  and  unharness 
their  horses  properly,  they  will  be  made  to  execute  the  move- 
mentSj  without  the  motions,  by  the  simple  command,  Har- 
ness, 

THE  TEAM. 

861.  The  team  consists  of  two  or  more  pairs  of  horses,  with 
their  drivers.  The  instruction  is  given  for  three  pairs;  they 
are  denominated  the  lead^  middle,  and  loliccl  liorses.  The 
instructor  is  aided  by  one  assistant  to  every  two  teams. 

In  the  movements,  the  instructor  goes  wherever  his  presence 
may  be  necessary.  In  Itne,  the  assistants  take  post  each  on 
a  line  with  the  lead  drivers,  and  midway  between  their  teams. 
In  column,  they  are  4  yards  from  the  left  flank,  and  opposite 
the  centres  of  their  teams,  with  the  exception  of  the  assistant 
whose  teams  are  at  the  head  of  the  column,  who  takes  post  on 
the  left  of  the  leading  driver. 

ARRANGEMENTS  OF  THE  TEAMS. 

862.  The  drivers,  mounted,  are  in  one  rank,  each  pre- 
servinjr  an  interval  of  2  feet  between  his  off  horse  and  the 
near  horse  of  the  man  on  his  right. 

When  the  pieces  are  parked  in  more  than  one  line,  the 
teams  of  the  second  line  are  placed,  each  on  the  left  of  the 
corresponding  team  in  the  first  line. 

The  teams  may  be  drawn  up  in  two  or  more  lines,  if  the 
nature  of  the  ground  requires  it. 

363.  The  teams  break  into  column;  change  direction  in 
column;  halt)  and  move  off;  advance  in  line;  march  bya 
flank,  and  change  the  gaits -in  the  same  manner  as  with  the 
drivrr.  Tn  breaking  into  column,  the  middle  and  wheel  dri- 
vers follow  in  the  tracks  of  their  leaders. 

OBLIQUE  IN  COLUMN.  . 

86-1.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.    Teams,  right  (or  left)  ollique.     2.  March. 
At  the  word  March,  the  lead  driver  in  each  team  obliques 


112  THE   TEAM. 

to  the  right.  He  is  followed  by  his  middle  nnd  wheel  drivers, 
who  turn  on  the  same  ground  and  follow  his  tracks,  so  that 
each  team- is  formed  in  columns  of  pairs. 

The  lead  drivers  keep  on  a  line  with  each  other,  and  a-t 
such  distances  that,  at  the  command.  Forward,  they  ^will 
mov-e  accurately  in  column  in *the  primitive  direction. 

TO  FORM  LINE. 

365.  To  inr.  front.  The  teams  being  in  column,  in  march, 
or  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  commands :  ^ 

1.  Forward' into  line — left  ohli que.     2.  MARCn. 
3.   Guide  right.     4.  Front. 

At  the  word  March,  the  lead  team  advances  18  yards,  and 
is  halted  by  the  assistant  instructor.  The  other  teams  obli(jue 
to  the  left,  and,  when  opposite  their  positions,  move  forward 
so  as  to  place  themselves  on  the  line  9  yards  from  the  team 
which  preceded  it. 

366.  To  the  right  or  left.  Being  in  march,  or  at  a  halt, 
the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  into  line,  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 
.4.  Eight— Dress.     5.  Front* 

At  the  word  March,  the  lead  drivers,  each  followed  by 
their  middle  and  wheel  drivers,  who  turn 'upon  the  same 
ground,  wheel  to  the  right  and  move  straight  to  the  front. 
As  soon  as  the  wheel  drivers  are  in  the  new  direction,  the 
instructor  commands  :     3.  Halt.     4.  Right — Dress. 

367.  On  the  right  or  left.     Being  in  march,  the  instructor 

commands : 

♦ 

1.    On  the  right  into  line.  <  2.  March. 
■•3.   Guide  right.     4.  Front. 

,:At  the  word'  March,  the  lead  team  wheels  to  the  right, 
moves  forward,  and  when  it  has  unmasked  its  column,  is 
halted  by  its  assistant  instructor.  The  other  teams  continue 
to  advance.  Each  passes  the  one  immediately  preceding  it, 
wheels  to  the  right,  and  forms  9  yards  on.  its  left.  The 
instructor  commands  Fhont  as  soon'  as  the  last  team  is  in  line, 
'     The  alignmj^nt  is  made,  ojk.'the  lead  drivers^ 


THE  TEAM.  113 

TO  FORM  LINE  ADVANCING. 

368.  Tfee  column  marching,  the  line  of  teams  is.  formed  in 
continuing  the  march  by  the  commands  and  according  to  the 
principles  of  No.  842,  the  teams  preserving  their  intervals  of 
9  yaVds  in  line. 

OBLIQUE  IN  LINE. 

369.  The  teams  beings  in  line,  in  march,  or  at  a  lialt,  the 
instructor  commands : 

1.    Teams,  riglu  (or  left)vhlique.     2.  MARCn. 
Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  364. 

THE  REVERSE. 

370  The  teams  being  in  line  or  in  column,  in  march,  or  at 
a  bait,  to  form  faced  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1 .    Teams,-  rigid  {or  left)  reverse. 
2.  March.     8.  Halt. 

.  At  the  word  March,  the  lead  drivers  execute  the  reverse, 
and  move  forward,  as  in  No.  353.  The  middle  and  wheel 
drivers  execute  the  reverse  on  the  same  ground,  and  follow 
the  tracks  of  their  leaders.  When  thej  are  all  accurately  in 
the  new  direction,  the  instructor  commands  Halt,  or 
Column,  Halt. 

If  he  wishes  to  move  forward  at  the  completion  of  the 
reverse,  instead  of  the  command  Halt,  the  instructor  com- 
mands :  Forward,  Guide  right  (or  left^,  or  Column,  FOR- 
WARD, as  thc'casc  may  be. 

THE  riECE  HORSED. 

371.  The  carriages  are  taken  in  the  park,  either  in  one  line, 
or,  as  usually  parked,  with  the  caissons  in  rear  of  their  pieces. 
Several  pieces  may  be  united  for  instruction.  The  teams  are 
always  formed  as  if  the  carriages  were  iu  one  line,  the  teams 
of  the  rciir  carriages  on  Uic  left  of  those  of  the  leading  car- 
riages of  the  same  file. 


114  THE  TEAM. 


TO  ENTER  THE  TARK. 

372.  The  teams  being  formed  in  line  in  the  same  order  as 
the  carriages  to  which  they  belong,  approach  the  park  as  cir- 
cumstances require.  If  they  are  to  enter  by  its  left,  they  are 
broken  into  column  from  the  right;  if  by  the  right,  they  are 
broken  from  the  left. 

The  instructor  directs  the  column  towards  the  flank  of  the 
park,  and  when  its  head  is  near  the  first  carriage,  he  com- 
mands : 

1.   Teams,  to  your  post^.  .  2.  March. 

At  the  word  March,  the  column  takes  such  a  dire'ction  as 
will  lead  it  in  front  of  and  near  the  poles  of  the  carriages,  and 
parallel  to  the  line  of  thje  park,  each-  team,  when  within  3  yards 
of  its  carriage,  changes  its  direction  to  the  left,  and  halts. 

If  there  are  several  lines  of  carriages,  the  teams  of  the 
second  break  off  from  those  of  the  first  at  the  word  March, 
and  form  a  column  which  executes,  with  reference  to  the 
second  line,  a  similar  movement  to  tliat  just  prescribed. 

If  the  teams  are  in  line,  in  front  or  in  rear  of  the  park,  and 
the  spaces  between  the  carriages  sufficient,  they  are  marched 
towards  the  park  in  line,  and  the  instructor  commands: 
Teams,  to  your  posts — March.  The  teams,  passing  to  the 
right  of  their  respective  carriages,  take  their  positions  in  front 
of  the  poles. 

HITCHING  THE  TEAMS. 
373.  The  instructor  dismounts  the  drivers,  and  commands  : 

HircH. 

At  this  command,  each  driver  goes  in  front  of  his  horses, 
and  faces  them.  The  wheel  driver  backs  his  horse  so  that 
they  can  be  hitched,  opens  tiie  branches  of  the  pole  yoke, 
fixes  the  toggles  to  the  sliding  rings,  commencing  with  his  off 
horse,  and  fastens  the  polo  straps,  or  chain,  to  the  slidini^ 
loops  of  the  breast  strarps,  commencing  with  his  near  horse. 
He  then  goes  in  rear  of  his  off  horse,  passing  by  the  right, 
detaches  his  traces  and  hitches  thcn>  to  the  splinter  bar,  com- 
mencing with  theinner  trace  of  the  near  and  ending  with  the 


TUE   TEAM'.  115 

outer  one  of  the  off  horse,  ile  thsn  passes  round  the  rear  of 
the  carriage  at  a  double-quick,  detaches  the  outer  trace  of  the 
near  horse,  hitches  it,  and  resumes  the  position  of  Stand  to 

HORSE. 

The  middle  driver,  as  soon  as  the  pole  straps  are  secured, 
backs  his  horses,  moves  behind  .his  off  horse,  passing  by  the 
ri<iht,  detaches  the  traces,  and  when  the  off  wheel  horse  is 
hitched,  fastens  them,  commencing  with  the  outer  trace,  and 
being  careful  to  put  the  inner  traces  above  the  pole  straps. 
He  hnishes  by  hitching  the  outer  trace  of  the  near  horse,  and 
resumes  the  position  of  Stand  To  horse.  • 

The  lead  driver  .regulates  himself  by  the  middle  driver, 
conforming  himself  to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  that 
driver. 

374.  Wlien  the  cannoneers  are  at  their  posts  in  time,  they 
may  be  required  to  hitch  instead  of  the  drivers.  When  this 
is  done,  the  drivers  arc  not  dismounted.  At  the  command, 
Cannoneer]  IIiTCH,  Nos.  1,  2,^  and  4  hitch  the  horses  of 
the  caisson,  the  gunner -and  Nos.  5,  6  and  7  those  of  the 
piece.  Each  hitches  on  his  own  side,  Nos.  1,  2,  5  and  the 
gunner  attending  to  the  wheel  horses. 

The  command,  CannoneerSj  Unhitch,  is  executed  in  a 
corresponding  manner.  •         •      . 

TO  UN  PARK. 

375.  Everything  being  in  proper  order,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

Stand  to  horse.    . 

At  this,  the  drivers  come  to  attention ;  the  wheel  driver 
runs  to  the  end  of  the  splinter  bar,  lifts  it,  raises  and  fastens 
the  pole  prop,  and  resumes  his  position;  the  instructor  then 
mounts  the  drivers,  and  commands  : 

1.  B^  piece  J  from  the  right — front  into  column. 
2.  March. 

At  the  word  March,  the  carriages  of  the  right  file  move 
straight  to  the  front,  and  arc  fyllowod  by  those  of  the  next 
file  on  the  left,  the  leading  one  of  which,  commencing  to  move 
when  the  hind  wheels  of  the  rear  carriage  of  the  right  file  are 
opposite  its  leaders,  obliques  to  the  rigiit  and  takes  its  place 


116  THE   TEAM. 

in  column.   -The  carriages  presefve  in  column  the  distance  of 
2  yards  from  each  other. 

TO  WHEEL. 

376.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Pieces, 'hft  icheel     2.  March.    .3.  Halt. 

At  the  word  March,  the  teams  wheel  to  the  left,  as  in  No. 
366,  and  move  directly  to  the  front.  The  command  Halt 
is  given  when  the  rear  carriages  are  in  the  new  direction. 

In  the;  wheelings,  and  in  the  movements  whiich  depend  on 
them,  the  lead  drivers  enter  the  new  direction  without  making 
their  horses  pull;  the  middle  drivers  do  tlie  same;  and  it  is 
not  until  the  wheel  drivers  are  in  the  new  direction  that  the 
traces  are  stretched. 

TO  OBLIQUE. 

377.  The  pieces  being  in  line^  or  in  column,  the  instjuctor 
commands :  .  .        • 

1.  Pieces,  left  (or  right)  oblique. 
2.  ^Jarcu.    -3.  Halt. 

Which  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  a  wheel,  observing 
that* the  oblique  is  a  h^lf-wheel. 

TO  REVERSE. 

378.  Being  in  line  or  in  column,  to  establish  the  carriages 
in  the  opposite  direction,  the  instructor  commands : 

,  1.  Piece's,  left  (or  right)  reverse. 

2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  word  March,  the  teams  reverse  as  in-  No.  o70j  so 
as  to  turn  the  carriages  on  the  shortest  curve  its  construction 
will  permit,  and  then  move  to  the  front. 

Tbe  command  Halt  is  given  when  the  carriages  are  straight 
in  the  opposite  direction. 

THE  ABOUT. 

379.  To  establish  the  carrragcs  in  the  opposite  direction 
and  on  the  same  ground,  the  insJ;ructor  commands: 

1.  Pieces,  left  about.     2.  March.     3.     Halt. 


THE   TEAM.  117 

At  the  word  March,  the  drivers  oblique  the  horses  to  the 
right;  and  the  leading  driver,  after  uiovinc;  7  yards  in  that 
direction,  reins  his  horses  to  the  left  in  such  a  manner  that 
the  extreme  part  of  the  curve  they  describe -shall  be  14  yards 
from  their  point  of  departure,  and  that,  after  passing  3  yards 
to  the  left  of  the  original  line  of  direction,  they  shall  return 
to  the  ground  on  which  the  carriage  first  stood.  The  other 
drivers  direct  their  horses  so  that  the  limber  wheels  shall 
describe  a  loop,  which,  extending  7  yards  to  the  right  and  11 
to  the  front  of  the  position  occupied  by  the  leaders  before 
starting,  shall  pass  a  little  to  the  left  of  the  line  of  direction, 
and  return  in  such/  a  manner  that  the  hind  wheels,  without 
crossing  that  direction,  shall  be  brought  to  the  position  from 
which  the  leaders  started. 

The  command  Halt  is  given  as  soon  as  the  leading  horses 
reach  the  ground  on  which  the  hind  'wheels  stood  at  the  com- 
mencement of  the  movement. 

380.  'When  it  is  desired,  to  move  forward,  at  the  completion 
of  the  foregoing  movements,  instead  of  the  command  Halt, 
the  instructor  commands : 

Forward  ; 
and  the.  pieces  move  direct  to  tHe  front. 

TO  REST. 

381.  The  instructor  dismounts  the  drivers;  and  whenever 
the  drivers  are  dismounted,  and  immediately  on  dismounting, 
the  wheel  driver  lets  down  the  pole  prop,  the  instructor  then 
commands : 

Eest. 

382.  To  resume  the  exercise,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Attention  ! 

At  this,  the  wheel  drivers  raise  and  fasten  the  pole  props, 
and  all  take  their  posts. 

TO  REIN  BACK  TO  THE  RIGHT. 

383.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1-   Pieces,  to  the  riijht  and  hackward. 
*ii    Mardh.    3.  Halt. 


118  THE    TEAM. 

At  the  first  command,  the  drivers  direct  the  pole  to  the 
right,  without  advancing  or  backing  the  carriiige.  At  tho 
second,  they  rein  hack  the  horses  as  in  No.  '>02,  taking  care 
to  keep  them  to  the  right. 

At  the  word  Halt,  they  place  the  team  and  carriage  in  line, 
and  halt,  stretching  the  traces. 

Baching  to  the  left  is  effected  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples, and  by  inverse  means. 

TO  PARK. 

384.  The  instructor  directs  the  column  towards  the  park, 
and  gives,  according  to  the  position  of*  the  ground  oh  which 
the  pieces  are  to  be  parked,  one  of  the  following  commands : 

.  T   (  Forward  into  park — right  (or  left')  oblique. 

'   .   , ,  J         <  To  the  right  (or  left)  into  park. 
(_  On  the  fight  (or  left)  into  park. 
2.  March. 

To  form  forvmrd  into  park.  The  column  approaches  tho 
park  from  the  rear,  the  leading  piece  being  in  rear  of  the 
ground  on  which  it  is  to  Test.  At  the  word  March,  the 
leading  piece  marches  direct  to  the  front  and  halts,*  on  the 
caution  of  the  instructor,  at  its  proper  place ;  all  the  other 
carriages  oblique  to  the  right  and  then  move  up  to  their 
places  in  line. 

To  form  to  the  right  (or  left)  into  park.  The  instructor, 
approaching  the  park  by  its  right,  directs  the  column  parallel 
to  the  front  and  40  yards  behind  it.  At  the  word  March, 
which  is  given  when  the  leading  piece  is  3  yards  from  the 
point- opposite  the  position  it  is  to  occupy,  it  is  wheeled  to  the 
right,  moved  forward,  and  halts  at  its  position.  The  other 
carriages  move  straight  forward ;  each  one  wheels  to  the  right 
when  3  yards  from  the  point  opposite  the  position  it  is  to 
occupy  in  park,  marches  forward,  and  places  itself  on  the 
right  of  and  in  line  with  those  already  established. 

To  form  to  the  left  into  park  is  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

To  form  on  the  right  into  park.  The  instructor,  approach- 
ing the  park  by  its  right,  directs  the  column  parallel  to  the 
front  and  40  yards  in  rear. 


THE   TEAM.  119 

The  leading  piece  is  wheeled  to  the  right  and  established  in 
its  position  as  before;  the  next,  passing  in  rear  of  it,  places 
itself  in  line  on  its  left  in  like  manner,  and  so  with  the  others. 

When  the  park  consists  of  two  or  more  lines,  the  same 
principles  are  observed  ',  each  carriage  of  the  rear  rank  follows 
its  file  leader  in  its  moveraents. 

The  park  should  be  formed  on  the  left 'according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

TO  UNHITCH. 

385.  The  park  being  formed,  the  instructor  causes  the 
drivers  to  disrdount  as  prescribed,  and  commands  : 

Unhitch. 

The  lead  driver  goes  in  front  of  his  horses,  faces  towards 
them,  backs  them  in  order  to  unhitch  more  easily,  lashes  the 
reins  of  the  near  horse  to  the  coupling  rein,  then  passing  by 
the  left  of  his  near  horse,  unhitches  his  traces,  commencing 
with  the  outer  one,  bends  them  and  fastens  them  by  means 
of  the  trussing  straps.  He  unhitches  the  off  horse  in  the 
same  manner,  commencing,  however,  with  the  inner  trace, 
and,  having  finished,  passes  to  rear  of  his  horses,  and  resumes 
the  position  of  stand  to  horse,  first  unlasjiing  the  reins. 

The  middle  driver  unhitches,  conforming  to  what  has  been 
prescribed  for  the  lead  driver. 

The  wheel  driver  goes  to  the  splinter  bar,  lets  down  the 
pole  prop,  unhitches",  bends  and  fastens  the  traces  of  the  near 
horse,  and  the  inner  trace  of  his  off  horse,  passes  at  double- 
quick  around  the  carria2;e,  unhitches  and  fastens  the  outer 
traces  of  the  off  horse;  then  goes  in  front  of  his  horses,  and, 
commencing  with  the^near  horse,  unfastens  the  pole  straps, 
detaches  the  toggles  from  the  sliding  rings,  commencing  with 
the  off  horse,  unites  the  branches  of  the  pole  yoke,  and 
resumes  the  position  of  Stand  to  horse. 

• 

TO  LEAVE  THE  PARK. 
886.  The  instructor  mounts  the  drivers,  and  commands: 

1.   By  team.,  from  the  riijht  (or  left)— front  into  column. 
^  2.  Maucit. 


120  THE   SECTION. 

*At  the  command  March,  tho  right  (or  left.)  team  moves  to 
the  front  until  it  is  disengaged  from  the  pole,  and  then 
changes  its  direction  at  the  command  of  the  instructor.  If 
the  carriages  are  in  two  or  more  ranks,  the  teams  of  the  same 
file  follow  each  other,  if  the  intervals  between  the  carriages 
are  sufficient  for  their  passage.  They  are  followed  by  the 
other  teams  or  filffs  of  teams,  which  enter  the  column  so  as  to 
leave  the  proper  distances  between  the  pairs. 

If  there  is  not  sufficient  intervals  between  the  carriages  for 
the  passage  of  the  teams,  the  instructor  commands: 

.^  1.    Teams,  l>y  the  rigid  (or  left)  Jianh. 

2.  March,     o.  Forward. 

Each  team  wheels  as  directed,  and  moves  forward.  As  the 
heads  of  the  column  pass  out  of  the  park,  the  teams  of  the 
rear  rank  oblique  to  the  left  or  right,  and  take  their  proper 
places  in  column,  in  rear  (or  front)  of  the  teams  of  the  front 
carriages  of  their  files. 

The  teams  are  then  marched  to  the  stables,  or  pickets,  by 
the  means  already  prescribed. 

THE  SECTION. 

In  the  battery  of  manoeuvre,  the  section  is  composed  of  two 
pieces  and  two  caissons,  horsed  and  prepared  for  service. 

The  piece  and  its  caisson  are  kept  in  a  fixed  relation  to 
each  other,  and  maybe  said  to  constitute  a  unit;  the  word 
piece  being  often  used  to  designate  the  piece  and  its  caisson, 
being  taken  together.  They  arc  separated  only  in  the  forma- 
tions in  battery,  and  this  simplifies  the  manoeuvre  greatly, 
rendering  it  generally  unnecessary  to  give  separate  commands 
to^the  caissons.  • 

In  the  manoeuvres,  it  is  immaterial  which  carriage  leads. 
AH  the  movements  should  be  executed  with  the  caissons  in 
front,  after  they  have  been  executed  with  the  pieces  leading. 

In  mounted  batteries  the  cannoneers  wear  their  sabre  belts 
only,  the  sabres  being  carried  on  the  ammunition  chests.  The 
drivers,  and,  in  horse  artillery^  the  cannoneers  also,  wear 
their  sabros,  unless  otherwise  directed. 

During  the  real  execution  of  the  firings,  each  chief  of  piece 
dismoTints  and  gives  the  reins  of  his  hbrse  to  the  driver  of  the 


THE    SECTION.  121 

wheel  horses  of  the  limber.  In  horse  artillery/  the  chief  of 
caisson  also  dismounts  and  gives  the  reins  of  his  horse, to  the 
wheel  driver  of  the  caisson.  Tn  the  manoeuvres  of  the  section 
the  chief  of  the  section  is  'oi;dinarily  the  instructor.  The 
posts  of  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  are  the  same 
as  when  the  section  forms  part  df  a  battery;  and  a, single 
section  can  be  exercised  in  all  the  formatio,ns  required  of  it  as 
prescribed  in 'the  School  of  the  Battery,  substituting  the  word 
Seciion  for  that  of  Bafteri/.  It  is,  therefore,  thought  unne- 
cessary to  inijlude  here  the  manoeuvres  of  an  isolated  section. 


122  BCUOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 


Stjjool  of  tj)c  '^dtcrg. 


S87.  This  applies  especially  to  batteries  whose  caunoueers 
are  not  mounted  ;  but  it  becomes  equally  applicable"  to  horse 
artillery,  by  inserting  the  proper  intervals  and  distances  \yith 
the  detachments  of  mounted  cannoneers.  (See  the  orders  in 
column,  in  line,  and  in  battery.)   • 

When  the  detachments  in  horse  ariillery  are  required,  to 
make  any  particular  movements,  directions  will  be  given 
them. '  But  in  general,  as  they  have  only  to  follo^v  2  yards 
in  rear  of  the  muzzles  of  their  pieces^  they  will  not  be 
mentioned. 

When  the  caissons  arc  detached,  which  is  frequently  the 
case  with  horse  artillery,  and  sometimes  with  mounted  batte- 
ries, the  intervals  and  distances  between  the  pieces  for 
manoeuvreing  will  be  the  same  as  though  the  caissons  were 
present,  so  that  the  necessary  ground  for  wheeling  into  line, 
etc.,  may  be  preserved.  Batteries  should  be  practiced  in  this 
kind  of  man(jcuyreing  accordingly. 

Measures  of  the  elements  composing  a  lattery, 
and  of  its  formations. 

388.  The  measures  given  in  the  following  table,  and  those 
to  be  given  hereafter,  result  from  the  dimensions  of  the 
different  elements  embraced. 

The  numbers  adopted  have  been  chosen  to  avoid  fractions. 


SCHOOL  p,E   TliE   EAJtTERY. 


12a 


Pieces  dra'wa  by  six  horses 

Caisson  drawn  by  six  horses 

I/iniber  drawn  by  six  horses 

riocc  in  battery  with  handspike; '..,, 

Detachment  of  harse'cannoneers^ 

-     -    • 


Column  of  sections 

Line  of  battle 

Line  in  battery 

Section  in  line 

Section  in  battery.. 


1 

MOUNTED  BATTERY. 

HORSE  AR 

Depth. 

Front. 

Depth. 

yards. 

yards. 

yards. 

94 

18 

115 

30 

82    : 

37 

47 

82 

47 

30 

18   1 

;   37 

47 

18 

1 

1   47 

1 

Front. 


yards. 

21 
97 
97 
21 
21 


When"  all  the  carriages  are  drawn  by  four  horses,  the  inter- 
vals arc  diminished  3  yards;  when  they  are  drawn  by  eight 
horses,  the  intervals  are  increased  3  yards,  the  distance  being 
the  same  in  each  case. 

Should  a  portion  of  the  teams  be  reduced  _  a  pair  of 
horses  or  more,  allowance  must  be  made  for  deficient  horses 
by  increasing  the  rh'sfance  of  those  carriages  accordingly, 
estimating  the  length  of  a  pair  of  horses  in  harness  at  3  yards. 
In  both  kinds  of  artillery  these  arrangements  are  the  same, 
whether  the  pieces  or  caissons  lead. 

FORMATIONS  OF  THE  BATTERY. 
ORDER   IN    COLUMN. 

389.  The  order  in  column  is  that'  in  which-  the  battery  is 
formed  by  sections ;  the  carriages  being  in  two  fileS;  and  each 


124  SCHOOL    OF   THE  BAI'TERlk 

piece  followed  or  preceded  by  its  caisson -at  .a  distance  of  2 
yards. 

The  captain  is  generally  14  yards  from  the  column  and 
opposite  its  centre.  But  during  the  manoeuvres,  he  goes 
wherever  bis  presence  may  be  necessftry,  and  where  his  com- 
mands may  be  beat  heard. 

Each  chief  of  section  is  in  line  with  bis  leading  drivers,  and 
midway  bcfcween  his  leading^carrir.ges. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  is  in  line  with  the  captain^, 
on  the  opposite  side  of  the  column,  and  4  yards  from  it.  But 
he  does  not  change  his  position  to  conform  to  that  of  the 
captain. 

Each  chief  of  piece  is  on  the  Jeft  and  near  the  leading  dri- 
ver -of  his  leading  carriage.  In  horse  artillery,  when  the 
chiefs  of  caissons  are  mounted,  each  chief  of  carriage  is  near 
the  leading  driver  on  his  left.  The  trumpeters  are  near  the 
captain.  -  ' 

The  gnidon  is  habitually  next  the  chief  of  the  leading 
piece,  or  guide  of  the  leading  section,  but  takes  post  wherever 
-the  captain  may  direct. 

1)1  mounted  batteries^  the  interval  between  tbe  carriages  is 
14  yards.  The  distance  between  the  carriages  is  2  yards. 
The  cannoneers  are  in  file  on  each  side  of  their  pieces,  or 
mounted  on  the  chcst^.. 

In  horse  artillery^  the  interval  between  the  carriages  is  17 
yards.  The  distance  between  the  carriages,  and  betwqen  the 
carriages  and-  detachments,  is  2  yards.  The  detachments, 
formed  in  two  ranks,  afe  2  yards  in  rear  of  their  pieces. 

In  both  kinds  of  artillery,  these  "arrangements  for  ths 
column  are  the  sam&,  whether  the  pieces  or  caissons  lead. 


-    ORDER  IN  LINE. 

390.  The  order  in  line  is  that  in  which  the  carriages  are 
formed  in  two  lines ;  the  horses  all  facing  in  the  same  direc- 
tion, the  pieces  limbered,  and  each  followed  or  preceded. by  its 
caisson. 

The  captain  is  generally  4  yards  in  front  of  the  centre; 
but,  during  the  manoeuvres,  wherever  Lis  presence  may  be 
necBBSary,  or  hie  commands  lieet  heard.     Each  chief  of  section 


gCROOL   0?'   THE   EATT 


i#^      '  125 


is  in  litie  witb  his  leading  drivers^  and  midway  between  the 
leading  carrinores  of  his  scctioo. 

The  chief  of  caissons  is  opposite  the  centre  and  4  yards  in. 
rear  of  the  line  of  carriages. 

Each  chief  of  piece  and  cuiVsoQ  is  in  the  same  position  as 
"n'column. 

The  trumpeters,  when  they  do  not  accompany  the  captain, 
are  in  line  with  the  leading-'drivers,  and  4  yardsfrom  the 
right  flank.  ■     "  • 

The  guidon  is  on  the  left  of  the  tji'umpeters. 

Ill  mountfd  artillery^  the  interval  between  the  carriages  is 
14:  yari'ds ;  the  distance  between  thetwo  lines  is  2  yard^.;  and 
the  catinoucers  "are  at  their  posts  as  in  column. 

In  Iwrac  artllhry^  the  interval  between  the  carriages  is  17 
^yards;  the  distance  between  the  lines  of  pieces,  detachments, 
and  caissons, -is  2  yards;  and  the  detachments  are  2  yards  in 
rear  of  their  pieces.     ,  ,  ' 

In  both  kinds  of  artillery,  tLese  arrangements  for  the  line 
are  the  same,  whether  the  pieces  or  caissons  lead. 

OHDER  IN  BATTERY. 

301.  T\\Q  order,  hi  hatter ij,  IS  that  in  which  the  pieces  arc 
prepared,  for  firing ;  the  pieces,  limbers,  and  caissons,  being 
turned  towards  the  enemy,  and  formed  in  three  parallel  lines. 

The  captain  is  generally  on  the  left  of  the  chief  of  the 
centre  section,  but  he  goes  wherever  his  presence  is  required. 

liach  chief  of  section  is  habitually  in  the  centre-  of  his 
section,  half  way  between  the  lines  of  pieces  and  limbers. 

The  chief  of  caissons  is  opposite  the  centre,  4  yards  in  rear 
of  the  line  of  caissons. 

Each  chief  of  piece  is  outside  the  file  on  the  left  of  his 
piece,  but  near  it,  and  opposite  the  middle  of  the  trail  band- 
pike.  .  During  the  real  execution  of  tlie  firings,  he  habitually 
dismounts  and  gives  the  reins  of  his  horse  to  the  driver  of  the 
whe<l  Horses  of  the  limber,  and  takes  his  place  on  the  right 
or  left  of  the  piece,  in  such  position  as  will  best  enable  jiini 
to  ob.-<erv«'  the  efF<3ct  of  the  shot.  .  ' 

Each  chief  of  caisson  is  on  the  left,  and  4  yards  in  rear  of 
the  limber  of  the  piece.  In  bolse  artillery  he  gives  the  reins 
of  r>7s  horse  to  tlie  driver  of  the  wheel  horses 'of  the  caisson. 


126  ^i^ 


OL   OF  THE   BATTERY. 


The  buglers  are  near  the  captain;  the  guidon  on  the  flank 
of  the  line  of  caissons.  '  * 

In  monntfil  Laftcrfes,  the  interval  between  the  pieces  is  14 
jards;  the  distance  between  the  lines  of  pieces  and  limbers 
is  6  yards,  measuring  from  the  end  of  the  handspike  to  the 
headsof  the  leading  horses. 

The  distance  between  the  lines  of  limbers  and  caissons  is  11 
yartis,  measuring  from  the  rear'of  the  limbers  to  the  heads  of 
the-leadiwg  horses  of  the  caissons.  .  " 

The  cannoneers  are  atjtheir  posts. 

Ill  horse  ai'tUlcri/,  the  interval  between  the  pieces  is  17 
jards.;  the  distance  betwe"en  the  lines  of  pieces  and. limbers  is 
6  yards,  jiiea^ured  as  before;  the  distance  between  the  lines 
©f  limbers  ^nd  caissons  is  11  yards,  measured  as  before;  the 
cannoneers  are  at  their  posts;  and  the  detachments  of  horses 
are  4-yards  in  rear.of  thc-limbers. 

The  regular  formation  in  battery  sjiould  always  be  pre- 
served in  the  manoeuvres.  But  on  the  field  of  battle  the  front 
wolild  be  commonly  more  extended ;  the  pieces  being  posted 
so  as  to  obtain  the  greatest  advantage  from  th"e  nature  of  the 
ground,  and  the  cais:ions  sheltered  as  much  .as  possible. 

When  a  battery  retires  firing,  the  horses  and  drivers  in 
both  kinds  of  artillery  remain  faced  to  the  rear,  after  the  firsfc 
retrograde  movement,  that  they  may  be  ready  to  continue  it. 

MANNING'  THE  BATTERY. 

802.  The  gun  detachments  and  teams,  having  been  pro- 
perly told  off,  are  marched  to  the  park  with  the  teams  in  front. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  and  caissons,  when  mounted,  march 
with  the  teanis.  The  whole  are  conducted  .tothe  battery,  the 
teams  hitched,  and  detachments  posted,  as  prescribed. 

iVs  soon  as  the  teanis  are  hitched  and  cannoneers  posted,  a 
minute  inspection  is  made  by  the  chiefs  of  pieces,  who  report 
to  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  a  similar  inspection  is  made  by 
the  chiefs  of  sections,  who  report  to  the  ciiptnin." 

The  officers,  after  reportinir,  will  draw  their  sabres  without 
waiting  for  ^  command  to  that  effect.  The  chiefs  of  pieces 
will  draw  theirs  on  an  intimation  from  the  captain. 

In  mounted  batteries  the  cannoneers  wear  thqii'  sabre  belts 
only,  the  sabres  being  carried  on  the  ammunition  chests.     The 


SCHOOL   OP   TIIE   BATTERY.  127 

drivers,  and,  in  liovse  artillery^  the  cannoneers  also,  wear  their 
sabres,  unless  special  directions  are  given  to  the  contrary. 

TO  UNPARK. 

393.  Everything  being  prepared  for  manoeuvring,  if  the 
captain  wishes  to  unpark  by  the  right,  he  coramaods  : 

*  1.  By  piece— ^from  the  riijlit — front  into  column. 
2.  March. 

At  the  command  March,  the  right  piece,  followed  by  its 
caisiion,  marches  direct  to  the  front,  and  the  captain 'indicates 
the  direction  it'should  take.  The  other  pieces  and  caissons 
follow  the  movement  of  the  right  piece,  each,,  so  regulating 
its  march  by  that  which  precedes  it,  as  to  march  in  the  same 
direction,  and  two  yards  behind.  Each  chief  of  section  di- 
rects the  march  of  his  carriages,  which  are  so  conducted  'by 
their  chiefs  as  to  enter  the  column  by  the  most  simple  move- 
ment. The.column  of  pieces  is  thus  formed  with  n  distance 
of  2  yards  between  the  carriages ;  and  in  horse  artillery 
with  the  same  distance  .between  the  carriages  and  detach- 
ments. 

The  captain  goes  wherever  his  duty;may  require,  but  gen- 
erally remains  on  the  left  flank,  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
column. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  places  himself  near  the 
chief  of  the  leading  piece,  and  on  his  >eft;  the  other  chiefs 
of  sections  4  yards  from  the  left  flank,  abreast  the  centres 
of  their  respective  sections. 

The, chief  of  the  line  of  cais.^o.ns  is  opposite  the  centre  of 
the  column  and  4  yards  from  the  right  flank. 

Each  chief  of  piece  and  caisson,  when  mounted,  is  near 
his  leading  driver,  on  the  left. 

The  trumpeter  is  near  the  captain. 

When  the  battery  is  parked  with  the  caissons  in  front,  the 
captain  causes  it  to  unpark  by  the  right  by  the  same  com- 
mands; the  movements  bcin;;  executed  in  the  same  muoner. 

The  battery  may  be  unparked  by  the  left  according  to  the 
sjMuo  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

394.  The  column  of  pieces  is  not  to  be  considtred  a  column 
of  manoeuvre.     It  will   be  chanpred  into  a  column  of  sections 


128  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

as  soon  as  the  nature  of  the  gnjund  will  permit.  But  the 
exigencies  of  service  someliiues  require  that  formations  .into 
line  and  battery  should  be  made  directly  from  theaolumn  of 
pieces.  In  such  cases,  the  principled  and  commands  laid  do'Wn 
for  similar  formations  from  the  column  of  sections,  will  gov-' 
em.  In  the  formations  to  the  right  or  left,  the  pieces  must 
close  up,  aad  wheel  successively  when  opposite  their  proper 
places. 

TO  HALT. 

395.  To   halt  the   battery,  when   marching  in   column  of 
pieces,  the  captain- commands  : 

1.    Column.     2.  IIalT. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections, 
all  the  carnages  are  immediately  halted. 

CHANGE  OF  GAIT. 

396.  The  changes  of  gait,  in  column  of  pieces,  are  exe- 
cuted by  the  following  commands  from  the  captain  : 

To  pass  from  the  walk  to  jf  trot. 

1.   Trot.     2.  March. 
To  pass  from  a  trot  to  a  walk. 

1.    Walk.     2.  Makch. 

At  the  first  command,  repoatod  by  the  chiefs  of  sections, 
all  the  drivers  and  others  on  horseback  prepare  to  change  the 
gait;  and  at  the  second,  repeated  in  like  manner,  they  pass 
at  once  to  the  gait  indicated  by  the^  first  command. 

TO  FORM  SECTIONS. 

897.  When  the  battery  is  marching  at  a  walk  in  column  of 
pieces,  to  form  «ecfcions  at  the  same  gait  by  gaining  ground  to 
the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  sections,  hft  oLUquc.     2.  March. 
8.'  Guide  right. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  129 

The  chifef  of  the  leading  section  repeats  the  "Commands, 
Form  section,  left  ohUque,  March,  Gui<Ie  right,  in  succession 
after  the  captain.  At  the  command  March,  the  two  first 
carriages,  piece  and  caisson,  continue  to  march,  and  halt  when 
they  have  advanced  5  yards.  The  two  following  gain  their 
interval  of  14  yards  by  obliquing  to  the  left,  arid  place. them- 
selves abreast  and  parallel  with  the  other  two. 

The  other  sections  continue  to  march  in  column  of  pieces, 
and  are  formed  successively  by  their  chiefs;  each  command- 
ing. Form  section,  left  oblique^  in  time  to  command  March, 
when  the  leading  carriage  of  "his  section  has  arrived  within  6 
yards  of  its  distance.-  The  chief  of  section  then  jcommands, 
Guide  right. 

When  the  column  of. pieces  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  for- 
mation is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by* 
the  same  commands.  But  the  leading  carriages,  instead  of 
advancing  5  yards  and  halting  as  before,  pass  to  a  walk  as 
soon  as  the  command  March  is  repeated  by  tue  chief  of  sec- 
tion. The  other  sections  continue  to  march  at  a  trot,  and 
execute  the  movement  at  that  gait;  the  two  leading  carriages 
of  each  section  passing  to  a  walk  at  the  cornmand  March, 
which  must  be.given  when  they  have  closed  to  their  proper 
distance. 

Vv^ien  the  column  of  pieces  is  at  a  halt,  .the  formation  is 
executed  as  prescribad  for  the  column  at  a  walk.  In  this  case 
the  carriages  all. move  at  the  command  March,  and  the  lead- 
ing ones  halt  after  advancing  5  yards." 

When  the  column  of  pieces  is  marching  at  a  walk",  to  form 
sections  at  a  trot  gaining  ground,  to  the  left,  the  captain  com- 
mands :  • 

1.   Form  serf  ions,  loft  Clique,  trot.     2.  March. 
o.    Guide  right. 

The  chief  6f  the  leading  section  repeats  the  commands, 
Form  .SfcV;V;?i.  Ir/t  oblique,  trot;  MaRCH;  Guide  riglit^m 
succession,  after  the  captain.  At  the  command^  March,  the 
two  lea(3ing  carriages  continue  to  march  in  the  Original  direc- 
tion at  a  walk.  The  two  following  oblique  to  the  left,  gain 
their  interval  at  a  trot,  and  resume  the  walk  when  opposite 
the  leading  carriages. 

At  the  first  command,  tho  chiefs  of  the  other  sections  com- 


130  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

mand  trot ;  and  at  tlie  second^  which  they  repeat,  their  sec- 
tions commence  the  trot. 

The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  third  sections  command,  Form 
section,  left  ohlujue,  \n  time  to  command  March,  when  the 
leading  carriage  of  each  section  has  nearly  gained  its  distance. 
The  leacj'ing  carriage  then  resumes  the  walk,  and  the  chief  of 
section  commands,  Guide  right. 

Tlie  chiefs  of  sections  superintend  their  carriages,  and  take 
'the  posts  assigned  them  in  the  order  in  column  as  soon  as 
their  sections  are  formed. 

Sections  are  formed  by  gainir>g  ground  to  the  right  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

THE  BATTERY  BEING  IN-  COLUMN. OF  PIECES,  TO  FORM 
-       THE  CAISSONkS  ON  THE  FLANK. 

39S.  When  the  battery  is  in  column  of  pieces  with  the 
caissons  in  re^,  to  form  the  pieces  and  caissons  into  separate 
columns,  as  in  the  fl^nk  march  of  a  "battery  in  line,  the  cap- 
tain commands : 

r.    Caissons  left  (or  caissons  left,  trot).     2.  MARCH. 
3.    Guide  right. 

These  commands 'are  repeated  by  t-hc  chiefs  of  sections,  the 
caissons  oblique  at  once  tcr  thp  left,  gain  the  interval-  of  14 
yards,  and  place  themselves  opposite  their  pieces;  the  pieces 
closing  upon  each  other  at  the  same  time  to  the  usual  dis- 
tance. The  gait  is  regulated  as  in  the  formation  of  sections; 
and  when  the  movement  is  performed  at  a  walk,  the  leading 
oarriagc  halts  after  advancing  its  own  length. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  take,itheir  places  as  in  column  of 
sections. 

The  caissons  are  formed  on  the  right  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means.    • 

*WBen  the  pieces  rtre  in  rear,  they  are  formed  on  the  right 
or  left  of  their  caissons  in  the  same  manner  and  by  corres- 
ponding comoiands. 

TO  MARCH  IN  COLUMN. 

899.  The  battery  being  in  column  at  a  halt,  to  advance,  the 
captain  conimands  ;  '    •' 


SCHOOL    QF   THE   BATTERY.  131 

1.    Column,  forward.     2.  MaRCII. 
3.    Guide  left  (or  right). 

The  commands  Forward,  March;  Giiide  left  (ov  rifjht),  are 
repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At  the  command  March, 
all  the  carriages  advance,  the  guide  maintains  the  direction, 
and  the.  carriages,  as  well  as  the  detachments  of  horse  can- 
noneers, preserve  their  intervals  and  distances. 

TO  MARCH  BY  A  FLANK. 

40(^jrhe  battery  being  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a  halt, 
to  gain  ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.'  Column,  h\j  the  left  Jicink.     2.   Marcu. 

,The  commands,  By  the  ieft  flanh^  March,  are  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  sections.  At-  the  command  March,  each,  car- 
riacjc  wheels  at  once  to  the  left. 

When  the  wheel  is,  nearly  completed,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Forward.     2.  Guide  right. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  th'e  chiefs  of  sections. 
At  the  command  Forward,  all. the  carriages  march  direct  to 
the  front.  '  *     .       ~  . 

The  line  is  regularly  established,  and  the  carriages  aligned 
in  each  rank,  with  their  distances  of  2,  and  intervals  of  14 
yards.  The  chiefs  of  sections  take  their  places  between  the 
leading  carriages  as  in  line. 

"To  cause  the  battery  to  resume  its  original  direction,  the 
captain  commands : 

1.  Battery,  hij  tlie  right  flanh.     2.    MaRCH. 
8.  Forward.     4.   Guide  left. 

••The  comraa'nds,  .5[y  the  right  fl an 7c,  March;  Forward; 
Guide  left,  are  repeated  and  executed  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples before  described.  .  *  " 

After  the  flank  jnareh,  to  march  the  battery  in  a  direction 
opposite  to  the  original  one,  the  captain  ^commands : 

1.   Battery,  by  the  leftjla:nk.      2.   MARCH. 
o.  Forward.     4.    Guide  right. 


182  SCHOOL   OP  THE   BATTERY. 

In  liorse  artillery^  the  flank  march  is  executed  accordinp;  to 
the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands.  The  lin« 
formed  by  the  flank  movement  is  established,  and  the  car- 
riages aligned  in  each  rank,  with  distances  of  5  and  intervals 
of  14  or  21  yards,  jrccofding  to  the  relative  position  of  the 
pieces  and  caissons.  The  detachments  wheel  in  the  same  di- 
rection as  their  pieces;  and,  after  following  them  during  a., 
part  of  the  movement,  place  themselves  by  their  sides,  2 
yards-  from  the  wheels,  with  the  heads  of  their  leading:  horses 
on  a  line  with  the  axle-trees  of  the  limber.  In  marching  by 
the. left  fla.^k  they  are  on  the  left  of  their  pieces,  and  the  re- 
verse when  marching  by  the  right.  When  suflScient.g^round 
has  been  gained  to  the  flank,  and  the  battery  resumes  its 
formation  in  column  by  marching  in  the  original  direction, 
the  detachments  wheel  in  the  same  direction  as  their  pieces 
and  place  themselves  in  their  rear..  But  when  the  march  in 
column  is  in  the  opposite  direction,  they  resume  their  places 
by  allowing  their  pieces  to  pass  them  and  then  falling  in  their 
rear. 

The  flank  march,  to  gain  ground  to  the  right,  is  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

In  each  case  the  capJtain  and  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons 
change  their  direction  to  the  left  or  right,  and  conform  to  the 
movements  of  the  battery.  • 

OBLIQUE  MARCIL 

401.  The  battery  being  in  column,  in  n^areh  or  at  a  halt, 
to  cause  it  to  march  obliquely  to  gain  ground  to  the^front.and 
left;  the  captain  commands  : 

1.    Column,  left  ohli<nm.     2.  MARCHi 

The  chiefs  of  sections  repeat  the  commands,  hft  oblitixie. ; 
March.  At  the. command  March,  all  the  carriages  oblique 
at  once  to  the  left,  and  march  direct  to  the  front  in  the  new 
direction;  moving  in  parallel  lines,  dressing  by  the  I'ight,  and 
preserving  their  intervals  from  that  flank. 

Iff  obliquing,  the  heads  ol'  the  horses  in  each  rank  are  on  a 
line  parallel  to  the  original  fronto^f  the  oolilmn.  -  The  inter- 
val between  the  carrfages  is  14  yards,  measured  parallel  to 
the  front ^  and  pnly  10  if  measured  perpendicularly  to  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  133 

oblique  directioti.  Each  carnage  of  the  right  file  marches  in 
the  proloDgation  of  the  left  carriage  of  the  rank  which  pre- 
cedes its  own,  and  at  a  distauoe  of  9  yards. 

The  officers  conform-  ta  the  ^movement  and  preserve  their 
relative  positions 

To  resirme  the  original  direction  the  captain,  commands  : 

Forward. 

This  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  the 
carriages  ■  resume  the  original  direction  by  obliquing  to  the 
riglit, 

~  If  the  captain  wishes  to  halt  the  column  for  the  pitYpose  of 
rectifying  its  alignments,  intervals,  or  obliquity,  he.  cofti- 
mj4nds  : 

1.    Column,,    2.  Halt. 
And  to  resume  the  march  in  the  oblique  direction-: 
1.   Column.     2.  'March. 

The  commands  Halt  and  March  are  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections. 

The  right  oblique  is  executed' according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples and  inverse  means. 

passage  op  car'riages  in  column. 

402.  When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column   at  a  walk 
to  change  the  relative  positions  of  the  front  and  rear  ranks, 
without  altering. the  gait,  "the  captain  commands  :    • 

1.  Pieces  J^nss  your  caisnohs  (oi^  raissovs  j^ass  i/our  ineccs). 
*    •  2.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by -the  chiefs  of  sections;  and 
at  the  Command  March,  the  leading  carriages  of  each  ^eqti«n 
haJt.  Those  of  tlic  rear  rank  execute  the  passage  with'out 
rhai)fiing  the  gait,  and  halt  as  soon  as  They  have  reached  their 
p<«itiups  in  front. 

To  continue  the  march  without  halting  the  carriages  of  (ho 
rear  rank,  the  captain  command.s  Fcrward,  when  the  passage 
is  nearly-completod,  and  the  command  is  repeated  l)y  the  ohi?f8 
"of  sect  ion  *}, 


Ipl  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

When  the  column  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  passage  is  exe- 
cuted according  to,  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  com- 
mjrnds,  except  that  the  carriages  of  the  front  rank  move  at  a 
walk  instead  of  halting  at  the  command  .March.'  The  car- 
riages of  the  rear  rank  execute  the  passage  at  a  trot^  and  then 
change  the  gait  to  a  walk, 

.  When  the  column  is  at  a  halt,  the  passage  is  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands. 
If  the  captain  wishes  to  put  the  column  in  march  immedi- 
ately after  the  movement,  he  commands  Forward,  when  the 
passage  is  n.h(mt  being  completed,  and  then  Guide  left  "(or 
right).  -  These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions. '  * 

When  the  column  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  execute  the 
passage  at  a  trot,  the  captain  comoiands  : 

1.  Pieces  pass  your  caissons,  trot  (or  caissons  p><^s>^  ^our 
pieces,  trot).     2.  March.. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  -  At 
the  command  March,  the  carriages  of  the  front  rank  in  each 
section  continue  to-  march  at  a  walk.  Those  of  the  rear  rank 
execute  the  passage  at  a  trot,. and  resume  the  walk  as  soon  as 
the-pa'ssage  is  completed. 

ABOUT  IN  COLU^IN. 

403.  The  battery  b'eingln  column,  in  march  or  at  a  halt, 
to  face  it  to  tl*e  rear,  the  ".captain  coratnands  : 

1.  -Pie.ces  and  caissons^  left  about.     2.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections ; 
and  at  the  second  all  the  carriages  execute  the  about.  When 
the  movement  is  about  being  completed  the  oaptain  commands. 
Column,  halt;  or  Forward,  Guide  right  (or  left);  the 
commands,  Halx,  or  Forward,  Guide  rigid  (or  left),  are 
repieate(,l  by  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

COUNTERMARCH  IN  COLUxMN. 

•  40'5.  The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a  halt, 
to  execute  the  countermarch  in  each  section,  the  captain  com- 
Giands : 


SCHOOL    OF   THE   BATTERY.  135 

1.   Countermarcli.     2.- March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and 
at  the  second,  each  piece  and  its  caisson  execute  the  counter- 
marcli. When  the  movement  is  about  being  completed,  the 
captain  commands,  Oolumn,  Halt;  or  For  ward;  Guide 
ricjht  (or  left^. 

These  commands  are  repeafced  as  in  the, preceding' para- 
graph. 

TO  CHANGE  DIRECTION  IN  COLUMN. 

40G.  The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a  halt, 
to  cause  it  to'change  direction  to  the  left,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

Head  of  column  to  ilie^'left. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands,  Lrft  wliccl — 
IMarch;  and  afterward.  Forward.  At  the  command  March, 
the  pivot  carriage  executes  the  wheel  without  changing  the 
gait.  The  carriage^  on  the  wheeling  flank  wheels  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  conform  to  its  movement;  increasing  the  gait, 
and  preserving  the  intervals.  At  the  command-  Forward, 
the  pivot  carriage  moves  direct  to  the  front,  and  the  other 
resumes  its  ori«^inal  gait  after  completing  the  wheel  and  ar- 
riving upon 'the  same' line.  The  carriages  of  the  rear  rank 
preserve  their  distance  and  follow  those"  of  the  front  rank. 

Each  of  the  other  sectians,  on  arriving  at  the  point  where 
(he 'first  Wheeled,  executes  the  same  movement,  and  by  the 
same  commands  fron>  its  chief. 

Fjach  chief  of  section  must  give  the  command  Left  wheel 
in  time  to  command  March,-  when  the  heads  of  his  Jeadetrs 
are  8]  yards  from  the  wheeling  point.  And  the  command 
Forward  mpst  be  given  as  soon  as  the  leading  pivot  carriage 
has  entereji  the  new  direction. 

The  change  of  direction  to  the  right  is  executed  ficcording 
to  the  same  princfples  and  by  inverse  means. 

'An  oplique  chang'e  of -direction  is  executed  accordiqg  to 
the  same  principles,  by  the  command  : 

Head  of  column — left  (or  r.i(jht')  halficlieel. 


136  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  command,  successively,  Left  (or 
right)  half-wheel — March — Forward  ;  the  command  For- 
ward being  given,  in  this  case,  when  the  leading  pivot  car- 
riage of  each  section  is  about  finishing  the  left  or  right 
oblique.  ' 

TO  DIMINISII  THE  ^FRONT  0^  A  COLUMN  ON  THE  MARCH- 

407.  The  battery  marching  at  a  walk^in  column  of  sections, 
to  form  column  of  pieces  from  the  riglit,  at  that  gait,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.  Bi/  tlte  right,  hreah  sections.     2.  March.  - 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands,  successively, 
after  the  captain,  Bj^  the  right,  break  section;  March.  At 
the  command  March,  the  two  riglit  carriages  of  the  leading 
section  continue  to  march  at  a  walk,  and  all  the  other  car- 
riages halt.  The  left'  carriages  of  the  leading  section  remain 
halted,  until  the  leaders  of  the  leading  carriage  are  passed  by 
the  wheel  horses  of  the-  .rear'  carriage  on  the  right.  They 
then  oblique  to  tbe  right,  take  their  places  in  column,  and 
follow  the  iwo  leading  carriages.  Tlie  other  sections  are  bro- 
ken in  succession  by  the  same  commands  from  their  chiefs; 
the  command  Marqh  being  given  when  the  wheel  horses  of 
the  left  carriages  of  the  next  preceding  section  enter  the  right 
oblique.       ~  ■  '     ■  ' 

When  the  column  is  •-marching  at  a  trot,  the  column  of 
pieces  is  formed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  the 
same  commands.  But  in' this  case«the  carriages  whith  halted 
before  slacken  the  gait  to  a  walk,  and  resume  the.  trot  to 
obliquo-and  enter  the  column. 

When  the  column  is  at  a-  halt,  the  movement  is  executed 
as  prescribed  for  a  column  marching  at  a  walk ;  the  two  right 
carriages  of  the  leading  section  moving  forward  at  a  walk  at 
the  command  March. 

The  battery  miu'ching  at  a  walk  in  coluijin  of  sections,  to 
f(5rm  column  of  pieces  from  the  right  at  "Ul  trot,  the  captain 
commands  : 

1.   By  the  right,  break  sections,  trot.      2.   March. 
The  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands;  successively, 


•SCHOOL   OF   THE   EATTERY.  13.7 

after  the  eaiptaiUy  B^- the  ru/ht,  break  section,  trot ;  March; 
and  tlie  right  carriages  of  -the  leading  section  move  forward 
at  a  inoderafce  trot.  The  left' carriages  of  the  saiiie  section 
commence  the  trot  on  obliquing  to  enter,  the  column. 

The  other  sections  are  broken  successively  b}'  the  same 
commands  from  their  chiefs;  and  the  carriages  are  regulated 
by  each  other,  as  in  breaking  sections  at  a  jV'^lk. 

This  formation  is  executed  from  the  left,  aceoji'ding  tothe 
same  principles  aiid  by  inverse  m'eans. 

IN  COLUMN  WITH  THE  CATSS0K3  ON  THE  FLANK,  TO 
REPLACE  THEM  IN  FRONT  OR  REAR.  .     .* 

408.  The 'battery  being  in  column' with  the  caissons  on  thQ 
tjie  iiank,  to  re-establish  theiu  in  rear  of  their  pieces,  the  cap- 
tain commands  : 

1.    Camo^is,  rear  (or  caissons,  rear,  trot.)     2.   March. 

Each  chief  of  section  repeats  the  commands  in  time  to  codi- 
mand  March,  when  the  leading  piece  of  his  section  is  to 
commence  the  inovemcn-t.  The  piece  at  the  head  of  the 
column  moves  forward  with  the  required  gait,  and  its  caisson 
places 'itself  in  rear  by  an  oblique.  The  other  pieces  move 
forward  in  succession,  and  are  followed  by  their  caissons  in 
like  manner. 

All  the  carriages  preserve  the  usual  distance  in  column. 

This  movement  is  performed  with  the  different  gaits,  and 
aceor<]ing  to  the  .principles  prescribed  for  breaking  sections. 

The  formation  for  placing  the  caissons  in  front  is  executed 
by  the  commands,  Caissuiis,  front,  (or  (aissous,J'ronf,  trot ;) 
IVIakch;  the  caissons  obliquing  successively  in  front  of  their 
pieces. 

TO  TASS  FROM  THE  ORDER  IN  COLUMN  TQ  THE  ORDER 
IN  LINE,  AND  THE  REVERSE. 

Tn  all  formations  in  line  or  column,  the  movements  are  the 
same,  whether  ^he  pieces- or  caissons  leadr  •        ^ 

FORWAJRD  INTO  LINE. 

409.  The  battery  being  in  column  at-a  halt,'  to  form  it  into 


138  SCHOOL    OF   THE   BATTERY.' 

line  on  the  head  of  the  column,  gaining  ground  to  the  left, 
the  captain  commands  :      . 

1.  Forv-ard  into  line,  left  olliqne.     2.  March. 
3.    Guide  right.     4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leadinoj  section  com- 
mands,  Section,  foricard,  and  those  of  the  other  sections, 
Section,  left  ohlique.  At  the  command  March,  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  leading  section  moves  to  the  front, 
and  its  chief -repeats  the  command  for  .  the  guide.  After 
advancing  18  yards,  or  for.  horse  artillery  twenty-two,  he  com- 
mOrnds,  Seel  ion,  halt;  lliijht — Dress. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  repeats  the  command 
for  the  guide,  and  conducts  his  section  by  a  left  oblique,  until 
by  the  direct  march  it  may  gain  its  proper  interval  from  the 
section  immediately  onits  right.  He  then  commands  For- 
ward, and  when  within  four  yards  of  the  line.  Section,  haltj 
Ri(jht — Dress. 

When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain, commands  Front. 

The  movement,  is  executed  on  the- opposite  flank,  according 
'to  the  same  principles,  and  hy  inverse  means. 

In.  this  case  the  commands  are.  Forward  into  line,  riylit 
ohlique,  March-7    Guide  left,  FRONT. 

The  formation  forward  into  line  by  a  right  or  left  t)bliqiie, 
is  executed  in  a  similar  manner  when  the  column  is  in  march. 
In  tliis  case  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  G;ives  n'o  command 
except  for  the  guide,  until  he  has  advanced  the  distance 
before  prescribed.     He  then  halts  his  section  as  before. 

TO  FORM  LINE  FACED  TO  THE  REAR. 

410.  The  battery  being  in  column  at  S,  halt,  to  form  it  into 
line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  head  of  the  colutnn  gaining 
gi'ound  to  the -left,  the  captain  commands: 

r.  Into  line,  faced,  to  the  rear,  left  ohlique.     2.   MARCH. 
3.    Guide  right.     4.   Front. 

At  the  fif^t  command,  .the  cWef  of  the  leading  section  com- 
mands, Section,  forward ;  and  t^iose  of  the  other  sections. 
Section,  left  ohliqiir..  At  the  command  March,  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  sections*^  the  movement  is   executed  as  in  No. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTERY.  139 

400,  with  the  ex.ception  of  the  alignment.  When  the  leading 
section  has  advanced  18  yards,  or  for  horse  artillery  22,  it  is 
halted  by  its  chief  until  the  centre  section  arrives  upon  the 
sanieline.  He  then  commands,  Countermarch — March;  and 
when  the  countermarch  is  nearly  completed,  Section — Halt  ; 
Left — Dress.  ^   '  -  j     . 

The  centre  section  is  halted  ugon.the  line,  in  like  manner, 
until  the  left  section  contes  up,  and  is  then  countermarched 
and  aligned  by  the  same  commands. 

When  the  left  section  arrives  upon  the  line,  it  is  counter- 
marched before  halting,  and  then  aligned  like  the  rest. 

When  the  centre  and.  left  sections  are  countermarched,  the 
commands,  Halt,  Left — Dress,  should  be  given-,  if  possilfle, 
when  they  are  four  yards  in 'rear  of  the  line  on  which  the 
leadiuo;  section  is  established. 

When  the  battery  is  al-igucd,  the  captain  commands  Fronj. 

The  movement  is  executed  on  the  opposite  flank,  according 
to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

The  formation  into  line,  faced  to  the  rear,  by  a  right  or  left 
oblique,  is  executed  in  a  similar  manner  when  the -polumn  is 
in  march.  In  this  case,  as  the  leading  section  is  already  in 
motion,  its  chief  only  repeats  the  command  for  the  guide,  as 
in  No.  409. 


TO  FORM  LINE  TO  THE  RIGHT  OH  LEFT. 

411.  The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march,  or  at  a,  halt, 
tq  form  it  into  line  tothe  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.   Left  into  Iine,.ic7ieel.      2.    MARCH,      o.   i>a^/er^^HALT. 
.4.  Left — DREfes.     5.  -Front. 

A,fc  tne  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  command, 
Section,  left  wheel;  and  at  the  second,  \vhich  they  repeat,  all 
the  sections  wheel  to' the  left.  Each  chief  of  section  com- 
mands, I^hrward,  Guide  left,  as  soon  as  his  leading  pivot 
carriage  has  taken  a  new  direction. 

AVhen  the  roar  carriages  have  completecLthe  wheel»  and  the 
sections  are  in  line,  the  captain  cotnmands,  Battery — Halt; 
Left — :D«EHS.  ' 

The  commands,  Halt,  /y^/z-^-DRESS,  are  repeated  by  the 


140  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

chiefs  of  sections,  and  when  the  align caent  is  completed,  the 
cap.taincommands  Front. 

The  battery  is  formed  into  line  to  the  right  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  mcana.    ' 

TO  FOPyM  LINE  ON  THE  RIGHT  OP.  LEFT. 

412.  The  battery  marching  in  column,  to  form  it  into  line 
on  the  right,  the  captain  commands: 

1.    Oil  the  rujla  into  line.     2.    Makcii.      3.    Guide  right. 

4.    L'^RONT.  ^ 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leaiing  section  com- 
mands, Section,  rit/ht  icheel ;  and  at.  the  second,  which  he 
repeats,  the  section  wheels  to  the  right.  As  soon  as  the  lead- 
ing, piyot  carriage  enters  the  new  direction,  he  commands, 
Forward,  Guide  right;  and  as  the  section  completes  the 
wheel  nnd  unmasks  the  column,  he  commands,  Section — Halt  ; 

Right — DRE;ii3.  •         - 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  sections  repeat  the  command  for  the 
guide,  and  their  sections  continue  tu  move  forward.  As  each 
section  passes  the  one  preceding  it  in  the  formation,  its  chief 
•establishes  it  on  the  line,  with  the'  proper  interval,  by  the 
sanie  commands.  The  commands.  Section — Halt;  Right — 
Dress,  are  given  when  the  section  is  four  yards  in  rear  of  the 
Hue. 
'    When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  com^raands  Front. 

The  line  is  formed  on  the  left  according:;  to  the  same  princi- 
ples, and  by  inverse  means.  The  commands  are,  .On  the  left 
'i"/:^7<,'7ic,  March;    Guide  left;  Front. 

"When  the  column  is  .at  a  halt,  the  line  is  formed  on  the 
right  or  ^eft  in  the  same  manner.  In  this  case,  the  chiefs  of 
the  two  rear  sections  command,  Section,  forward^  aitd  after- 
wards repeat  the  commands,  MARCii ;  Guide  riglu  (or-  left.) 

TO  BREAK  INTO  COLUMN  TO  THE  FRONT. 

413..  The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  break  into 
column  io  the  front  from  the  right,  the  captain  comman^ds  : 

1.   Bjj  section  from  the  right,  front  into  column. 
'2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTERY.  l4l 

At  the  first  coramftnd,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  cora- 

,  niands,  Scrlion,  forward ;   ;uid   those  of  the  other  sections, 

Section,  right  oblique.     At   the  commnnd    Marcft,  repeated 

by  the  chief  of  the  right  section,  that  section  moves  forward, 

and  its  chief  repeats  the  co.nKnand  for  the  guide. 

E;ich  of  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  repeats  the  commands, 
March,  Guide  I^/t,  n?iev  the  section  on  his  right  has  com- 
menced the  movement,  and  when  the  leaddi's  of  its  rear  car- 
riages are  in  line  with  him".  After  obliquing  sufficiently  to 
gain  the  rear  of  the  preceding  section,  he  commanjds  For- 
ward. 

The  movement  is  executed  from  the  left  according  to  the 
same  principles  and.  by  inverse  means. 


TO  BREAK  INTO  COLUMN  TO  THE  RTJAR. 

.  414.  The  battery  being  in  line,  in  march  or  at  a  Jialt,  to 
break  into  column  to  the  rear  from  one  of  the  flanks,  the  cap- 
tain executes  an  about  or  a  countermarch,  according  to  the 
kind  of  carriage  he  may  wish  in  front,  then  halts  the  battery; 
and  breaks  it  into  column  to  the  front  by  the  preceding 
manoeuvre. 


TO  BREAK  INTO  COLUMN  TO  THE  RIGHT  OR  LEFT. 

415.  The  battery  being^  in  line,  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  to 
break  it  into  column  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands : 

.1.  Bi/ section,  left  loheel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 
4.    Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  command, 
Section,  left  icheel ;  and  at  the  second,  repeated  by  those 
chiefs,  all  the  sections  wheel  to  the  left.  When  the  wheels 
are  nearly  completed,  the  captain  commands,  Forward,  Guide 
left,  and  the  chiefs  of  sections  repeat  the  commands. 

When  the  column  is  not  to  advance,  the  command,  Cohimn, 
halt,  is  substituted  for  Forward,  Guide  hft. 

The  battery  is  bvokcn  into  column  to  the  right  according 
to  the  same  principky,  and  by  invewe  means. 


142  SCHOOL  or  tre  lattery. 


TO  BREAK  INTO  COLUMN  TO  THE  FRONT  FROM  ONE 
•     FLANK,  TO  MARCH  TOWARDS  THE  OTHER. 

416.  The  battery  being  iu  line  at  a  halt,  to  break  from  tho 
right  to'march  to  the  left,  the  ciiptain  commands  : 

1.   Bi/  section,  hreah  from  the  rigfit^  to  march  to  the  left. 
2.  March,     o.    Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  com- 
mands, jSection,  forward ; '■and  at  the  second,  which  he 
repeats,  the  section  moves  forward,  and  be  commands,  Guide 
left.  After  advancing  11  yards,  he  chansjes  the  direction  to 
the  left  by  the  commands,  Section,  left  icheel ;  March;  For- 
ward. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  command.  Section, 
forward,  in  time  to  command  March',  when  the  limber 
wheels  of  the  rear  carriages  in  the  section  preceding  his  own 
arrive  in  front  of  him.  He  then  conducts  the  section  to  the 
front,  changes  its  direction  to  the  left,  and  places  it  in  rear  of 
the  preceding  section  by  the  commands  already  prescribed  for 
the  section  on  the  right. 

The  battery  is  broken  from  the  left  to  march  to  the  right, 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

TO  BREAK  INTO  COLUMN  TO  THE  REAR  FROM  ONE 
FLANK,  TO  MARCH  TOWARDS  THE  OTHER. 

417.  The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  break  to  the 
rear  from  one  flank  to  march  towards  the  other,  the  captain 
first  executes  an  about  or  countermarch,  according  to  the  kind 
of  carriage  he  may  wish  in  front.  He  then  halts  the  battery 
and  executes  the  preceding  manoeuvre. 

TO  BREAK  INTO  COLUMN  TO  THE  FRONT  WHEN  THE 
BATTERY  IS  MARCHING  IN  LINE. 

4i8.  The  battery  marching  in  line  at  a  walk,  to  "break  into 
column  to  the  front  from  the  right,  and  at  the  sainc  gait,  tho 
cJiptain  commands  : 

1.  7iy  the  riyht,  hreah  into  sections. 
2.  March.     3.   Guide  left.  . 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY.  14 


o 


Tlio  .chief  of  the  right  section  repeats  the  command  for  the 
guide,  and  his  section  continues  to  move  at  the  same  gait. 
A,t  the  command  Marc  a,  the  other  sections -are  halted  by  the 
oomm-;xndj  Section — Halt,  from  their  chiefs.  . 

The  halted  sections  are  put  in  motion  successively  by  their 
chiefs,  each- commanding,  Seclion,  right  ohli^uej  in  time  to 
command  March,  when  the  leaders  of  the  rear  carriages  in 
the  section  on  his  right  arrive  opposite  to  him.  The  sections 
oblique  and  enter  the  column  as  described  in  No.  413. 

AVhen  the  battery 'is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  movement  is 
executed,  according  to  the  ssmuc  principles.  But  the  sections 
which  halted  in  t-lie- preceding  case  slacken  the  gait  to  a  walk 
at  the  commands,  Walky  March,  from  their  chiefs.  They 
again  trot  and  enter  the  column  by  the  commands,  Section, 
i ir/ht  ohlirjue]  trot ;  March;  Forward. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line  at  a  walk,  to  break 
into  column  from  the  right  at  a  trot,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Bj/  the  right  break  into  seciio7is,  trot. 
2.  March.     3.    Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  com- 
mands, tr.ot ;  and  at  the"  second,  which  he  repeats,  the  section 
changes  its  gait  to  a  trot.  He  afterwards  repeats  the  com- 
mand Guide  left. 

Each  of  the  other  sections  continues  to  march  at  a  walk 
until  required  to  enter  the  Column,  when'  its  chief  conducts 
it,  as  already  described,  by  the  commands.  Section,  right 
ohli que,  trot ;  March;  Forward., 

The  battery  is  broken  into  column  from  the  left,  according 
to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

r 

TO  FORM  LINE  ADVANCING. 

419.  When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column  at  a  walk, 
to  form  it  into  line  at  a  trot,  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  and" 
continue  the  march,  the  captain  commands : 

1,   Form  line  advancing,  left  ohlirpie,  trot. 
2.   March.      3.    Guide  right. 

The  chief  of  Ihe'  leading  section  repeats  the  command  for 
the  guide;  and  his  goction  continues  to  move  at  a  walk. 


114  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERt. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  other  sections  com- 
mand, Scclion,  left  oblique,  trot.  The  command  March  is 
repeated  by  the  same  chiefs;  and  when  the  oblique  move- 
ment is  commenced,  they  repeat  the  command,  Guide  right. 
Each  chief  commands  Forward,  as  soon  as  his  section  has 
obliqued  sufficiently  to  the  left,  and  Walk,  in  time  to  command 
March,  as  it  arrives  on  the  line. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column  at  a  trot,  the 
movement  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principle.  In 
this  case  the  captain  does  not  comuiantl  frot;  and  the  chief  of 
the  leading  section  commands  Walk,  Mahch,  successively, 
after  the  first  and  second  commands  of  the  captain.  The 
chiefs  of  the  other  sections  t!;ive  the  same'  commands  as  their 
sections  arrive  on  the  line. 

The  movement  is  executed  so  as  to  gain  ground"  to  the  right, 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. ^ 

TO  FORM  DOUBLE  COLUMJ^  ON  THE  CENTRE  SECTION. 

420.  The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  form  -double 
column  on  the  centre  section,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Double  column  on  the  centre.     2.  March. 
3.    Guide  right  (or  left.') 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  com- 
mands. Section,  forward;  the  chief 'of  the  right  section, 
Section,  left  oblique;  and  the  chief  of  the  left  section,  Sec- 
tion,  right  oblique.  At  the  command  March,  repeated  by 
the  chief  of  the  centre  section,  that  section  marches  to  the 
front,  and  its  chief  repeats  the  command  for  the  guide. 

When  the  wheel  horses  in  the  rear  ranis  of  the  centre  sec- 
tion have  passed  the  leaders  in  the  front  rank-o^he  other 
sections,  the  chiefs  of  those  sections  repeat  the  command 
JVIarch,  and  the  sections  commence  the  oblique. 

When  the  piece  nearest  the  column  is  about  entering  it,  in 
each  of  these  sections,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  com- 
mands, By  the  left,  break  section,  March;  and  the  chief  of 
the  left,  By  the  right,  break  section,  March.  The  right  and 
left  sections,  without  change  of  gait,  then  form  into  columns 
of  pieces  in  rear  of  the  right  and  left  carriages  of  the  centre 
Bectfon. 


BCnoOLOP   THE   BATTERY.  145 

Tlio  chiefs  af  the  flank  sections  are  careful  to  make  their 
pieces  enter  the  column  at  the  proper  time.  And  when  the 
column  is  formed  thej  place  themselves  4  yards  outside  of  it, 
the  senior  opposite  the  headers  of  his  leading  carriage,  the 
other  opposite  the  leaders  of  the  front  carriage  of  his  rear  piece. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  follows  the  movement, 
sees. that  his  carriages  do  not  enter  the  column  too  soon,  and, 
when  the  column  is  formed,  places  himself  4  yards  in  rear  of 
the  centre. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  form  the  double 
colpmn  at  the  same  gait,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Double  column  on  the  centre.     2.  March. 
3.    Guide  right  (or  left.^ 
The  chief  of  the  centre  section  repeats  the  command  fo|' 
the  guide,  and  the  section  continues  to  advance. 

At  the  command  March,  the  other  sections  are  halted  by 
the  command,  Seclion,  Halt,  from  their  chiefs.  They  are 
afterwards  formed  into  column  by  the  commands  and  means 
prescribed  for  forming  double  column  from  a  halt. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  double  column 
is  formed  according  to  the  same  principles.  In  this  case  the 
flank  sections  pass  to  a  walk,  instead  of  halting  as  before,  and 
resume  the  trot  to  oblique,  and  enter  the  column.  The  com- 
mands from  their  chiefs  are.  Walk — March  ;  Section,  left 
(or  right,)  oblique,  trot — March,  and,  i?y  the  left  (or  right,) 
break  section — March. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  form  the  double 
column  at  a  trot,  t/he  captain  commands  : 

1.   Double  column  on  the  centre,  trot.     2.   March. 
3.    Guide  right  (or  left.) 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  com- 
mands Trot.  At  the  second,  which  he  repeats,  the  section 
moves  forward  at  a  moderate  trot,  and  he  repeats  the  command 
for  the  guide.  • 

The  flank  sections  continue  to  walk  until  the  centre  has  ad- 
vanced sufficiently  to  allow  them  to  oblique,  and  arc^  then 
formed  into  column  as  already  prescribed,  their  chiefs  com- 
manding, Section,  left  (or  right)  oblique,  trot — MARCH;  and, 
B(/  the  left  (or  right,)  ^break  section — March. 

To  form  the  double  column  with  a  battery  of  four  pieoee", 
7 


146  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

the  captain  gives  the  same  commands  as  with  a  battery  of  six v 
The  right  section  is  broken  into  column  of  pieces  by  the  left, 
and  the  left  section  by  the  right.  The  chief:?, of  sections  place 
themselves  on  the  outer  flanks  of  the  column,  as  directed  for 
the  flank  sections  of  the  battery  of  six  pieces.  The  senior  chief 
repeats  the  command  for  the  guide,  and  gives  such  other  com- 
mands^as  are  required  for  the  head  of  the  column ;  the  leading 
carriages  moving  as  a  section  for  the  time  being. 

TO  DEPLOY  THE  DOUBLE  COLUMN  INTO  LINE  TO  THE  FRONT. 

421.  The  battery  being  in  double  column  at  a  halt,  to  forna 
it  into  line  to  the  front,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Forward,  into  line.     2.  March.     3.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  com- 
mands, Section,  forward;  the  chief  of  the  right  section, 
Section,  into  line,  right  ohlicj^ue ;  and  the  chief  of  the  left 
section,  Section,  into  line,  left  oblique.  At  the  command 
March,  repe^^ted  by  these  chiefs,  the  centre  section  advances 
five  yards,  audits  chief  commands,  Section,  Halt;  Right  (or 
Zf/0— Dress. 

The  flank  sections  oblique  to  the  right  and  left;  and  as 
their  pieces  arrive  in  rear  of  their  proper  places  on  the  line, 
they  move  forward,  halt,  and  dress  towards  the  centre  without 
command. 

As  soon  as  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  commands 
Front. 

When  the  column  is  marching,  the  movement  is  executed 
in  the  same  manner.  In  this  case  the  chief  of  the  centre 
section  does  nob  command.  Section,  forward — March;  but 
halts  and  aligns  his  section  after  advancing  5  yards. 

422.  When  the  column  is  marching  at  a  trot,  to  deploy  it 
into  line  to  the  front  at  the  same  gait,  without  discontinuing 
the  march,  the  captain  command!?: 

1.  Form  line  advancing.     2.  March. 
8.    Guide  right  (or  left). 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  com- 
mands, Walk;  the  chief  of  the  right  section.  Section,  into 
liney  right  oblique  ;  and  the  chief  of  the  left  section,  Section,' 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  147 

into  line,  left  ohliquc.  At  tlie  command  March,  repeated  by 
these  cliiefs,  the  centre  section  slackens  its  gait  to  a  walk, 
and  the  flank  sections  deploy.  As  each  piece  arrives  upon 
the  line,  its  gait  is  changed  to  a  wall^^without  command.  The 
movement  is  executed  as  in  the  preceding  cases;  but  wheu 
the  line  is  formed  it  continues  to  advance;  the  captain  com- 
manding Guide  ri'jlit  (ov  ?(?/^),  which  command  is  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

When  the  column  is  marching  at  a.' walk,  to  deploy  it  into 
line  to  the  front  at  a  trot,  without  discontinuing  the  march, 
the  captain  commands  :  . 

1.   Form  line  adcanciiig,  trot.     2.   MARCH. 
3.    Guide  right  (or  left). 

At  the  lirst  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  com- 
mands, Section,  into  line,  right  oblique,  trot;  and  the  chief 
of  the  left  section.  Section,  info  line,  left  ohlicj[ue,  trot.  At 
the  command  March,  repeated  by  these  chiefs,  the  Hank  sec- 
tions deploy  at  a  trot;  the  centre  section  continues  to  march 
at  a  walk;  and,  the  line  having  been  formed  as  in  the  pre- 
ceding case,  the  captain  gives  the  command  for  the  guide. 

"When  the  battery  consists  of  four  pieces,  the  double  col- 
umn is  deployed  into  line  to  the  front  by  the  same  commands 
from  the  captain  as  when  it  consists  of  six.  The  chiefs  of 
sections  give  the  same  commands  as  in.  the  other  case,  and 
then  their  sections  are  formed  as  in  No.  397.  When  the  line 
is  to  be  halted,  as  in  forming  forward,  into  line,  the  senior 
chief  commands.  Halt — Right  (or  left)  Dress,  as  soon  as 
the  leading  carriages  have  advanced  5  yards;  and  the  align- 
ment is  made  upon  the  central  carriages. 

TO  FORM  Tlir,  DOUBLE  COLUMN  INTO  LINE  TO  THE 
RIGHT  OR  LEFT. 

Vl^i.  The  battery  being  in  double  column  at  a  halt,  to  form 
it  into  line  to  the  right,  the  captain  commands : 

•  1.    To  and  on  the  right  into  line.     2.   MARCH. 

3.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  com- 
mauls,  Sution,  right  ichetl;  and  the  other  chiefs  of  sectioned; 


148  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

Foricard.  At  the  second,  repeated  by  those  chiefs,  the  lead- 
ing section  wheels  to  the  right  and  is  established  oy  the  line 
as  in  No.  412.  The  other  pieces  advance  under  the  direction 
of  their  chiefs  and  of  jhe  chiefs  of  sections,  wheel  to  the 
right  in  succession  as  they  arrive  opposite  their  places,  estab- 
lish themselves  on  the  line,  and  dress  upon  the  pieces  already 
aligned.  When  the  alignment  is  completed,  the  captain  com- 
mands Front. 

When  the  column  is  marching,  the  line  is  formed  to  the 
right  in  the  same  manner,  except  that  the  chiefs  of  the,  flank 
sections  omit  the  commands,  Forward^  March.  The  line  is 
formed  to  the  left  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means. 

When  the  battery,  consists  of  four  pieces,  the  double,  col- 
umn is  deployed  into  line  to  the  right  or  left  by  the  same 
commands  from  the  captain,  as  when  it  consists  of  six.  In 
this  case  the  leading  pieces  are  wheeled  to  the  right  or  left,  as 
a  section,  and  established  on  the  line.  For  this  purpose  the 
senior  chief  of  section  commands,  Right  (or  left^  ivhccl — 
March — Forward  —  Guide  right  (or  /e/;^)— Halt — Right 
(or  left^  Dress.  The  other  pieces  move  forward,  wheel  in 
succession  as  they  arrive  opposite  their  places,  and  form  on 
the  line  as  already  described. 

MOVE-MENTS    IN    LINE. 

TO  ADVANCE  IN  LINE. 

424.  The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  cause  it  to  ad- 
vance, the  captain  indicates  to  the  guide  the  points  on  which 
he  is  to  march,  and  commands  : 

1.  Battery^  forward.     2.  March. 
3.    Guide  right  (or  left^. 

The  commands,  Forward — March — Guide  right  (or7^//'), 
are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At  the  comman^ 
March,  all  the  carriages  move  forward  at  a  walk,  and  the 
chiefs  of  sections  preserve  the  alignment  towards  that  chief 
of  carriage  who  serves  as  guide  of  the  line.  The  guide 
marches  steadily  in  the  given  direction,  and  the  chiefs  of  car* 
riages  regulate  their  inteiTals  and  alignment,  by  him. 


i 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTERY.  149 

The  carriages -of  tliG  rear  rank  follow  those  in  front  at  their 
appropriate  distance  of  2  yards.  The  chief  of  the  line  of 
caissons  superintends  the  march  of  the  rear  rank  of  carriages, 
and  moves  wherever  his  presence  may  be  necessary  for  that 
purpose. 

In  liorse  artillery  the  detachments  preserve  their  align- 
ments, and  follow  their  pieces  at  the  proper  distance. 

TO  HALT  THE  BATTERY  AND  ALIGN  IT. 

425.  When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  to  halt  and 
align  it,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Battery — Halt.     2.  Right  (or  left') — Dress. 
3.  Front. 

The  commands, .  Halt — Right  (or  left) — Dress,  are  re- 
peated by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At  the  first  command,  the 
carriages  and  detachments  halt,  and  at  the  second,  align  them- 
selves by  the  right  (or  left)  in  their  respective  ranks;  the 
carriages  dressing  by  the  drivers  of  their  wheel  horses.  The 
carriages  are  placed  as  squarely  on  the  line- as  possible  with- 
out opening  or  closing  the  intervals.  The  captain  superin- 
tends the  alignment  of  the  front  rank  of  carriages,  and  the 
chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  that  of  the  rear;  each  placing 
himself  for  that  purpose  on  the  flank  of  the  guide.  When 
the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  commands  Front, 

When  the  battery  is  halted,  if  it  cannot  be  aligned  by 
slight  movements,  the  captain  causes  one  or  two  carriages 
from  one  of  the  flanks  or  centre- to  advance  4  yards,  or  to  a 
greater  distance  if  necessary,  and  then  causes  the  alignment 
to  6e  made  by  the  right,  left,  or  centre,  by  the  command 
Right,  left,  or,  on  tJic  centre,  Dress.  At  this  command,  the 
carriages  and  detachmcntts  move  forward  and  align  themselves 
according  to  the  principles  just  explained  ;  the  drivers  halt- 
ing a  little  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  dressing  forward,  so  as  to 
place,  the  carriages  as  squarely  upon  it  as  possible. 

TO  CHANGE  DIRECTION  IN  LINE. 

426.  The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  wheel  it  to  the 
right,  the  captain  commands  : 


150  SCHOOL  or  THE  battery. 

1.  Battery,  rir/Jtt  lolieel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 
4.  Batter)/— Raj,t.     5,  Right — Dkess.     6.  Front. 

The  commands,  Right  wheel, — March,  Forward,  Halt, 
Right — Dress,  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

At  the  command  March,  the  pivot  carriage  moves  at  a 
walk,  and  describes  a  quadrant  (22  yards)  of  a  circle,  whose 
radius  is  14  yards.  The  other  carriages  move  at *a  trot  and 
preserve  their  intervals  from  the  pivot.  They  regulate  theii> 
gaits  according  to  their  distances  from  the  pivot,  so  as  to  re- 
main as  short  a  time  as  possible  in  rear  of  the  line,  without 
urging  their  horses  injuriously,  and  so  as  to  arrive  upon  it  in 
succession.  The  carriafi^es  of  the  rear  rank  follow  at  the  • 
proper  distance  in  the  tracks  of  those  in  front. 

At  the  command  Forward,  which  is  given  when' the  lead- 
ing pivot  carriage  has  described  its  arc  of  22  yards,  that  car- 
riage moves  direct  to  the  front;  and  when  the  rear  pivot  car- 
riage is  in  the  new  direction,  the  captain  commands,  ^Batteri/, 
Halt — Right— Dry,s^.  The  commands  Forward — Halt— -_ 
Right — Dress,  are  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  right  section 
immediately  after  the  captain;  and  by  the  other  chiefs  in 
time  to  be  applicable  to  their  sections;  the  pivot  carriages 
halting  at  the  command  Halt,  and  the  others  halting  and 
dressing  towards  the  pivot  as  they  arrive  in  succession  on  the 
line. 

When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  commands  Front. 

The  battery  is  wheeled  to  the  left  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

427.  When  the  battery  is  at  a  halt  or  marching  in  line,  to- 
wheel  it  to  the  right  and  continue  the  march,  the  captain  com- 
mands :  • 

1.  Battery,  right  wheel.     2.  March,     o.  Forward. 

• 
T-he   movement  is   executed   as   already  described,  except 
that  the  pivot  carriage,  after  wheeling,  continues  to  march  in 
the  new  direction,  and   the  others  conform  to  its  gait- and  di- 
rection ns  they  arrive  on  the  line. 

The  direction  is  changed- to  the  left  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTERY.  151 

TO  CLOSE  INTERVALS  IN  LINE. 

428.  When  the  battery  is  marcbing  in  line  at  a  walk  or 
ferot^  to  diminish  its  intervals^  the  captain  commands  : 

1.    Oil  right  (or  left)  piecCy  df section,  to yards — 

close  intervals.     2.  .March. 

•  The  chief  of  the  section  designated  repeats  the  command, 

Oil  right  (or  left^  pie^e,-  to yards — close  intervals;  and 

the  other  chiefs  of  sections  command,  Vt'/r^ 7*7  (oTleft)  to 

yards — clo'se  intervals.  At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the 
same  chiefs,  the  piece  designated  as  the  one  of  direction 
moves  forward  at  a  walk,  and  the  others  oblique  towards  it  at 
a  trot.  3^]ach  obliquing^  carriage  regulates  its  march  by  the 
one  next  the  carriage  of  direction,  and,  aftx3r  closing  to  the 
prescribed  interval,  moves  forward  on  the  alignment  of  the 
directing  carriage  and   slackens  the. gait  to  a  walk. 

As  soon  as  the  intervals  are  closed, 4ho  command  for  the 
guide  is  renewed  by  the  captain,  and  repeated  bj?^  the  chiefs  of 
sections.  When  the  intervals  are  closed  towards  one  of  the 
flanks,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.    On  right  (or  left)  piece,  to yards — close  intervals. 

2.  March. 

ABOUT  OR  COUNTERMARCFI  WITH  DIMINISHED 
INTERVALS. 

429.  The  battery  being  in  line  with  diminished  intervals, 
in  march  or  at  a  halt,  to  execute  an  about  or  countermarch, 
the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Pieces  and  caissons — left  about  (qy  countermarch.) 

2.  Right  pieces  forward  (or  right  pieces  forward — trot.) 

3.  March. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  repeat  these  commands.  At  the 
second,  the  right  caMages  of  each  section  move  forward,  and 
as  soon  as  they  are  disengaged  from  the  line,  the  captain  com- 
mands, March.  All  the  carriages  execute  the  required 
movement  at  this  command^  with  the  pjait  corresponding  to 
that  of  the  carriages  in  front.  The  ri^ht  carriages;  return  to 
the  line  asrain  after  *'  '    'on  of  the  movement. 


152       SCHOOL  OF  the  battery. 

TO  RESUME  INTERVALS. 

430.  When  the  battery  is  marclung  in  line  with  dimin- 
ished intervals,  to  cause  the  regular  intervals  to  be  resumed^ 
the  captain  commands  : 

1.    On  right  (or  left) -piece  of ,section — full  intervals . 

2.  March. 

The  chief  of  the  section  designated  repeats  the  first  com- 
mand; and.  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  command,  From  the 
right  (or  left) — full  intervals.  At  the  word  March,  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  carriage  of  direction  in  each 
rank  continues  to  march  to' the  front,  and  the  others  oblique 
from  it  at  an  increased  gait  to  regain  their  interyals.  "Each 
carriage  regulates  its  march  by  the  one  adjoining  towards  the 
carriage  of  direction,  and,  when  the  interval  is  regained;, 
moves  forward  on  the  alignment  and  resumes  its  gait. 
.As  soon  as  the  mo'^ment  is  completed,  the  command  for 
the  guide  is  renewed  by  the  captain. 

When  the  intervals  are  to  be  resumed  from  one  of  the 
flanks,  the  captain  commands: 

1.    On  right  (or  hft)  piece^full  intervals.     2.  March. 
PASSAGE  OF  OBSTACLES. 

431.  When  a  battery  is  marching  in  line,  to  pass  an  obsta- 
cle which  presents  itself  in  front  of  one  of  the  sections,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.  Section.     2.  Obstacle. 

At  the  word  Obstacle,  the  chief  of. the  section  designated 
observes  the  obstacle,  and  gives  the  necessary  commands-  for 
closing  on  one  of  the  adjoining  sections,  removing  from  it, 
breaki'ng  his  section,  or  halting  it  and  forming  in  column  in 
rear  of  one  of  the -adjoining  sections.  The  section  generally 
resumes  the  reguh^r  m.arch  by  means  the  inver,se  of  those 
used  for  passing  the  obstacle.  It  resumes  its  place  at  an  in- 
creased gait,  and  by  the  commands,  Section  into  line — March^ 
from  its  chief. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY.  153' 

The  passage  of  defiles  is  nothing  more  than  the  passage  of 
obstacles,  which  requires  the  line  to  be  broken  into  column  of 
sections,  by  one  of  the  manoeuvres  prescribed  for  passingfrom 
the  order  in  line  to  the  order  in  column.  When  it  becomes 
necessary  to  break  the  sections,  they  should  be  formed  again 
in  succession  by  their  chiefs  as  soon  as  the  ground  will  permit. 


FORMATIONS    IN    BATTERY. 

IN  LINE,  WITH  PIECES  IN  FRONT,  TO  FORM    IN   BATTERY 

TO  THE  FRONT. 

432.  When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the  pieces 
in  front,  to  form  the  battery  to  the  front,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  In  battery.     2.   Guide  left     3.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At 
the  command  In  battery,  the  caissons  stand  fast,  and  the 
pieces  advance.  The  intervals  and  alignment  are  preserved, 
and  the -chiefs  of  pieces  and  sections  march  at  their  places  in 
line.  At  the  command  March,  which  is  given  as  soon  as 
they  have  advanced  17  yards,  the  chiefs  of  pieces  and  sections 
halt,  and  the  pieces  execute  an  about.  As  soon  as  the  about 
is  completed,  the  pieces  are  halted,  unlimbered,  and  prepared 
for  firing ;  the  limbers  being  taken  to  their  places  in  battery 
by  an  about.  « 

When  the  cannoneers  are  marching  by  the  sides  of  their 
pieces,  they  halt  at  the  command  March,  allow  their  pieces 
to  pass  them,  change  sides,  and  move  forward  to  the  posts 
they  are  to  occupy,  when  their  pieces  have  completed  the 
about.  They  are  not  required  to  observe  any  particular  order 
during  this  movement.. 

When  the  cannoneers  are  mounted  on  the  ammunition 
chests,  those  on'the  caissons  dismount  and  run  to  their  posts  at 
the  command  In  battery^  Those  on  the  pieces  dismount 
after  the  about. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  and  sections  take  their  posts  in  battery 
as  soon  as  the  formation  is  completed. 
'  J )->  horse  aj'line?y,  the  movement  is  executed  in   tlif^  same! 


154  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY. 

manner,  and  by  the  same  commands.  I3ut  the  pieces  advance 
only  10  yards  before  executing  the  about.  The  horses  of  the 
detachments  do  not  advance.  But  at  the  aommand  In  bat- 
tery, the  cannoneers  dismount  and  run  to  their  posty. 

After,  the  formation,  the  captain  rectiiies  the  alignment,  if 
necessary. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line  with  the  pieces  in 
front,  it  is  formed  in  battery  to  the  front,  according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  the  commands,  In  battery,  March. 
The  cais.sons  halt  at  the  command  In  battery;  and  in  horse 
artillery  the  detachments  do  the  same,  the  cannoneers  dis- 
mounting and  running  to  their  posts. 

TO  FORM  IN  BATTERY  TO  THE  FRONT  BY  THROWING  THE 
CAISSONS  TO  THE  REAR.     > 

433.  When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the  pieces 
in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front  by  throwing  the  cais- 
sons to  the  rear,  the  captain  commands : 

Action  front. 

At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the 
pieces  are  unlimbered  and  wheeled  about  by  hand ;  the  lim- 
bers reversing  to  the'  left  at  the  same  time,  and  taking  their 
places  in  battery,  as  described  in  the  school  of  the  piece.  No. 
244.  The  caissons  reverse  to  the  left,  move  to  the  rear, 
reverse^gain  to  the  left,  and  take  their  places  in  battery. 

AVhen  the  cannoneers. are  mount^ed  on  the  ammunition 
ch'estSj  they  dismount  and  run  to  their  posts,  at  the  command 
Action  front. 

In  Itor^e  artlUeri/,  wl^^n  this  mode  of  coming  into  action  is 
resorted  to,  the  detachments  move  to  the  posts  belonging  to 
their  horses  in  battery,  before  dismounting,  except  when  the 
number  of  horses  is  so  small  that  theymay  be  led  to  the  roar 
by  the  liorse  holders.  In.  this  case,  the  captain  commands 
Ca?2«o«cers,  Dismount;  immediately  after.  Action  front. 
When  the  detachments  conduct  their  horses  to  the  rear,  they 
dismount  without  command  fromthc  captain. 

The  battery  is  generally  in  line  at  a  halt,  when  this  mode 
of  coming  into  action  is  resorted  to.  It  may  also  be  used  ip 
sijpcessive  formations  by  giving  the  command  Action  front 


SCHOOL   OF   THE  BATTERY.  155 

wlien  a  part  of  the  battery  has  been  halted  on  the  line.     But 
with   bad  ground   or  heavy  pieces,  this  mode  of  coming  into 
action  should  not  be  used.  ^ 

IX  LINE,  WITH  CAISSONS  IN  FRONT,  TO  FORM  IN  BATTERY 

TO  THE  FRONT. 

434.  Whcn^thobattery  isinlineata  halt,  with  the  cais- 
sons in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front,  the  captain 
commands :    •     "  ^  r 

1.  Pieces,  pass  ijour  caissons.     2.   March.     3.  In  battery. 
4.    Guide  left.     5.  March. 

^  These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections  •  the 
pieces  pass  their  caissons,  and  at  the  command  In  battery 
given   as   soon   as  the  pieces   have  passed   their  caissons,  the 
formation  is  executed  as- prescribed  in  No.  432. 

In  horse  artlUcri/,  the  command  In  bat-tery  is'dven  when 
the  detachments  have  passed  the  caissons. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  with  the  caissons  in 
tront,  it_  IS  formed  in  battery  to  the  front  accordin<r  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  the  commands,  Pieces, /niss  ^%ir  cais- 
sons (or  FieceSf  pass  your  caissons,  //'oO— March— In  Eat- 
TERY— Guide  10,  March. 

IN  LINE,  WITH  PIECES  IN  FRONT,  TO  FORM  IN  BATTERY 

TO  THE  REAR. 

^    435.  When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the  pieces 
m  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear,  the  captain  commands  : 

.     1.  Fire  to  (he  rear.     2.    Caissons,  pass  your  pieces,  trot. 
2.  March.     4.  In  battery.' 

^  The  three  last  commands  arc  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions. At  the  third,  the  caissons  pass  their  pieces  at  a  brisk 
trot.  And,  at  the  fourth,  which  is  given  as  soon  as  the  cais- 
sons have  passed,  the  cannoneers*  unlimbcr  and  prepare  for 
iirino;.  ^    * 

The  cais.sons  advance  17  yards  beyond  their  pieces,  executo 
an  about  together,  and  take  their  places  in  battery. 


156  SCHOOL  or  the  battery. 

When  the  cannoneers  are  mounted  on  the  ammunition 
chests,  the  caissons  advance  17  yards  beyond  their  pieces,  and 
then  halt  to  allow  the  cannoneers  to  dismount  before  executing 
the  about.  As  soon  as  the  caissons  h:ilt,  the  cannoneers  dis- 
mount and  run  to  their  posts.  When  the  battery  is  at  a  halt, 
as  in  the  present  case,  it  is  considered  better  to  dismount  the 
cannoneers  before  coinmencing  the  movement.  The  chief  of 
the  line  of  caissons  precedes  the  movement  of  his  carriages, 
and  places  himself  on  the  line  to  be' occupied  by  their  leaders, 
when  the  about  is  commenced.  He  takes  his  place  in  battery 
as  soon  as  the  about  is  couipleted  and  the  carriages  are  on  the 
line. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  and  sections  take  their  places  in  battery 
as  soon  as  the  formation  is  completed. 

In  horse  artillery^  at  the  command  In  battery,  the  detach- 
ments incline  to  the  right,  pass  their  pieces  at  a  brisk  trot, 
and  take  their  places  in  battery  by  a  left  reverse,  The  can- 
noneers then  dismount,  run  to  their  posts,  unlimber,  and  pre- 
pare for  firing. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  with  the  pieces  in 
front,  the  formation  in  battery  to  the  rear  is  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands.  At 
the  command  In  battery,  which  is  given  as  soon  as  the 
caissons  have  passed  their  pieces,  the  latter  halt,  the  detach- 
ments in  horse  artillery  pass  them,  and  the  movement  is 
completed  as  already  described. 

IN  LINE,  WITH  CAISSONS  IN  FRONT,  TO  FORM  IN 
BATTERY  TO  THE  REA&. 

436.  When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the  cais- 
sons in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear,  the  captain 
commands :        •  . 

1.  Fire  to  the  rear.     2.  In  Battery. 

At  the  command  In  battery,  which  is  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections,-  the  cannoneers  unlimber  and  prepare  for 
firing. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  and  sections  take  their  places  in  battery. 

The  caissons  move  at  a  brisk  trot  and  take  their  places  ir^ 
battery,  under  the  superintendence  of  their  chief.  ® 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTERY,  157 

In  horse  artillery^  at  the  command  In  battery,  the  detacli- 
ments  pass  their  pieces  at  a  trot,  move  to  their  places  in 
batter}',  dismount,  and  run  to  their  posts. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  with  the  caissons  in 
front,  the  formation  in  battery  to  the  rear  is  executed  accord- 
ing to'  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands. 


IN  BATTERY,  TO  FORM  IN  LINE  TO  THE  FRONT. 

•  437.   Being  in  battery,  to  form   in   line  to  the  front  with 
the  caissons  in  rear,  the  captain  commands : 

Limber  to  the  front. 

This  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  the 
pieces  are  limbered  as  described  in  No.  232,  the  (Jfeissons 
closing  at  the  same  time  to  the  proper  distance  without  further 
con^mand. 

When  the  captain  wishes  to  place  the  caissons  in  front,  he 
commands.  Limber  to  the  fr'ont  ;  and  while  the  pieces  are 
limbering,  Caissons,  pass  your  jjieces,  tri'ot — March.  The 
caissons  pass  and  halt  in  front  of  their  pieces ;  or,  if  the  cap- 
t?iin  wishes  the  battery  to  advance,  he  commands  Forward, 
Guide  right  (or  left),  as  the  caissons  .are  completing  the 
passage,  and  the  battery  moves  forward  at  a  walk. 

In  horse  artillery,  when  the  pieces  are  limbered  to  the  front, 
the  horse   holders  advance  within  two  yards  of  their  pieces;, 
and  there  the  cannoneers  mount. 

The  captain  rectifies  the  alignment,  if  necessary,  and  com- 
mands Front. 

•When  the  battery  is  to  advance  immediately,  the  captain 
commands,  Forward — Guide  right  (or  left),  instead  of 
Battery,  Halt;  and  the  caissons  close  on  the  march. 

When  the  captain  wishes  to  place  the  caissons  in  front,  he 
may  cause  the  pieces  to  be  limbered  to  the  rear,  and  command  :• 

1.  Caissons,  jjass  your  pieces,  trot,  ineces  left  about. 

2.  March. 

3.  Battery — IIalt,  or  Forward — Guide  right  (or  left.) 

These  commands  are  repeated  and  executed  as  already  pre- 
Bcribed  ;  the  pieces  executing  the  about  as  soon  as  the  ground 


158  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY." 

has  been  unmasked  by  the  caissons,  and  the  battery  halting  or 
•  advancing  as  soon  as  the  passage  is  completed. 

In  horse  artillrri/y  when  the  pieces  are  limbered  to  the  rear, 
the  cannoneers  run  to  their  horses,  mount,  and  rejoin  their 
pieces. 


IN  BATTERY,  TO  FORM  IN  LINE  TO  THE  REAR. 

438.  When  in  battery,  to  form  in  line  to  the  rear,  the 
captain  causes  the  pieces  to  be  limbered  to  the  rear;  and  then, 
if  he  v*nshes  to  place  the  caissons  in  front,  commands  : 

1.  Caissons,  left  about ;  pieces,  forward. 

2.  March. 

3.  Battery — Halt,  or  Forward — Guide  riglit  (or  left.) 

The  Jtwo  first  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
sections ;  the  caissons  execute  the  about ;  and  the  pieces  close 
to  their  proper  distance.  The  third  command,  which  is  given 
at  the  moment  the  about  is  finished,  is  repeated  and  executed 
as  prescribed. 

The  captain  rectifies  the  alignment  if  necessary,  and  com- 
mands Front. 

In  horse  ariillcry,  the  detachments  oblique  to  the  left  to 
facilitate  the  movement  of  the  caissons.  And  then,  if  the 
battery  halts,  they  place  themselves  at  once  in  rear  of  their 
pieces;  or,  if  it  advances,  they  wait  and  do  the  same  by 
wheeling  to  the  right  as  they  pass. 

if  the  formation  in  line  to  the  rear  is  to  be  executed  by 
placing  the  pieces  in  front,  the  captain,  after  causing  the 
nieces  to  be  limbered  to  the  rear,  commands : 

1.  Pieces^  pass  your  caissons  ;  caissons,  left  about. 

2.  March. 

3.  Battery — Halt,  or  Forward — Guide  right  (or  left.) 

The  first  two  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions ;  the  pieces  pass  their  caissons;  and  the  caissons  execute 
the  about  as  soon  as  the  ground  is  unmasked.  The  third 
command  is  repeated  afid  executed  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  in  No.  424'         •  '      ' 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  159 

The  capfain  rectijSes  the  alignmeDt,  if  necessary,  and  com- 
mands Front. 

In  horse  artilleri/;  the  detachments  place  themselves,  behind 
their  pieces  as  soon  as4hej  are  passed  by  them. 
^  In  forming  line  to  the  rear,  either  with  pieces  or  caissons 
in  front,  the  caissons  may  be  placed  at  once  in  front  of  their 
p^ieces  for  greater  convenience  in  mounting  the  cannoneers. 
For  this  purpose,  as  soon  as  the  captain  has  commanded 
Limber  to  the  rear,  he  commands  : 

1.    Caissons,  in  front  of  your  pieces  (or  caissons,  in  front  of 
your  ineces,  trot).     2.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections;  and 
while  the  pieces  are  limbering,  the  caissons  oblique  to  the 
right,  move  forward  nea*-  the  middle  of  the  interval  between 
the  leaders  of  the  pieces,  place  themselves  in  front  of  them 
by  t.wo  successive  wheels  to  the  left,  and  .halt. 
^  In  horse  artillery,  when  the  caissons  are  ordered  to  the 
front  of  their  pieces,  the  horse  holders  oblique  to  the  left  at 
the  command  March,- and  halt  between  the  leading  drivers 
of  the  pieces.  As  soon  as  the  cannoneers  are  mounted,  the 
detachments  take  their  posts  in  rear  of  their  pieces. 

IN  COLUMN,  WITH  PIECE'S  IN  FRONT,  TO  FORM  IN  BATTERY 

TO -THE  FRONT. 

439.  When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt^with  the 
pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front  by  gaining 
ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.   Forward,  into  battery,  left  oblique.     2.  March. 
o.    Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  com- 
mands. Section,  forwavd;  and  those  of  the  o'ther  sections 
SertMm,  left  oblique.  Thc^chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  moves 
quickly  to  the  right  of  the  leading  section,  to  cause  the  cais- 
sons to  halt  at  the  proper  time  and  to  superintend  their 
alignment.  At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  sections,  the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No. 
109,  for  forming  line  to  the  front.     But  as  each  section  ?.rriv^3 


160  SCHOOL    OF  THE   BATTERY. 

on  the  line,  instead  of  halting,  its  chief  forms  it  in  battery  to 
the  front  bj  the  commands,  In  battery — March,  which  a-re 
executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  432. 

The  formation  in  battery  to  the  front,  by  gaining  ground 
to  the  right,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and 
by  inverse  means. 

When  the  batter}'^  is  marching  in  column,  it  is  formed  in 
battery  to  the  front  by  applying  the  prin^'iples  of  No.  432. 


IN  COLUMN,  WITH  CAISSONS  IN  FRONT,  TO  FORM  IN 
BATTERY  TO  THB  FRONT. 

440.  When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a'  halt,  with  the 
caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front  by  gaining 
ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Forward,  into  battery,  left  ohliqxie,     2.  March. 
3.    Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section 
commands,  Section,  forward ;  and  tho.se  of  the  other  sections, 
Section,  ^eft  ohlique.  The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons 
moves  quickly  to  the  right  of  the  leading  section,  to  halt  the 
caissons  at  the  proper  time  and  to  superintend  their  aliga- 
ment.  At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
sections,  the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  432, 
for  forming  line  to  the  front.  But. as  each  section  arrives  on 
the  line,  instead  of  halting,  its  chief  forms  it  in  battery  to 
the  front  by  the  commands,  Pieces,  pass  your  caissoiis — 
March — In  Battery — March,  which  will  be  executed  as 
prescribed  in  No.  434. 

The  formation  in  battery  to  the  front,  by  gaining  ground  to 
the  right,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  it  is  formed  in 
battery  to  the  front  by  applying  the  principles  laid  down  in 
the  latter  part  of  No.  434. 

IN  COLUMN,  WITH  PIECES  IN  FRONT,  TO  FORM  IN  BATTERY 

TO  THE 'rear. 
•  441.  When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  with  the 


4 
SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTERY.  161 

pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear  by  gaining 
ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Into  battery  J  faced  to  the  o'ear,  left  ohliqiic.     2.  March. 

Z.^Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  com- 
mands, Section,  forward ;  and  those  of  the  other  sections, 
Section,  left  oblique.  The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  goes 
to  the  right  of  the  leading  section,  to  direct  the  reverse  of  the 
caissons,  and  to  superintend  their  alignment.  At  the  com- 
mand Marqii,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  409,  for  forming  line  to 
the  front.  But  as  each  section  arrives  on  the  line,  instead  of 
halting,  its  chief  forms  it  in  battery  to  the  rear  by  the  eom- 
mands.  Fire  to  the  rear,  caissons,  jjass  your  j^i^ces,  trot — 
IMarcii — In  Battery,  which  are  executed  as  prescribed  in 
No.  435. 

The  formation  in  battery  to  the  rear,  by  gaining  ground  to 
the  right,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  it  is  formed  into 
battery  to  the  rear  by  applying  the  principles  prescribed  in 
Nos.  409  and  435. 

IN  COLUMN,  WITH  CAISSONS  IN  FRONT,  TO  FORM  IN 
BATTERY  TO  THE  REAR. 

442.  The  battery  being  in  column  at  a  halt,  with  the  cais- 
sons in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear  by  gaining  ground 
to  the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Into  battery,  faced  to  the  rear,  left  oblique.     2.  March. 

3.    Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  com- 
mands, Section,  foricard ;  and  those  of  the  other  sections, 
Section,  left  oblique.  The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  goes* 
to  the  right  of  the  leading  section,  to  direct  the  about  of  the 
caissons,  and",  to  superintend  their  alignment.  At  the  com- 
mand March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  409,  for  forming  line 
to  the  front.     But  as  each  section  arrives  on  the  line,  instead 


162  SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTERY. 

of  halting,  its  chief  forms  it  into  battery  to  the  rear  by  the 
command,  Fira  to  the  rear — In  Batpery,  which  is  executed 
as  prescribed  in  No.  435. 

The  formation  in  battery  to  the  rear,  by  gaining  ground  to 
the  right,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means.         '    - 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  it  is  formed  into 
battery  to  the  rear  by  applying  the  principles  of  Nos.  409 
and  485. 

IN  COLUMN,  WITtf  PIECES  IN  FRONT,  TO  FORM  IN  BATTERY 
TO  THE  RIGHT  OR  LEFT. 

443.  When  the  battery  is  in  column,  in  march,  or  at  a  halt, 
with  the  pieces  in  front,  if  the  captain  wishes  to  form  it  in 
battery  to  the  left,  by  gaining  ground  to  the  right,  he  com- 
mands : 

1.   Fire  to  the  left^  Jiy  section^  right  wheel.     2.  March. 
3.    Caisiions,  2^(^s^  y^ur pieces,  trot.     4..  March. 
5.  In  Battery. 

At  the  first  command,   the  chiefs   of  sections    command, 

•  Section,  rir/ht  icheel ;   and  at  the  second,  which   they  repeat, 

all  the  sections  wheel  to  the  right.     The  caissons  follow  their 

pieces  at  the  proper  distance.  , 

At  the  commands,  Caissons,  pass  yonr  pinrs,  trot — March, 
which  are  givHJU  before  the  completion  of  the  wheel,  and  re- 
peated by  "the  chiefs  of  sections,  all  the  caissons  pass  the 
pieces  at  a  trot. 

At  the  command  In  Battery,  which  is  given  and  repeated 
in  like  manner  as  soon  as  the  caissons  have  passed,  and  the' 
pieces  are  square  on  the  new  line,  all  the  sections  form  at  onco 
into  battery  to  the  rear,  as  prescribed  in  No.  435. 

When  the  captain  wishes  to  form  in'battery  to  the  left,  by 
gaining  ground  to  the  left,  he  commands  : 

1.   Fire  to  the  hft,  hij  section,  left  icheel.     2.   MARCH. 
3.  In  Battery.     4.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  command, 
Section,  left  wheel;  and  at  the  second,  which  they  repeat,  all 
the  sections  wheel- at  once  to  the  left. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  163 

A.fc  the  command  In  Battery,  which  is  given  and  repeated 
as  soon  as  the  caissons  have  completed  the  wheel,  all  the  sec- 
tions form  at  once  into  battery  to  the  front,  as  prescribed  in 
No.  432. 

The  two  formations  in  battery  to  the  right,  by  gaining 
ground  to  the  left  or  right,  are  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

IN  COLUMN,   WITH  CAISSONS  IN  FRONT.  TO  FORM  IN 
BATTERY  TO  THE  RIGHT  OR  LEFT. 

444.  When  the  battery  is  in  column,  in  march,  or  at  a  halt, 
with  the  caissons  in  front,  .to  form  it  in  battery  to  the  left,  by 
gaining  ground  to  the  right,  the  captain  command*: 

1.  Fire  to  the  left,  hij  section,  right  lohecl.     2,  March. 
3.  In  Battery. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  command, 
Section,  ri(jht  wheel;  and  at  the  second,  which  they  repeat, 
the  sections  wheel  af  once  to  the  right,  and  move  to  the  front 
at  the  commands.  Forward,  Guide  right,  frorji  their  ohiefs. 

At  the  command  In  Battery,  which  is  given  and  repeated 
as  soon««s  the  pieces  are  square  ©n  the  new  line,  all  the  sec- 
tions form  at  once  into  battery  to  the  rear,  as  prescribed  in 
No.  435. 

To  form  in  battery  to  the  left,  by  gaining  ground  to  the  left, 
the , captain  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left,  hy  section,  lejt  wheel.     2.   March. 
3.  Fieces,  j)C(ss  your  caissois.     4.  March. 
.  5.  In  Battery.     G.  March. 

"At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  command, 
Section,  left  wheel ;  and  at  the  second,  which  they  repeat,  the 
sections  wheel  at  once  to  the  left.  The  third  and  fourth  com- 
mands are  given  an'd  repeated  just  before  the  completion  of 
the  wheel ;  and  the  fiffh  is  given  when  the  pieces  have  passed 
their  caissons,  and  the  latter  are  square  upon  the  new  Hoe. 
"fhe  sections  are  then  foi'med  in  battery  to  the  front  as  pre- 
scribed in  No.  432. 

The  formations  in  battery  to  the  right,  by  gaining  ground 
to  the  right  or  left,  are  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples and  by  inyerso  means. 


164  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY. 

IN  COLUMN,  WITH  PIECES  IN  FRONT,  TO  FORM  IN  BATTERY 
ON  THE  RIGHT  OR  LEFT. 

445.  When  the  battery  is  raarchinp:  in  column,  with  the 
pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  on  the  right,  the  captain 
commands  : 

1.    On  the  right,  into  hatter)/.     2.   MARCH.     3.    Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  com- 
mands, Section,  right  ii^icel ;  and  the  chief  of  the  line  of 
caissons  goes  to  that  section.  At  the  command  MARCti, 
repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  leading  section,  that  section 
wheels  to  ih^  right,  and  its  chief  conducts  it  into  line  by  the 
commands,  Forward,  Guide  right.  And  then,  without  -halt- 
ing, it  is  formed  into  battery  to  the  front,  as  prescribed  in  No. 
432,  by  the  commands.  In  Battery,  March,  from  its  chief. 

The  other  sections  continue  to  advance  ;  and  as  each  arrives 
opposite  its  place  in  battery,  after  passing  the  one  preceding 
it  in  the  formation,  it  is  formed  into  battery  by  its  chief,  by 
the  commands.  Section,  right  icheel — March — Forward — 
Guide  right — In  Battery — March;  the  command  In 
Battery  being  given  as  the  Caissons  arrive  in  line  wiuh  thos6 
already  established. 

The  formation  in  battery  on  the  lieft  is  executed  according 
to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  it  is  formed  in 
battery  on  the  right  or  left  according  to  the  same  principles. 
In  this  case,  the  chiefs  of  the  two  rear  sections  command.  Sec- 
tion, forward,  immediately  after  the  first  command  of  the 
captain,  and  then  repeat  the  commands,  March — Guide  right 
(pvleft.-) 

IN  COLUMN,  WITH  CAISSONS  IN  FRONT,  TO  FORM  IN 
BATTERY  ON  THE  RIGHT  OR  LEFT. 

446.  When  tlie  battery  is  marching  in  column,  with  the 
caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  onthe  right,  the  captain 
commands  : 

1.    On  the  right,  into  hatteri/.     2.   March.     3.    Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  com- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  165 

mands,  Section,  right  lohcel ;  and  the  chief  of  the  line  of 
caissons  goes  to  that  section.  At  the  command  March,  re- 
peated by  the  chief  of  the  leading  section,  that  section  wheels 
to  the  right,  and  is  conducted  to  the  line. by  the  commands, 
Forward,  Guide  right,  from  its  chief;  as  soon  as  it  reaches 
the  line,  the  section  is  formed  in  battery  to  the  front  by  the 
commands,  Pieces,  pass  your  caissons — March— In  Bat- 
tery— March,  from  its  chief. 

The  other  sections  continue  to  advance,  and  as  each  jy^rives 
opposite  its  place  in  battery,  after  having  passed  the  one  pre- 
ceding it  in  the  formation,  it  is  wheeled  to  the  right,  and 
formed  into  battery  by  its  chief,  in  the  "same  manner  as  the 
leadinsf  section. 

The  formation  in  battery  on  the  left,  is  executed  according 
to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  it  is  formed  in 
battery  on  the  right  or  left,  according  to  the  same  principles; 
the  chiefs  of  the  two  rear  sections  giving  the  additional  com- 
mands prescribed  in  No.  445. 


TO  DEPLOY  THE  DOUBLE  COLUMN  INTO  BATTERY  TO  THE 
FRONT  OR  REAR. 

447.  The  battery  being  in  double  column  at  a  halt,  to  de- 
ploy it  into  battery  to  the  front,  the  captain  commands : 

1.   Forward  into  battery.     2.   March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  com-, 
mands,  Section,  forward ;  that  of  the  right.  Section,  into 
line,  right  oblique;  that  of  the  left.  Section,  into  line,  left 
oblique;  and  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  goes  to  the  lead- 
ing section.  At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  sections,  the  centre  section  advances  5  yards,  and  without 
halting,  is  formed  into  battery  to  the  front  as  prescribed  in 
No.  432  or  434,  according  to  the  kind  of  carriage  in  front. 

The  pieces  of  the  flank  sections  are  brought  upon  the  line 
by  obliquing,  and  placed  successively  in  battery  without  com- 
mand ;  regulating  by  the  centre  section. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  double  column,  it  is  de- 
ployed into  battery  to  the  front  in   the  same   manner,  except 


166  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

that  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  does  not  command,  Sec-, 
tioji,  forward — MARCH.  .        -  . 

When  the  battery  is  in  double  column,  marching  or  at  a 
halt,  it  is  deployed  into  battery  to  the  rear  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  in  this  No.  and  in  No.  441  or  442,  ac- 
cording to  the  kind  of  carriage  in  front.     The  commands  are  : 

1.  Into.hatteri/,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  March. 

Wien  the  battery  consists  of  four  pieces,  the  double  column 
is  deployed  into  battery  to  the  front  or  rear,  by  the  same  com- 
mands from  the  captain  as  when  it  consists  of  sis..  The  sec- 
tions are.  formed  into  battery  as  prescribed  for  the  flank  sec- 
tions in  this  number.  The  senior  chief  of  section,  besides 
superintending  the  formation  of  his  own,  gives  the  commands 
required  for  the  centre  section,  and  the  leading  pieces  conform 
to  the  movements  of  that  section. 

TO  DEPLOY  THE  DOUBLE  COLUMN  INTO  BATTERY  TO  THE 
RIGHT  OR  LEFT. 

448.  When  the  battery  is  in  double  column,  marching,  or 
at  a  halt;  to  form  it  in  battery  to  the  right,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.    To  and  07i  the  right,  into  hattery.     2.  March. 

The  centre  section  is  formed  in-battery  on  the  right,  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  leading  section  in  No.  445  or  446,  according 
to  the  kind  of  carriage  in  front. 

The  other  pieces  are  brought  into  line  as  prescribed  in  No. 
423,  and,  without  halting,  are  formed  successively  in  battery 
to  the  front  without  commands;  regulating  by  the  centre 
section. 

The  deployment  into  battery  to  the  left  is  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  consists  of  four  pieces,  the  double  column 
is  deployed  into  battery  to  the  right  or  left,  by  the  same  com- 
mands from  the  captain  as  when  it  consists  of  six.  In  this 
case  the  leading  pieces  ate  wheeled  to  the  right  or  left  as  a 
section,  and  conducted  to  the  line  by  the  senior  chief  of  sec- 
tion. And  then,  without  halting,  they  are  formed  into  battery 
to  the  front  by  the  earns  chief.     The  other  pieties  move  for- 


SCHOOL    OF   TkE    BATTERY.  16'7 

ward,  wheel  ia  succession  as  they  arrive  opposite  their  places, 
and  form  in  battery  on  the  alignment  of  those  already 
established. 

TO  PASS  FROM  THE  ORD.ER  IN  BATTERY  TO  THE  ORDER  IN 

COLUMN. 

449.  Being  in  battery,  to  form  column,  the  captain  fifct 
causes  the  line  to  be  formed  as  prescribed  in  No.  437  or  438, 
and  then  forms  column  by  one  of  the  manoeuvres  for  passing 
from  the  order  in  line  to  the  order  in  column. 

TO  MARCH  BY  A  FLANK. 

450.  Being  in  battery,  to  gain  ground  to  the  left,  for  the 
purpose  of  forming  again  in  battery  without  an  intermediate 
formation,  the  captain  causes  the  pieces  to  be  limbered  to  the 
rear,  and  commands  : 

1.   Pieces  right — caissons  left — wheel.     2.   MARCH. 
3.  Forward.     4.    Guide  right. 

The  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and, 
at  the  word  March,  the  carriages  wheel , as  ordered,  and  at 
the  third  and  fourth  commands,  move  forward  with  the  inter- 
val of  8  yards,  and  a  distance  of  2  yards. 

The  movement  to  gain  ground  to  the  kft  may  be  executed 
by  linfl)ering  at  once  to  the  left;  the  caissons  wheeling  to  the 
left  while  the  pieces  are  limbering;  and  the  captain  after- 
wards commanding,  Forward— March — Guide  right. 

In  horse  artiUeri/,  the  captain  warns  the  horse  holders  to 
stand  fast  whilst  the  piece  is  limbering  to  the  rear;  they 
move  to  the  left  of  their'  pieces  when  limbering  to  the  leiPt. 

The  movement  to  gain  ground  to  the  right  is  executed  by 
the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

"As  soon  as  the  battery  has  i;cached  the  position  on  the  left 
which  it  is  intended  to  occupy,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Battery^  hy  the  left  flanh.     2.  March. 
3,  Fire  to  the  rear.     4.  In  battery. 

The  first  and  second  commands  are  repeated  and  executed 
as  usual.     The  third  and  fourth  commands  are  given  and  re-i^ 
peated  as  soon  aB  the  pieces  have  completed  the  wheel. 


168  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTEHY. 

In  liorse  artilleri/,  the  detachments  follow  the  movemeilts 
of  their  caissons,  and  take  their  places  in  battery. 

^When  the  battery  is  to  move  to  a  flank  and  be  formed  into 
battery  again  on  the  same  line,  it  may  be  executed  by  lim- 
bering to  the  front,  marching  to  a  flank,  and  then  command- 
ing, Column — hy  the  right  (or  left)  flank — March — Fire  to 
the  rear — In  BATTERY ;  the  caissons  taking  their  proper 
pFaces  in  battery  by  a  left  about. 

Th-e  sanVe  thing  may  be  executed  by  limbering  to  the  right 
or  left,  gaining  ground  to  a  flank,  halting,  and  commanding, 
Action  left,  or  Action  right. 

In  horse  artillery^  the  detachm'ents  wheel  to  the  right  or 
left  and-  take  their  places  in  battery. 

In  ail  cases  when  a  battery  is  halted  or  marching  in  a 
flank  direction,  it  maybe  formed  into  battery  to  the  right  or 
left,  by  the  command-,  Action  right  or  Action  left. 

In  horse  artillerij,  this  mode  of  coming  into  battery  should 
not  be  resorted  to,  when  the  caissons  are  required  to  pass 
their  pieceSj  unless  the  horses  may  be  easily  conducted  to 
their  places  hj  the  horse  holders.  In  this  case  the  captain 
commands,  Dismount,  immediately  after  Action  right  or 
Action  left. 

•  FIRINGS. 

451.  When  everything  is  prepared  for  firing,  the  Captain 
commands : 

Commence  firing. 

This  command,  given  by  itself  or  after  Load,  is  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  the  firing  immediately  com- 
menced. 

The  firing  by  battery,  by  half-battery,  by  section,  and  by 
piece,  will   be  governed  by  th^  directions  already  prescribed. 

To  fire  by  battery,  the  captain  commands : 

1.   Fire  hy  battery.     2.  Battery — FiRE. 

The  first  command  is  repeated  •  by  the  chiefs  of  sections^ 
the  second  is  not  repeated. 

To  fire  by  half- battery,  the  captain  commands : 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY.  169 

1.  Fire  hy  lialf-hattery . 

2.  Rlgla  (or  left)  liaJ f-h alter y—YlViV.. 

To  fire  by  section  : 
1.  Fire  hy  section.     2.  Right  (centre  qv  left)  section — FiRE, 
To  fire  by  piece  : 

1 .  Fire  hy  piece. 

2.  Right  section — right  (or  left)  piece — FiRE. 

The  chiefs  of  half-batteries  or  sections  repeat  the  first  com- 
mand, and  immediately  designate  their  respective  commands 
as  Right  or  left  half-battery — Right  or  left  section.  They  do 
not  repeat  the  second  commands. 

The  firing  is  discontinued  by  the  command  or  signal : 

Cease  firing. 

The  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections  and  of 
pieces,  and  the  loaded  pieces  discharged  or  the  load  drawn, 
except  in  the  case  when  the  battery  is  retiring  with  the  pro- 
longe. 

452.  To  move  and  to  fire  with  the  prolonge  fixed,  the  cap- 
tain gives  the  necessary  directions  as  in  No.  247.  It  is  but 
seldom  that  this  mode  of  moving  and  firing  is  necessary,  and 
it  will  only  be  resorted  to  when  circumstances  require  it. 

TO  FIRE  ADVANCING. 

453.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  to  advance  by  half-batte- 
ries, the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Fire  advancing,  hy  halfhattery. 

2.  Right  half-hattery — Advance. 

,  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  half-battery 
discontinues  firing,  causes  his  pieces  to  be  limbered  to  the 
front,  and  commands.  Forward,  March,  Guide  left.  Or, 
he  may  cause  them  to  be  limbered  to  the  rear,  and  after  exe- 
cuting the  about,  command.  Forward,  Guide  left.  The  half- 
battery  advances,  and  the  caissons  preserve  their  distance  in 
battery. 

As  soon  as  the  right  half  battery  reaches  the  new  position, 
previously  indicated  by  the  captain,  its  chief  places  it  in  bat- 
8 


170  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

levy,  by  the  commands,  Halt — AcnoN — pront  ;  or  In  bat- 
tery, March  ;  the  two  last  commands  being  given  in  quick 
succession.  The  caissons  halt  at  these  commands;  and  as 
soon  as  the  pieces  are  unlimbered,  the  firing  is  renewed  by 
command  from  the  chief  of  half-battery. 

The  fire  of  the  left  half-battery  is  continued  during  the 
movement  of  the  right,  care  being  taken  to  direct  the  pieces 
60  that  their  fire  shall  not  injure  the  half-battery  in  advance. 

As  soon  as  the  right  half-battery  commences  firing,  the  left 
moves  forward  with  the  guide  to  the  right ;  and,  after  passing 
the  right  half-battery  as  far  as  the  latter  has  advanced,  is 
formed  into  battery  and  the  tiring  commenced.  The  move- 
ments of  the  left  half-battery  are  efiected  by  commands  and 
means  corresponding  to  those  of  the  right. 

The  right  half- battery  again  advances  as  soon  as  the  left 
commences  firing ;  and  the  two  continue  to  advance  alter- 
nately until  the  captain  causes  the  firing  to  cease.  The  bat- 
tery is  then  aligned,  or  formed  into  line,  to  the  front  or  rear, 
by  the  proper  commands  from  the  captain. 

While  advancing  by  half-battery,  the  captain  places  him- 
self habitually  with  the  most  advanced  portion  of  the  battery, 
and  is  accompanied  by  the  chief  of  the  centre  section.  The 
chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  remains  habitually  with  the  rear 
half-battery. 

In  horse  artillery,  while  advancing  by  half-battery,  the  de- 
tachments preserve  their  distance  in  battery.  "When  the  pieces 
are  limbered  to  the  front,  the  horse-holders  advance-to  enable 
the  cannoneers  to  mount  more  readily;  but  as  soon  as  the 
pieces  advance,  the  detachments  resume  their  distance  in 
battery. 

To  fire  advancing  by  half-battery,  commencing  with  the 
left,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

The  movement  may  also  be  executed  by  section  ;  the  sec- 
tions advancing  in  succession,  according  to  their  positions  in 
the  battery. 

TO  FIRE  IN  RETREAT. 

454.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  to  retire  by  half-batteries, 
the  captain  commands : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  171 

1.  Fire  retiring^  hy  lialf-hattery. 

2.  Rvjlit  half -battery — IIetire. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  half-battery 
discontinues  firing;,  limbers  to  the  rear,  and  commands,  Cais- 
S071S,  left  about,  March.  As  soon  as  the  about  is  completed, 
he  commands.  Forward,  Guide  right;  and  conducts  the 
half-battery  tothe  ground  previously  indicated  by  the  captain; 
the  pieces  preserving  their  distance  in  battery  by  marching 
19  yards  in  roar  of  the  caissons.  As  soon  as  the  ground  has 
been  reached,  the  chief  of  the  half-battery  commands.  Halt, 
Fire  to  the  rear' — In  BATTERY,  and  commences  firing;  taking 
care  not  to  injure  the  other  half-battery.  The  limbers  and 
caissons  remain  facino;  toward  the  rear,  as  Iodo;  as  the  firing; 
in  retreat  continues. 

As  soon  as  the  right  half-battery  commences  firing,' the  left 
retires  with  the  gaide  to  the  left;  and,  after  passing  the  right 
half-battery  as  far  as  the  latter  has  retired,  it  is  formed  into 
batter}?-,  and  the  firing  again  commenced.  The  movements 
are  executed  in  a  manner  corresponding  to  those  of  the  other 
half-battery. 

The  half-batteries  continue  to  retire  alternately,  until  the 
captain  causes  the  firing  to  cease.  The  battery  is  afterwards 
aligned,  or  formed  into  line  to  the  front  or  rear,  by  appropri- 
ate commands  from  the  captain.  "    ■ 

While  retiring  by  half- battery,  the  captain  remains  habitu- 
ally with  the  portion  of  the  battery  nearest  the  enemy,  and  is 
accompanied  by  the  chief  of  the  centre  section.  The  chief 
of  the  line  of  caissons  accompanies  the  other  half-battery. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  detachments  move  to  the  left  to  fa- 
cilitate the  about  of  the  caissons.  They  afterfv^ards  place 
themselves  behind  and  follow  them  during  the  retrograde 
movement  at  the  distance  of  2  yards;  remaining  faced  to  the 
rear  as  long  as  the  firing  in  retreat  continues. 

To  fire  retiring  by  half-batter}^,  commencing  with  the  left, 
is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

The  movement  may  also  be  executed  by  section ;  the  sec- 
tions retiring  in  succession  according  to  their  positions  in  the 
battery. 


172  SCHOOL   01'   THE   BATTERY. 

MOVEMENTS  FOR  FIRING  IN  ECHELON. 

455,  When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt  with  pieces  in 
front,  to  advance  in  echelon  of  pieces^  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Bjj  piece  from  the  rights  front  into  echelon. 
2.  March. 

At  the  last  command,  the  right  piece  moves  forward,  fol- 
lowed by  its  caisson.  The  next  piece  moves  forward  in  like 
manner  as  soon  as  its  leaders  are  abreast  the  wheel  horses  of 
the  rear  carriage  on  the  right;  and  the  other  pieces  commence 
the  movement  in  succession  according  to  the  same  rule. 

The  officers  preserve  the  same  relative  positions  as  in  line. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line  at  a  walk  or  trot,  the 
echelon  is  formed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
the  same  commands;  the  gaits  being  regulated  as  in  breaking 
sections. 

The  battery  advances  in  echelon  of  pieces  from  the  left 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  caissons  are  in  front,  the  battery  advances  in 
echelon  of  pieces  from  the  right  or  left  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  the  same  commands. 

When  the  battery  is  in  echelon,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  it 
may  be  formed  into  battery  to  the  front,  rear,  right,  or  left. 

When  firing  in  echelon  to  the  front  or  rear,  the  direction 
of  the  fire  may  be  changed  to  the  right  or  left.  For  this  pur- 
pose the  captain  orders  the  firing  to  cease,  and  commands, 
Action  right  (or  left).  At  this  command,  the  trails  of 
the  pieces  arp  turned  to  the  left  (or  right),  and  the  limbers 
and  caissons  take  their  places  in  rear  of  the  pieces.  But  if 
retiring  with  the  prolonge  fixed,  the  caissons  stand  fast,  and 
the  limbers  back  to  allow  the  trails  to  be  turned  in  the  proper 
direction.  The  prolonge  must  be  sufficiently  slack  to  allow 
the  recoil  of  the  guns.  This  last  method  is  only  applicable 
to  firing  to  the  right  when  retiring  by  the  right,  and  to  the 
left  when  retiring  by  the  left. 

BEING  IN  ECHELON,  TO  FORM  LINE. 

456.  The  battery  being  in  eohelou  at  a  halt,  to  form  it  into 
ine,  the  captain  commands  j 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  173 

1 .    On  the  right  (or  left^  piece — forward  into  line, 
2.  March. 

The  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  Each 
piece  moves  forward  and  establishes  itself  on  the  line,  dress- 
ing on  the  piece  indicated. 

If  the  battery  is  in  march,  to  form  line  without  halting, 
the  commands  are  : 

1.  Form  line  advancing y  on  right  [ov  left')  piece — trot. 
2.  March. 

The  pieces  to  the  rear  move  forward  at  the  increased  gait, 
and  take  their  positions  in  line. 

If  the  battery  is  in  echelon  and  firing,  to  form  it  in  the 
order  in  battery,  continuing  the  fire,  the  captain  causes  the 
pieces  behind  the  line  on  which  the  formation  is  to  be  made 
to  cease  their  fire,  and  commands : 

1.    On  the  right  (or  left')  piece — forward  into  battery. 
2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  places 
his  left  piece  on  the  line,  the  right  continuing  its  fire.  The 
chiefs  of  the  other  sections  caus-e  them  to  be  limbered  to  the 
frontj  and  at  the  word  March,  which  they  repeat,  move  them 
forward,  and  establish  them  in  battery  on  the  line  with  the 
right  section. 

TO  FIRE  TO  THE  REAR. 

457.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  to  fire  to  the  rear,  the 
captain  causes  the  firing  to  cease,  and  commands : 

1.  Fire  to  the  rear.     2.  Limhers  and  caissons^  pass  your 
pieces — trot.     3.     March.  ' 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At 
the  command  March,  the  pieces  arc  wheeled  about  by  turn- 
ing the  trails  to  the  left;  and  the  limbers  and  caissons  oblique 
to  the  right,  pass  them,  and  take  their  places  in  battery  by  a 
left,  reverse. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  horses  follow  their  limbers,  pass 
them,  and  take  their  places  by  reversing  to  the  left. 


174  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY. 


CHANGES  OF  FRONT  IN  BATTERY. 

CHANGE  OF  FRONT  TO  FIRE  TO  THE    RIGHT,  LEFT  WING 
FORWARD,   AND  THE  REVERSE. 

458.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  if  the  captain  wishes  to 
make  a  perpendicular  chanpje  of  front,  to  fire  to  the  right, 
throwing  forward  the  left  wing,  he  discontinues  firing,  and 
commands :  ' 

1.  Fire  to  the  riyht.     2.    Change  front  forward  on  the 
right  piece.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  places 
the  right  piece  in  the  .new  direction,  by  causing  the  trail  to  be 
moved  to  the  left.  He  also  causes  the  left  piece  of  his  sec- 
tion to  be  moved  forward  by  band,  and  established  on  the 
new  line.  When  the  ground  is  unmasked,  the  Jimbers  and 
caissons  of  these  pieces  oblique  to  the  left,  move  forward,  and 
take  their  places  in  battery  by  wheeling  to  the  right;  the 
caissons  aligning  themselves  by  the  chief  of  the  line  of  cais- 
sons established  on  the  rio;ht. 

The  other  chiefs  of  sections  cause  their  pieces  to  bis  lim- 
bered by  the  commandj  Limber  to  the  front;  the  caissons, 
and  in  horse  artillery  the  horse  holders,  also,  closing  upon  the 
pieces  while  they  are  limbering.  As  soon  as  they  are  lim- 
bered the  chiefs  of  sections  command  Forward. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons 
places  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  piece  of  the  centre  sec- 
tion, facing  to  the  front,  to  mark  the  right  of  the  new  line  of 
caissons. 

At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  the 
centre  and  left  sections,  these  sections  move  to  the  front;  and 
when  each  has  arrived  opposite  its  place  on  the  new  line,  its 
chief  commands,  Section,  right  -wheel — March — Forward — 
and  afterward,  In  battery,  March,  so  as  to  form  upon  the 
alignment  of  the  right  section.  When  the  caisson  of  the 
right  piece  of  the  centre  section  reaches  the  point  where  its 
piece  wheeled,  it  wheels  to  the  left,  takes  its  distance  in  rear, 
wheels  about  and  dresses' to  the  right  upon  the  line  of  cais- 
sons. 

The  other  caission  of  the  same  section  obliques  to  the  left 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY.  175 

wben  its  piece  commences  the  wheel;  and,  after  gaining  its 
distance,  establishes  itself  on  the  line  hy  wheeling  and  dress- 
ing to  the  right. 

The  pivot  piece  commences  firing  again,  as  soon  as  it  is  in 
position,  and  the  others xis  they  arrive  on  the  line. 

The  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  loft,  right  wing  forward,, 
is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

In  Jiorse  artiUcri/^  the  detachments  follow  their  pieces  and 
halt  at  the  proper  distance  from  the  line.  That  of  the  left 
piece  of  the  right  section,  when  limbered,  wheels  to  the  left 
when  its  piece  wheels  to  the  right,  allows  its  caisson  to  pass 
it,  and  takes  its  place  by  wheeling  about  to  the  left.  The 
horse  holders  of  the  pieces  not  limbered  oblique  to  the  left, 
with  their  limbers,  and,  like  theiu,  take  their  places  in  bat- 
tery by  wheeling  to  the  right.  When  it  is  deemed  advisable, 
the  captain  may  retain  the  cannoneers  at  their  pieces,  and 
allow  all  the  horse  holders  to  conduct  their  horses  to  the  new 
line.     The  sanle  may  be  done  in  the  other  changes  of  front. 

CHANGE   OF   FRONT    TO   FIRE   TO    THE   LEFT,    LEFT  WING 
FORWARD,  AND  THE  REVERSE. 

459.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  if  tl;e  captain  wishes  to 
make  a  perpendicular  change  of  front  to  .fire  to  the  left, 
throwing  forward  the  left  wing,  he  discontinues  firing  and 
commands  : 

1.   Fire  io  the  left.     2.    Change  front  forvcard  on  the  right 
piece.     3.   March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  (he  right  section 
causes  the  right  piece  to  be  placed  in  the  new  direction  at 
once,  by  moving  the  trail  to  the  right;  and  the  limber  and 
caisson  of  that  piece  will  oblique  to  the  right,  and  take  their 
places  in  its  rear  by  wheeling  to  the  left;  the  caisson  dressing 
upon  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons.  He  also  causes  his 
left 'piece  to  be  moved  to  its  place  and  established  on  the  lino 
by  hand;  the  limber  of  this  piece,  passing  it  on  the  right, 
takes  its  place  by  wheeling  to  the  left,  its  caisson  obliques  to 
the  right,  passes  on  the  right,  and  in  rear  of  the  right  cais- 
son, and  takes  its  place  also  by  wheeling  to  the  left. 


176  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  sections  cause  them  to  be  limbered 
to  the  front ;  and  while  limbering  they  command,  Caissons, 
^ass  1/ou)' pieces,  trot — Marcii.  '  When  this  is  executed,  the 
chief  of  the  centre  section  commands,  Section,  right  wheel, 
and  that  of  the  left,  Foricard. 

At  the  command  JMarch,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  the 
centre  and  left  sections,  these  sections  move  as  ordered,  with 
the  caissons  leading.  The  centre  section  is  conducted  to  the 
line  by  its  chief  and  formed  by  the  commands,  Forward  and 
In  battery.  The  left  section  advances  5  yards  and  is  con- 
ducted to  the  line  by  two  successive  right  half-wheels.  It  is 
there  formed  in  like  manner  upon  the  alignment  of  the  right 
section. 

At  the  second  command  from  the  captain,  the  chief  of  the 
line  of  caissons  places  himself  in  prolongation  of  the  line,  32 
yards  on  the  right  of  the  right  piece,  and  faces  to  the  front^ 
to  mark  the  left  of  the  new  line  of  caissons. 

The  pivot  piece  re-commences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is  un- 
masked; and  the  others  when  they  arrive  on  the  line. 

The  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  right,  right  wing  for- 
ward, is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

In  horse  artilleri/,  the  horse  holders  of  those  pieces,  which 
are  placed  on  the  line  by  hand,  conduct  the  horses  to  their 
positions  in  battery  by  following  their  limbers. 

CHANGE  OF  FRONT  TO  FIRE  TO  THE  LEFT,  LEFT  WING 
TO  THE  REAR,  AND  THE  REVERSE. 

460.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  if  the  captain  wishes  to 
make  a  perpendicular  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  throw- 
ing the  left  wing  to  the  rear,  he  causes  the  firing  to  cease,  and 
commands : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left.     2.    Change  front  to  the  rear  on  the 
right  piece.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section 
places  the  right  piece  in  the  new  direction,  by  causing  the 
trail  to  be  moved  to  the  right.  He  also  causes  the  left  piece 
of  his  section  to  be  moved  to  the  rear  by  hand,  and  estab- 
lished on  the  new  line.     The  limbers  and  caissons  of  these 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTERY.        •  177 

pieces  move  at  once  to  the  rigbt,  obliquing  sufficiently  to  place 
themselves  in  rear  of  their  respective  pieces,  and  take  their 
places  by  reversing  to  the  left. 

The  other  chiefs  of  sections  command,  Limber  to  the 
REAR,  and  immediately  afterwards,  Catssojis,  in  front  of  your 
pieces,  trot — March.  The  caissons  place  themselves  in  front 
of  their  pieces,  while  they  are  limbering,  and  halt  as  pre- 
scribed in  No.  438.  The  chiefs  of  these  sections  then  com- 
mand. Forward. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  places  himself  in. the  pro- 
longation of  the  line,  82  yards  on  the  right  of  the  right  piece, 
and  faces  to  the  rear,  to  mark  the  right  of  the  new  line  of 
caissons. 

At  the  command  March,  given  by  the  captain,  and  re- 
peated by  the  chiefs  of  the  centre  and  left  sections,  the  chiefs 
of  these  sections  command,  Guide  left,  and  afterwards  in  suc- 
cession, Section,  left  wheel — March — Forward — In  bat- 
tery. The  carriages  dress  towards  the  pivot  as  they  arrive 
on  the  line. 

The  pivot  piece  re-commences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is  un- 
masked, and  the  others  when  they  arrive  on  the  line. 

The  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  right,  right  wing  to  the 
rear,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

In  liorse  artillery,  the  detachments  pass  their  pieces  at  the 
command  March,  place  themselves  2  yards  in  rear  of  the 
muzzles,  follow  them,  and  at  the  command  In  battery, 
take  their  places.  The  horse  holders  of  those  pieces  which 
are  moved  by  hand,  follow  their  limbers  and  conduct  the 
horses  to  their  positions  by  movements  corresponding  to  those 
6f  their  caissons.  When  the  left  piece  of  the  right  section 
is  limbered,  the  horses  of  the  detachment  are  conducted  to 
their  places  in  the  same  manner  as  though  the  piece  were  un- 
limbered,  except  that  the  detachment  mounts. 

CHANGE  OF  FRONT  TO  FIRE  TO   THE   KIGHT,  LEFT  WING 
TO  THE  REAR,  AND  REVERSE. 

461.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  if  the  captain  wishes  to 
make  a  perpendicular  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  right, 
throwing  the  left  wing  to  the  rear,  he  discontinues  firing  and 
/jomyiiand.s : 


178  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

1.  Fire  to  the  right.     2.    Change  front  to  the  rear  on  the 
right  piece.     3.  March. 

At  tlie  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  com- 
mands, Limbers  and  'caissons,  in  rear  of  your  pieces,  trot — 
March.-  The  limbers  and  caissons  oblique  to  the  right,  and 
pass  their  pieces  with  the  limbers  leading.  As  soon  as  the 
limbers  have  passed,  they  wheel  twice  to  the  left  and  cover 
their  pieces.  The  caissons  pass  their  limbers  and  cover  them 
in  like  manner.  The  chief  of  the  section  causes  the  trail  of 
his  right*  piece  to  be  moved  to  the  left,  and  his  left  piece  to 
be  placed  upon  the  new  alignment  by  hand. 

The  chiefs  of  other  sections  command,  Limber  to  the 
REAR,  and  Caissons,  in  rear  of  your  pieces,  trot — MARCH. 
When  this  is  executed,  they  command  Forword,. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons 
places  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  piece  of  the  centre  sec- 
tion, facing  to  the  rear,  to  mark  the  left  of  the  new  line  of 
caissons. 

At  the  command  March,  from  the  captain,  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  the  centre  and  left  sections,  those  sections,  as  well 
as  the  limbers  and  caissons  of  the  first,  are  established  upon 
the  new  line  as  described  in  No.  458. 

The  pivot  piece  recommences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is  placed 
in  the  new  direction,  and  the  others  as  they  arrive  on  the  line. 

Tho  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  right  wing  to  the- 
rear,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  mounted  detachments  pass  their 
pieces  with  the  caissons  at  the  command  March,  and  take 
their  places  in  rear  of  the  muzzles  by  successive  wheels  to  the 
left.  The  horse  holders  of  the  pieces  which  are  moved  by 
hand  follow  their  limbers  and  wheel  into  their  places  in  like 
manner.     The  remainder  is  executed  as  in  No.  458. 

TO  TASS  A  DEFILE  IN  FRONT. 

462.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  to  pass  a  defile  in  front  of 
the  right  section,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.    To  the  front ^  hy  the  right  section,  pass  the  defle. 

2.  MARc^. 


School  of  the  BATTERYi  179 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of.  the  right  section  dis- 
continues firing,  limbers  his  pieces  to  the  front,  and  commands 
Forward.  At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  this  chief, 
who  also  commands  Guide  left,  the  section  moves  forward, 
passes  the  defile,  and  is  again  established  in  battery,  and  the 
firing  commenced  by  his  command.  ^ 

As  soon  as  the  right  section  commences  firing,  the  centre 
is  put  in  motion  in  like  manner.  Its  chief  conducts  it  through 
the  defile  by  successive  wheels,  and  forms  it  into  battery  in 
line  with  the  first. 

As  soon  as  the  centre  section  commences  firing,  the  left 
passes  in  like  manner. 

While  one  section  is  passing  the  defile,  the  others  continue 
firing,  care  being  taken  not  to  injure  the  section  in  advance. 

When  the  defile  is  in  front  of  the  left  section,  it  is  passed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  commencing  with  that 
section. 

When  the  defile  is  in  front  of  the  centre  section,  it  is  passed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  commencing  with  that 
section,  and  by  the  commands.  To  the  front,  by  the  centre 
section,  pass  the  defile — March.  Unless  there  is  some  reason 
to  the  contrary,  the  right  section  will  pass  before  the  left. 

W^hen  the  flank  or  oblique  march  is  better  suited  to  the 
nature  of  the  ground,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will  give  the 
required  commands. 

When  the  defile  will  admit  but  one  piece  at  a  time,  the 
sections  are  broken  by  their  chiefs  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
cause  the  nearest  piece  to  enter  first.  The  sections  are 
ro  formed  by  their  chiefs  immediately  after  passing  the  defile. 

TO  PASS  A  DEFILE  IN  REAR. 

463.  When  the  battery  is  firings  to  pass  a  defile  in  rear  of 
the  centre  section,  the  captain  commands : 

.    1.    To  the  rear,  hy  the  right  section,  pass  the  defile. 

2.  March. 

•  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  dis- 
continues firing,  limbers  to  the  rear,  and  commands,  Caissons, 
left  about,  pieces,  forward.  At  the  command  March, 
repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  right  section^  the  caissons  of  that 


180.  SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTERY. 

section  execute  the  about,  and  the  pieces  close  to  their  proper 
distance  at  a  trot.  As  soon  as  the  about  is  completed,  the 
chief  commands  Forward,  Guide  left,  conducts  the  section 
through  the  defile  by  successive  wheels,  and  forms  it  into 
battery  in  rear  of  its  first  position. 
'*'  The  left  section  is  put  in  motion  as  soon  as  the  rif!;ht  com- 
mences firing.  It  is  conducted  through  the  defile  by  its  chief, 
and  formed  into  batterry  in  rear  of  its  first  position,  by  the 
principles  already  described. 

The  centre  section  rjoves  as  soon  as  the  left  commences 
firing.  It  is  formed  into  battery  in  rear  of  its  first  position, 
and  in  line  with  the  other  two  sections. 

The  passage  of  the  defile  may  be  executed,  commencing  with 
the  left  section,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by 
inverse  means. 

When  the  defile  is  in  rear  of  one  of  the  flanks,, the  move-- 
ment  should  commence  with  the  other.     It  should  always  end 
by  passing  the  section  or  piece  covering  the  defile. 

When  the  defile  will  admit  but  one  piece  at  a  time,  the 
sections  are  broken  by  their  chiefs  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
cause  the  piece  farthest  from  the  defile  to  enter  first;  and  the 
sections  are  again  formed  as  soon  as  possible  after  leaving  the 
defile. 

PARADE  FOR  REVIEW  AND  INSPECTION. 

464.  The  battery  being  in  line,  with  the  pieces  in  front; 
the  first  sergeant  2  yards  from  the  right ;  the  buglers  and 
guidon  in  one  rank,  6  yards  on  his  right;  the  quartermaster- 
sergeant  2  yards  from  the  left;  the  artificers  in  one  rank,  6 
yards  on  his  left;  all  dressed  on  the  lead  drivers  of  the 
pieceS;  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Prepare  for  review. 
3.  Action  front.     4.  Right — Dress.     5.  Front. 

At  the  third  command,  the  battery  is  formed  as  directed  j 
the  chiefs  of  sections  take  their  places  in  the  centre  of  their *^ 
sections,  3  yards  in  front  of  the  line  of  muzzles ;  and  the 
chiefs  of  pieces,  without  dismounting,  take  their  places  at 
their  posts,  in  hattevij.  The  first,  and  quartermaster-sergeants, 
|)uglers.  guidon^  and  artificers;  I'^verse  with  the  limbers^  and 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  181 

take  their  places,  in  the  order  already  directed,  on  a  line  with 
the  lead  drivers ;  the  cannoneers  are  at  their  posts. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  battery  is  aligned — the  chiefs 
of  sections,  the  pieces,  and  the  limbers,  by  the  captain;  and 
the  caissons  by  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons. 

At  the  fifth  command,  given  by  the  captain  when  the  align- 
ment is  completed,  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  takes  hi3 
position  ill  hattcry.     The  captain  then  commands  : 

Draw — Sabres. 

This  is  executed  by  the  first  sergeant,  quartermaster- 
sergeant,  chiefs  of  pieces,  and  artificers;  and  the  captain  takes 
post  12  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  battery,  (8  yards, 
if  there  are  two  or  more  batteries  in  line,)  faces  to  the  front, 
and  awaits  the  approach  of  the  reviewing  officer. 

When  the  reviewing  officer  is  midway  between  the  camp- 
color  and  the  captain,  the  latter  reverses  to  the  right,  and 
commands ; 

Present — Saeres. 

He  immediately  resumes  his .  front  and  salutes,  as  do  all 
whose  sabres  are  drawn,  and  the  music  plays  according  to  the 
rank  of  the  reviewino-  officer. 

o 

The  reviewing  officer  having  halted,  and  acknowledged  the 
salute,  the  captain  brings  his  sabre  to  a  carry,  reverses  as 
before,  and  commands : 

Carry — Sabres. 

He  immediately  resumes  his  front;  the  reviewing  officer 
turns  off  to  the  right  of  the  battery,  passes  along  its  front,  and 
returns  to  the  right  by  passing  between  the  lines  of  carriages, 
or  in  rear  of  the  caissons.- 

^Yhile  the  reviewing  officer  is  passing  around  the  battery, 
the  music  plays.  It  ceases  when  he  turns  off  to  take  his  post 
at  the  camp-color. 

When  the  music  ceases,  the  captain  faces  the  battery,  and 
commands : 

Limber  to  the  front, 

and  all  resume  their  places  in  line. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  takerii  a  position  near  the 
camp-color,  the  captain  causes  the  cannoneers  to  mount,  and 


i^ 


182  ^^'  '^^      SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

breaks  the  battery  into  column  of  sections  to  the  right  by  the 
usual  commands.     lie  then  commands  : 

Pass  in  review, 

•.and  puts  the  column  in  march,  at  a  walk,  with  the  guide  to 
the  right. 

The  captain  then  places  himself  at  the  head  of  the  column, 
4  yards  in  advance  of  the  chief  of  the  leading  section ;  the 
buglers  march  4  yards  in  advance  of  the  captain  ;  the  chief 
of  the  line  of  caissons  outside  the  column,  opposite  the  centre, 
and  4  yards  from  the  left  flank;  the  first  sergeant  and 
quartermaster-sergeant  outside  the  column,  4  yards  from  the 
left  flank,  the  former  abreast  the  lead  drivers  of  the  leading 
section,  the  latter  abreast  the  lead  drivers  of  the  rear  section  ; 
the  artificers  in  one  rank,  4  yards  in  rear  of  the  column-;  the 
guidon  at  the  side  of  the  chief  of  the  directing  piece. 

When  the  head  of  the  column  has  arrived  within  40  yards 
of  the  reviewing  officer,  the  music  begins  to  play,  and  as  soon 
as  the  latter  has  ^passed,  it  wheels  out  of  column  to  a  position 
in  front  of  the  reviewing  officer,  where  it  faces  him,  and 
continues  to  play  until  the  column  has  passed.  It  then 
ceases,  follows  in  rear  of  the  battery,  and  resumes  its  place  at 
the  head  of  the  column  after  the  next  change  of  direction. 

All  the  officers  salute  in  succession  as  they  arrive  within  G 
yards  of  the  reviewing  officer,  casting  their  eyes  tow^ards  him 
at  the  same  time,  and  bringing  their  sabres  to  a  carry  after 
having  passed  him  6  yards.  As  soon  as  the  captain  has 
saluted,  he  places  himself  on  the  left  of  the  reviewing  officer, 
passing  by  his  rear,  remains  until  the  battery  has  passed,  and 
then  rejoins  it,  again  passing  by  the  rear. 

The  column  is  so  conducted  as  to  march  parallel  to  the  line 
on  which  the  battery  is  to  form,  and  far  enough  in  its  rear  to 
enable  the  column  to  wheel  into  litie.  _  It  is  then  wheeled  into 
line,  formed  into  battery,  and  the  review  terminated  by  a 
salute  as  at  the  beginning. 

"When  instruction  has  been  previously  given  to  pass  a  second 
time,  either  at  a  trot  or  gallop,  it  will  be  done  before  wheeling 
into  line,  the  officers  passing  the  second  time  without  saluting. 

Wlien  artiller.ij  is  reviewed  with  other  troops^  the  pieces,  on 
coming  into  battery,  are  dressed  on  them,  the  wheels  being  in 
the  prolongatiou  of  the  line  of  the  front  rank,  the  chiefs  of 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY.  183 

sections  place  themselves  on  the  line  of  company  officers,  and 
"the  captain  on  the  line  of  field  officers. 

At  the  command,  dose  order,  instead  of  limbering  to  the 
front,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Limher  to  the  rear,     2.  Pieces,  left  ahont — Caissons, 
forward.     3.  Majicii.     4.  Baiter^/ — Halt. 

These  commands  are  executed,  and  the  pieces  halt  with 
their  lead  drivers  on  a  line  with  the  other  troops. 

After  passing  in  review  and  reaching  the  s=;round  on  which 
it  is  to  form,  the  battery  may  be  wheeled  by  section  to  the 
right,  and  after  gaining  the  necessary  distance  to  the  rear, 
countermarched,  and  established  on  the  line. 

When  a  battery  is  to  march  passed  in  line  or  iij  column  of 
•half  batteries,  it  will  be  done  according  to  the  principles 
already  prescribed.  In  line,  the  officers,  etc.,  will  be  at  their 
usual  posts.  In  polumn  of  half  latteries,  the  captain  will  be 
2  yards  in  advance  of  the  chief  of  the  leading. half  battery; 
each  chief  of  half  battery  2  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his 
command ;  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  on  the  left  of  the 
leading  half  battery,  4  yards  from  its  centre,  and  the  chief  of 
the  line  of  caissons  in  the  same  position  with  respect  to  the 
rear  half  battery. 

In  eight-gun  batteries,  when  the  column  is  formed  "by  half 
battery,  the  chiefs  of  sections  who  do  not  command  half  bat- 
teries, retain  their  places  in  their  sections. 

The  buglers  are  4  yards  in  front  of  the  captain.  The  first 
sergeant  and  quartermastcr-sergeanfc  are  outside  the  column  of 
half  batteries,  4  yards  from  the  left  flank,  the  former  abreast 
the  lead  driver  of  the  leading,  the  latter  abreast  the  load 
driver  of  the  rear  half  battery;  the  artificers  in  one  rank,  4 
yards  in* rear  of  the  column,  the  guidon  at  the  side  of  the 
directing  piece. 

OFFICERS'  SALUTE  AVITII  THE  SABRE. 

405.  When  officers  are  to  salute,  whether  on  horseback  or 
on  foot,  at  a  halt  or  in  march,  they  execute  it  in  four  motions  : 

1st.  At  G  yards  from  the  person  to  be  saluted,  raise  the 
sabre  perpendicularly,  the  point  upwards,  edge  to  the  left,  the 
hand  opposite  to  and  1  foot  from  the  right  shoulder,  the  waist 
6  inches  from  the  body. 


184  SCHOOL   OP  THE   BATTERY. 

'■* 

2d.  Lower  the  blade,  extending  tlie  arm  to  its  full  length, 
the  hand  in  quarter  until  the  point  of  the  sabre  is  near  the 
foot. 

od.  Raise  the  sabre  quickly,  the  point  upwards  as  in  the 
first  motion,  after  the  person  saluted  is  passed  4  yards. 

4th.  Bring  the  sabre  to  a  carry, 

INSPECTION. 

466.  Batteries  of  field  artillery  will  always,  for  inspection, 
be  formed  either  in  line  or  in  battery. 

The  knapsacks  of  the  cannoneers  are  strapped  on  the  foot 
boards  of  the  ammunition  chests.  If  the  inspector  wishes  to 
examine  the  clothing  of  the  men  on  the  field,  the  knapsacks 
and  valices*will  be  unstrapped,  laid  at  the  feet  of  the  men 
and  opened,  the  drivers  being  dismounted  for  the  purpose. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   BATTEEIES.  185 


OB&olutious  of  IJatinits. 


467.  This  part  of  the  text  gives  the  movements  necessary 
for  the  different  formations  of  several  harnessed  batteries 
united  together,  applying  to  each  of  them  the  manoeuvres  of 
a  single  battery.  It  is  especially  prepared  for  four  batteries, 
but  is  susceptible  of  being  applied  to  a  greater  or  lesser 
number. 

When  different  kinds  of  batteries  are  to  manoeuvre  together, 
all  will  take  and  keep  the  intervals  and  distances  of  the 
liorse-hatteries,  the  Jwrsc-hatleries  being  placed  on  the  wings. 
Each  battery  is  composed,  in  its  material  and  jpersonnel,  as 
prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Battery. 

Two  batteries  form  a  division^  which  is  commanded  by  a 
major. 

The  four  batteries  arc  commanded  by  a  colonel  or  a  lieu- 
tenant-colonel. 

An  adjutant  accompanies  the  commandant  of  the  four  bat- 
teries. It  is  his  duty  to  see  that  the  lines  of  formation  or  of 
deployment  are  established  at  the  prescribed  distances  j  to  su- 
pervise the  assistant  adjutants  in  the  movements  in  which 
they  are  employed ;  to  send  or  give  the  points  of  direction  to 
the  guide  of  the  march,  whether  in  line  or  in  column  ;  and  to 
communicate  the  orders  of  the  colonel  when  so  directed. 

The  chief  bugler  is  also  attached  to  the  colonel. 

An  assistant  adjutant  accompanies  each  division  command- 
ant, and  attends  to  the  duties  of  his  division  analogous  to 


186         EVOXUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

those  of  the  adjutant  in  the  four  batteries.     Each  division 
commandant  has  a -bugler  near  him. 

468.  The  batteries  are  desir/natedhy  numbers^  referring  to 
their  positions  in  line  or  in  column,  and  varying  with  that  po- 
sition;  but  always  beginning  from  the  right  of  the  line,  or 
froDi  the  head  of  the  column,  so  that  with  four  batteries  the 
two-of  the  tvings  will  always  bear  the  numbers  1  and  4,  and 
those  of  the  centre  the  numbers  2  and  3 ;  the  wing  batteries 
and  the  centre  batteries  interchanging  among  themselves  these 
numbers,  so  that  the  wing  battery  on  the  right  of  the  line,  or 
the  battery  at  the  head  of  the  column,  is  always  designated  as 
No.  1,  and  the  front  or  right  centre  battery  as  No.  2;  thus 
avoiding  all  considerations  of  inversions,  or  of  direct  and 
inverse  d^iler. 

469.  The  guides  of  marcli  are  the  chiefs  of  pieces.  In 
column,  the  side  of  the  guide  is  that  on  which  the  ofl&cers  are 
placed;  and,  whenever  the  execution  of  a  manoeuvre  requires 
a  change  of  the  side  of  the  guide,  that  change  will  only  con- 
tinue until  the  close  of  that  manoeuvre. 

470.  The  principle  adopted  in  the  School  of  the  Bat- 
tery— that  of  describing  the  movements  for  on^  flank  only — 
is  also  followed  in  the  Evolutions  of  Batteries.  The 
corre.'^poriding  movements  may  be  executed  by  the  other  flank, 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

ORDER  IN  COLUMN. 

471.  There  are  two  orders  in  column — one  by  section,  the 
other  by  battery.  In  both  cases,  the  batteries,  being  arranged 
as  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Battery,  are  formed  in 
rear  of  the  headmost  battery. 

The  distance  between  two  contiguous  batteries,  measuring 
from  the  rear  of  the  rear  rank  of  the  battery  which  precedes 
to  the  heads  of  the  leaders  of  the  battery  which  follows,  is 
equal  to  the  interval  between  the  pieces.  The  column  by 
battery  is,  therefore,  always  a  dose  column. 

The  colonel  is  habitually  opposite  to  the  centre  of,  and  28 
yards  from  the  column  on  the  same  sidojas  the  majors  and 
captains.  He,  of  course,  goes  wherever  his  presence  may  be 
required.  '  ,v- 

The  majors  and  captains  remain  on  the  flank  on  which  the 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.         187 

formation  of*  the  column  places  them.  When,  in  passing 
from  the  order  in  line  to  the  order  in  column,  the  right  of  the 
line  of  battle  forms  the  head  of  column,  they  will  place  them- 
selves on  the  left  flank;  and  when  the  left  of  the  line  forms 
the  head  of  column,  they  will  place  themselves  on  the  right 
flank.  The  majors  opposite  to  the  centres  of  their  divisions, 
and  20  yards  outside  of  the  column  by  section,  and  14  yards 
from  the  column  by  battery.  The  captains  opposite  to  the 
^centre  of  their  batteries,  and  14  yards  outside  of  the  column 
by  section,  and  4  yards  outside  of  and  in  line  with  the  leaders 
of  their  batteries  in  the  column  by  battery. 


ORDER  IN  LINE  AND  IN  BATTERY? 

472.  In  the  orders  in  line  and  in  hatter^,  the  batteries, 
arranged  as  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Battery,  are 
formed  on  one  and  the  same  line.  The  batteries  are  num- 
bered from  right  to  left  in  the  regular  order,  according  to 
their  respective  positions  in  line.  The  interval  between  con- 
tiguous batteries  is  double  that  between  pieces. 

IN  LINE. 

The  colonel,  followed  by  his  adjutant,  is  habitually  28 
yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  line;  but  he  goes  wherever 
his  commands  may  be  best  heard. 

Each  major,  having  his  assistant  adjutant  behind  him,  is 
14  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division. 

IN  BATTERY. 

The  colonel,  goes  wherever  the  good  of  the  service  requires 
his  presence. 

Each  major  is  generally  opposite  to  the  centre  of  his 
division,  and  half-way  between  the  lines  of  limbers  and  cais- 
sons, or  wherever  his  presence  may  be  necessary. 

473.  The  cautionary  command  Attention,  and  the  com- 
mand Front,  are  not  repeated.  The  preparatory  commands 
are  repeated  at  once  or  explained,  by  the  majors. 

The  colonel  does  not  habitually  name  the  guide,  who  is  de- 


188         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

termined  by  the  position  of  the  ojficers,  or  is  particulapized 
by  the  macoeuvres;  he  may,  however,  desiguate  him  if  he 
deem  proper. 

When  a  line  or  column  is  to  make  a  simultaneous  move- 
ment, the  captains  repeat  at  once  the  preparatory  commands. 

In  case  of  successive  movements,  they  repeat  the  prepara- 
tory commands  in  time  to  enable  them  to  give  the  command 
of  execution  at  the  moment  when  the  movement  should  com- 
mence in  their  commands. 

When  an  evolution  requires  a  particular  movement  of  any 
battery  its  captain  commands  that  movement,  instead  of  re- 
peating the  preparatory  command  of  the  colonel. 

The  commands  of  execution  will  be  repeated  simultaneously 
by  the  majors.  The  captains  will  do  the  same,  except  in 
movements  which  require  successive  commands.  The  cap- 
tains will  always  indicate  the  guide,  conformably  to  what  is 
prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Battery. 

Should  a  eomm£^d  not  havebeen  heard  by  a  captain,  he 
will  conform  as  quickly  as  possible  to  the  movement  of  the 
battery  which  precedes  his  on  the  side  of  the  formation,  or  of 
the  breaking  of  the  batteries. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

474.  The  ali'gnments  are  established  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  in  the  School  op  the  Battery.  The  cap- 
tain superintends  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank  of  carriages, 
and  the  chief  of  caissons  the  rear  rank.  The  captain,  when 
his  battery  is  aligned,  commands  Front.  lie  and  the  chief 
of  caissons  resume  their  places  in  line  at  the  command  Front, 
from  the  colonel. 

For  a  successive  alignment,  the  colonel  causes  one  of  the 
batteries  to  be  moved  forward,  and  when  it  is  aligned,  he 
commands : 

B?/  hatteri/j  rigJit  (or  left) — Dress. 

At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain  of 
the  second  battery  commands  :  Bafterjj/forivard,  March — 
Guide  right ;  and,  as  soon  as  his  battery  is  4  yards  from  the 
new  line,  he  commands  :  Battery,  Halt.     The  battery  halts, 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES*         189 

the  captain  places  himself  at  its  left,  commands :  Right-^ 
Dress,  and  when  it  is  aligned :  Front. 

Each  of  the  other  captains  will  execute  the  same  move- 
ment in  succession,  but  will,  not  command  March,  until  the 
captain  who  precedes  him  has  commanded  Halt. 

For  a  simultaneous  ali^^nment,  the  colonel  causes  one  of 
the  wing  batteries  to  be  advanced ;  and  when  it  has  been  cor- 
rectly aligned  by  its  captain,  he  commands  : 

Right  (or  left) — Dress. 

At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains  move 
their  batteries  at  once  to  the  new  line  by  the  commands  : 
Batteri/^  forioard,  March — Guide  right;  and  when  they  are 
4  yards  from  the  line  :  Battery,  Halt.  The  batteries  halt, 
the  captains  place  themselves  on  the  left  of  their  batteries, 
command  :  Right — Dress,  and  afterwards  :  Front. 

In  both  of  these  alignments,  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons 
places  himself  at  the  left  of  that  lino  to  attend  to  its  align- 
ment at  the  same  time  that  his  captain  moves  to  the  left  wing 
of  his  pieces. 

The  batteries  having  been  aligned,  the  colonel  commands: 
Front. 

The  alignments  on  the  centre  are  executed  simultaneously 
according  to  the  same  principles.  The  colonel  having  caused 
one  of  the  centre  batteries  to  be  advanced,  commands  : 

On  the  centre — Dress. 

TO  MARCH  IN  COLUMN. 

.  475.  The  batteries  being  in  column  by  section,  the  colonel 
indicates  to  the  adjutant  the  direction  the  column  is  to  take, 
and,  after  the  guides  have  received  their  instructions  from  the 
adjutant,  he  commands  : 

1.   Column,  forward.     2.  March. 

The  first  command  is  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains. 
At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  same  officers,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  at  once  in  each  battery  as  in  the  School  of 
THE  Battery. 


190         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES, 

TO  HALT. 

476.  To  halt  the  column,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt. 

Which  is  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains,  and  executed 
as  in  No.  395. 

CHANGES  OF  GAIT. 

477.  The  column  being  in  march,  the  colonel  causes  the 
changes  of  gait  t©  be  executed  as  in  No.  396. 

TO  MARCH  BY  A  FLANK, 

The  batteries  being  "in  column,  at  a  halt  or  in  march, 
to  gain  ground  towards  one  of  the  flanks,  and  to  resume  its 
original  direction,  or,  after  the  march  by  the* flank,  to  march 
the  batteries  in  a  direction  opposite  to  the  original  one,  the 
colonel  will  give  the  commands,  and  cause  them  to  be  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  in  No.  400 — the  word  Batteries  being 
substituted  for  battery. 

OBLIQUE  MARCH. 

478.  The  batteries  being  in  column,  at  a  halt  or  in  march, 
to  cause  them  to  gain  ground  towards  one  of  the  flanks  and  to 
the  front,  the  colonel  will  give  the  commands,  which  will  be 
executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  401. 

PASSAGE  OF  CARRIAGES. 

479.  The  principles  of  the  passages  of  carriages,  prescribed 
in  No.  402,  are  applicable  to  the  evolutions  of  batteries.    • 

THE  ABOUT. 

480.  This  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  403. 

THE  COUNTERMARCH. 

481.  This  movement  is  executed  at  once,  in  each  battery, 
as  prescribed  in  No.  405. 


W^ 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   BATTERIES.  191 

CHANGE  OF  DIRECTION. 

482.  The  batteries  marching  in  column,  by  section,  to 
cause  them  to  change  direction  to  the  left  (or  right),  by  suc- 
cessive wheels,  the  colonel  commands  : 

Head  op  column  to  the  left  (or  right)* 

At  this,  repeated  by  the  major  of  the  headmost  division, 
and  by  the  captain  of  the  first  battery,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  in  No.  406. 

Each  captain  gives,  in  succession,  the  same  command  just 
before  the  head  of  his  column  arrives  at  the  point  where  the 
first  battery  commenced  its  wheel. 

The  second  major  repeats  the  command,  just  before  the 
head  of  the  column  of  his  two  batteries  reaches  the  point 
where  the  first  commenced  its  wheel. 

The  assistant-adjutant  of  the  leading  division  goes  to,  and 
remains  at,  the  wheeling  point,  until  the  hindmost  carriages 
of  the  first  division  have  finished  their  change  of  direction, 
when  he  is  replaced  by  the  assistant-adjutant  of  the  second 
division. 

General  remarh. 

483.  All  the  movements  explained  for  the  column  hy  sec- 
tion, from  No.  475  to  No.  482,  inclusive,  are  executed  in  the 
same  manner,  and  by  the  same  commands  from  the  colonel 
and  majors,  in  the  column  hy  battery  (or  close  column^  ;  but, 
in  all  cases,  the  captains,  stationed  as  prescribed  in  No.  471, 
replace,  in  their  command,  the  word  column  by  that  of  bat- 
tery, and,  in  the  change  of  direction,  No.  482,  they  replace 
the  command.  Head  of  column,  to  the  left  (or  right), 
by  the  commands :  Battery,  left  (or  right)  wheel,  and  For- 
ward, as  in  No.  406. 

TO  PASS    FROM  THE  ORDER    IN  COLUMN  BY  SECTION,  TO 
^THE- ORDER  BY  BATTERY  (CLOSE  COLUMN.) 

484.  The  batteries  marching  in  column  by  section,  to  di- 
minish the  depth  of  the  column  without  changing  the  gait, 
the  colonel  commands  : 

I.  Form  haUeries — left  (or  right)  oblique. 
2.  March. 


192         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

At  the  first  coliimand,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  first  battery  commands;  Forward  into  line — left 
ohlique. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  the  cap- 
tain of  the  first  battery,  the  movement  is  executed  by  that 
battery  as  in  No.  409,  without  a  change  of  gait,  except  that 
the  captain  remains  on  the  flank  of  his  battery  after  the  for- 
mation. 

The  other  batteries  continue  the  march  and  are  formed, 
successively^  by  the  command.  Forward  into  line — left  ohliquej 
given  by  each  captain,  in  time  to  command  March,  so  that 
his  battery  may  be  formed  at  its  proper  distance  from  the  one 
which  precedes  it. 

The  movement  is  executed  in  each  battery,  as  it  was  by  the 
first,  the  chiefs  of  the  leading  sections  being  careful  to  com- 
mand Halt,  at  their  proper  distance. 

As  each   battery  is  formed,  its  captain  commands.  Front. 

If  the  column  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles.  The  chiefs  of  the 
leading  sections  command.  Walk,  at  the  command  Forward 
i^Ho  line — left  oblique,  of  their  captains,  and  change  to  the 
walk  at  the  command  March,  repeated  by  them  when  at- 
their  distance. 

If  the  column  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  execute  the  move- 
ment by  doubling  the  gait,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Form  batteries — left  oblique — trot.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  first  battery  commands,  Form  line  advancing — left 
oblique — trot.  ''  The  captains  of  the  other  batteries  command. 
Trot. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  all  the 
captains,  the  movement  is  executed  by  the  first  battery  as 
prescribed  in  No.  419,  in  doubling  the  gait,  except  that  the 
captain  remains  on  the  flank  of  his  battery  after  it  is  formed. 

The  other  batteries  change  to  the  trot,  and  are  formed,  suc- 
cessively, by  the  command,  Form  line  advancing — left  obliquej 
given  by  each  captain,  in  time  to  command  March,  when  his 
first  section  is  at  its  distance.  The  chiefs  of  the  leading  sec- 
tions of  each  battery  command  Walk,  at  the  command  Form 
line  advancing — left  ohUquef  of  their  captains,  and  pass  to 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.  193 

the  walk   at   the   comniand    March,  repeated   by  them  when 
they  are  at  their  distance.- 

TO  PASS  FKOM  THE  OHDER    IN  CLOSE  COI-UMN  TO  THE, 
OKDER  IN  COLUMN  BY  l^ECTION. 

485.  The  batteries  being  in  close  column,  at  a  halt,  to  di- 
minish the  front  of  column,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.   By  section  fi^jm  the  right  (or  left)  of  hatf erics— front  into 
column.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  coa)mand,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  first  battery  commands.  By'  section  from  the  riyht^  (or 
hi /t)  front  into  vxyJumn. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors,  and  by  the 
captain  of  the  first  battery,  the  movement  is  executed  by  that 
battery,  as  prescribed  in  No.  413,  for  breaking  from  a  halt. 
Each  of  the  other  captains  commands,  successively,  By  .'.e'c- 
tion  from  the  rhjlit,  front  into  column,  in  time  to  commnnd 
March,  yt  the  moment  the  right  section  of  his  battery  ought 
to  move  to  the  front,  to  take  its  place  in  the  column  at  its 
distance  from  the  battery  which  precedes  his  own. 

If  the  close  column  is  in  march,  to  break  it  by  section, 
without  changing  the  gait,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.   By  the  right  of  hatffries — break- into  sections. 
2.  March         * 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  first  battery  couimnnds,  By  the  r'ght^  break  into  sec- 
tions;  the  other  captains  command  at  once,  ^a//e/'^,  and,  at 
the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  the  captain  of 
the  first  battery,  they  command  Halt.  The  first  battery  is 
broken,  as  prescribed  in. No.  418.  The  captains  of  the  other 
batteries  give  their  commands  so  as  to  take  their  distances 
into  column,  the  movement  being  executed  as  prescribed  in 
No.  413. 

The  column  being  in  march  at  a  trot,  to  break  it  by  sec- 
tions, withou*;  chanijinir  the  gait,  the  captains  of  the  last  three 
batteries  command,    Wnlh^    March,  and   afterwards,    lly   the 

'ijht,  break"  into Jcrtions,  trot,  and    March,  in    time  for   the 
right  sections  to  take  their  distance  froiii  the  battery  which 
prcccdcB  their  owCo 
9 


194  EVOLUTIONS  OP  BATTERIES. 

The  batteries  in  close  column,  iDareliin^];  at  a  walk,  to  di- 
niinish  the  front  of  the  column  hy  doubling  the  gait,  the 
colonel  commands : 

1.   B^  the  rujKt  of  latteries,  hreak  into  sections. 
2.  Mauch. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  by  the 
captain  of  the  first  battery,  the  movement  is  executed  by  that 
battery,  as  prescribed  in  No.  418,  for  breaking  at  a  trot.  All 
the  other  batteries  continue  to  march  at  a  walk,  each  .captain 
giving,  successively,  the  commands,  Bi/  the  riijJit,  hreak  into 
sections,  trot^  and  Makch,  in  time  for  his  leading  section  to 
liave  its  distance  from  the  preceding  battery. 

CHANGE  OF  THE    DIRECTION  OF  THE  CLOSE  COLUMN,  BY 
A  SliMULT^NEOUS  MOVEMENT. 

486.  The  batteries  being  in  close  column,  at  a  halt,  to  cause 
them  to  change  direction  to  the  left  (or  right),  by  a  simulta- 
neous movement,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.    Change  direction  to  the  left  (or  inght). 
,  2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  first  battery  commands,  Battery ^  hi/  the  right  jlank — 
Head  of  column  to  Ui*'.  left.  The  captains  of  the  other  batte- 
ries command,  Battery^  hy  the  right  flank— ^head  of  column, 
left  ha  If- wheel. 

The  assistant  adjutant  of  tbe  first  division  places  himself 
22  yards  in  front,  and  22  yards  to  the  right,  of  the  leaders  of 
the  first  piece  of  the  leading  battery,  to  mark  the  point  where 
the  captain  of  that  battery  should  halt. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majorsand  captains, 
all  the  batteries  break,  by  piece  and  by  caisson,  to  the  right. 
Just  before  the  wheel  to  the  right  is  cotnpletcd,  the  captains 
coniQiand  Forward,  and  place  themselves  at  the  heads  of 
their  columns  to  direct  them. 

At  the  command  Forward,  given  by  the  captain  of  the 
first  battery,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  .immediately  com- 
mands, Lrft  lohecl,  Forward,  and  moves  forward  perpendicu- 
larly to  the  original  front  of  the  battery,     The  other  two  sec- 


EVOLUTIONS  ©F  BATTERIES.  195 

tions,  after  having  moved  to  the  fr(fnt,  are  wheeled,*  suc- 
cessively, by  command  of  their  chiefs,  on  the  same  ground 
where  the  first  section  wheeled. 

The  ciiptain,  who  has  marched  at  the  head  of  his  battery 
until  he  is  22  yards  in  advance  of  its  original  front,  halts, 
lets  his  column  file  past  him,  and  commands,  Colvm.71,  hjj  the 
left  Jlankf  in  time  to  command  March,  when  the  heads  of 
the  leaders  of  the  rear  rank  of  his  carria^res  arrive  opposite 
to  him.  -  Just  as  h.is  carriages  are  about  finishing  their  left; 
wheel,  he  cojnmands.  Forward,  Guide  lefty  and,  when  his 
battery  has  advanced  4  yards,  Batteri/,  Halt — Lcft^—J)Y{^^^.^ 

At  the  command  Forward,  given  by  th&  captain  of  the 
second  battery,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  commands,  at 
once,  Left — Wheel,  and  directs  it  diagonally,-  so  as  to  wheel 
again  to  the  left  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  first  battery,  by  the 
command,. Head  of  column,  left  half-wheel,  given  by 
the  captain  when  the  right  section  arrives  opposite  to  the  left 
of  the  first  battery.  The  other  two  sections,  after  having 
.moved  forward,  are  successively  wheeled,  by  comm;inds  of 
their  chiefs,  on  the  same  ground  where  the  first  section 
wheeled.  * 

l^hc  captain,  who  has  marched  at  the  head  of  his  battery 
until  he  is  in  line  with  the  left  of  the  firt-t  battery,  halts,  lets 
his  battery  file  past  him,  and  commands.  Column,  by  the  left 
flaiih,  in  time  to  command  March,  when  the  heads  of  the 
leaders  of  the  rear  rank  of  his  carriatres  are  even  with  him. 

As  the  carnages  are  about  finishing  their  wheel,  the  captain 
c6mmandg,.  Forward,  Guide  left,  and  at  the  moment  they 
reach  their  distance,  Battery — Halt,  Loft — Dress,  and 
Front. 

The  third  and  fourth  batteries  conform,  exactly,  to  what 
has  been  prescribed  for  the  second  battery. 

TO  PASS  FROM  THE  ORDER  IN  COLUMN  TO  THE  ORDER 

,  IN  LINE. 

487.  The  batteries^  being  in  column  by  section,  at  a  halt^ 
to  form  them  into  line  on  the  head  of  the  column,  gaining 
ground  towards  one  of  the  flanks,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.    Forward,  into  line^-^left  (or  rijht)  oblique.      2.    March. 


196  EVOLUTIONS  OP  BATTERIES. 

Tl>e  majors  and  captain  of  the  first  battery  repeat  the 
first  couiinanJ  ;  the  other  captains  command:  Column,  foV' 
imtrd — head  <>f  column,  left  linlfiohccl. 

Af  the  word  Makcii,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  the  cap- 
tain of*  the  firbt*  battery,  that  battery  forms  as  prescribed  in 
No.  409. 

The  captains  of  the  other  batteries  pbico  themseU-es  in  line 
with  the  heads  of  their  columns,  to  direct  them.  Each  chi,cf 
of  the  first  section  of  each  of  those  batteries  commands  at  once, 
Left  wheel,  Forward;  the  other  sections  move  forward  and 
wheel  on  the  same  ground  where  the  first  sc.ction  wheeled. 
The  captains  of  the  last  three  batteries  couimand  Guide  'right 
as  soon  as  their  first  sections  have  wheeled  to  the  left. 

Each  battery,  thus  formed  in  column,  is  directed  diagonally 
52  yards  in  rear  of  the  batter^  which  precedes  it  in  the 
forhiation,  and  opposite  to  the  point  "where  its  right  ought  to 
rest  in  the  line  of  battle. 

The  captain*  of  the  sf  cond  battery  commands,  Head  of 
COLUMN,  RIOHT  HALF  WHEEL,  when  the  right  of  his  first 
section  reaches  the  point  iodicatc^  ahove ;  he  then  commands, 
Forward,  into  line — left  oblique,  in  time  to  command  March, 
when  his  second  section  has  wheeled  to  the  riiirht.  This  bat- 
tery  forms  as  pvesciibed  .for  the  first. 

The    captains  of   the  other  ■  batteries  conform  to   what  is 
prescribed  for  the  second  battery. 
.  The  batteries  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands  Front. 

The  formation  forward  into  line,  left  or  right  oblique,  are 
executed  in  the  same  manner,  when  the  column  is  in  march. 
In  this  case,  the  captains  of  the  last  three  butleries,  being  iu 
march,  only  command  :   Head  of  column,  left  half  wheel. 

TO  FORM  FACED  TO  THE  REAR,  INTO  LINE. 

488.  .The  batteries  being  in  column  by  section,  at  a  halt, 
to  form  them,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line,  on  the  head  of 
column,  gaining  ground  towards  one  of  the  flunks,  the  colonel 
commands :  . 

1.   Faced  to  the  rear,  info  line — left  (^or  right)  ohlique. 
2.  March. 

The  Hret  command  is  repeated  by  tho  majors  and  the  oaptaiu 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.         197 

of  the  first  battery  5  the  captains  of  the  other  batteries  com- 
mand :    Column,  forwanl — head  of  column,  h'ft  half  ichecl. 

At  the  word  March,  ropeated  by  the  same  officers,  the 
movement  is  executed  according  to  the  principles  of  No.  487, 
except  the  alignment. 

Each  battery  is  formed  faced  to  the  rear  into  line,  in  line 
with  the  battery  which  precedes  it  on  the  side  of  the  forma- 
tion, as  in  No.  410.  The  last  section  of  each  battery  does 
not  countermarch  umil  the  first  section  of  the  battery  which 
next  follows  has  arrived  in  line  with  it.  The  batteries  being 
aligned,  the.  colonel  commands  Front.. 

The  formations  are  executed  in  the  same  manner  when  the 
column  is  in  march. 


TO-  FORM  TO  THE  LEFT  (OR  RIGHT),  INTO  LINE. 

480.  The  batteries  being  in  column  by  section,  at  a  halt, 
to  form  thorn,  to  the  left  (or  right),  into  line,  the  colonel 
com  mantis: 

1.    To  the.left,  (or  right,)  info  line.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  which  is  repeated  by  the  majors,  the 
captains  command,  Lf^/f  into  line,  icheel. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  same  officers,  the 
movement  is  executed,  at  once,  by  each  battery,  as  prescribed 
in  No.  411. 


TO  FORM  ON  THE  'RIGHT  (OR  LEFT),  INTO  LINE. 

490.  The  batteries  marching  in  column  by  section,  to  form 
them  on  the  right  (ur  left),  into  line,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.    On  the  right  (or  hft),  into  line.     2.  March. 

At  the.  word  IMarctt,  the  first  battery  forms  as  prescribed 
in  No  412. 

The  captains  of  the  other  batteries  command  Guide  right, 
place  thtrm.sclves  at  the  heads  of  their  columns  to  direct  them, 
%ud  conmiand,  successiyely,  On  the  rigJif,  into  Hue,  in  time  to 
comnuinil  Makch,  when  their  first  sections  arrive  at  the  p.-fnt 
where  they  must  wheel  to  the  right,  to  form  at   their  proper 


198         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

intervals  on  the  line  of  battle.     The  batteries  being  aligned, 
the  colonel  commands  Front. 


TO  FOR:\r  TO  THE  LEFT  (OR  RIGHT),  AND  FORWARD  INTO 

LINE. 

491.  The  batteries  marching  in  column  by  section,  and 
having  changed  direction  towards  one  of -itsiianks,  to  form 
them  into  line,  fronting  the  same  direction  as  the  original 
line  of  march,  the  colonel  halts  the  column,  before  the  rear 
section  of  the  battery  which  last  entered  the  new  direction  has 
finished  its  wheel,  and  commands  : 

1.    To  the  left  (or  rir/ht),  and  forward,  into  line.     2.   MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  each  major,  according  to  the  position 
of  his  b-itteries,  repeats  the  whole  of  that  command,  or  only 
gives  that  part  of  it  which  corresponds  with  the  movement  he 
has  to  execute.  The  captains  of  the  batteries  which  have 
changed  direction  command.  Left  into  line,  wheel ;  the  cap- 
tain of  the  battery  which  follows  next  to. those  which  have 
changed  direction,  commands:  Column^  forward ;  and  the 
captains  who  follow  him  command,  Column,  forward — head 
of  column,  left  half  wheel. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  these  officers,  they  con- 
form, respectively,  in  each  portion  of  the  column  to  what  is 
prescribed  for  to  the  left  into  line,  and  forward  into  line — 
left  ohlupie. 

The  captain  of  the  battery  which  has  first  to  form  for- 
V)ard  into  line,  will  take  care  not  to  give  the  command 
March,  which  follows  forward,  into  line — left  oblique,  until 
the  head  of  his  column  has  passed  10  yards  over  the  rear  of 
the  line-of-battle. 

The  batteries  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands  Front. 

TO  FORM  TO  THE  LEFT  (OR  RIGHT,)  AND  FACED  TO  THE 
REAR  INTO  LINE. 

492.  The   batteries   marching  in   column  by  section,  and  a 
part  of  th-e  column  having  changed  direction  towards  one  of  • 
its  flanks,  to  form  them  into  line  faced  towards  the  rear  of  the 
original  direction  of  the  line  of  march,  the  colonel  halts  the 


EV.OLUTIONS   OF   EATTEIIIES.  199 

column  before  the  last  seotion  of  the  battery,  which  is  chang-' 
ing  direction,  has  completed  its'wheelyand  commands: 

1.    To  the  left  (or  right,^  and  faced  to  the  rcaVj  into  line, 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  .each  major  repeats  tbie  whole  of  that 
command,  or  only  that  part  of  it  which  is  applicable  to  the 
movement  he  has  to  execute.  The  captains  of  the  batteries 
which  have  changed  direction  command,  Left  intojine,  wheel ; 
the  captain  of  tlu  battery  which  follows  next  to  those  which 
have  changed  direction  commands,  Into  line,  faced-  to  the 
rear — right  ohli que  ;  the  captains  of  the  batteries  wbich  have 
not  changed  direction  command,  Column ,  forward — head  of 
column,  right  half  wheel. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  same  officers,  they 
conform,  respectively,  in  each  portion  of  the  column,  to  what 
is  prescribed  for  forming  to  the  left  into  line,  and  faced  to  the 
rear  into  line — right  oblique.  •  '. 

The  batteries  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands,  Front. 

TO  FORM  FORWARD  INTO  LINE,  ON  A  LINE  PASSED  BY  THE 
HEAD  OF  COLUMN. 

493  The  batteries  being  in  column  by  section,  at  a  halt,  to 
form  them  forward  into  line  on  a  line  which  the  head  of 
column  has  passed,  throwing  the  front  batteries  to  the  right 
(or  left,)  the  colonel-  commands  : 

1.    On  the,,  third  (aecond   or  fourth)   hattery,  forward   into 
line — front  batteries  to  the  right  (or  left.)     2.  MarciJ. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
of  the  batteries  which  precede  the  formation  command,  By 
aection,  right  lohecl.  The  captain  of  the  battery  of  formation 
commands,  Forward  into  line — left  oblique.  The  captains  of 
the  batteries  which  follow  the  battery  of  form.ation  command, 
Column,  forward — head  of  column,  left  half  wheel. 

At  tlie  word  march,  repeated  by  the  same  officers,  the  bat- 
tery of  formation  and  those  in  reir  of  it,  execute  what  is 
prescribed  for  forward  into  line — left  oblique,  No   487. 

The  batteries  which  precede  the  battery  of  formation,  wheel 
to  the  right  by  section;  when  the  pivot  carriages  finish  the 
wheel,  the  captaiift  command,  Forward,  direct  their  bat- 


200         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIBg, 

teri^s  perpeodiculirly  to  the  original -line  of  march  and  coni- 
firand,  B}/  Hcclion,  riyht  wheel,  so  as-  to  cbnrm-uid,  MarCH, 
■when  the  front  of  tbeir  batteries  are  4  y.arcjs  .short  of  their 
proper  intervalto  the  right,  of  the  baltery  of  formation.  The 
batteries  execute  agaifi  a  wheel  to  the  right  by  soetion,  and  as 
soon  as  the  column  is  thus  developed,  the  captains  couform  to 
what  is  prescribed  fi^r  forming  f^ced  to  the  rear^  into  line — 
left  oblique,  No    488. 

The  batteries  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands,  J^ront. 

The  battery  of  formation  will  always  be^deployed,  gaining 
ground  to  the  left,  when  the  batteries  which  precede  it  are 
thrown  to  the  right,  and  the. reverse. 

TO  FORM  FACED  TO  THE  EEAR,  ON  A  LINE  PASSED  BY 
THE  HEAD  OF  COLUMN. 

494.  The  batteries  beicfg  in  column  'by  section,  at  a  halt,  to 
form  them  faced  to  the  rear  into  line,  on  a  line  which  the 
head  of  column  has  passed,  throwing  the  front  batteries  to 
the  right  (or  left,)  the  colonel  commands: 

1.    On  the  third  (arcovd   or  fourdi)  hattcry,  faced  to  the  rear 
into  line — Jrontbatteneiitotheii(jht\oYle-/t):    2.   March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
of  the  batteries  which  precede  the  battery  of  formation  com- 
mand, i>y  aection,  riijht  wjieal.  The  capiain  of  the  ba^ttery 
of  formation  commands.  Into,  line,  faced  to  the  rear — left 
oblique.  'J  he  enptain-^  of  batteries  in  rear  of  the' battery  of 
forniation  command,  Cohunn,  fonrard.  —  head  of  coltinui  left 
'h(df  wheel. 

At  the  word  MauCH,  repeated  by  the  same  oiheers,  the 
movement  is  executed  acciuding  to  the  principles  of  No  40^. 
The  battery  of  formation  and  the  one  next  in  rear  6f  it. ex- 
ecute wh  it  is  prescribed  for  faced  to  (lie  rear  into  line — left 
fjhiique,  No  4t^8  The  batteries  which  precede  tUe  batt'eij, of 
forniatiim,  after  being  developed  into  column  by  two  wh^isls 
by  section' to  the  ri^jrht,  are  i'ovmaii  forward  into  line-j-left 
oLliqite^  as  \n  No.  487.  ..  **" 

The-  batteries  being  aljgned,  the  colonel  commands  Front. 

The  battt'iy  of  formation  will  always  be  deployed,  gaining 
ground  to  the  left  when  the  front  battery  is  thrown  to  the 
right,  and  the  reyevro.  4^ 


EVOLUTIONS   OP  BATTERIES.  201 

TO    DEPLOY  THE   CLOSE   COLUMN    FORWARD,  INTO    LINE, 
IN  ADVANCE  OF  ITS  FRONT. 

495  The  batteries  being  in  close  column,  at  a  halt,  to  deploy 
them  forward  into  line  in.  advance  of  irs  front,  on  one  of  the 
last  three  batteries,  throwing  the  front  batteries  to  the  lighti 
(or  lett,)  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.    Oa  the  third   (second   or  fourth')   Tjatfery — forwar^\.{nt.o 
line — front  batteries^  to  the  rijht  (or  left.)      I.   March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  cap- 
tains of  the  butteries  which  precede  the  battery  of  forma- 
tion command,  Battery ^hy  the  right  Jiank ;  the  captain  of 
the  third  battf^rj  (the  battery  of  formation,)  commands,  Bat- 
tery^  forward ;  the  .captain  of  the  fourth  battery  (next  in 
rear  of  the  battery  of  formation,)  commands :  Battery,  by 
th'' I  ft  flank.' 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  by  all  the 
captains,  except  the  one  commanding  the  batter}  of  formation, 
these  batteries  wheel  by  piece  and  by  caisson  to  the  right  and 
left.  When  thevvheels  are  nearly  completed,  the  captajus 
whose  batteries  have  wheeled  by  piece  and  by  caisson  to  the 
right  command,  Forward,  Guide  left;  and  those  whose 
pieces  and  caissons  have  wheeled  to  the  left,.  Forward, 
Guide  ri(jht;  they  all  place  themselves  at  once  at  the  heads 
of  fheir  columns,  to  direct  them. 

The  captain  of  the  battery  on  which  the  deployment  is 
made,  docs  not  command  ^\^KCAl,  Guide  ric/ltt,  until  the  bat- 
tery which  is  in  front  of  him  has  unmaskei  his  battery,  fie 
then  marches  his  battery  3"3  yards  in  advance  of  the  original 
posirion  of  the  head  of  the.  column,  halts  it,*  and  commands,. 
RitfJit — rf.^RKss,  and  Front. 

The  ^captains  of  the  other  batteries  march  at  the  head  of 
their  batteries  until  they  are  opposite  to  where  the  left  of  the 
rijiht  batteries  and  the  right  of  the  left  batteries  are  to  be  es- 
tablished on  the  line,  there  halt,  let  their  columns  file  past 
them,  and  command,  those  of  the  right  wing:  G-lfihin,  b// 
the  Uft  flank,  and  those  of  the  left  :  Column^  by  the  riglit 
flank,  in  time  to  command  iMARcn,  wjien  the  leaders  of  the 
rear  rank  of  tlieir  carriajies  are  <3  yards  from  them.  As  soon 
as  the  wheel  by  carriage  is  nearly  completed,  they  command 


202        .  EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

Forward,  those  of  the  right  adding  Guide  left,  and  those 
of  the  left  Guide  rif/ht,  and  when  4  yards  in  rear  of  the  front 
of  the  battery  on  which  they  are  to  align  their  batteries,  Bat- 
Jeiy,  Halt — left  (or  ricjht) — Dress,  and  Front. 

The  batteries  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands  Front. 

In  this  movement  each  captain  whose  battery  is  in  front  of 
the  battery  of  formation,  except  the  one  commanding  the  bat- 
tery, head  of  column,  must  be  carel'ul,  after  having  executed 
his  left  wheel,  to  command  Batteri/,  Halt,  and-iinmediately 
afterwards  Battery,  forward,  so  as  to  command  March,  Guide 
left,  as  soon  as  his  battery  is  unmasked. 

The  assistant  adjutant  of  the  major  commanding  the  bat- 
teries head  of  column,  moves  rapidly,  at  the  lirst  command  of 
the  colonel,  to  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  battery  of  forma- 
tion is  to  rest. 

The  movement  is  executed  on  the  first  battery,  the  head  of 
column,  when  in  march  or  at  a  halt,  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  the  means  employed  fur  the  batteries  which 
follow  the  battery-of  formation,  throwing  the  batteries  either 
to  the  right  or  the  left,  the  colonel  commanding : 

1.    On  the  frst  hatteri^ — forward j  irito  line — rear  batteries  to 
the  right  (or  left.)     2.  March. 

The  battery,  head  of  column^  being  in  march,  advances  83 
yards  in  front  of  its  position,  at  the  command  March  of  the 
colonel,  its  captain  will  not  conyiiand  Batter f/^  forward ^  ov 
March,  but  will  only  indicate  the  guide. 

TO  DEPLOY  THE  CLOSE  COLITMN  FORWARD  INTO  LINE,  ON 
ONE  OF  THE  BATTERIES  WHICH  STANDS  FAST. 

496.  The  batteries  being  in  close  column,  at  a  halt,  to  de- 
ploy them  forward  into  line  on  the  front  of  one  of  jhe  last 
three  batteries  standing  fast — -(that  is-to  say,  tn  line  with  the 
front  of  the  designated  battery,)  throwing  the  front  batteries 
to  the  right  (or  left,)  the  colonel  commaijds  : 

1.    On  the  third  {second  or  fourdi)  haHery  landing  fad—" 
forioardj  into  line — frrmt  batteries  to  the  right  (or  left.) 
'  2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.         203 

of  the  first  and  second  batteries  command,  Battery,  hij  t^^e 
riijlit  fianh ;  the  captain  of  the  fourth  buttery  commands, 
Battert/,  hy  the  h'ft  jian/c  ;  the  third  battery  stands  fast. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  by  ■ 
i\iQ  captains  of  all  the  batteries  other  than  the  third,  the 
fourth  batter}'',  (next  in  rear  of  the  battery  of  formation.)  ex- 
ecutes the  movement  for  deploying  the  column  forward,  into 
line,  in  advance  of  its  front.  No.  495.  The  two  batteries 
which  precede  the  battery  of  formation,  after  having  gained 
their  intervals  to  the  right,  (as  in  No.  495,)  execute,  again^ 
a  right  wheel,  by  piece  and  by  caisson,  march  forward  and 
cross  the  line  of  battle,  to  which  they  are' brought  back  by 
an  about,  by  the  commands,-  Column,  by  the  ri^j/it  Jiank — 
March^— Forward — Guide  right — Pieces  and  caissons,  left 
ahout — March — Forward,  Guide  left;  Battery,  Halt; 
Xe/)5-DRKSS,  and  Front. 

The  batteries  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands,  Front. 

The  movement  is  executed  on  the  first  battery,  head  of 
column,  standing  fast,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and 
by  the  means  employed  for  the  batteries  which  follow  the  bat- 
tery of  formation,  throwing  those  batteries  either  to  the  left 
(or  right.)     The  colonel  commands  : 

1.    On  the  first  battery  standing  fast — Forward,  info  line — 
rear  batteries  to  the  left  (qy  right.)     2.'   March. 

TO    DEPLOY    TUB    CLOSE    COLUMN    IN    MARCH    WITHOUT 

HALTING  IT. 

497.  The  batteries  marching  in  close  column,  to  deploy 
them  in  advance  of  the  front  of  the  column,  without  halting 
them,  the  colonel  commands  :  . 

1.    Ou  the  first  battery,  form  line   advancing — rear  batteries 
to  the  left  (or  right.)     2.   MARCH. 

The  movement  is  executed  in  the  manner  prescribed  in  the 
prf  ceding  manoeuvre,  for  forming  forioard,  int't  line,  on  the 
battery,  head  of  column  ;  but  the  captain  of  that'  battery 
neither  commands  Battery,  Forward,  nor  March,  but  only 
indicates  the  guide,  and  continues  marching  at  a  walk.  The 
captains  of  the  other  batteries,  after  marching  their  batteries 
to  the  flank,  command,  Column^  by  the  left  (or  right)  fianh — * 


204-  EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

tmt — March,  and  conduct  their  batteries  at  a  trot,  causing 
them  to  resume  the  walk  at  the  moment  of  coming  into  line 
by  the  commands,  Walk — March. 

TO  DEPLOY   THE  CLOSE    COLUMN,  FACED    TO    THE    REAR, 

INTO.  LINE. 

498.  The  batteries  being;  in  close  column,  to  deploy  them 
faced  towards  the  rear  of  their  present  position,  the  colonel 
first  causes  them  to  counter-march,  and  then  commands  the 
deployment  on  such  battery  as  he  may  deem  best,  applying 
the  principles,  ko, ,  of  ""No.  49G  or  497. 

TO  DEPLOY  THE  CLOSE  Ct)LUMN  TO  THE  LEFT  (OR  RIGIiT,) 

INTO  LINE. 

499.  The  batteries  being  in  close  column,  at  a  halt,  to  de- 
joloy  them  into  line  on  the  left  (or  right)  flank  of  the  column, 
the  colonel  comtuands : 

1.  \Bj/  the  rear  of  column  to  the  left  {oY.rixjht,)  inio  line. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  fourth  battery  commands.  Battery^  left  wheel;  the 
captains  of  the  other  batteries  command,  Battery ^  forward — 
trut.  • 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  same  officers,  the 
first  three  batteries  move  forward  at  a  trot,  their  captains  com- 
manding Guifle  left ;  the  fourth  battery  wheels  to  the  left, 
halts,  and  is  alisneci  as  prescribed  in  No.  426.  The  captain 
of  the  third  battery,  just  before  reaching  the  point  where  he. 
ought  to  commence  his  left  wheel,  comtnands.  Walk — 
March — and  afterwards,  Battery;  left  wheel,  so  as  to  com- 
mand March  when  the  fourth  battery,  which  precedes  him 
in  the  formation,  has  executed  half  of  its  left  wheel ;  and  ho 
conforms,  as  did  the  captain  of  the  fourth -battery,  to  what  is 
prescribed  in  No.  4*26.  The  captains  of  the  other  barteries 
conform,,  successively,  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  captain  of 
the  third  battery. 

The  batteries  being  alia-ned,  the  colonel  commands  Front. 

The  movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  when  the 
column  is  ia  march;  but  at  the  second  command  of  the  co|- 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  BATTERIES.         205 

onel,  the  captains  of  the  first  three  batteries  only  coraraand 
Trot.  ~  . 

TO  DEPLOY  THE  CLOSE  COLUMN  ON  THE  LEFT  (OR  RIGHT,) 

INTO  LINE. 

500.  The  batteries  inarching  in  close  column,  to  deploy 
them  on  the  left  (or  right,)  into  line,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.      On  the  left  (or  right)  into  line.     2.  March.. 

At  the  first  command,- repeated  by  .the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  first  battery  commands  Batter i/,  left  ivheel. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  the  cap- 
tain  of  the  first  battery,  that  battery  wheels  co  the  left,  as  in 
No.  426.  . 

Eaeh  of  the  other  captains  commands  Guide  le/t,  places 
himself  by  his  guide,  and  commands,  successively,  Butteri/j 
hft  ivheel^  in  time  to  command  March,  when  his  battery  has 
passed  12  yards  beyond  the  right  of  the  battery  which  pre- 
cedes his  in  the  formation.  For  the  rest  of  the  movement,- 
they  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  first  battery. 

TO  PASS    FROM  THE    ORDER  IN    LINE    TO  THE  ORDER  IN 

COLUMN. 

501.  The  batteries  being  in  line,  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  to 
break  to  the  right  (or  left)  into  column,  by,; a  simultaneous 
movement,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.   By  section  to  the  right  (or  left,)  into  column.     2.   March, 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain^ 
conimand,   Bi/  flection,  right  wheel.    ' 

At  the  word  Makch,  repeated  by  the  parae  officers,  the 
njovement  is  executed  at  once,  in  each  battery,  as  in  No.  415. 

Ho  form  column  by  section  in  front,  or  in  rear  of  the  lin^, 
the  above  movement  is  first  executed,  and  immediately  after- 
wards a  change  of  direction  is  efi'ected  by  the  command,  Head 
OP  Column,  to  the  left  (or  right.)     No. -482. 

TO 'BREAK    BY    SECTION    PROM    ONE    WING,    TO    MARCH 
TOWARDS  THE  OTHER. 

502.  The  batteries  being  in   line,  at  a  halt,  to  break,  by 


206         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

successive  moyements,  to  the  right  (or  left,)  to  pass  parallel 
to  and  in  front  of  the  line,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  By  section^  hreah  from  the  right  (or  Ifft,^  to  march  to  the 
left  (or  right.)     2.  March. 

The  first  command  is  repeated  by  the  majors  and  the  cap- 
tain of  the  first  battery. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  same  .officers,  the 
movement  is  executed  by  the  first  battery,  as  in  No.  416. 
Each  of*  the  other  captains  repeats,  in  succession,  the  "first 
command  in  time  to  command  March,  when  the  rear  of  the 
battery  which  precedes  his  own  is  in  front  of  the  left  piece  of 
the  right  section  of  his  battery.  The  movement  is  executed 
in  each  battery  as  in  the  first. 

To  break  to  the  rear  from  one  of  the  wings  to  march 
towards  the  other,  the  about  or  countermarch  is  first  executed, 
the  batteries  are  then  halted,  and  execute  the  preceding 
manoeuvre. 


TO    FORM    CLOSE    COLUMN,    FACED    TO    THE    RIGHT    (OR 

LEFT.) 

503.  The  batteries  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  to  form  them 
in  close  column,  faced  to  the  right  (or  left,)  the  colonel  com- 
mands : 

1.    Batteries  to  the  right  (or   left),  form  close  column. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
command,  Batteri/^  right  wheel^  and  place  themselves  on  the 
right  of  their  batteries 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  by  the 
captains,  all  the  batteries  wheel  to  the  right.  When  the  pivot 
carriage  of  each  battery  has  described  its  quadrant  of  a  circle 
of  22  yards,  each  captain  commands,  Forward,  Guide  right. 

The  captain  of  the  first  battery,  just  before  the  completion 
^of  the  wheel,  commands  :  Battery — Halt,  Left — ;Dress, 
Front,  and  places  himself  immediately  at  the  left  of  his 
battery. 

Eich  of  the  other  captains,  at  the  moment  he  reaches  his 
distance  from   the   battery  which  precedes  his,   commands ; 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  BATTERIES.         207 

Battery — Halt,  Right — Dress,  Front,  and  places  himself 
at  once  at  the  left  of  his  battery. 

The  movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  when  the 
batteries  are  in  march,  but  the  captains  of  the  last  three  bat- 
teries add  :  Trot — March,  after  the  command  Forward, 
given  after  the  wheel.      "  ' 

TO  FORM  CLOSE  COLUMN  FROM  A  HALT,  WITHOUT  A 
CHANGE  OF  FRONT. 

604.  The  batteries  being- in  line,  at  a  halt,  to  form  close 
column,  right  (or  left)  in  front,  without  changing  the  front, 
the  colonel  commands : 

1.    Oil  the  3c?  (Is/,  2>nd,  or  Wi)  hattery — rujlit  (or   left)   in 
front ,  form  clone  column.     2.   March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  battery  of  formation  places  himself  on  the  left  of  his 
battery,  and  commands:  Left — Dress,  Front. 

The  captains  of  the  two  right  batteries  command  :  Battery ^ 
hy  the  left  flank  —he<xd  of  cnlmnn,  riglit  half  wheel. 

The  captain  of  the  fourth  battery  commands  :  Battery ^  hy 
the  right  Jlanh — head  of  column  to  the  right. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  by  all  the 
captains,  except  the  one  commanding  the  battery  of  formation, 
all  these  batteries  execufe  a  left  or  a  right  wheel,  by  carriage, 
and,  as  soon  as  the  carriages,  heads  of  column,  have  con)- 
menced.the  wheel,  the  captains  of  the  right  batteries. immedi- 
ately command  :  Forward —  Guide  left,  and  place  themselves 
at  their  heads  of  column,  to  direct  them. 

The  chief  of  the  left  section  of  the  second  battery,  imme- 
diately after  the  command  Forward  of  his  captain,  com- 
mands :  Right  wheel — Forward,  and  afterwards  :  Lift  wheel, 
Forward,  so  as  to  enter  squarely  in  a  direction*  parallel  to 
the  front  of  the  third-  battery,  passing  near  the  heads  of  the 
leaders  of  its  front  rank.  The  captain  of  this  battery  marches 
at  the  head  of  his  battery,  and  commands:  Column,  by  tlie 
right  flank,  in  time  to  command  March,  when  the  leaders 
of  his  head  of  column  are  4  yards  from  the  prolongation  of 
the  left  flank  of  the  third  battery.  The  «ight  wheel  by  car- 
■riage  being  nearly  completed,   he  co^.nmands :  Forward— 


208  EV0LUTI01?S   OF   BATTERIES. 

Guide  Irff,  and,  when  he  has  gained  his  distance  :  Battery — 
Halt,  L^ft — DiiE>s — Front. 

The  iiiuveiijents  of  (he  first  battery  are  simifar  to  those  pre- 
scribed for  the  secolid  battery,  it  being  ployed  in  front  of  the 
second  batfery. 

The  chief  of  the. right  section  of  the  fourth  battery.'' im- 
mediately after  the  command  Forward  of  his  captain,  com- 
mands: Right  wheel — Forward,  and  marches  straight  for^ 
ward.  When  the  head  of  column  Las  marched  33  yards  to 
the  rear  of  the  battery  of  formation,  the  captain  commands  : 
Head  of  column  to  the  left,  and  directs  his  battery  on  a 
line  parallel  to  the  battery  of  formation.  The  captain  lets  his 
column  file  past  him,  and  commands:  Column^  hy  the  left 
ftank,  in  time  fo  command  March,  when  the  leaders  of' the 
last  rank  of  his  carriages  are  4  yards  from  the  prolongation 
of  the  left  flank  of  the  battery  of  formation.  He  then  forms 
his  battery  in  rear  of  the  battery  of  formation,  by  the  com- 
mands :  Forward — Guide  lefty  Battery —  Halt,  Left-^ 
Dress,  Frojst. 

TO  FOR^I  CLOSE  COLUMN,  WHEN  IN   iVUTLCII,  WITHOUT  A 
CHANGE  OF  FRONT. 

505  The  batteries  marching  in  line,  to  form  close  colurap, 
right  in  front,  without  a  change  of  front,  and  without  halting, 
the  colonel  commands: 

1.  On  the  1st  (or  4:th)  batteries,  form  close  column. 

2.  ^March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  "the  first  batter;^  commands  :  Guide  ^e/?,  and  goes  to  the 
left  of  his  battery;  the  captains  of  the  other  batteries  com- 
mand :    Battery.,  hy  the  right  flank — T'rot. 

At  the  word  Mahch,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  by  all  the 
captains,  except;  the  one  commanding  the  battery  of  formation, 
the  batteries  execute  the  flank  march  at  a  trot,  and  whgn  the 
wheel  is  nearly  completed,  the  captains  command-:  Fouward, 
Guide  left,  and  place  themselves  at  the  heads  of  the  column 
to  .direct  them. 

As  the  head  of  ^ach  column  arrives  in  line  with  the  left 
flank  of  the  first  battery,  its  captain  halts,  lets  his  column  file 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES,         209 

past  him,  and  commaods:  Column^  hij  the  left  flanJc,  in  time 
to  command,  MaliCFI,  when  the  IcudtTs  of  fhe  last  rank  of  his 
carriages  arrive  4  yards  IVom  the  prolongation  of  the  left,  flank 
of  the  first  battery. 

The  column  having  executed  the  left  wheel  bv  carriage,  the 
captain  commands:  Forward — Guide  le/tj  and,  when  at  its 
distance  from  the   battery  which  precedes  it,    Walk — March. 


TO  ADVANCE  IN  LINE. 

506.  The  batteries  being  in  lino,  at  a  halt,  to  cause  them 
to  march  to  the  front,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  The  first  [ov  fourth),  the  hatlcri/  of  direction. 

2.  Butteries,  for  war sJL. 

3.  MAlfCEI. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  adjutant 
indicates  the  points  of  direction  to  the  principal  guide. 

The  second  command  is  repeated  by  the  majors  and 
captains 

At  the  word  March,  repented  by  the  majors  and  captains, 
the  latter  adding,  Guide  rir/ht  (or  left),  the"  batteries  move 
forward,  the  battery,  of  direction  cont'oruiing  to  what  js  pre- 
scribed for  the  advance  in  Hup.,  No.  424,  the  others  taking  care 
to  preserve  their  alignment  and  their  interval  from  the  side  of 
the  guide 

5U7.  To  halt  the  batteries  and  align  them ;  the  changes  of 
gait;  to  march  by  a  flank;  the  oblique  march;  pas>age  of 
Ciirriciges;  the  about,  and  the  conntei  m.uch,  are  executed  as 
prescribed  for  simiiar'movements  in  the  School  of  the  Bat- 
tery, the  colonel  giving  fhe  commands  then  prescribed  for 
the  captain,  substituting- the  word  battg'ies  for  battery. 

TO  CLOSE  INTEHVALS. 

.  508.  The  batteries  marching  in  line,  to  diminish  their  front 
by  closing  the  carriages  on  one  of  the  wings  of  a  designated 
battery,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.    O/i  the  ri<jhf  (or  hfi)  piece  of  hntto'-y- — to 

yarda — close  interuais.      2.   MarcH. 


210  EVOLUTIONS  OF.  BATTERIES. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  mnjors,  the  captains 
of  the  batteries  on  the  right  of  the  designjvted  batter}',  com- 
mand :  Left  .oblique^  and  those  of  the  batteries  on  the  left, 
com.raand :   Right  ohlique. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains, 
the  movement  is  executed  promptly  in  each  battery  as  pre- 
scribed in  No.  428. 

In  this  movement,  care  must  be  taken  always  to  preserve 
between  the  batteries  double  the  interval  designated  in  the 
colonel's  command. 

MOVEMENTS  WITH  CLOSED  INTERVALS. 

509.  The  batteries,  being  in  line  with  closed  intervals,  in 
march  or  at  a  halt,  to  execute  an  about,  or  countermarch,  the 
colonel  commands :  • 

1.  Pieces  ami  caissons,  left  about  (or  counfermarcJi.') 

2.  Right  i^ieces,  FORWARD,  (or /^/^7i^  piece's," FORWARD — 

Trot)  •         ' 

3.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains, 
and  .the  movement  is  executed,  at  once,  in  each  battery,  as  in 
No.  429. 

TO  RESUME  INTERVALS. 

510.  The  batteries,  marching  in  line  with  closed  intervals, 
to  cause  them  to  resume  their  regular  intervals,  the  colonel 
commands :  ♦  • 

I.    On  the  right  (or  left)  piece  of batter?/ — full  intervals. 

2.  March. 

At  the  word  March*  the  movement  is  executed,  promptly, 
in  each  battery,  as  in  No.  430. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.         211 

FORMATION  ANt)  DEPLOYMENT  OF  TWO  PARALLEL 

COLUMNS. 

511.  The  batteries  beinp:  in  line,  at  a  halt,  to  form  them 
into  two  parallel  columns  bj  section,  in  fear  of  the  two  cen- 
tral sections  of  the  line,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  By  section,,  from  the  left  and  right  of  the  second  and  third 

batteries,  front  into  column. 

2.  March. 

3.  The  ri-ght  (or  left),  the  column  (f  direction. 

At  the  first  command,  the  major  of  the  right  division  com- 
mands By  section^  from  the  left  of  the  second  battery — front 
into  column  ;  and  the  major  of  the  left  division.  By  section, 
from  the  right  of  the.  third  battery — front  into  cohimn. 

The  captains  of  the  second  and  third  batteries  command, 
respectively:  By  section,  from  the  left — front  into  column  ; 
and,  By  section,  from  the  right— front  into  column.  The 
captains  of  the  first  and  fourth  batteries  command,  respec- 
tively.  By  section^  left  w%eel ;  and,   By  section,  right  wheel. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains, 
the  movements  indicated  are  executed,  at  once,  by  all  the 
batteries.  Just  before  the  completion  of  the  wheels  by  sec-- 
tion  of  the  first  and  fourth  batteries,  the  captains  command, 
respectively.  Forward  —  Head  of  column,  righj  half 
wheel;  and,  Forward— Head  of  column,  left  half 
wheel;  and  each  places  himself  in  line  /with  his  head  of 
column,  and  directs  his  pieces  in  such  manner  as  to  place 
them  in  file  in  rear  of  the  second  and  third  batteries,  by  the 
commands  Head,  OF  column,  right  half  wheel;  and, 
Head  OF  COLUMN,  LEFT  half  v/heel. 

As  soon  as  the  two  central  batteries  are  formed  in  column, 
tlie  colonel  gives  the  third  command,  which  is  repeated  by 
the  majors. 

To  deploy  these  two  parallel  columns  forward,  into  line, 
when  in  march,  or  at  a  halt^  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Forward,  into  line.     2^  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  major  of  the  right  division  com- 
mands, Forward,  into  line — right  <>blique  ;  and  the  major  of 
the'  left  division  Forward,  into  line — left  obliq^ue. 


212  EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES, 

The  captains  of  batteries,  heads  of  columns,  repeat  their 
major's  comiiiand.  The  captains  of  the  first  and  fourth  bat- 
teries command,  respectively,  Iltul  of  column^  riyJit  lialf 
V)heel;  and,  Htad  o^  column ^  left  half  wheel ;  adding,  if  the 
movement  be  made  from  a  halt,    C^'lamn,  foricard. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  same  officers,  the 
movement  is  executed  in  each  column,  as  for  forming  yc»r- 
ivard,  into  line.     No.  487. 

FORMATION  AND  DEPLOYMENT  OF  FOUR  t'ARALLEL  COL- 
UMNS. 

512.  The  batteries  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  to  form  tliem 
into  four  parallel  columns,  by  section,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Bj/  sect  ion  J  from  the  right  (ov  left)  of  batteries — front  into 

column. 

2.  March.  .        , 

3.  The  right  (or  left^  the  column  of  direction. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
command;  B(/  section,  from  the  fight  (or  left,)  front  into 
column. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  all  the  officers,  the  move- 
ments are  executed,  at  once,  in  all  the  baiteries,  as  in  No. 
413.      - 

As  soon  as  the  columns  are  formed,  the  colonel  gives  the 
third  command,  which  is  repeated  by  the  majors. 

The  line  niay,  also,  when  in  march,  be  broken  into  four 
parallel  columns,  by  the  commands  1.  Bj/  the  right  (or  lef) 
of  batteries — break  into  sections;  (or,  B//  the  right  (or  I- ft) 
of  .batteries — 'break  info  se.ctio7in — trot.^  2.  MarCH,  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  of  No.  407. 

To  form^  these  four  columns  forward  into  line,  the  colonel 
commands  : 

1.   Forward,  into  line — left  (or  right)   oblique.     2.   MARCH. 
Or,  if  he  wishes  to  continue  the  march  : 

1.  Form  line  advancing — left  (or  right)  oblique. 

2.  Marcfi. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  all  the  officers,  the  move- 


fiVOLtJTrOi^S    OF   BATTERIES".  213 

ment  is  executed,  at -once,  in  all  the  batteries,  as  in  Nos  409 
an(r4i9. 

The  four  parallel  columns  may  be  formed  faced,  to  the  rear, 
info  Z/7*r,  accordinji;  to  the  principles  of  No.  410. 

Tlie  forniiition  and  deploy' tueut  of  Jouhle  columns^  on  the 
centre  serfioits  of  the  batteries  are  executed  in  an  analogous 
manner,  by  applying  the  principles  of  Nos.  420,  421,  or  422, 
by -the  coininands  :  1.  In  rach  hatteri/  —  doiijde  column  on  the 
centre  2.  MARCfl.  3.  The^lcft  (or  riyht)  the  "column  of 
direction;  adding  ^ro^- to  the*^ first  command,  when  the  col- 
umns are  in  march;  and  to  deploy  the  columns.  I.  Forward^ 
info  line ;  (or,  if  in  march,  and  ttie  line  not  to  l)e  halted, 
Form  line,adoancin(j — trot.)     2.   March. 

PASSAGE  OF  OBSTACLES.. 

'tis.  Batteries  marching  in  line  execute  the  passage  of  ob- 
stacles, which  are  found  in  front  of  them,  according  to  the 
principles  of  No.  431.     The  colonel  commands: 

1. Batter?/.     2.  M ARCH. 

CHANGES  OF  FRONT  OF  THE  LINE  OF  BATTLE. 

514.  The  batteries  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  to  change  the 
front  of  the  line,  the  colonel  will  first  form  column,  by  sec- 
tion to  the  right  (or  left),  and  then  execute  the  formation 
forward,  or  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line,  on  the  head  of  the 
coluuiQ,  or  on  one  of  the  other  batteries,  according  to  the  new 
front  he  may  desire  to  establish. 

FORMATIONS    IN    BATTERY. 

TO  PASS  FROM  THE  ORDER  IN  LINE  TO  THE  ORDER  IN 

BATTERY. 

515.  The  batteries  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  or  in  march,  to 
form  them  ;it  once  iuto  battery,  to  fire  to  the  front,  the  colo- 
•nel  commands : 

1.    Forward,  into  hattrry.      2.    MARCH. 

With  piccos  leading :-— 


214  EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

At  thc!  word  March,  repeated  by  the  iiiajprs,  the  captains 
command:  In  Lattery — Guide  right;  and  the  uiovcmeut  is 
executed  at  once,  in  all  the  batteries,  as  prescribed  in  No. 
432. 

If  tlie  colonel  wishes  to  form  into  battery,  throwing  the 
caissons  to  the* rear,  he  commands: 

Action  Front. 

Which  is  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains,  and  executed 
at  once  in  all  the  batteries,  as  in  No.  43o. 

With  caissons  leadin'g  :  — 

At  the  'command  FonvanJ,  into  hatlery^  repeated  by  the 
majors,  the  cap.tains  command  :^  i^/eces,  jia^s  your  caissons — 
March.  ^  - 

At  the  colonel's  command  March,  repeated  by  the  majors 
and  captains,  the  tatter  add ;  Guide  riyhtj  and  the  movement 
is  executed  as  in  No.  434. 

TO  FORM  TO  THE  REAR  INTO  BATTERY. 

516.  The  batteries  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  or  in  march,  to 
form  them  at'once  into  battery,  to  fire  to  the  rear,  the  colonel 
oommands : 

1.    To  the  rear  J  into  battery.     2.  March. 

With  pieces  leading  : — 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
command:  Eire  to  the  rear — caissons,  pass  your  pieces— trot^ 
March.  • 

At  the  colonel's  command  March,  repeated  by  the  majors 
and  captains,  the  latter  add:  Guide  left;  and,  afterwards.  In 
battery;  and  the  movement  is  executed,  as  in  No.  435. 

With  the  caissons  leaxiing : 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
command,  Fire  to  the  rear. 

At  the  word  Mauch,  repeated   by  the  majors,  the  captains 
command,  In  battery,  and  the  movement  is  executed  as  in. 
No.  436. 


.  33VOLUTIONS   OF   BATTERIES.  216 

■      IN  BATTERY,  TO  FORM  FORWARD,  INTO  LINE. 

■  517.  The  pieces  being  ia  line  and  formed  into  battery,  to 
form  them  forward,  into  line,  with  the  pieces  in  front,  the 
colonel  commands  : 

1.  Forwardy  into  line — jpieces  in  front.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
cause  their  pieces  to  be  limbered,  (in  the  evolutions  of  batte- 
ries, pieces  will  always  be  limbered  to  thei'car),  and  command, 
I^ieces,  left  about — caissons,  forward. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains, 
the  movement  is  executed  by  all  the  batteries  at  once,  as  in 
No.  437.^ 

If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  forward,  into  line,  with 
the  caissons  in  front,  he  commands  : 

1.  Forward,  into  line — caissons  in  front.     2.  March* 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
cause  their  pieces  to  be  limbered  to  the  rear,  and  command, 
Caissons,  ^)as.s  your  jr lee es — trot ;  pieces  left  about. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains, 
the  movement  is  executed  as  in  No.  4o7. 

When  either  of  the  preceding  movements  is  nearly  com- 
pleted, the  colonel  commands:  Batteries — Halt;  or,  For- 
ward, according  as  he  may  wish  to  halt  the  line,  or  put  it  in 
march.  These  commands  arc  repeated  by  the  majors  and 
captains. 

IN  BATTERY,  TO  FORM  FACED  TO  THE  REAR,  INTO  LINE. 

518.  The  batteries  being  aligned  in  battery,  to  form  them 
to  the  rear,  into  line,  with  caissons  in  front,  the  colonel  com- 
mands : 

1.  Faced  to  the  rear,  into  line — caissons  in  front. 
2.  March. 

At  the  fir.=-t  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
cause  their  pieces  to  be  limbered  to  the  rear,  and  command, 
Oai6don6f  left  about — pi^ct^,  forward. 


216  EVOLtTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

At  the  "word  March,  repeated  by  the  oiajors  and  captains, 
the  movement  is  executed  as  in  No.  438. 

If  tbe  colooel  should  wish  to  have  .the  pieces  in  front,  he 
oommauda: 

1.   Faced  to  the  rear,  into  line — pieces  in  front. 

2.    MARCfl. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  mnjors,  the  captains^ 
cause  their  pieces  to  bo  liin^)ored   to  the  rear,  and   command, 
Piecc-R,  pa^!^-  i/f)}ir  ciiawnn — caissons,  left  about. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majnrs  and  captain?, 
the  movement  is  executed  by  all  the  batteries' at  once,  as  in 
No.  488. 

When  either  of  the  preceding  movements  is  nearly  com- 
.pleted,  the  colonel  comnmuds,  Batteries— ^ Aim,  or  Lorwakd, 
according  as  he  may  wish  to  cause  the  line  to  halt,  or  to  put 
it.  in  march.  These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  majors 
and  captains. 

Should  the  colonel  deem  it  proper,  in  executing  the  pre- 
ceHing  movements,  to  cause  the  caissons  to  be  placed,  at  once, 
near  to  and  in  front  of  their  pieces,  he  will  command,  as  soon 
as  the  captains  have  ordered  their  pieces  to  be  limbered  up. 
Caissons,  in  front  of  your  pieces,  or,  Caissons,  in  front  of 
your  pieces — trot. 

TO  PASS    FROM    THE  ORDER    IN  COLUMN,  TO  THE  ORDER 

IN  BATTERY. 

519.  The  batteries  being  in  column^ by  section,  at  a  halt, 
to  form  them  forward,  into  battery,  in  line  with  the  head  of 
column,  gaining  ground  to  one  of  the  flanks,  the  colonel  com- 
mands : 

1.  Forward  J  into  battery — left  (or  right)  oblique. 
2.  March.  # 

The  first  command  is  repeated  by  the  majors  and  by  the 
captain  of  the  first  battery;  the  captains  of  the  other  batte- 
ries command.  Column.  Jorward— head  of  column,  iPft  half- 
wheel. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  mr.jors  and  captains, 
tho  movomuut  is  ext?cutud  by  the  firat  battery,  us  proeuribed 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.  217 

for  forming  forward^  into  Une\  No.  487,  and  each  battery  is 
formed  in  line  forioardyinto  hattery^  left  ohlique,  according 
to  the  principles  and  by  the  commands  of  eitber  No.  439  or 
440,  according  as  the  pieces  or  caissoia^  are  in  front. 

With  the  pieces  in  front,  the  formation  of  each  of  the  last 
three  batteries  on  the  line,  is  "executed  as  in  No.  487,  and  the 
command  MarciT,  which  follows  th^t  oi  fonoard  into  battery^ 
left  oblique,  is  given  when  the  second  section  has  finished  its 
right  wheel,  and  when,  consequently,  the  head  of  the  column 
has  passed  10  yards  over  the  new  line  to  be  ocoupied  by  the 
caissons.  When  the  caissons  are  in  front^  which  makes  it 
necessary  for  the  pieces  to  pass  their  caissons  at  the  moment 
of  forming  into  battery,  the  command  March,  after  that  of 
Forward,  into  hattcry-^left  oblique,  must  be  given  in  the 
formation  of  the  last  three  batteries  in  line,  when  the  head  of 
the  column  is  10  yards  from  the  rear  of  the  new  line.- 

The  movement  is  executed  when  in  march,  .with  the  modi-  ♦- 
fications  indicated  at  the  close  of  No.  487,  relative  to  the  com- 
mands of  the  captains  of  the  last  three  batteries,  and  of  the 
chief  of  section,  head  of  column. 

TO  FORM  FACED  TO  THE  REAR,  INTO  BATTERY. 

620.  The  batte.ries  being  in  column,  by  section,  at  a  halt, 
to  fortn  them  faced  to  the  rear,  into  battery,  on  the  head  of 
column,"  gaining  ground  to  one  of  the  flanks,  the  colonel  com- 
mands : 

1.  Faced  to  the  rear,  into  battery — left  (or  right)  oblique. 

2.  March. 

The  first  command  is  repeated  by  the  majors  and  by  the 
captain  of  the  first  battery,  and  the  captains  of  the  other  bat- 
teries command.  Column,  forward — head.,  of  column,  left 
half  wheel. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  same  officers,  the 
movement  is  executed  as  in  No.  487,  for  forming  forward, 
into  line,  and  each  battery  is  formed  fared  to  the  rear,  into 
battery,  left  oblique,  according  to  the  principles  and  by  the 
commands  of  either  No.  441  or  442,  according  as  the  pieces 
or  caissons  are  in  front. 
10 


218'         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES, 

TO  FORM  TO  THE  LEFT  (or  RIGHT)  INTO  BATTERY.  . 

521.  The  batteries  beins:  in  column,  by  section,  at  a  haiti 
or  in  march,  to  foroi  them  into  battery,  to  fire  towards  one  of 
the  flanks,  gaining  groiind  towards  the  other,  the  colonel  com- 
mands: 

1.    To  the  left  (or  right)  into  battery — sections,  right  (or  left) 
wheel.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
command,  Fire  to  the  le/f,  hy  section^  right  wheel. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  same  officers,  the 
batteries  are  formed,  at  once,  in  line  to  the  left  into  battery^ 
according  to  the  "principles  and  by  the  commands  of  either 
No.  448  or  444,  as  the  pieces  or  caissons  are  in  front. 

If  the  colonel  wishes  to  form  'them  into  battery,  to  fire  in 
the  direction  of  the  flank  towards  which  he  gains  ground,  he 
commands : 

1.    To  the  left  \or  right)  into  Lattery — sections,  left  {pv  right) 
wheel.     2.  March. 

At  the  ^rst  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
command  :   Fire  to  the  left,  by  section — left  wheel.  *' 

At  the  word  March,  repjai^ed  by  the  same  officers,  the 
batteries  are  formed  at  once  to  the  If'ft,  int  ■  battery,  according 
to  the  principles  and  by  the  commands  of  either  No.  443  or 
444,  as  the  pieces  or  caissons  are  in  front. 

TO  FORM  ON  THE  LEFT  (OR  RIGHT,.)  INTO  BATTERY. 

522.  The  batteries  marching  in  column,  by  section,  to  form 
them  ■  on  the  left  (on  right)  into  battery,  the  colonel  com- 
mands : 

■    1.    On  the  left  (or  right)  into  battery.     2.  March.     • 

At  the  word   March,  the   movement  is  executed  as  in  No, 

490,  for  forming  on  the  lejt  into'  line,  and  each   battery  is 

formed  on  the  left,  into  battery,  by  the  same  principles  and 

'Commands  of  either   No.  445   or  446,  according  as  the  pieces 

or  caissons  are  in  front. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   BATTERIES.  219 


'  TO  FORM  TO    THE  LEFT  (OR    RIGHT),   AND  FORWARD, 
INTO  BATTERY. 

523.  The  batteries  marchino;  in  column,  by  section,  and  a 
part  of  the  colubin  having  changed  direction,  t-o  form  them 
into  battery,  to  fire  towards  the  front  of  the  origifial  line  of 
march,  the  colonel  halts  the  colirain,  as  directed  in  No.  491, 
(before  the  rear  section  of  the  baj^tery,  which  entered  last  in 
the  new  direction,  has  finished  its  wheel,)  and  commands  : 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)  and  foricard,  into  hattery. 

2.  March! 

At  the  first  command,  each  major,  according  to  the  positions 
of  his  batteries,  repeats  the  whole  of  that  command,  or  only 
that  part  of  it  which  is  applicable  to  the  movement  he  has  to 
execute  J  the  captains,  whose  batteries  have  changed  direc- 
tion, command  :  Five  to  the  left, — hij  &ection,  left  wheel ;  the 
captain  of'the  battery  imm^iately  following  those  which  have 
changed  direction  commands  :  Column,  foricard }  and  the 
captains  who  follow  him  command  :  Column,  forward — head 
of  column,  left  half  wheel. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  same  officers,  tJiey 
conform,  respectively,  in  each  portion  of  the  column,  to  what 
is  prescribed  for  forming  to  the  left,  into  battery  —  sections^ 
left  wheel,  No.  443  or  444  j» and  for  forward^  into  hattery-^— 
left  oblique,  No.  519.     ,. 

TO  FORM  TO  THE  RIGHT  (OR  LEFT)  AND  FACED  TO  THE 
"  *      .  REAR,  INTO  BATTERY.  '        • 

* 

524.  The  batteries  marching  in  column,  by  section,  and  a 
pact  of  the  column  having  changed  direction,  to  form  them 
into  battery  to  fire  towards  the  rear  of  the  original  line  of 
march,  the  colonel  halts  the  column,  as  in  the  preceding 
manoeuvre  and  commands  : 

1.  To  the  right  (or  lef,)  and  faced  to  the  rear^  into  battery. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  each  major,  according  to  the  positions 
of  his  battories,  repeats  the  whole  of  that  conimand,  or  only 
gives  that  part  of  it  which  is  applicable  to  the  movement  he 


220         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

has  to  execute.  The  captains,  whose  batteries  have  changed 
direction,  command:  Fire  to  the  right — hy  section^  left  wheel ; 
the' captain  of  the  battery  immediately  following  those  which 
have  changed  direction,  commands  :  Column,  forward  ;  and 
the  captains  who  follow  him  command  :  Column,  forward — 
head  of  column,  left  half  wheel. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  these  officers,  they  con- 
form, respectively,  in  each  portion  of  the. column,  to  what  is 
prescribed  for  to  the  right,  into  battery — sections,  left  wheel ; 
No.  443  or  .444,  and  faced  to  the  rear,  into  battery — l^ft 
obli^ie,  No.  b20:  ,  ..it. 

TO  FORM    FORWARD,  INTO    BATTERY,  ON    A  LINE  WHICH 
HAS  BEEN  PASSED  BY  THE  HEAD  OF  THE  COLUMN. 

525.  The  batteries  being  in  column,  by  section,  at  a  halt, 
to  form  them  forward,  into  battery,  on  a  line  which  the  head 
of  column  has  passed,  throwing  the  front  batteries  to  the 
right  (or  left),  the  colonel  commands  :  • 

1.    On  the  3c?,  (2d  or  4:th)  battery — forioard,  into  battery — 
front  batteries  to  the  right  (or  left.)     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command',  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
of  the  batteries  which  precede  the  battery  of  formation  com- 
mand:  Column,  forward;  the  captain  of  thd'  battery  of 
formation  commands  :  Forward, .mto  battery — left  oblique; 
and  the  captains  of  the  batteries  which  follow  the  battery  of 
formation  command  :  Column,  forward — head  of  column,  left 
half  icheel. 

At  tRe  word  Maj^cS,  repeated  by  the  same  officer^j  the  bat- 
teries which  precede  the  battery  of  formation,  Tfnove  38  yards 
straight  to  the  front,  when  their  captains  form  them  on  the 
right  flank  of  the  column,  and  facing  towards  it.s  rear,  by 
means  of  two  right  wheels,  as.  directed  in  No.  493.  That 
part  of  the  coluriin  being  thus  developed,  the  captain  of  the 
battery  which  immediatiely  precedes  the  battery  of  formation, 
commands:  Info  battery,  faced  to  the  rear — left  oblique — 
March;  the  captain  of  the  first  battery  commands :  Head 
OF  COLUMN,  LEFT  HALF  WHEEL;  and,  afterwards,  when  at  its 
proper  position.  Into  buttf^ry,  faced  to  the.. rear-^ left  oblique — 
March;  and  each  battery  Ls  formed  into  battery  in  line  with 
the  battery  of  formation,  as  prescribed  for  faced  to  the  rcar^ 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.         221 

into  lattery,  No.  441"  or  442,  according  as  the  pieces  or  cais- 
sons are  in  front. 

The  battery  of  formation  forms  for wai-dj  ivto  hdtteiy,  as- 
in  No.  439  or  440,  according  as   the  pieces  or  caissons  are  in 
front.     The  batteries  which  follow  it  form  forward,  into  hat- 
tery,  in  line  with  it,  and  at  their  proper  intervals,  as  in  No. 
519. 

TO  FORM  FACED  TO  THE  REAR,  INTO'  BATTERY,  ON  A 
LINE  PASSED  BY  THB.-HEAD'  OF  COLUMN. 

526.  The  batteries  being  in  column,  by  section,  at  a  halt, 
to  form  them  faced  to  the  rear,  into  batt'ery,  on  a  line  which 
has  been  passed  by  the  head  of  the  column,  throwing  the 
front  batteries  to  the  right  (or  left,)  the  colonel  commands : 

1.    On  the  ^d,  (2c?  or  4^7i)  battery,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  hat- 
'*""  tery— front  batteries  to  the  right  (or  left.)     2.  March. 

.  At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
of  the  batteries  which  precede  the  battery  of  formation  com- 
mand:.  Column,  forward  ;  the  captain  of  the  battery  of  form- 
ation commands  :  Into  battery,  faced  to  the  rear — left  oblique  ; 
the  captains  of  the  batteries  which  follow  the  battery  of  form- 
ation' cooimanoi:  Column,  forward — head  of  column,  left 
half  ivheel.  -     •  . 

At  the,-word  March,  repeated  by  the  sapae**'' officers,  the 
movement  is  executed  according  to  the  principles  of  the  pre- 
ceding No.,  525.     .  ,* 

TO  DEPLOY   THE    CLOSE    COLUMN    FORWARD,    INTO    BAT- 
•        TERY,  IN  ADVANCE  OF  ITS  FRONT. 

527.  The  batteries  being  in  close  columta,  at  a  halt,  to  de- 
ploy them  forward,  into  battery,  in  advance  of  the  head  of 
the  column,  on  one  of  the  last  three  batteries,  throwing  the 
front  batteries  to  the  right  (or'^eft,)  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.    On  the  3d,  (2d  or- 4th)  battery,  forward,  into  battery — 
front  battering  to  the  right  (or  lejt.)     2.    March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
of  tbe  batteriff  which  precede  the  battery  of  formation  com- 


222     ~  .   EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

matid :  Battftry,  hij   the  right  JiarJ^;  the  captain  of  the  bat- 
tery  of    formation   commands:   Battery^   /o/zfa/v/;  and,  the  . 
captains  of  the   batteries  which   fullow  the    battery  of  forma- 
tion command:   Battery,  by  theUft  Jlank. 

At  the  word  VIauch,  repeated  by  the  majors  laid  by  all  the 
captains,  except  the  one  commanding  the  Hattery  of  forma- 
tion, the  movement  is  executed  as  in  No  49o,  for  deploying 
forward^  into  line^  in'  advance  of  the  front.'  The  battery  of 
formation,  having'  passed  33  yards  beyond  the  original  front 
of  the  head  of  the  column,  is  then  fornied  forward^  into  hat-' 
tery^  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  No.  432  or 
434,  according  as  the  pieces  or  caissons  are  in  front.  Each 
of  the  other  batteries,  regulating  itself  by  the  batiery  of 
formation,  or  by  the  battery  urxt  to  it  on  that  side,  is -formed 
forward,  into  battery,  as  in  No.  432  or  434 

The  movement   is  executed   on  the  headmost  battery  when 
the  i3olumn   is   marching,  or  at  a   halt,  according  to  the  same' 
principles^ and  by  the v means  pr^cribed  for  batteries  which 
follow  the  battery  of  formation,  the  colonel  commanding.: 

1.    On  1st  battery,  forward,  inf')  battery — rear  hatteries^to  the 
left  (or  rvjht.)     2.  March.  "^ 

TO    DEPLOY    THE    CLOSE    COLUMN    FACED    TO  THE  REAR, 
INTO  BATTERY,  IN-  ADVaiNCE  OF  ITS  FRONT. 

528.  The  batteries  being  in  close  column,  at  a  halt,  to  deploy 
them  faced  to  the  rear,  intp'jDattery,  on  a^jjioe  pasi-ed  by  the 
front  of  the  column,  on  one  of  the  last  three  batteries,  throw- 
ing" the  front  batt^jfttes  to  the  right  (of  left),  the  colonel  com' 
itiands :  '  ' 

1.    On  3r7,  (2d  0T^4:fh')  battery,  faced   to    the   7'ear,  into   bat- 
tery ^-f  rant  batteries  to  the  right  (oTilefi.y    2.   March. 

^'  .  '    .  .  ^ 

At  the  fim  comp:jand,  repeated  by  the  mnjors,  the  captains 
of  the  batteries  which  precede  th^battlft-y. of  formation  com- 
mand: Battery,  by  the  right  Jianh  ;  the  captain  of  the  bat- 
tery of  form  ition  commands  :  Battery,  fo'-ymrd  ;  the  cap- 
ons of  the  batteries  which  follow  the  batb^  of  fonnation 
command  :    Battery,  by  the  left  Jiunk 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by   the  majOTs  an.d  all  the 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.      "   223 

captains,  except  tlie  one  commanding  the  battery  of  forma- 
tion, the  movement  is  executed  according  to  No.  527  for 
foni)in|z;  forward  into  battery,  in  advance  of  the  front ^  and 
all  the  batteries  are  formed  faced  to  the  rear,  into  hatteri/,  by 
their  captains,  who  command  and  execute  what  i-^  prescribed 
in  No.  485  or  436,  according  as  the  pieces  or  caissons  are  in 
front. 

The  movement  is  executed  on  Ihe  headmost  battery  of  the 
column  inarching,  or  at  a  '1ialt,  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples and  by  the  moans  employed  for  the  batteries  which  fol- 
low the  battery  of  forrtiation,  which  may  be  thrown  to  the 
left  or  right,  the  colonel  cpdamauding: 

1.    On  the  first  battery,  faced  to""  the  rear,  into  battery — rear 
batteries  to  the  left  (qv  right.')     2.  March. 

TO  DEPLOY  THE  CLO^E  COLUMN,  PIECES  IN  FRONT,  FOR- 
WARD, INTO  BATTKRY,  IN  LINE  WITH  ONE  OF  THE 
BATTERIES   WHICH  STANDS  FAST. 

529.  The  batteries  being  in  close  column,  at  a  halt,  with 
pieces. in  front,  to  deploy  th«m  forward,  into  buttery,  on  one 
of  the  batteries'standing  fast — (that  is,  in  line  wilh  the  desig- 
nated battery,)  throwing  th#front  batteries  to  the  right  (or 
left,)  the  colonel  commands  :  *       , 

1.    OnSdf  {2d.  or   4:th)  battery  standing  fast j  f^ward,  into 
battery^-front  batterien  to  the  right  (or  left  )     2.   MARCH. 

'4         <.       ■•  ■  ■  . 

At  the  first  command,  repeated   by  the  mgjors,  the  captain 

of  the  battery  of  formation  commands :  jF^re  to  the  front; 
the  captains  of  the  baferies  which  precede  the  battery  of 
formation  command:  Battf^ry,  by  the  right  flank ;  and  the 
captains  of  the  batteries  which  follow  the  battery  of  formation 
command  :   Battery,  by  the  left  flank. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  all  the 
captains,  except  the  one  comitianding  the  battery  of  forma- 
tion, who  commands:  In  battery,  and  forms  at  once  into 
battery;  the  batteries  which  precede  the  battery  of  formation 
are  formed  /'/clpf  to  the  rear,  int »  battery—  ccdssons'  i?i  fronfj 
No  .430  ;  and  tliose  which  follow  it  "are  formed /or ?/j« re/,  into 
battery,  pieces  in  front,  No.  432. 


224         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

To  deploy  the  close  column,  establishing  the  line  of  bat- 
teries in  line  with  the  headmost  battery,  by  throwing  the 
caissons  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Action  fvont — rear  batteries  to  the  left  (or  rigTitJ) 
"2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
of  the  rear  batteries  command  :   Baitery^  hy  the  left  Jiank. 

At  the  word  Mar-cii,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  by  all  the 
captains,  except  the  one  commanding  the  battery  of  forma- 
tion, the  rear  batteries  are  conducted  to  their  proper  intervals 
on  the  line  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  No.  for  the  batte- 
ries which  follow,  the  battery  of  formation. 

The  captain  of  the  first  battery,  as  soon  as  the  ground  is 
uncovered,  commands  ACTION:  jfront,  which  is  executed  as  in 
No.  433.  Each  of  the  other  captains,  regulating  himself  by 
the  battery  of  foi-mation,  or  by  the  one  next  to  it^  gives  and 
executes  the  same  command. 

TO    DEPLOY    THE   CLOSE    COLUMN,    CAISSONS    IN   FRONT, 
.  FACED  TO  THE  PREAR,    INTO  BATTERY,    IN     LINE  WITH 
ONE  OF  THE  BATTERIES  WHICH  STANDS  FAST. 

630.  The  batteries  being  in  close  column,  at  a  halt,  with 
caissons  in  front,  to. deploy  them  faced  to  the  rear,  into  bat- 
tery, on  one"t>f  the  batteries  which  stands  fast,  throwing  the 
batteries  which  precede  it  to  the  right  (or  left),  the  colonel 
commands :       .  ...    ^        '^ 

1.    On  3c?  (2d  or  4th)  hattery  standing  fastj  faced  to  the  reaVy 

into  battery — front  batteries  to  the  right  (or.  left). 
2i,  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  battery  of  formation  commands.  Fire  to  the  rear  ;  the 

"captains  of  the  batteries  which  precede  the  battery  of  forma- 
tion command,  Battery^  by  the  right  flank;  the  captains  of 
the  batteries  which  follow  the  battery  of  formation  command, 
Battery,  by  the  left  Jlanlc.  A, 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  uie  majors  and  by  all  the 
captains,  except  the  one  commanding  the  battery  of  formation, 

-  who,  as  soon  as  the  ground  is  unma?ked,  commands,  In  bat- 
tery. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.         225 

The  movement  is  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples, and  by  the'  means,  prescribed  in  the  preceding;  No.,  529) 
for  forming  /or  luard,  into  hattevy^from  a  halt.  The  battery 
of  formation  is  formed,  /acec^  to  the  rear,  into  hatter y  ;  and 
those  which  precede  it,  forward,  into  battery ,  pieces  in  front ; 
and  those  which  follow  it,  faced  ip  the  rear,  ivto  hattcry,  cqis- 
S071S  in  front. 

TO  DEPLOY  THE"CL0SE  COLUMN  TO  THE  LEFT  (oe  RIGHT), 

INTO  BATTERY. 

531.  The  batteries  being  in  close  column,  at  a  halt,  to  de- 
ploy them,  into  battery,  to  fire  to  the  left  (or  right),  gaining 
ground  to  the  right  (or  left),  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  By  the  rear  of  qolumn,  to^the  left  (ox  right),  into  battery — 
batteries,  right  (or  left)  wheel.     2.  March. 
• 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  fourth  battery  commands,  Battery,  right  wheel ;  the 
captains  of  the  other  batteries  command.  Battery,  forward— ' 
trot. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  same  ofiicers,  the 
first  three  batteries  move  forward  at  a  trot;  the  fourth  bat- 
tery executes  its  right  wheel. 

The  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  "499,  for 
forming  to  the  right,  intoliiic,  and  each  battery  is  formed  into 
battery,  faced  to  the  rear,  without  halting,  as  soon  as  it  has 
executed  its  wheel,  according  to  the  principles  and  by  the 
commands  of  No.  435  or  436,  as  the  pieces  or  caissons  are  in 
front. 

To  execute  the  deployment,  to  fire  in  the  direction  of  the 
flank,  towards  which  ground  is  gained,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  By  the  rear  of  column,  to  the  left  (or  right),  into  battery—^ 
batteries,  left  (or  right)  wheel.     2.   MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  fourth  battery  commands.  Battery,  left  wheel;  the 
captains  of  the- other  batteries  command.  Battery,,  forward, 
guide  left- — trot.   ■ 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  same  oflEicers,  the 
>iq^overaent  Is  executed  according, to  the  principles  above;  and 


226         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

each  battery  is  formed  in  line  forv:iard^''into  hatteri/,  without 
Lalting,  as  soon  as  it  has  finished  its  wheel,  according  to  the 
principles  and  by  the  commands  of  No.  432  or  434,  as  the 
pieces  or  caissons  are  in  front. 

The  movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner,  when  the 
close  column  is  in  march,  but,  at  the  first  commandj'the  cap- 
tains of  the  first  three  batteries  only  command  the  trotj  and 
designate  the  guide  after  the  second  command. 

TO  DEPLOY  THE  CLOSE  COLUMN  ON  THE  XEFT  (or  RIGHT), 

INTO  BATTERY.  * 

532.  The  batteries  in  close  column  being  in  march,  to  de- 
ploy them  on  the  left  (or  right),  into  battery,  the  colonel 
commands ; 

li    On  the  left  (or  right) j  into  \attery.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  captain 
of  the  first  battery  commands,  Batter i/,  left  wheel. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  the  cap- 
tain of  the  first  battery,  the  movement  is' executed  as  in  No. 
500,  for  forming  on  the  left,  into  line,  and  each  battery,  with- 
out halting,  is  formed,  successively,  'fo/ivard,  into  battery^ 
as  soon  as  it  has  finished  its  wheel,  according  to  the  princi- 
ples of  No.  432  or  434,  as  the  pieces  or  caissons  are  in  front. 

DEPLOYMENT  OF  TWO  PARALLEL  COLUMNS  FORWARD,  OR 
FACED  TO  THE  REAR,  INTO  13ATTERY. 

533.  The  batteries  being  formed  in  two  parallel  columns, 
by  section  (each  on  the  wing  of  one  of  the  central  batteries), 
to  deploy  them  forward  into  battery,  the  colonel  commands': 

1.  Forwardy  into  battery.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  tl;,e  major  of  the  right  column  com- 
mands, Forward^  into  battery — right  oblique;  and  the  major 
of  the  left  column  command^f  i'brii^an;?,  into  battery — left 
oblique.  '  '       ' 

At  the  word  March,  the  movement  is  esieeuted  in  each 
column,  as  in  No.  511,  and;^each  battery  is  formed  in  line 
forward,  into  battery,  according  to  the  principles  and  by  the 


BVOLtTTIONS   OF  BATTERIES.  227 

commands  of  No.  489  or  440,  as  the  pieces  or  caissons  are  in 
front. 

The  deployment, /ricer^  to  the  rear ^  into  haiiery^  is  executed 
by  replacing  the  command  for^-ard.,  info  hatter t/^  by  that  of 
faced  to  the  rear,  into  bafte/y,  and  according  to" the  principles 
of  No.  520,  and  of  No.  441  or  442. 

DEPLOYMENT  OF    FOUR    PARALLEL    COLUVINS    FORWARD, 
Oi^FACED  TO  THE  REAR,  INTO^BATTEuY. 

534.  The  batteries  being  formed  in  four  parallel  colu9|.ns, 
by  section,  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  (^ach  column  on  one  di^he 
wings  of  each  battery),  to  deploy  them  forward,  into  battery, 
the  colonel  commands  : 

1^  Forward^  into  hattery — left  (or  right)  ohliqne. 
2.  March. 

At  thB  word  Ma^ii,  repeated  by  all  the  officers,  the  move- 
ment-is executed,  at  once,  by  all  the  batteries,  according  to 
the  principles  of  No.  439  or  440,  as  the  pieces  or  caissons  are 
in  front. 

.If  the  batteries  are  formed  in  four  double  columns  (on  the 
centre  section  of  each  battery),  the  colonel  commands: 

1.   Forward^  into  hatteryT    2.   March. 

At  the  word.  March,  repeated  by  all  the  officers,  the  niove- 
ment  is  executed,  at  once,  by  all  the  batteries,  according  to 
the  principles  and  by  the  commands  of  No   447. 

'J^he  batteries  formed  i^  four  parallel  columns^  may  be  de- 
ployed f'iced  to  the  rear,  into  battery^  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  the  same  commands  of  the  superior  officers, 
except  that  the  v^or^s  forward,  into  battery,  are  changed  into 
faced  to  tlie^rear,  into  battery,  the  captains  conforming  to 
Sos.  441,  ^"2,  or  447.     .. 

•t     , 

TO  PASS  FROM  TgE  ORDER  IN  T!\TTERY,  TO  THE  ORDER 

IN  COLUMN. 

535  The  line  of  batteries  being  formed  in  batfery,  to  form 
column,  the  colonel  first  ext?cutes  one  of  the  miuoenvres  of 
No.  517  or  518,  and  thus  forms  the  line  of  battle  most  suita- 


228         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

ble  for  what  he  designs.  He  then  breaks  the  line  into  col- 
umn, by  one  of  .the  manoeuvres  prescribed  for  passing  from 
the  order  in  line  to  the  order  in  column.  •  . 

BEING  IN  BATTERY, ., TO  MARCH   BY  A -FLANK. 

,  536.  Being  in  battery,  to  gain  ground  towards  one  df  the 
flanks,  and  to  form  in  battery  again,  without  executing  'an 
intermediate  formation,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Limber  to  the  rear. 

^.^I.eces,  right— rcaissons,  left  vjheel,   (or  Pieces,  left — cais' 

^  sons,  ,7'ight  wheel). 

8.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains, 
and  the  movement  is  executed,  at  once,  by  all  the  batteries, 
as  in  No.  450.  -  r^- 

To  re-form  the  line  into  battery,  the  colonel  commands  : 

,  '^ 

1.  Batteries,  hy  the  left  (or  right), flanh.     2.  March. 
3.  Fire  to  the  rear.     4.  In  battery. 

The  colonel  may  execute  a  flank  march,  and  form  into  bat- 
tery again  on  the  same  lino,  by  limbering  to  the  front,  march- 
ing to  a  flank,  and  then  commanding  :  , 

1.    Column,  hy  the  right  (or  left)  flank.     2.   MarCH. 
3.  Fire  to  the  rear.     4.  In  battery. 

He  may  accomplish  the  same  thing,  by  limbering  to  the 
right,  or  left,  gaining  ground  to  a  flank,  halting,  and  com- 
manding, Action  right,  or  AcTidlsr  left. 

EXECUTION  OF  THE  FIRINGS. 

537.  The  batteries  being  formed. in  the  order  in'battery,  to 
cause  them  to  commence  fl^ng,  the  colonel  commands : 

Commence  firing.  • 

-     This  command  is  repeated  by  th^ajors.  and  captains,  and 
is  ex-ccuted  according  to  instructions  prescribed  on  this  subject, 
The  firing  is  discontinued  by  the  signal : 

Cease  firing. 


EVOLUTIONS   OP  BATTERIES.  229 

TO  FIRE  ADVANCING. 

538.  The  batteries,  being  in  licte,  and  firing,  to  move  them 
by  p^rts  and  in  succession  to  the  front,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Fire  advanHng — hy  division. 

2»  Right  (or  lej't)  division — Advance.  • 

At  the  second  command,  the  major  of  the  right  division  cau- 
ses the  firing' of  his  two  batteries  to  cease,  limbers  them  to  the 
rear  or  front,  and  advances  260  yards  in  the  dirjection  indicated, 
and  there  forms  them  into  battery  again,  when  the  firing  is 
renewed. 

The  left  division  is  moved  forward  260  yards  in  advance  of 
the   right  division,  as  soon  as  that  division  commences  firing. 

The  movement  is  thus  executed,  alternately,  by  the  two 
divisions,  until  the  colonel  Causes  the  firing  to  cease,,  and 
orders  the  line  re-formed.  7<''  ^^      ■•"'■ 

The  firing,  advancing,  by  battery,  is  executed  in  an"  analo- 
gous manner,  the  colonel  commanding : 

1.  Fire  advancing, — &y  hattery. 

2.  First  (ov  fourth')  battery — ADVANCE. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  first  battery 
discontinues  firing,  commences  the  movement,  and  advances 
his  battery  about  130  yards,  and  there  places  it  in  battery. 
The  batteries  continue  the  movement,  each,  successively, 
establishing  itself  180  yards  beyond  the  one  far thes^t  advanced, 
as  soon  as  the  battery  which  properly  precedes  it  has  com- 
menced fiVing. 

Each  major  always  accompanies  the  advanced  battery  of 
his  .division. 

TO  FIRE  IN  RETREAT. 

539.  The  batteries  being  in  lin^e^and  firing,  to  move  them, 
successively,  by  parts,  to -the  rear,  the  colonel  command? : 

1.  Fire  retiring — by  division. 

2.  Right  (or  left  division') — Retire. 

At  the  second  command,  the  major  of  the  right  division 
CJ^uaes  his  two  batteries  to  discontinue  the  fire,  and  %q  be  lim- 


280         EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

bered  to  the  rear,  and  then  moves  his  division  to  the  rear 
about  260  yards,  or  to  the  point  dehignated,  forms  them  into 
battery,  and  recommences  the  firfi. 

The  left  division  is  moved  in  like  manner  about  260  yards 
to  the  rear  of  the  right  division,  as  soon  as* the  latter  com- 
mences firing. 

♦  ^The  movement  is  thus  executed,  alternately,  by  the  two 
divisions,  until  the  colonel  causes  the  tiring  to  cease,  and  re- 
forms the  line.  ^ 

The  firing,  retiring,  bv  battery,  is  executed  in  an  analogous 
m^anner,  the  colonel  commanding  : 

1.  Fire  refirlncjr—by  battery 

2.  First  (ov  fourth)  battery — Retire. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  th^  first  battery 
commences  the  movement,  and  march'^s  about  130  yards  to 
"the  reajj^where  he  forms  in  battery.,"  The  other  ba.tferies  con- 
tinue the  mbVetiientl^  each  establishing  ^tself,  successively, 
about  130  yards  in  rear  of  the  farthest  retired  battery,  as  soon 
as  the  latter  has  commenced  its  firing. 

The  major  oP  eat-h  division  remains  with  that  one  of  his 
batteries  which  is  ueanst  the  enemy. 

,¥  ■*'■    ■  '' 

k 

TO  FIRE  TO  THE  REAR.     '  "* 

w 

♦•640.  The  batteries  bein^jn  line,  and  firing,  to  cause  them 
to  fire  in  the  opposite  dife^tion,  the  colonel  causes  the  firing 
to  cease,  aUd  commands  ; 

1.    Fire  to  the  rear.  ^2.   MARCH.  m 

At  the  first  comm  ind,  ropeat.ed  by  the  majors,  the  captains 
commanii  :  Fire  to  the  rear — limbersmnd  cainsohs,  -pass  your 
pieces^  T^t.  ^ 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors*^d  captain**, 
the  movement  is  executed^t  once  by  all  the  batteries,  as  pre- 
scribed in  1^0.  457. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.  281 


CHANGES  OF  FRONT  IN  BATTERY. 

CHANGE  OF  FRONT  ON  THE  RIGHT  WING,  TO  FIRE  TOTHE 
RIGHT,  LEFT  WING  FORWARD,  AND  THE  REVERSE. 

541.  The  batteries  Joeing  in  line  and  firing,  to  chatige  front, 
perpendicularly,  on  one  oi'  the  wings,  to  fire  in  the  direutioa 
of  the  pivdt  flunkj'  throwing  forward  the  other  wing,  the  colo- 
nel causes  t]^  firing  to  cease,  and  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  rujht  (or  left^ 

2.  Change  front  on  the  Ist  (or  4^A)  battery — left  (or  right) 

wiitg^  forward. 

3.  March.v  ^   . 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  major?!,- the  cap- 
tain of  the  fir>t  battery  commands  :  Fire  to'thf  ri<ih' — change 
front  forward  on  the  right  ^)?>r<?;  the  captains  of  the  other 
batteries  command  :  Limbt:r  T^Qi^JiE  REAR,  and  afterwards: 
Pieces!^  left  about — cai><sons\  forward. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  dnd  captains, 
the  first  battery  executes  the  change  of  front  for tv<ird  on  its 
right  piece,  t^  fire  to  the  right,,  nf^  in  No^458.  The  captains 
of  the  other  batteries,  the  moment  thi,'.ir  pieces  have  executed 
the  about,  command  Forward;  and' each,  after  having  ad- 
vanced "^8  yards,  conducts  his  battery  by  two  half  wheels  to  its 
interval  on  the  new  line,  aad  there  fornis  forward  into  battery. 

Each  battery  commences  firin^.ias  soon  as  it  is  formed 

CHA^GE  Of   front  ON  THE  RIGHT  WING,  TO  FIRE  TO  THE 
LEFT,  LEFT  WING  FORWARD,  AND  THE  REVERSE. 

542.  The  batteri^  being  in  line,  firing,  to  change  front, 
perpenrlicularly,  on  the  right  wing,  fo  tire  to  the  leVt,'t1irow- 
ing  forward  the  left  wing  or  the  reverse,  the  colonel  causes 
the  tiring  to  cea.se,  and  commands : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left  (or  right.) 

2.  Change  front  on   the  lat  (or   4//i)  batter?/ — left  (or  right) 

wing,  forward. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  commaod,  repeated   by  the  majors,  the  cap- 


232        .  EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

tain  of  the  first  battery  commands :  Fire  to  the  left — change 
front  forward  oil  the  right  piece.  The.  other  captains  com- 
mand, Limber  to  the  rear,  and  afterwards  :  Caissons,  pass 
^our  pieces — pieces^  left  about. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains, 
the  first  battery  executes  the  change'  of  font  on  the  right 
piec&j  to  fire  to  the  left,  left  wing  fofioa'rclyViB  in  No.  459. 

Each  of  the  other  captains,  at  the  moment  his  pieces  have 
executed  the  about,  marches  his  battery  6  yards  to  the  front, 
and  then  conducts  it  to  its  interval  on  the  new  line,  by  the 
commands,  given  twice  :  Battery,  right  half  loheel — March, 
and  Forward,  and  then  forms  it  faced  to  the  rear.,  into 
battery.  » 

Each  battery  commences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked. 

CHANGE  OF  FRONT  ON  THE  RIGHT  WING,  TO  FIRE  TO  THE 
RIG HTj -LEFT  WING  TO  THE    REAR,  AND  THE  REVERSE. 

543  The  batteries  being  in  line  and  firing,  to  execute  a 
perpendicular  change  of  front  of  the  line  on  the  right  wing, 
to  fire  to  the  right,  throwing  the  left  wing  to  the  rear,  or  the 
reverse,  the  colonel  causes  the  firing  to  cease,  and  commands: 

1.   Fire  to  the  right  (or  lef.")     2.    Change  front  on  the  \st  (or 

4^A)  battery — left  (or  right)  wing,  to  the  rear. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  cap- 
tain of  the  first  battery  commands.  Fire  to  the  rujht — change 
front  to  the  rear,  on  the  right  piece;  the  other  captains  com- 
mand, Limber  TO  THE  rear,  and  afterwards,  Fieces,  pass 
your  caissons—  caissons,  left  about — trot. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains, 
the  first  battery  executes  the  change  of  front,  to  fire  to  the 
right,  left  wing  to  the  rear,  as  in  No.  461 ;  each  of  the  other 
captains,  at  the  moment  the  caissons  are  in  rear  of  their  pieces, 
commands,  Forward,  and  after  advancing  his  battery  6  yards, 
conducts  it,  by  two  left  halt^heels,  by  the  commands,  given 
twice,  Battery,  left  halfioheel,  -March,  and  Forward,  to  its 
interval  on  the  new  line,  and  there  forms,  it  successively  for- 
ward into  battery,  as  in  No.  432. 

Each  battery  commences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is  formed. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.         283 

CHANGE  OF  FRONT  ON  THE  RIGHT  WING,  TO  FIRE  TO  THE 
LEFT,  LEFT  WING  TO  THE  REAR,  AND  THE  REVERSE. 

544.  The  batteries  being  in  Hne  and  firing,  to  execute  a 
perpendicular  change  of  front  on  the  right  wing,  to  fire  to  the 
left,  throwing  the  left  wing  to  the  rear,  or  the  reverse,  the 
colonel  causes  the  firing  to  cease,  and  conamands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left  (or  right).     2.    Change  front  on  the  \st  (or 
■ith)  hattety—left  (or  right)  wing  to  the  rear. 
\  3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  cap- 
tain of  the  first  battery,  commands.  Fire  to  the  left — change, 
front  tothe  rec^r,  on  tJie  right  piece;  the  other  captains  com- 
mand, Limber.'"  TO  the  rear — Caissons,  in  front  of  your 
pieces — trot.     ""  ^   , 

■  At  the  word<^MARCH,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains, 
the  first- battery  executes  the  change  of  front  on  the  right 
piece,  to  fire  to^he  left,  left  luing  to  the  rear,  as. in  No.  460; 
each  of  the  other  captains,  at  the  moment  his  caissons  are  in 
front  of  their  pieces,  commands  Forward,  and  after  march- 
ing his  battery  24  yards  to  the  front,  conducts  it  by  two  left 
half-wheels,  by  the  commands,  given  twice.  Battery,  left  ha.lf- 
i6'7ief'Z^MARCH— JFoRWARD,  to  Its  interval  on  the  new  line, 
and  then  forms  it  to  the  rear,  into  battery,  according  to  the 
principles  and  by  the  commands  of  No  436. 

Each  battery  commences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked. 

CHANGES  OF  FRONT  ON  A  CENTRAI/  BATTERY.'      * 

545.  Remark. — The.  new  direction  of  fire  being  deter- 
mined, the  wing  designated  as  the  marching  wing,  must  be 
the  one  most  distant  from  tne  object  to  be  fired  at,  viz  : 

To  fire  to  the  right,  the  left  loing  must  be  the  marching 
wing;  it  may  be  throjiFn  either  to  the  fro^t,  or  to  the  rear. 

To  fire  to  the  left,  the  right  wing  must  be  the  marching 
wing;  it  may  be  thrown  either  to  the  front,  or  to  the  rear. 

CHANGE  OF  FRONT  ON  THE  CENTr'e,  TO  FIRE  TO  THE 
RIGHT,  LEFT  WING  FORWARD,  AND  THE  REVERSE. 

546.  The  batteries  being  in  line  and  firing,  to  execute  a 
perpendicular  change  of  front  on  one  of  the  centre  batteries, 


234  EVOLUTIONS   OF   BATTERIES. 

to  fire  to  the  right,  throwing  the  left  win^  forward,  or  the  re- 
verse, the  colonel  discontinues  firing,  and  commands: 

1.   Fire  to  the  rir/ht  (or  Jff')-     -•    Ch^pnge  front  on  the  Sd  (or 

2d)  battery— ^h'ft  (or  righf^  iv in (j  forward. 

3.  March 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  majors,  the  cap- 
tain of  the  third  battery  commands,  Fire  (c^jJie  right — rham/e 
front  forward,  on  the  r>ght  piece;  the  captain  of  the  fourth 
battery  (ni^xt  on  the  left  of  the  pivot  battery),  commands, 
Limber  to  tiik  rear,  and  afterwards,  Pieces,  hft  about — 
caissons,  foj'ica7-d ^.Jt.iie  cap^alns  o£  the  first  and  second  batte- 
ries (on  the  right  of  the  pivot  b'ttter.y),  command,  LiMBEtf 
TO  THE  REAR,  and  afterwards,  CaissonSj  t^  front  of  your 
pieres-^-frot.    ""  '"  ,  '^^ 

At  the  word  March,  reppated  by  the  majors  and  by  the 
captain.:^,  the  pivot  battery  executes  the  change  of  front  to  fire 
to  the  right,  ft-ft  wing  forwakd,  as  in  No.  458 

The  captains  of  the  other  batteries,  the  moment  their  pre- 
paratory com  mands  have  been  execitted,  command,  Fo-tWARD — 

MARCif. 

The  fourth  battery,  after  having  ndvanced  48  yards,  is  con- 
du -te^    by  two   right  h^lf-wheels,   by  t>he   comm;i-nds,   given, 
tmo^i^ Battery,  right  Ka If  wheel — :  VI  ARCH,  and    FokWakd,-.  to 
its  interval  on  the  new  line,  and  is  there  {Kixm^^ forward,  into 
hatte  y,  as  in' No  432. 

^The  secmd  battery  is  whieeled,  at  once,  to  the  right,  by  the 
com n?ain(],  B-^tterp,  right  wheel — Marcu,  to  its  interval  on 
the  new  line,  and  i*^  there  formed  faced  to  the  rear,  into  bat- 
tery, as  irt^No.  436. 

The  first  battery,  after  marching  24  yards  forward,, is  con- 
ducted   by  two  right    half.wheels,    by  the   commands,   given 
^  twice,  Battery,  right  half  whewt — March,  and    FORWARD,  to 
its  interval  on  the  ^ew.line,  and   is  theffe'  formed  faced  to  the 
rear,  into  battery,  as  in  No.  43.6. 

Each  battery  commences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is  formed. 

CHANGE  OF    FRONT  ON    THE  CENTRE.  TO   FIRE  TO   THE 
HipilT,  LI<:FT   wing  to  the  REAH,  AND  THK  REVBUSE 

547.  The  batteries  being  in  line  and  firing,  to  execute  a 
perpendicular  change  of  front  on  a  centre   battery,  to  fire  to 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES.  235. 

the  right,  throwing  the  left  wing  to  th«  rear,  or  the  reverse, 
the  colonel  discontinues  firing,  and  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to ^leriyht  (ov  left). 

2.  Chamje  front  on   the  "id   (^  2d)   hatteyy—left  (or  right) 

win(j  to  the  rear. 

3.  March. 


At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  mnj  irs,  the  cap- 
tain of  the  pivot  battery  coiumjinds.  Fire  to  the  right — thangc 
front  to  the  7-ear,  on  the  right  piece  ;' the  captain  of  the  frttirlh 

•  battery  (next  on  the  left  of  th§  pivot  battery)  cotun)ands, 
I4IMBER  TO  THhi  REAR — Pieers,  puss  i/ou,r;cai>iyons  -cdissouf;, 
leftab'Utj  tjie  captaiiis  of  the  first  and  "second  batteries  (00 
the  right  of  the  pivot  batter^)  comooand,  Limber  to  the 
REAR — (Jaissoiis,  pans  j/our  pieces — pieccH,  left  about. 

At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  majors  and  captains, 
the  pivot  battery  executes  the  chtnigc  of  front,  to  Jire  to  the 
right,  left  wing  to  tfie  rear^  as  in  No.  461.  _    ^    ' 

The  captains  of  the  other  batteries,  as  soon  as  their  com- 
mands have  been  executed,  command,  PoRWAUB,  or  Forwaj-S- — 
March  ^..« 

The  fourth  battery,  after  marching  6  yards  forward,  is  con- 
ducted, by  two  left,  half-wheels,  by  the  commands,  given 
twice.  Batter t/,  hft  ha/f  w he el-^MARCU,  and  Forwahd,  to 
ity  interval  on  the  new  line,  and  is  there  formed  forward,  into 
battery,  as  in  No.  432. 

•  The  second  and  first  batteries,  after  mashing  6  yards  to 
the  fr'ont,  are  Qonducied,  by  two  left  half  \yheels,  by  ihe  com- 
mands, given  twice,  Batter  ty,  left  half  wheel — Mahoh,  and 
Forward,  to  their,  intervals  on  the  new  line^and  are  there 
formed  faced  to  the  rear,  into  battery,  as  in  No.  435  or  436. 

Each  battery^otuLuences  filing  as  soon  as  it  is  formed." 

TO  PA8§  A  DEFILE  IN  FRONT. 

548  The  battery  opposite  to'  the  defile  pas.«ies  through  it 
first,  and  is  formed  "in  such  a  position  as  will  not  interfere 
wUh  the  movement  of  our  troops,  or  with  the  pas'^age  of  the 
other  batteries,  and  as  will  be!?t  enable  it  to  protect  thedi  in 
their  passage. 

If  the  defile  covers  one  of  the  central  batteries,  that  bat- 


236  EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

• 
tery  passes  first,  and   it  is  followed  by  the  other  central  bat- 
tery, then  the  battery  of  the  right. wing,  and  finally,  the  bat- 
tery of  the  left  wing,  unless  circumstances  render  it  advisable 
'to  pass  that  battery  before  the  battery  of  the  right  wing. 

When  the  defile  covers  one  of  the  wing  batteries,  that  bat- 
tery passes  first,  and  it  is  followed  by  the  other  batteries,  suc- 
cessively ;   the  battery  u.ext  to  it  following  first. 

The  battery  which  passes  first  througpi^the  defile,  will  re- 
commence firing  as  soon  as  it  can  do  so;  the  succeeding  bat- 
tery will  not  commence  its  movement  until  that  battery  has 
resumed  its  firing.  This  rule  will  be  observed  by  all  the 
other  batteries;  by  this  means  the  firing  is  kept  up  by  all  the 
batteries  except  the?pne  engaged  in  passing  the  defile. 

Batteries  should  not  be  estabjished  immetliate^y  in -front  of 
the  entrance  of  a  defile,  but  rather  on  one  side  of  it.  If  es- 
tablished in  front,  the  retreat  of  the  troops,  or  of  those  thrown 
back,  will  mask  its  fire,  and  shots  fired  by  the  enemy's  artil- 
lery at  the  batteries,  will  enfilade  the  defile. 

TO  PASS  A  DEFILE  IN  REAR. 

549.  The  battery  farthest  frdfti"^the  defile  passes  first.  If 
the  defile  be  in  rear  of  the  centre,  the  right  battery  will  pass 
it  first,  unless  circumstances  render  it  advisable  to  pass  the 
battery  of  the  left  wing  in  preference,  then  the  battery  of  the^ 
other  wing,  and  afterwards,  the  central  batteries,  ending  by 
that  battery  which  best  covers  the  defile ;  the  latter  will  con- 
tinue firing  until  the  three  others  have  resumed  firing. 

If  the  defile  be  in  rear  of  one  of  the  wings,  the  battery _of 
the  other  wing  passes  first,  ^nd  'the  •.others  follow,  in  order, 
and  successively.  »  \  -      i  r^v 

No  battery  will  commence  its  raotement,  i:yitil  the  battery 
which  precedes  it  in  the  passage  has  resumed  its  firing;  by 
this  means,  as  in  the  passage  of  a  defile  in  front,  the  firing  of 
only  one  battery  is  interrupted  by  the' passage. 

The  movements  will  ordinarily  be  made  in  column,  by  sec- 
tion, the  columns  being  formed  on  one  of  the  wings  of  each 
battery,  except  in  the  case  of  a  battery  having  to  pass  a  defile 
in  front  of  it,  when 'it  will  be  better  to  form  double  column 
on  the  centre  section.  If  the  defile  be  so  narrow  as  to  render 
it  advisable  to  pass  it  in  column  by  piece,  the  sections  will  be 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  BATTERIES.  23T 

re-formed,  in  each  batlery,  ag  soon  as  the  ground  will  permit. 
Each  captaib  conducts  and  reforms  his  battery,  accordine;  to 
the  principles  and  by  the  commands  prescribed  in  Nos.  462 
and  468. 

The  colonel,  according  to  circumstances  in  each  case,  gives 
the  following  commands  :- 

By  the  %d  (or  2dy>hatteryy  to  the  front — Pass  the  defile. 
Or :  r.j5y  the  right  (or  left)  wing,  to  the  front — Pass  the 

DEFILE. 

Or :  By  the  right  (or  left')  loing,  in  rear  of  the  centre — Pass 

TijtE    DEFILE. 
Or :  By  the  right  (or  left)  wing,  in  rear  of  the  left  (or  right) 
wing — Pass  the  defile. 


\-c  ■■ 


ARRANGEMENTS  FOR  PARADES  AND  REVIEWS. 

FOR  PARADES. 

550.  The  batteries  are  arranged  in"  line  of  battle,  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  School  of  the  Battery. 

Th.Q  colonel  is  28  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  line, 
having  behind  him  the  adjutant  and"  the  chief  bugler. 

The  majors  are  14  yards  in  front  of  the  centres  of  their 
divisions,  each  having  his  asnstant  adjutant  behind  him. 

The  buglers  are  on  the  right  of  the  line,  5  yards  to  the 
right  of,  and  in  line  with,  the  leaders  of  the  front  rank  of 
carriages. 

FOR  REVIEWS. 

551.  Each  battery  is  arranged  a§  prescribed  in  the  School 
OF  THE  Battery,  a(^ordinpi;  as  they  are  to  be  marched  in 
review,  whether  by  battery,  by  half-battery,  or  by  section. 

The  colonel  marches  at  the  bead  of  the  column,  having  the 
adjutant  behind  him. 

The  major  of  the  first  division  marches  at  the  head  of  his 
division,  5  yards  in  front  of  the  captain  of  the  fiVst  battery, 
and  5  yards  in  rear  of  the  adjutant. 


238  EVOLUTIONS  OF  BATTERIES. 

The  major  of  the  second  division  marches  at  the  head  of 
his, division.  '  '  -"  . 

Each  asinrstantaffjutnntmdirQheBm  Hne  with  the  front  ranlj 
of  his  division,  and  on  the  reverse  side  oP  the  <ruide. 

The  rhief  huijhr  marches  #ith  the  buglers,  6- yards  in' ad- 
vance of  the  colonel. 


!►- 


APPENDIX 


POINTING  AND  RANGES. 

Ta  point  a  piece,  is  to  place  it  in  such  a  position  that  the 
shot  may  reach  the  object  it  is  intended  to  strike.  To  do  thivS, 
the  axis  of  the  trunnions,  being  horizontal,  the  lin.e  of  metal,  , 
called  also  the  natural  line  of  sight,  must  be  so  directed  as  to 
pass  through  the  object,  and  then  the  elevation  given  to  the 
piece  to  throw  the  shot  the  required  distance.  The  dirertion 
is  given  from  the  trail,  and  the  elevation  from  the  breech  ;  the 
trail  being  moved  to  the  right  and  left,  by  a  handspike,  and 
the  breech  raised  or  depressed  by  an  elevating  screw. 

The  axis  of  the  piece  coincides  with  that  of  the  cylinder  of 
the  bore. 

The  line  of-  sight  in  pointing  is  the  lina  of  direction  from 
the  eye  to  the  object.  It  lies  in  a  vertical  plane,  passing 
through,  or  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece. 

The  angle  of  sight  is  the  angle  which  the  line  of  sight 
makes  with  the  axis  of  the  piece.    -^ 

The  natural  line  of  sight  is  the  straight  line  passing 
through  the  highest  points  of  the  base  ring,  the  swell  of  the 
muzzle,  muzzle  sight,,  or  muzzle  band. 

The  natural  angle  hf  sight  is  the  "^ngle  which  the  natural 
line  of  sight  makes  with  the  axis  of  the  piece.  ^ 

By  range  is  commonly  meant  the  distance  between  the  piece 
and  the  object  which  the  ball  is  intended  to  strike;  or,  the 
first  graze  of  the  ball  upon  the  horizontal  plane  on  which  the 
carriage  stands  Point  bhmk  range  is  the  distance  between 
the  piece  and  the  point  blank.  Extreme  range^  is  the  distance 
between  the  piece  and  the  point  where  the  bail  finally  rests. 

Theortj  i>f  pointhig. — The  jyoiut-hlaiiA'  is  the  second  point 
of  intersectiuQ  of  the  traj(iotory  or  curve 'described  b^  the  pro- 


240  APPENDIX. 

jcctile  in  its  flight  with  the  line  of  sight.  As  the  angle  of 
siojht  is  increased,  the  projectile  is  thrown  farther  above  the 
line  of  sight,  and  the  trajectory  and  point-blank  distance  be- 
comes more  extended. 

The.  point-blank  range  increases  with  the  velocity^  the  di- 
ameter^ and  the  density  of  the  ball. 

A  piece  is  said  to  be  aimed  'point-hlanh  when  the  line  of 
metal,  which  is  the  natural  line  of  sight,  is  directed  upon  the 
object.  This  must  be  the  case  when  the  object  is  at  point- 
blank  distance.  When  at  k  greater  distance,  the  pendulum 
hausse,  or  the  tangent  scale,  is  raised  upon  the  breech  until 
the  sight  is  at  the  height  which  the  degree  of  elevation  for  the 
distance  may  require.  An  artificial  line  of  sight,  and  an 
artificial  point-blank  are  thus  obtained,  and  the  piece  is  aimed 
as  before. 

Pendulum  hausse. — The  instrument  at  present  in  most 
general  use  in  pointing  field  guns  at  objects  beyond  the  natural 
point  blank,  is  called  a  pendulum  hausse^  of  which  the  com- 
ponent parts  are  denominated  the  scale,  the  slider,  and  the 
seat.  The  scale  is  made  of  sheet  brass ;  at  the  lower  end  is 
a  brass  bulb  filled  with  lead.  The  slider  is  of  thin  brass,  and 
is  retained  in  any  desirable  position  an  the  scale  by  means  of 
a  brass  set  screw  with  a  milled  head.  The  scale  is  passed 
through  a  slit  in  a  piece  of  steel,  with  which  it  is  connected 
by  a  brass  screw,  forming  a  pivot  on  which  the  scale  can 
vibrate  laterally;  this  slit  is  made  long  enough  to  allow  the 
scale  to  take  a  vertical  position  in  any  ordinary  cases  of  ine- 
quality of  the  ground  on  which  the  wheels  of  the  carriage 
may  rest.  The  ends  of  this  piece  of  steel  form  two  journals, 
by  means  of  which  the  scale  is  supported  on  the  seat  attached 
to  the  piece.  The  seat  is  of  iron,  and  is^fastened  to  the  base  of 
,the  breech  by  three  screws,  in  such  a  manner  that  the  centres 
of  the  two  journal  notches  shall  \)q  at  a  distance  ffom  the  axis 
equal  to  the  radius  of  the  base  ring. 

A  muzzle  sight  of  iron  is  screwed  into  the  swell  of  the 
muzzle  of  guns,  or  into  the  middle  of  the  muzzle  ring  of 
howitzers.  The  height  of  the  sight  is  equal  to  the  dispart  of 
the  piece,  so  that  a  line  from  the  top  of  the  muzzle  sight  to 
the  pivot  of  the  scale  is  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece. 
Consequently,  the  vertical  plane  of  sight  passing  through  the 
centre  line  of  the  scale  and  the  top  of  the  muzzle  sight  will 


APPENDIX.  241 

be  also  parallel  to  the  axis  in  any  position  of  the  piece;  the 
scale  will  therefore  always- indicate  the  angle  which  the  line  of 
sight  makes  with  the  axis. 

The  haussG,  when  not  in  use,  is  carried  by  the  gunner  in  a 
leather  haversack,  suspended  by  a  shoulder  strap. 

ON  POINTING. 

As  it  is  impossible  to  point  a  piece  correctly  without  know- 
ing the  distance  of  the  object,  artillerymen  should  be  fre- 
quently practised  in  estijiiating  distances  by  the  eye  alone, 
and  rectifying  the  estimate  afterward,  either  by  pacing  the 
distance,  or  by  actual  measurement  with  a  tapeline  or  chain, 
until  they  acquire  the  habit  of  estimating  them  correctly. 

JShelk  are  intended  to  burst  in  the  object  aimed  at;  spheri- 
cal case  sJiots  are  intended  to  burst  from  fifty  to  seventy-five 
yards  short  of  it. 

Shell  or  spherical  case  firing,  for  long  ranges,  is  less  accu- 
rate than  that  of  solid  shot. 

At  high  elevations,  a  solid  shot  will  range  farther  than  a 
shell  or  spherical  case  shot,  of  .the  same  diameter,  fired  with 
an  equal  charge.  But  at  low  elevations,  the  shell  or  spheri- 
cal case  will  have  a  greater  initial  velocity,  and  a  longer  range. 
If,  however,  the  charges  are  proportioned  to  the  weights  of 
the  projectiles,  the  solid  shot  will,  in  all  \!ases,  have  the 
longest  range. 

The  velocity  or  range  of  a  shot  is  not  affected  in  any  appre- 
ciable degree  by  checking  the  recoil  of  the  carriage,  by  using 
a  tight  wad,  or  by  difiereut  degrees  of  ramming. 

The  principal  causes  which  disturb  the  true  flight  of  the 
^projectiles  are  as  follows  : 

1st.  If  the  wheels  of  the  carriage  are  not  upon  the  same., 
horizontal  plane,' the  projectile  will  deviate  toward  the  lowest 
side  of  the  carriage. 

.  2d.  If  the  direction  of  the  wind  is  across  the  line  of  fire, 
deviations  in  the  flight  of  the  projectile  will  be  occasioned, 
and  in  proportion  to  the  strength  of  the  wind,- the  angle  its 
direction  makes  with  the  line  of  fire,  and  the.  velocity  of  the 
projectile. 

od.  If  the   centre  of  gravity  of  the  projectile  be  not  coin- 
cidcat  with  tho  centre  of  figure,  the  projectile  will  deviate 
11 


242  APPENDIX. 

towards  the  heaviest  side,  that  is,  in  the  same  direction  that, 
the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  projectile,  while  resting  in  the 
piece,  lies  with  regard  to  the  centre  of  figure.  Therefore,  if  a 
shot  130  placed  in  the  pi«ce  so  that  its  centre  of  gravity  is  to 
the  r)(/ht  of  the  centre  of  the  ball,  the  shot  will  deviate  to  the 
rifjlit^  and  vice  versa.  If  the  centre  of  gravity  be  above  the 
centre  of  figure,  range  will  be  increased;  if  below,  it  will  be 
diminished. 

Solid  shot  should  be  used  from  350  yards  upwards ;  the  use 
of  canister  should  begin  at  350  yards,  and  the  rapidity  of  the 
fire  increases  as  the  range  diminishes.  In  emergencies,  double 
charges  of  canister  may  be  used  at  150  or  160  yards,  with  a 
single  cartridge. 

Spherical  case  should  not,  as  a  general  rule,  be  used  for  a 
less  range  than  500  yards ;  .and  neither  spherical  case  nor 
shells  should  be  fired  at  rapidly  advancing  bodies,  as,  for  in- 
stance, cavalry  charging. 

The  fire  of  spherical  case  and  of  shells  on  bodies  of  cavalry 
in  line  or  column,  and  in  position,  is  often  very.etfective.  To 
the  destructive  effects  of  the  projectiles  are  added  the  confusion 
and  disorder  occasioned  amongst  the  horses  by  the  noise  of 
their  explosion ;  but  neither  shells  nor  spherical  case  should 
be  fired  so  rapidly  as  solid  shot. 

In  case  of  necpssity,  solid  shot  may  be  fired  from  howitzers. 


APPENDIX. 


24S 


APPROXIMATE  RANGES  OF  FIELD  GUNS  AND  HOWITZERS. 

The  range  of  a  shot  Dr  a  shell  in  this  table  is  the  distance 
froui  the  piece  to  the  point  at  which  the  first  graze  of  the  ball 
is  made  on  hoiiz;ontal  ground,  the  piece  being  mounted  on  its 
appropriate  field  carriage. 

The  range  of  a  spherical  case  shot  is  the  distance  at  which 
the  shot  bursts  near  the  ground  in  the  time  given,  thus  show- 
ing the  elevation,  and  the  length  of  the  fuze  required  for 
certain  distances. 

[  Note. — Thft  range  of  3  inch  Rifle  Guns,  with  7,  or  11,  or  13  grooves,  does  not 
vary  niaterialJv  from  that  of  a  10-Pdr.  Parrolt  Rifle  up  to  2,300  yards — 0°^ giving 
2,250  yards  by  tiie  3  inch  Ritle.J-  , 


Descript'n  of  Piece. 

Charge. 

Projectile. 

Elevation. 

pange. 

Remarks. 

Lbs. ' 

o 

/ 

Yard.". 

C-Pdr.  Gux.  .    .    . 

l.-:5 

Shot. 

0 

318 

« 

a 

1 

2 

3 
i 

(-.74 

S»-)7 

1,1 3S 

1.256 

" 

a 

5 

1,523 

1.25 

Sph.  ca.  shot. 

1 

600 

■  Time  2     seconds. 

" 

1 

45 

700 

"     2%       '• 

u 

2 

800 

((       3              a 

iC 

2 

45 

900 

"     5%       « 

i( 

3 

1,000  . 

"      3%        " 

' 

i 

15- 

1,100 
1,200 

"4           " 
"     5           " 

LiaST  12-PDR.  Gun, 

2.5 

Shot.    , 

0 

325 

Or 

n 

1 

()20 

12-Pdr.  Na]?oleon,' 

(< 

Hi 

(< 

o 

w 

3 

4 
5 

875 
1,200 
1,320 
l.CSO 

2.5  . 

Sph.  ca.  sliot. 

0 

30 

300 

Timel     second. 

(C 

1 

676 

"     J^M      " 

<( 

1 

30 

633 

"     21^       " 

« 

2 

730 

«     3          « 

« 

3 

960 

((     4-         <( 

il 

3 

30. 

1,080 

".    4%       " 

ii 

3 

45 

1,135 

«     5           " 

o 

Shell. 

0 

300 

Time  ?:( second. 

"     IK       " 
"     1%      " 

"     2^t       " 

>( 

0 

30 

425 

(( 

1 

616 

<< 

1 

30 

700 

(( 

2 

-     787 

C( 

2 

30 

935 

"      3j..i       « 

m 

(< 

3 

.!  1 

1.080 
1,3U0 

i<      .1            a 

244 


A^i'ENDIi:. 


Approximate  Ranges  of  Fiel'd  Guns  and  Hoioitzers — Continlied. 


Descript'n  of  Piece. 

Charge 

Projectile. 

Elevation. 

■Range. 

Kemai'ks. 

Lbs. 

o 

/ 

12-Pdr.  Gun,      .    . 

2.5 

-Shot. 

0 

1 

347 
662 

a 

1, 
■) 

4 

30 

785- 
90U 
1,269 
1,455 

'•' 

5 

1,603 

2.5 

Sph.  ca.  shot. 

1 

000 

Timel^'secends 

'• 

1 

45" 

,700 

"     214       "• 

a 

2 

800 

u      5;,^        « 

a 

2 

15 

900 

"3          " 

(I 

2 
3 

30 

1,000 
1,100 

il     4           (i 

• 

-  .^ 

" 

3 

■30 

1,200 

"     4X       " 

12-Pde,,  Howitzer, 

1. 

Shell. 

.   0 

■  195 

Time  l'.<  second. 

- 

i( 

1 

539 

a 

2 

640" 

a 

3 

847 

a 

4 

975 

a 

5 

1,072 

"     4i|       'i 

1.25 

Sph.  ca.  shot. 

2 

15 

485 

Time  2  seconds. 

" 

3 

15 

715 

'•    -3       " 

i( 

3 

45 

1,050 

«     4    ■-   «f 

24:-Pdr.  Howitzer, 

2.5 

Shell. 

0 

295 

Time  -K  second. 

" 

1 

516 

a 

,  2 

793 

a 

3 

"976 

"      3           -" 

a 

4 

1,272 

il     4            (( 

il 

5 

1,322 

''     4>^       " 

2.5 

Sph.  ca.  shot. 

1 
2 

30 

600 
700 

Time  2    seconds. 
'•     23^      »' 

il 

2 

30      ' 

800 

"     3U      " 

a 

.   2 

45 

900 

"  a 

3 

15 

1,000 

<<      -4,   '         a 

k( 

3 

45 

1,100 

■"       41^         " 

"     4^       " 

il 

3 

50 

1,200 

IO-Pdr.  ParrOtt 

1. 

Shell. 

0 

,  300 

Time    H  second. 

Rifle  Gun, 

(i 

1 

450 

»     .  1        « 

(I 

2 

900 

t£           2             " 

il 

il 

3 
4 

1,300 
1.600 

"       3        " 

il 

4 

30 

1,760 

"     5  "    -i 

a 

5 

1,950 

"       6        •" 

<; 

5 

30 

2,200 

«       6^/^     " 

il 

6 

2,300 

il       'J  "      11 

a 

7 

2,600 

"    iojI    " 

,   .  a 

.10 

3,000- 

il 

12 

3.600 

«     12l<     " 

(( 

15 

4,100 

"     16.        " 

il 

20 

5J)00 

iPoo 

"     19^4;     " 
«     23K     " 

« 

a 

25 

il 

30 

5,900 

''     27  g     " 

<< 

86 

6.200 

"     31i|     « 

APPENDIX.  245 

To  determine  the  lieic/ht  of  the  hreecli-sicfht  for  different 
angles  of  elevation  :—-Yivst  measure  carefully  the  cir<3unifer- 
ence  of  the  swell  of  the  muzzle  and  divide  it  by  3.1416. 
The  quotient  will  be  the  exterior  diameter  of  the.  muzzle.  In 
the  same  manner  determine  the  diameter  of  the  base  ring. 
Salf  the  difference  between  these  diameters  will  be  the  dis- 
part of  the  gun.  This  determines  the  height  of  the  muzzle- 
sight  required  to  make  the  line  of  sight  parallel  to  the  axis 
of  the  bore.  Now  measure  carefully  the  exact  length  of  the 
gun  from  the  swell  of  the  muzzle,  or  centre  of  the  muzzle- 
sight,  to  the  rear  of  the  base  ring.  .  This  distance  multiplied 
by  natural  tangent  of  1°,  2°,  3°,  etc.,  (taken  from  the  table 
of  natural  tangents,  Ord.  Manual,)  after  deducting  the  dis- 
part,  will  give  the  height  of  the  breech  sight,  necessary  to 
elevate  the  gun  1°,  2°,  3°,  &c.  When  there  is  no  Qmizzle- 
sight,  xhQ  dispart  must  be  subtracted  from  the  height  of  the 
hrcech-sight  thus  calculated. 

MANAGEMENT  OF  A^BATTEKY. 

.     "      ARTILLERY   HORSES. 

Artillery  officers  should  make  themselves  thoroughly  ac- 
quainted with  the  natural  history  of  the  horse,  and  the  effects 
of  different  modes  of  treatment,  chapges  of  diet,  etc.,  on  his 
system,  and  powers  of  endurance.  In  the  field  the  horse  is 
subjected  to  so  many  privations,  exposures,  changes  of 'food 
and  water, .etc.,  that  an  officer  deficient  in  Fuch  knowledge 
will  either  have  his  battery  constantly  lacking,  in  efficiency 
and  reliability,  or  else  make  large  expenditures  necessary  to 
provide  remounts. 

Artillery  horses  are  required  for  quick  draught ;  they  should 
move  the  carriage,  ordinarily,  rather  by  the  weight  thrown 
into  the  collar  than  by  muscular  exertion. 

Description. — Age  at  date  of  purchase,  5  to  7  years;  height, 
15  hands  3  inches,  allowing  a  variation  of  1  in-ch  ;  they  should 
be  well  broken  to  harness,  free  from  vice,  perfectly  ^ound  in 
every  respect,  full  chested,  shoulders  sufficiently  broad  to  sup- 
port the  collar,' but  not  too  heavy;  full  barrelled,  with  broad' 
deep  loins ;  short-caupled,  with  solid  hind  quarters ;  and  their 


24G  APPENDIX. 

weight  as  great  as  is  consistent  with  activity,  say  from  1100 
to  1200  pounds  when  in  good  condition.  In  purchasing,  spe- 
cial attention  should  be_ directed  to  the  feet,  to  see  that  they 
are  perfectly  sound,  and  in  good  order,  with  hoofs  rather  large, 
and  that  the  horse  submits  willingly  to  bo  shod. 

Long-legged,  loose-jointed,  long- bodied,  or  narrow-chested 
horses  should  be  at  once  rejected,  as  also  those  which  are 
restive,  vicious,  or  too  free  in  harness. 

GENERAL  RULES  FOR  STABLE  MANAGEMENT. 

The  following  rules  having  been  tested  by  experience,  and 
found  to  be  convenient,  are  recommended  : 

1.  The  stable  guard  will  consist  of  not  less  than  three  men 
"and  a. non-commissioned  officer.     This  guard  is  responsible  for 

the  police  and  order  of  the  stables  betweerT  stable  calls. 

2.  The  stable  guard  and  the  stable  duty  aire  under  the'di- 
rection  of  the  battery  officer  of  the  day,  the  first  sergeant, 
and  the  stable  sergeant. 

8.  The  men  habitually  groom  their  own  horses,  superin- 
tended by  their  chiefs  of  pieces.  Supernumerary  horses  may 
be  groomed  by  recruits,  carefully  supervised-  and  instructed.' 
The  horses  of  chiefs  of  pieces  are  groomed  by  men  of  their 
commands. 

4.  The  horses  should  be  stalled  according  to  their  positions 
in  battery,  the  teams  nearest  the  doors  to  be  led  out  first. 
Their  places  at  the  picket  rope  will  be  in  accordance  with  the 
^ame.rule. 

5.  The  grooming  should  always  be  at  the  picket  rope,  un- 
less in  stormy  weather;  if- done  in  the  stalls,  the  wisp  and 
brush  alone  should  be  used. 

6.  To  strike  a  horse  whilst  at  the  picket  rope,  or  in  the 
stall,  is  apt  to  make  him  vicious;  it  is  strictly  prohibited. 

7.-  Horses  require  gentle  treatment.  Docile,  but  bold 
horses,  may  be  excited  to  retaliate  upon  those  who  abuse 
them,  whereds  persistent  kindness  has  often  reclaimed  vicious 
ones. 

8.  Each  horse  of  a  team  should  be  groomed,  about  twenty 
minutes,  then  at  the  signal  ''Lead  up,"  the  chief  of  each 
piece  inspects  his  horses  successively,  exacting  that  the  rules 
laid  down  under  the  head  of  "Grooming"  shall  have  been 


APPENDIX.  247 

strictly  complied  with;  if  not,  the  horse  is  to  be  taken  back 
to  the  picket. 

9  At  mornino^  stable  call,  the  stable  guard,  assisted  by 
supernumerary  men,  police  the  stables,  take  up  the  bedding, 
(separating  that  which  is  soiled  for  the  manure  heap,)  the  re- 
mainder to  be  put  on  racks  to  dry.  The  stalls  are  then 
swept  out  and  the  manners  cleaned. 

10.  The  grain  may  be  put  in  each  bin  by  the  stable  guard. 
A  box  on  wheels  for  the  grain  is  moved  in  front  of  the  stall, 
and  two  allowance  measures  enables  the  distribution  to  be 
made  with  rapidity.  The  hay  is  fed  by  the  stable  men  after 
their  horses  are  led  in,  receiving  it  from  the  stable  sergeant. 
The  grain  must  be  fanned  and  the  hay  shaken  before  being 
given  to  the  horses. 

11.  At  the  afternoon  stable  call,  when  the  horses  have  left 
the  stalls,  the  stable  is  policed  and  the  bedding  laid  down, 
fresh  clean  straw  being  spread  on  the  top  of  the  old.  Care 
should  be  taken  that  the  bed  be  not  in  ridges,  but, soft  and 
even,  the  thickest  part  towards  the  head  of  the  stall.  The 
feeding  to  be  the  same  as  in  the  morning. 

12.  The  watering  is  usually  done  from  troughs;  but  after 
severe  exercise  and  at  noon  in  hot  weather,  buckets  are  pre- 
ferable, it  then  being  necessary  to  limit  the  horse's  allowance. 
The  hor.=^es  are  to  be  led  at  a  walk  to  and  from  water. 

13.  Should  it  be  found  that  a  horse  has  neglected  his  feed, 
or  refuses  his  water,  it  will  at  once  be  reported,  to  the  stable 
sergeant. 

14.  A  non-commissioned  officer  of  the  stable  guard  should 
inspect  the  stable  at  least  once  in  every  two  hours  during  the 
night;  any  appearance  of  sickness  in  a  horse  should  be  im- 
mediately made  known  to  the  stable  sergeant. 

15.  The  sickness  of  a  horse,  and  the  treatment  he  receives, 
should  constitute  part  of, the  report  of  the  battery  officer  of 
the  day,  to  be  recorded  in  a  book  kept  for  the  purpose. 

GROOMING. 

The  wisp,  the  curry-comb,  j^nd  the  brush,  are  the  imple- 
ments used. 

1.  The  wisp  is  to  be  used  when  the  horses  come  in  warm 
from  exercise,  and  the  horse  is  rubbed  until  dry,  from  his 
hind  quarters  against  the  hair  up  to  his  head. 


248  APPENDIX. 

2.  The  CTirry-eomb  is  used  when  the  horse  is  dry,  begin-' 
BiPg  always  on  the  near  side  afc  his  hind  quarters,  its^ippli- 
cation  being  in  proportion  to  the  length  and  foulness  of  the 
coat;  that  is,  if  the  coat  is  close,  long,  full  of  dust,  and  very 
filthy,  use  it  freely  to  loosen  the  coat  or  the  sweat  that  is 
dried  and  fast  on  the  skin  and  roots  of  the  hair,  appearing 
like  a  white  saltish  dust.  ,*. 

In  the  spring  of  the  year,  the  curry-comb  should,  whilst 
the  coat  is  changing,  be  used  judiciously,  as  a  removal  of  the 
hair  too  rapidly,  exposes  the  horses  to  the  sudden  changes  of 
temperature.  Proceeding  from  the  hind  quarters,  descend  to 
the  quarters,  minding  not  to  scratch  or  injure  the  horse.  The 
legs  below  the  houghs  are  not  to  be  touched  with  the  curry- 
comb unless  the  dirt  is  matted  on  the  joi^its  of  tho  hoof, 
which  may  be  carefully  loosened  with  the  curry-comb.  The 
comb  works  unpleasantly  on  that  part,  and.  must  be  handled 
lightly. 

Next  proceed  to  the  fetlocks,  back,  loins,  flank,  belly,  shoul- 
ders, arms,  chest,  and  neck,  omitting  no  part  that  the  curry-comb 
can  be  conveniently  applied  to;  but  tender  places,  thin  of 
hair,  or  "I'ubbed  by-  the  harness,  need  not  be  touched ;  they 
should  be  rubbed  with  the  wisp.  Observe,  therefore,  to  begin 
with  the  curry-comb  on  the  near  hind  quarter  and' finish  with 
the  head,  keeping  the. comb  in  the  right  hand.  After  curry- 
ing the  near  side,  proceed  with  the  off  side ;  here  use  the  left 
hand.  This  done,  wisp  off  those  places  not  touched  by  the 
curry-comb;  then  use  the  brush.  Begin  first  at  the  head  on 
the  near  side,  taking  the  brush  in  the  left  hand  and  the  curry- 
comb iri  the  right;  brushing  more  particularly  those'  parts 
where  the  dust  is  more  apt  to  lodge,  proceed  down  the  neck. 
The  scurf  of  the  neck  next  the  head,  and  the  scrag  next  the 
main,  are  dif&cult  to  clean.  Apply  the  brush  backward  and 
forward  on  these  places,  finishing  by  leaving  the  coat  smooth. 
Clean  the  brush  from  dust  after  every  two  or  three  strokes, 
with  the  curry-comb.  Proceed  in  the  reverse  order  used  by 
the  curi^y-comb,  taking  in  those  parts  not  touched  by  the 
curry-comb,  viz:  under  the  chests- between  the  fore-lQgs,  the 
inside  of  the  elbow  or  arm,  and  the  parts  about  the  fetlocks. 
The  skin  under  the  flank  and  between  the  hind  quarters  must 
be  free  from  dust,  soft,  and  so  clean  as  not  to  soil  a  white 
cloth. 


APPENDIX.  249 

The  curry-comb  begins  at  the  hind  quarters,  and  ends  at 
the  head. 

The  brush  begins  at  the  head,  an(37takinp;  in  all  parts  of 
the  horse,  ends  at  the  quarters. 

A  cloth  should  then  be  used  to  wipe  out  the  eyes,  nostrils, 
and  the  parts  under  the  flanks. 

INSTRUCTION  FOR  THE  PRESERVATION  OF   HARNESS. 

The  preservation  of  harness  requires  two  kinds  of  atten- 
tion:  one,  that  of  neatness,  which  must  be  continual;  the 
other,  strictly  that  of  preservation,  which  consists  in  oiling 
the  leather  parts  two  or  three  times  a  year,  and  oftener  if  ex- 
posed to  constant  field  service,  and  the  weather. 

To  keep  the  harness  neat,  the  men  should  wipe  and  care- 
fully clean  it  whenever  it  has  been  used. 

Collars,  which  it  is  important  to  keep  soft  and  supple,  must 
be  carefully  attended  to.  Airing,  and  beating  with  a  rope  or 
small  mallet,  the  stuffing  of  the  collars  and  saddles,  are  im- 
portant duties,  which  must  not  be  omitted  on  continued 
marches. 

In  giving  the  second  kind  of  attention  to  harness,  that  of 
preservation,  the  oiling  should  be  done  ofr.ener  in  summer  than 
in  winter.  The  best  oil  for  this  use  is  neat's-foot  oil,  the 
unctuous  property  of  which  is  particularly  suitable  for-  pre- 
serving the  suppleness  of  the  leather.  This  oil  contains  no 
siccative  part,  and  may  be  used  unpurified.  As  a  maximum, 
four  pints  and  a  hilf  will  answer,  each  tioie,  for  oiling  the 
harness  of  a  team  of  six  horses. 

Before  Gsing  the  oil,  every  part  of  the  leather  must  be 
perfectly  cleaned  and  washed,  without,  however,  allowing,  the 
water  to  penetrate  deeply  into  the  leather.  While  still  damp, 
blacken  those  places  which  have  become  red,  with  hatter/s 
dye,  ink-ball,  or  acetate  of  iron;  and  when  the  leather  be- 
gins to  dry,  oil  it,  spreading  the  oil  on  with  a  sponge,  or  thick 
and  soft  brush.  When  ncat's-foot  oil  cannot  be  obtained, 
fish  oil,  if  pure,  may  be  used.  This  is  very  good  for  preserv- 
ing black  leather;  but  it  must  be  carefully  ascertained  not 
to  contain  any  siccative  matter,  as  that  would  render  it  inju- 
rious. 

Other  oils  may  be  usefully  employed,  as  wlialc  oil,  when 


250  APPENDIX. 

they  can  be  obtained  pure ;  this  is  not  easily  done,  and  it  is 
difficult  to  detect  the  fraud.  Vegetable  oils  are  very  injuri- 
ous. Oq  campaigns,  good  oils  can  rarely  be  procured;  under 
these  circumstances  a  mixture  of  three-quarters  of  melted  lard 
and  one-quarter  of  whale  oil  may  be  used  ;  it  should  be  spread 
over  the  leather  with  a  piece  of  woollen  cloth,  and  rubbed  in 
well. 

FIELD    SEEYICE. 

MARCHES. 

The  front  of  a  column  should  not  be  frequently  diminished 
and  increased  on  a  long  march,  as  it  unavoidably  increases  the 
fatigue  of  the  column,  -particularly  the  rear  of  it :  when,, 
therefore,  the  front  is  diminished,  it  should  not  be  increased 
until  there  is  a  probability  that  it  will  not  be  necessary  to 
diminish  it  again  for  some  time. 

The  detachments  should  be  told  offinto  two  parties,  one  for 
the  piece,  the  other  for  the  caisson,  in  order  to  give  their 
assistance  in  holding  on,  or  whenever  it  may  b*e  required  on 
the  march,  etc. 

The  officers  commanding  sections,  in  order  to  preserve  them 
in  place,  will,  without-  waiting  for  express  instructions,  give 
such  orders  as  may  be  necessary  for  holding  on  in  descents, 
for  assisting  horses  out  of  .difficulties,  for  the  passage  of 
obstacles,  &c, 

Artificers  should  always  be  carried  on  a  march,  as  their 
duties  commence  when  that  of  the  other  men  ma}^be  said  to 
end,  and,  if  fatigued  with  marching,  they  cannot  be  expected 
to  work  with  alacrity  or  efficiency,  however  willing. 

An  intelligent  non-commissioned  officer  should  be  sent  to 
reconnoitre  the  road  or  ground  that  artillery  is  to  pass  over, 
and,  when  necessary,  to  report  the  state  of  it.  When  the 
march  is  connected  with  military  operations,  an  officer  should 
be  employed  for  this  duty. 

The  distarice  of  two  yards  between  the  carriages  should 
always  be  maintained  on  the  best  roads,  to  prevent  fatigue 
and  unnecessary  stoppage  to  the  horses.  In  bad  or  difficult 
roads,  it  may  be  necessary  to  increase  the  distance  to  four 
yards  or  more,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground.     Evea 


.APPENDIX.  "     251 

infantry,  under  such  circumstances,  open  out  and  lose  distance ; 
with  artillery  it  is  unavoidable,  and  the  horses  si^ffer  much 
from  being  alternately  checked  and  urged  on. 

The  strictest  attention,  however,  should  be  constantly  paid 
to  the  preservation  of  distances;  not  opening  out  more  than 
is  absolutely  necessary.  The  loss  of  distances  with  small 
bodies  of  artillery  may  be  made  up;  bjit  with  large  bodies, 
or  when  acting  with  infantry,  this  cannot  be  done  without 
serious  disadvantage,  particularly  to  the  infantry;  therefore, 
this  point  cannot  be  too  strongly  insisted  upon,  as  being  one 
of  essential  consequence. 

Officers  commanding  sections  should  frequently  halt  to  see 
that  (heir  carriages  are  well  up,  and  marching  in  proper  order. 

When  an  accident  happens  to  a  carriage,  it  should,  if  possi- 
ble, be  drawn  out  of  the  column,  so  as  not  to  interrupt  the 
march  of  the  other  carriages  or  troops.  The  carriage  in  its 
rear  must  pass  it  by  the  most  convenient  flank,  and  close  to 
proper  distance.  The  disabled  carriage  resumes  its  position 
as  soon  as  the  damage  is  repaired;  when  the  road  is  narrow; 
it  must  fall  into  the  first  interval  it  finds,  and  use  every 
(5pportunity  aft'orded  by  a  wider  space  to  regain  its  propfer 
place. 

A  caisson  belonging  to  a  disabled  piece  must  remain  with 
it;  a  piece,  however,  should  not  remain  with"  its  disabled 
caisson,  but  merely  leave  a.sufficient  number  of  men  to  rep'air  it. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  move  a  carriage  along  a  slope,  where 
a  small  jerk  may  overturn  it,  a  drag  rope  should  be  fastened 
to  the  lowest -side  of  the  carriage,  passe(^  over  the  top  of  it, 
and  held  by  two  or  three  men,  marching  on  the  upper  side  of 
the  slope;  -a  small  effort  by  these  means  will  prevent  a  car- 
riage from  overturning  on  a  very  steep  slope. 

Whenever  the  ruts  are  very  deep,  the  carriages  must 
quarter  the  road  ;  when,  however,  the  road  is  narrow  and 
sunk  between  banks,  the  horse?  should  be  left  to  themselves 
and  not  hurried.  In  such  circumstances  a  skilful  driver  will 
save  his  horses  much,  particularly  the  wheel  horses. 

In  passing  over  deep  furrows,  or  small  ditches  or  drains,' 
the  carriages  should  cross  them  obliquely;  when  they  are 
crossed  perpendicularly,  fhe  horses  not  only  encounter  greater 
difficulty,  but  they,  as- well  as  the  harness,  suffer  much  from 
the  jerks.  The  former  line  of  march  should  bo  resumed  ag 
soon  as  the^  are  passed. 


252     ■  APPENDIX. 

When  the  roads  are  good  or  even  tolerable,  the  artillery  h 
always  obliged  to  wait  for  infantry,  which  is  attended  with 
much  additional  fatigue  to  the  horses,  from  having  the  harness 
so  much  longer  upon  them.  When,  therefore,  there  is  no 
danger,  the  artillery  should  be  allowed  to  regulate  its  own 
rate  of  marching.  .  • 

On  ordinary  marches  the  detachments  may  be  in  front, 
rear,  right,  or  left  of  their  respective  pieces;  or  they  may  all 
be  in  front  or  rear  of  the  column  of  carriages,  as  the  circum- 
stances may  require.  But  •when  the-  detachments  are  thus 
separated  from  their  carriages,  one  man  should  march  with 
ea'ch.  "^ 

The  preservation  of  liorses  is  an  important  duty  of  an 
artillery  officer. 

The   greatest  care   should   be  given  to   the  fitting  of  the- 
saddles  and  collars. 

Sore  backs"  and  galled  shoulders  arise  chiefly  from  neglect 
on  the  march.  •  By  prompt  attention  on  the  part  of  the  officers, 
many  horses  may  be  preserved  for  service  which. would  other- 
wise be  disabled  for  months.  The  drivers  must  never  be 
allowed  to  lounge  or  sit  uneven  on  their  saddles.  *  A  folded 
blanket  under  the  saddle  is  the  best  preventive  of  sore  backs, 
as  it  adapts  the  shape  of  the  saddle  to  any  loss  of  flesh  in  the 
horse.  ' .  ' 

Every  driver  should  have  attached  to  his  harness  a  pair  of 
pads  of  soft  leather,  about  six  inches  by'four,  stufi'ed  with 
hair;  basil  leather  is  the  best  for  this  purpose.  The  moment 
any  tenderness  is  perceived  in  a  horse's  shoulders,  the  pressiiro 
must  be  removed  by  placing  the  pads. under  the  collar  above 
and  below  the  tender  part. 

When  a  battery  arrives 'in  camp,  quarters,  or  a  cantonment, 
each  non-commissioned  officer  will  immediately  examine  every 
part  of  the  carriage  under  his  charge,  especially  the  wheels, 
to  the  greasing- of  which  he  must  attend':  he  will  report  to 
the  officer  of  his  section,  who- reports  to  the.commander  of  the 
battery.     All  damages  must  be  repaired  without  delay. 

The  best  grease  for  wheels  is  coarse  sweet  oil  and  tallow, 
(in  equal  parts  melted  together,)  next  to  that,  old  soft  lard. 
When  these  cannot  be  procured,  slu§h  may  be  used.  Black- 
lead  should  be  mixed  wjth  ithe  grease. 


APPENDIX.  253 

The  drivers  must  immediately  report  to  the  non-com- 
missioned officers  of  their  carriage^  any  loss  or  breakage  of 
their  harness,  and  also  any  gall  or  other  hurt  which  may  have 
happened  to  their  horses;  any  neglect  on  this  point  must  be 
punished.  In  camp,  greasy  heels  are '^  the  most  common 
disability  with  which  horses  are  affected ;  as  these  proceed 
from  cold,  occasioning  humors  to  settle,  the  best  preventives 
is  hand  rubbing  and  exercise  to  keep  up  a  circulation. 
-  Unless  for  some  particular  purpose,  the  elevating  screws 
should  never  be  raised  Higher  thali  half  their  length;  on  a 
march  they  must  be  covered  with  a  piece  of  canvass,  or  old 
flannel  cartridge  bag,  to  prevent  their  being  clogged  with  dust. 

The  pintle  hooks  and  lunettes  should  be  greased  previous 
to  marching. 

If  a  battery  is  parked  in  hot  weather,  the  naves  of  the 
wheels  must  be  protected  as  much  as  possible  from  the  effect 
of  the  sun/ by  sods,  tarpaulings,  or  o'ther  covering. 

ASCENTS. 

If  the. ascent  be  long  and  steep,  the  road  in  a  bad  state,  or, 
if  from  any  other  cause,  the  exertion  of  the  horses  is  likely  to 
be  great,  a  part  of  the  carriages  should  halt,  the  leaders  of 
them  be  hitched  on  to  those  in  front,  and,  when  they  arrive 
at  the  top,  be  sent  back  with  as  many  more  leaders  as  may  be 
necessary. 

AVhatever  may  be  the  difficulties  of  the  road,  not  more  than 
ten  horses  can  be  hitched  with  effect  to  the  same  carriage  ; 
beyond  this  number,  "and  even  with  it,  it  is  difficult  to  make 
the  horses  pull  together.  It  may  be  sometimes  necessary  to 
make  the  detachments  assist  with  bricoles  or  drag  ropes. 

After  going  up  a  short  steep  hill  the  horses  should  be 
halted;  but  when  that  cannot  be  done,  they  should  be  made 
to  move  slowly  to  allow  them  to  recover  their  wind. 

In  going  up  a  hill,  carriages  may  be  halted  to  rest  the 
horses  by  bringing  them  across  it,  and  locking  the  limbers  or 
chocking  the  wheels.  For  this  purpose  it  may  be  advisable 
to  divide  the  carriages  into  portions  of  three  or  four  each, 
starting  them  from  tlw3  bottom  in  succession,  with  an  interval 
of  twenty  or  thirty  yards,  or  more,  between  each  portion. 


254  APPENDIX. 

DESCENTS. 

The  drivers  sbnuld  never  dismount  in  going  down  hill. 
The  wheel  driver  holds  his  near  horse  well  in  hand,  and  his 
off  horse  very  short;  the  other  drivers  barely  stretch  their 
traces. 

In' descending  steep  hills  the  cannoneers  must  hold  on. 
For  this  purpose,  previous  to  marching  off,  the  end  of  a  drag 
rope  is  passed  twice  round  the  tulip  of  rhe  piece,  and  the  run- 
ning part  passed  into  the  hook  and  pulled  tight;  the  rope  is 
then  wound  round  the  muzzle,  or  formed  into  a  small  coil  and 
hung  on  it. 

At  the  caisson  the  drag  rope  is  fastened  to  one  of  the  hind 
irons,  or  to  the  hind  axletree.  With  a  light  battery,  holding 
on  will  generally  be  sufficieat;  but,  if  necessfeiry,  the  wheels 
must  also  be  locked. 

In  steep  and  difficult  descents  the  wheel  horses  only  are  left, 
in  the  carriage,  the  others  being  taken  out  and.  led  in  rear; 
the  cannoneers  hold'  on  with  drag  ropes. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  lock,  the.  middle  driver,  or  with 
four  horses  the  leading  one,  dismounts  for  that  purpose. 
Should  ther"e  be  a  ditch  or  other  dangerous  part  on  the  side 
of  the  road,  the  wheel  towairds  that  side  is  locked  in  preference 
to  the  other. 

CROSSING  FORDS. 

When  the  water  is.  deep  and  ..the  current  strong,  great 
attention  must  be  paid  in  fording.  The  person  conduQting  a 
column  over  a  direct  ford,  should  keep  his  eyes  steadily  fixed 
on  some  object  on  the  opposite  bank, .which  marks  the  place 
of  going  out.  He  must  not  look  at  the  stream,  which  wpuld 
deceive  him  by  appearing  to  carry  him  down. 

All  those  in'  rear  should  keep  their  eyes  on  those  in  front. 

^In  order  to  resist  the  power  of  the  stream,  it  is  necessary 
to  wade  rather  agaiust  it.  . 

When  the  bottom  of  the- ford,  or  the  bank  on  the  opposite 
side  is  Had,  the  leaders-of  the  rear  cjjirriages  should  be  hitched 
to  those  in  front,  and  an  officer  stationed  at  the  entrance,  and 
another  at  the  place  of  going  out.  The  former  causes  the 
distance  to  be  observed,  and  directs  the  drivers  as  >to  the 
manner  of  crossing  the  ford,  and  the  latter  directs  them  ia 
their  leaving  it. 


APPENDIX.  255 

Above  all  things,- the  horses  must  not.be  allowed  to  drink, 
haU,  or  trot  either  in  passin-g  the  ford  or  in  leaving  it.  If, 
however,  the  stream  to  be  forded  is  small,  and  neither  deep 
nor  rapid,  and  there  are  no  troops  immediately  in  rear,  this 
opportunity  of  watering  the  horses,  or,  at  least,  of  giving 
them  a  mouthful  of  water,  may  be  embraced. 

The  j^assage  should  be  effected  with  as  large  a  front  as 
possible.  After  reaching  the  opposite  bank,  the  leading 
carriages  should  move  on  to  such  distance  from  the  ford  as 
not  to  impede  those  in  jear. 

If  the  ford  is  not  well  known,  it  must  be  examined,  and 
the  iiangerous  places  well  marked,  before  the  carriages  attempt 
to  cross. 

Artillery  carriages. can  pass  a  ford  three  feet  and  one-third 
deep;  and  this  depth  may  be  attempted  when  the  ammunition 
boxes  are  perfectly  water  tight,  or  means  have  been  taken  to 
raise  them  sufficiently  high ;  although  much  depends  upon 
the  botton\.  and  the  strength  of  the  current. 

When  the  ammunition  boxes  are  not  water  tight,  and  are 
at  their  usual  height  of  two  feet  ten  inches  above  the  ground, 
the  depth  attempted  should  not  exceed  two  feet  four  inches. 


PASSAGE  OF  MILITARY  BRIDGES.. 

At  the  entrance  of  the  bridge  all  but  the  wheel  drivers 
dismount  ;  the  dismounted  drivers  march  at  their  horses' 
heads,  holding  the  reins  of  the  near  horse  with  the  right  hand 
near  the  bit.  A  distance  of  twenty  yards  is  kept  between  the 
carriages.  The  gait  must  be  free  and  decided,  and  the 
drivers  should  conduct  the  carriages  as  near  the  middle  of  the 
flooring  as  possible;  if  the  flooring  is  wet,  they  must  attend 
particularly  to  keeping  the  horses  from  slipping.  Battens 
should,  in  this  case,  be  nailed  across  the  "bridge  It  may 
sometimes  be  necessary  to  pass  the  carriages  and  horses  sepa- 
rately. ■       *  ^ 

Tliere  should  bo  no  halt  on  the  bridge.  Whenever  it  is 
perceived  to  rock,  the  passage  of  the  troops  must  be  stopped. 
If  the  bridge  cracks  under  a  carriage,  it  should  increase  its 
gait  and  pass  as  quickly' as  possible. 


256  APPEJSDIX. 

In  passing  over  a  flying  bridge  the  drivers  hold  the  horses, 
facing  towards  them  ;  it  may  occasionally  be  advisable  to  take 
the  horses  out ;  and  in  boisterous  weather,  or  at  night,  the 
wheels  should  be  locked. 

REVERSING  OF  A  BATTERY  IN  A  NARROW  ROAD. 

AH  the  carriages  should  be  drawn  close  to  one  side  of  the 
road,  and  the  pieces  and  caissons  unlirabered  and  reversed. 
The  limbers  are  then  brought  in  front  of  their  carriages, 
which  are  then  to  be  limbeued  up.  .If  there  is  not  room,  to 
reverse  the  limbers,  the  horses  must  be  taken  out. 

Should  the  read  be  so  narrow  that  the  limbers  cannot  pass 
their  carriages,  the  trails  of  the  pieces'  and  stocks  of  the  cais- 
sons must  be  brought  into  a  direction  .perpendicular  to  the 
road;  if  it  has  a  bank  on  either  side,  the  wheels  must  run 
close  to  the  bank,  and  the  trails  and  stocks  made  to  rest  upon 
it.  On  a  dyke,  or.  road  with  a  ditch  on  each  side,  the  car- 
riages must  be  run  as  close  to  the  edge  as  possible,  and  the 
trails  and  stocks  held  up  while  the  limbers  pass.  Great  care 
must  be  taken  not  to  run  the  carriages  too  far,  and  the  wheels 
must  be  scotched  or  locked  at  the  edge  of  the  dyke  or  ditch. 

Remarks. — When  a  battery  is  in  stationary  quarters,  there 
must  be  a  weekly  inspection  of- every  part  of  it,  and,  when 
circumstances  perimt,  a  parade  in  marching  order;  at  which 
parade  every  part  of  the  harness,  carriages,  and  appointments 
of  the  cannoneers  is  expected  to  be  in  the  best  order.  Parti- 
cular attention  should  be  given  to  the  state  of  the  ammunition, 
which  must  be  frequently  aired. 

The  battery  should  frequently  take  out  a  day's  forage, 
secured  and  arranged  as  for  service;  the  detachments  being 
in  marching  order,  and  their  blankets,  etc.,  properly  fixed. 

It  should  be  made  to  go  over  all  sorts  of  ground,  up  and 
down  steep  slopes  and  across  ditches.  The  intrenching  tools 
should  be  occasionally  taken  ojEi',  and  used  in  filling  up  holes 
and  making  ramps,  to  enable  the  carriages  to  pass  over 
difficult  ground. 

IN  ACTION,  OR  PREPARING  FOR  ACTION. 

In  those  formations  in  battery  i-n  which  the  pieces  or 
sections  arc  brought  up  successively  on  the  right  for  action 


APPENDIX.  257 

front,  each  piece  sliould  reserve  its  fire  until  the  one  on  its 
right  is  unlimbered,  and  its  limber  reversed  ;  by  not  attend- 
ing to  this,  the  horses  become  so  frightened  as  not  to  be 
brought  up  to  the  piece  without  difficulty. 

No  positive  rule  can  be  laid  down  with  respect  to  the  cais- 
sons in  presence  of  the  enemy.  This  must  depend  upon  a 
variety  of  circumstances;  but,  in  general,  it  will  be  found  ex- 
pedient to  place  them  under  charge  of  an  officer,  who  will 
conform  to  the  movements  of  the  main  body,  in  such  a  man- 
ner, and  at  such  distance,  as  to  enable  him  to  supply  the 
pieces  with  ammunition  before  that  which  is  in  the  limbers  is 
expended. 

In  a  hilly  road,  when  any  obstruction  is  expected  from  the 
enemy,  the  leading  gun  should  always  be  twenty-five  or  thirty 
yards  in  advance  of  the  others,  in  order  to  leave  room  for  the 
limber  to  take  its  place  in  rear  when  it  comes  into  action, 
without  the  necessity  of  running  back  the  rest  of  the  column. 
This  might  be  avoided  in  some  cases,  by  running  the  piece 
forward,  but  cases  may  arise  where  it  would  not  be  advisable 
to  do  so. 

When  pieces  are  in  position  on  the  brow  of  a  hill,  they 
should  be  retired  from  it  as  far  as  they  can  be  without  losing 
the  command,  in  order  that  the  men  may  be  covered  as  much 
as  possible.  If  it  is  necessary  to  place  them  close  to  the  edge, 
it  should  not  be  done  until  the  firing  is  about  to  commence. 

Should  a  battery  be  ordered  to  come  into  action  to  a  flank 
upon  a  dyke,  or  road  which,  is  entirely  open,  with  a  ditch  on 
each  side  of  it,  the  carriages  must  take  double  distance  from 
each  other,  and  the  caissons  turn  so  as  to  bring  their  rear  to- 
wards the  enemy.  When  the  piece  is  unlimbcred,  the  limber 
moves  near  the  caisson  and  turns  its  rear  also  towards  the  en-  ' 
eray.  If  the  road  is  too  narrow  to  allow  the  caissons  to  change 
their  direction,  they  remain  in  the  same  line  with  the  pieces, 
and  in  the  middle  of  the  interval  between  two  of  them;  the 
limbers  do  not  reverse,  but  move  forward  to  the  caisson  of  the 
preceding  piece. 

When  pieces  are  placed  on  the  edge  of  a  considerable  slope, 
they  mny  be  run  down  by  hand,  the  limbers  backing  so  far  as 
to  allow  the  pieces,  when  the  prolonges  are  stretched,  to  fire 
with  eff"c;ct,  and  command  the  whole  slope.  The  pieces  should, 
however,  be  only  run  down  sufficiently  to  efl'ect  this  purpose, 


258  APPENDIX.        • 

that  the  limbers  may  be  as  far  as  possible  from  the  edge,  and, 
consequently,  in  some  df'gree  covered.  Should  there  be  any- 
thing at  hand,  the  wheels  may  be  scotched;  or/if  there  is 
time,  a  small  cut  may  be  macle  across  the  hill.  By  these  pre- 
cautions pieces  may  be  fired  down  a  slope  so  considerable,  that 
they  would  otherwise  run  down  themselves. 

Should  there  be  any  fear  of  a  piece  running  forward,  when 
unlimbered  for  action  on  the  brow  of  a  hill,  the  wheel  should 
be  locked  with  a  lock  chain,  prolonge,  or  drag  rope.  It  must 
be  applied  to  the  top  felloe^  or  spoke  of  the  wheel,  instead  of 
the  lower  one. 

In  passing  a  defile  or  bridge  with  the  enemy  on  the  other 
side;  and  likely  to  oppose  the  advance,  the  pieces  alone  should 
move  forward,  leaving  the  caissons  to  follow  in  rear  by  them- 
selves. 

In  retiring  through  a  defile  or  over  a  bridge  in  the  presence 
of  an  enemy,  the  caissons  should  be  sent  to  the  rear;  one  or 
two  may  be  kept  nearer  than  the  others  for  supplying  ammu- 
nition. 

The  prolonge  should  be  generally  used  when  artillery  is  re- 
tiring slowly.  When  the  rear  of  the  column  retires  with  the 
prolonge  along  a  road,  cavalry  will  hesitate  to  attack  it,  if  its 
flank  be  securei 

After  firing,  either  on  drill  or  in  action,  the  bore  of  the 
piece  should  be  washed  and  the  piece  depressed. 

REPLACING  KILLED  OR  DISABLED  HORSES. 

The  teams  of  the  pieces'  must  always  be  kept  complete  at 
the  expense  of  those  of  the  caissons.  A  disabled"  horse,  in 
the  first  instance,  is  replaced  by  the  corresponding  one  at  the 
caisson,  leaving  the  caisson  to  refit  with  a  spare  horse  and  the 
harness  of  the  disabled  one.  After  all  the  spare  horses  have 
been  used,  those  of  the  caisson  should  be  taken  in  succession, 
so  that  they  may  be  gradually,  and  regularly  reduced. 

SPIKING  and'  UNSPIKING  CANNON. 

To  ajylhe  a.  piece,  or  to  vender  it  iinserviceahle':  Drive  into 
the  vent:  a  jagged  and  hardened  steel  spike  with  a  soft  point, 
ox%  nail  without  a  head;  break  it  off  flush  with  the  outer 


APPENDIX.  25-9 

surface  and  clinch  the  point  inside  by  means  of  the  rammer. 
Wedge  a  shot  in  the  bottom  of  the  bore  by  wrapping  it  with 
felt,  or  by  means,  of  iron  wedges,  using  the  rammer  or  a  bar 
of  iron  to  drive  them  in  ;  a  wooden  wedge  would  be  easily 
burnt  by  means  of  a  charcoal  fire  lighted  with  the  aid  of  a 
bellows.  Cause  shells  to  burst  in  the  bore  of  brass  guns,  or 
fire  broken  shot  from  them  witti  high  charges.  Fill  a"  piece 
with  sand  over  the  charge  to  burst  it.  Fire  a  piece  against 
another,  muzzle  to  muzzle,  or  the  muzzle  of  one  to  the  chase 
of  the- other.  ■  Light  a  fire  under  the  chase  of  a  brass  gun, 
and  strike  on  it  with  a  sledge  to  bend  it.  Break  off  the  trun- 
nions of  iron  guns;  or  burst  them  by  firing  them  with  heavy 
charges  and  full  of  shot,  at  a  high  elevation. 

When  guns  are  to  be  spiked  temporarily,  and  are  likely  to 
be  re-taken^  a  spring  spike  is  used,  having  ^j,  shoulder  to  pre- 
vent its  being  too  easily  extracted. 

■  To  innjjike  a  inece :  If.  the  spike  is  not  screwed  in  or 
clinched,  and  the  bore  is  not  impeded,  put  in  a  charge  of  pow- 
der of  one-third  the  weight  .of  the  shot,  and  ram  junk  wads 
over  it  with  a  handspike,  laying  on  the  bottom  of  the  bore  .a 
strip  of  wood  with  a  groove  on  the  under  side  containing  a 
strand  of  quick  match,  by  which  fire  is  communicated  to  the 
cbarge.  In  a  brass  gun,  take  out  some  of  the  metal  at  the 
upper  orifice  of  the  vent,  and  pour  sulphuric  acid  into  the 
groove  for  s^idc  hours  before  firing.  If  this  method,  several 
times  repea#d,  is  not  successful,  unscrew  the  vent  piece,  if  it 
be  a  brass  gun,  and  if  an  iron  one,  drill  out  the  spike,  or  drill 
a  new  vent. 

To  drive  out  q,  shot  loedged  m  the  horje :  Unscrew  the  vent 
piece,  if  there  be  one,  and  drive  in  wedges  so  as  to  start  the 
-shot  forward,  then  ram  it  back  again  in  ordei*  to  seize  the 
wedge  with  a  hook;  or  pour  in  powder  and  fire  it,  after -re- 
placing the  vent  piece.  In  the  last  resort,  bore  a  hole  in  the 
bottom  of  the  breech,  drive  out  the  shot,  and  stop  the  hole 
with  a  screw. 

RIGHTIN'G  CARRIAGES  THAT  HAVE  BEEN  OVERTURNED. 

"  WHien  a  carriage  has  been  overturned  it  is  better,  if  time 
permits,  to  disengage  the  piece,  right  the  carriage,  and  then 
mount  the  piece  again  in  the  manner  already  described.     The 


260  APPENDIX/ 

piece  may  be  easily  disengaged  by  allowing  the  breech  to  rest 
upon  the  ground,  or  a  block  of  wood,  raising  the  muzzle  by 
means  of  a  handspike  while  the  cap  squares  are  taken  off. 


CAMP  OF  ARTILLERY. 

The  artillery  is  encamped  near, the  troops  to  which  it  is  at- 
tached, so  as  to  be  protected  from  attack,  and  to  contribute  to 
the  defence-  of  the  camp.  Sentinels  for  the  park  are  furnished 
by  the  artillery,  and,  when  necessary,  by  the  other  troops. 

PISPOSITION  OF  PIECES,  ETC. 
FIRST    MODE. 

In  this  mode  the  pieces  are  parked  with  diminished  inter- 
vals; and  the  tents  and  horses  are  placed  upon  the  flanks  in 
lines  parallel  to  each  other  and  perpendicular  to  the  front,  so 
as  to  give  the  encampment  a  froiit  of  the  same  extent  as  the 
battery  in  line.  The  horses  of  each  half-battery  are_picketed 
together  upon  their  appropriate  flank.  The  team  of^the  flank 
piece  is  placed  at  the  end  of  the  picket  rope' in  front,  and  that 
of  its  caisson  next.  Then  come  the  teams  of  the  next  piece 
and  caisson,  and  so  on  in  the  same  t)rder.  The  horses  of .  the 
chiefs  of  pieces  are  with  their  appropriate  teams.  The  teams 
of  the  other  carriages  are  afterwards  picketed  in  the  same 
order  with  reference  to  their  positions  in  park;  and  finally 
the  horses  of  the  officers  near  the  end  of  the  rope. 

When  two  or  more  batteries  are  encamped  together,  the 
interval  between  the  camps  is  equal  to  that  between  two  bat- 
teries in  line;  and  the  captain's  tent  is  between"  those  of  his 
lieutenants. 

In, horse  artillery ,  the  front  of  the  encampment  would  be 
97  yards,  and  the  interval  between  the  pieces  7.  The  horses 
of  each  detachment  would  be  picketed  after  the  teams  of  its 
caissons.  ^  " 

SECOND   MODE. 

In  this  mode  the  pieces  are  parl^ed  ^itb  full  intervals,  and 
the  horses  and  tents  are  placed  in  parallel  lines  in  rear.  When 
a  single  line  of  .rope  is  not  sufficient  fOr  the  horses,  a  second 


APPENDIX.  261 

13  placed  4  yards  in  rear  of  the  first,  and  the  horses  made  to 
face  each  other.  The  teams  of  the  pieces  and  caissons  are 
placed  in  the  order  of  their  pieces  alono;  the  centre  of  the 
first  line,  and  those  of  the  other  carriages  are  placed  upon 
their  flanks  opposite  the  half- batteries  to  which  they  belong. 
If  necessary  a  part  of  them  are  placed  in  rear  of  the  second 
line.  The  horses  of  tlxe  officers. are  at  the  extremities  of  the 
line. 

In  liorse  aTiillery\,  in  which  the  second  line  is  always  neces- 
sary, the  horses  of  the  detachments  are  picketed  together  in 
their  proper  order  along  the  centre  of  that  line;  and  the  offi- 
cers' horses  at  the  extremities  of-  the  same. 
•  In  this  mode  of  encampment  the  intervals  between  two  ad- 
joining batteries  and  the  position  of  the  captain's  tent  are 
subject  to  the  same  rules  as  in  the  other. 

Instead  of  placing  the  harness  in  lines  it  may  be  placed 
upon  the  carriages  and  covered  by  tarpaulins  when  it  is  possi- 
ble to  do  so.  The  saddles  and  bridles  of  the  riding  horses 
may  also  be  covered  by  placing  them  in  the  tents  with  the 
men. 

The  number  of  lines  upon  which  a  battery  is  parked  varies 
■according   to  the   number   of  spare  carriages   attached.     The 
battery  of  manoeuvre,  which  is  composed  of  the  pieces  and 
their  appropriate  caissons,  occupying  the  two  front  lines. 

COMMENCING  AN  ACTION. 

Before  the  commencement  of  an  action  a  battery  should  be 
placed  as  much  as  possible  under  cover,  by  taking  advantages 
of  banks,  hollow-ways,  buildings,  woods,  &c.  It  is  not  advisa- 
ble to  move  a  battery  at  once  into  position  on  the  field;  but 
if  unavoidable,  it  should  be  masked  as  much  as  possible  until 
ordered  to  open  fire.  , 

A  battery  should  be  masked,  if  possible,  by  covering  it 
with  cavalry  in  preference  to  infantry,  as  the  former  does  it 
more  effectually  and  is  sooner  moved  out  of  the  way. 

'  Batteries  should  be  placed  in  relation  to  the  troops  with 
which  they  are  acting,  upon  the  flank  of  a  line,  but  at  such 
a  distance  as  not  to  impede  its  movements,  and  at  the  same 
time  to  be  unfettered  in  their  own ;  the  artillery  may  thus 


262  APPENDIX. 

represent  the  faces  of  a  bastion,  and  the '?liae  of,  troops  tlid 
eurtain. 

The  front  of  a  line  of  troops  is  the  worst  possible  position 
for  a  field  battery,  while  a  position  in  rear  is  nearly  as  bad; 
the  former  obstructing  the  movements  of  the  troops,  the  lat- 
ter liable  to  seriously  injure,  or  at  least  disquiet  them. 

In  supporting  an  attack,  the  battery  sh9uld' be  carefully 
kept  clear  of  the  intended  tnajrch  of  oiir  own  troops,  and  such 
points  occupied  as  may  afford  the  greatest  annoyance  to  the 
enemy. 

Batteries  should  generally  be  disposed  with  regard  to  the 
enemy's  troops,  so  as  to  secure. a  cross  fire  on  his  position,  and 
on  all  the  ground  over  which  he  moves  to  the  attack,  endeavor- 
ing to  take  him  at  all  times  in  the  direction  of  his  greatest 
dimensions;  that  is,  obliquely,  or  in  flank,  when  in  line,  and 
in  front  when  formed  in  columns.  Moderate  heights,  com- 
manding as  much  as  possible  the  surrounding  country,  should 
always  betaken  advantage  of,  but  not  such  as.  may  prevent 
operations  in  advance  if  required. 

When,  from  particular  circumstances,  the  front  of  the  army 
is  too  extended  and  unavoidably  divided  into  two  lines,  it  may 
become  necessary  to  place  one  or  more  batteries  in, the  centre, 
if  those  on  the  flanks  are  unable  to  sweep  the  whole  front; 
but  great  care  must  be  taken  not  to  impede  the  advance  or 
retreatof  the  troops  when  required. 

The  fire  of  the  field  batterie.'?  should  not  be  carried  on  at  the 
same  uniform  rate ;  the  destruction  of  the  enemy  being  the 
object,  it  follows  that  at  distant  ranges  a  greater  degree  of 
care  is  required  in  pointing  the  guns;  the  fire  is  slow  and 
steady,  and  increasing  in  rapidity  as  the  enemy  advances, 
without,  however,  impairing  its  precision. 

The  fire  of  field  batteries  should  never  be  carried  on  in  sal- 
voes, but  in  a  regular  manner,  well  sustained,  and  with  dis- 
tinct intervals  between  every  round,  commencing  slowly,  and 
increasing  in  rapidity  "as  the  range  diminishes. 

The  effects  of  the  fire  will  be  in  proportion  to  the  number 
of  guns  brought  together,  and  therefore,  in  order,  to  strike  a 
decisive  blow,  this  should  at  once  be  done. 

Two  solid  shot,,  or  case  shot,  or  three  of  canister,  can  be 
fired  from  a  field  piece  in  one  minute ;  the  latter  being  fired 
at  short  distances,  and  not  requiring  such  care  in  aiming. 


Ai>PENDIX.  263 

Two  is  the  smallest  number  of  giins  that  may  with  safety 
be  employed  in  face  of  an  enemy. 

Only  under  peculiar  circumstances  is  the  practice  of  em- 
ploying field  batteries  against  those  of  the  enemy  recommend- 
ed;  as,  for  instance,  when  his  troops  are  well  covered,  and  his 
guns  exposed,  or  their  fire  very  destructive.  Their  fire  should 
be  directed  principally  against  columns  of  attack  and  masses, 
or  upon  positions  which  are  intended  to  be  carried 

A  battery  can  come  into  action  in  the  field  and  fire  one 
round  in  25  seconds,  timing  from  the  order  -** action  front''  to' 
the  discharge  of  one  piece, 

Should  cavalry  be  advancing  to  attack  infantry,  and  first 
observed  at  the  distance,  of  a  mile,  passing  over  the  first  half 
mile  at  a  trot,  and  next  quarter  of  a  mile  at  the  manoeuvring 
gallop,  and  the  remaining  distance  at  an  increased  gallop, 
terminating  with  the  charge — occupying  altogether  about  six 
minutes — during  the  last  1500  yards  of  their  advance,  a  bat- 
tery might  fire  eleven  rounds  per  piece. 

A  battery  can  fire  thirty-six  rounds  against  infantry  in  16i 
minutes,  supposing  them  to  pass  over  1500  yards. 

Should  the  enemy  attempt  to  force  the  passage  of  a  river, 
the  best- position  for  t^e  artillery  to  oppose  it  is  wherever  the 
best  cross  fire  can  be  obtained  in  order  to  harass  him  as  much 
aa  possible,  and  if  he  has  succeeded  in  passing  over  any 
portion  of  the  troops,  it  should  be  directed  against  their  for- 
mation. 

When  the  enemy  is  making  the  passage  of  a  river  in  re- 
treat, the  guns  should  be  posted  in  such  a  pobition  as  to  bear 
upon  the  batteries  that  cover  the  retreat  and  also  upon  his 
bridges. 

The  bridge  being  generally  laid  in  a  re-entering  angle,  bat- 
teries should  be  posted  on  each  side  of  the  bridge,  and  far 
enough  from  it  to  secure  a  cross-fire  on  the  opposite  flank. 

The  indiscriminate  expenditure  of  ammunition  should,  upon 
no  account,  be  permitted  in  the  field  during  action,  particu- 
larly at  the  commencement,  as  the  want  of  it  at  the  close  may 
decide  the  fate  of  the  day.  It  should  be  sparingly  used  in 
skirmishing  and  minor  affairs,  especially  when  at  a  distance 
from  supplies^  or  in  anticipation  of  a  general  action. 

Tffe  reserve  should  be  employed  when  a  particular  point*of 
the  line  requires  additional  support,  a  favorable  position  is  to 


264  APPENDIX. 

be  seized,  an  impression  has  been  made  on  the  line  by  the 
enemj'-,  a  fdrward  or  retrograde  mo-vement  is  in  contemplation, 
or  when  a  determined  attack  is  to  be  made  on  him.     Under   y 
such  circumstances  the  reserve  should  come  up  and  take  -^^^ 
in   the   action,  and  it  is  of  the   utmost  importance  tlraf  this 
should  be  done  as  expeditiously  as  possible. 

Previous  to  the  engagement,  the  reserve  should  be  placed  in 
rear  with  the  second  line,  out  of  the  range  of  shot,  and  as 
little  exposed  as  circumstances  will  admit,  but  always  in  such 
a  position  as  to' have  ready  access  to  the  front 'and  rear. 

Never,  until  the  very  last  extremity^  should  guns  be  aban- 
doned before  an  enemy.  An  artilleryman  must  never  forget 
t\i2iVMs  gun  is  his  projjer  arm  ;  that  here  lies  his  strength  ; 
that  here  is  his  post  of  honor  and  duty;  also,  that -the  last 
discharges  are  always  the  most  destructive,  and  may  possibly 
insure  the  safety  of  the  whole  army,  or  turn  the  tide  of  vic- 
tory in  their  favor. 

The  position  of  cavalry,  when  placed  in  support  of  a  bat- 
tery, is  on  its  flank,  and  as  much  concealed  as  possible. 

When  infantry  are  formed  in  sc|uares  to  resist  the  charge  of 
cavalry,  the  guns  should  be  placed  outside  at  the  angles  of  the 
squares,  the  limbers,  horses,  &c.,  on  the  inside.  Should  the 
detachments  be  driven  from  their  guns,  they  will  retire  into 
the  square  after  discharging  their  pieces,  and  taking  with  them 
the  sponges  and  other  equipments;  the  moment  the  enemy 
has  retired,  they  re-commence  the  fire.  Supposing  the  in- 
fantry formed  in  echelon  of  regimental  squares,  and  that  the 
time,  or  small  extent  of  the  squares,  would  not  admit  of  the 
limbers,  &c  ,  being  placed  inside,  then  the  wagons  and  lim- 
bers should  be  brought  up  with  their  broadsides  to  the  front, 
so  as.  to  occupy,  if  possible,  the  space  between  the  guns,  leav- 
ing no  intervals  for  the  cavalry  to  cut  through  ]  the  prolonge, 
or  drag  ropes,  might  also  ofler  an  effectual  momentary  Impe- 
diment to  them-if  properly  stretched  and  secured. 


'^*Miy 


